_BERING’S: 4 OYAGES-
FLA, GOLDER. |
So VOLUME I

| AMERICAN GEOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY
a | RESEARCH SERIES NO.1 0

Alfred C. Redfield
Estate
1983

—_-

h €220000 TOEO O

HMM

HM/18lN |

BERING’S VOYAGES
VOLUME I

i

- AMERICAN GEOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY
RESEARCH SERIES NO. I
W.L. G. Joerc, Editor

BERING’S VOYAGES

An Account of the Efforts of the Russians to
Determine the Relation of Asia and America

BY

F. A. GOLDER

IN TWO VOLUMES
VOLUME I:

The Log Books and Official Reports of
the First and Second Expeditions
1725-1730 and 1733-1742

WITH A CHART OF THE SECOND VOYAGE
BY
ELLSWORTH P. BERTHOLF

S\"
LAS

\

BROADWAY AT IS6TH STREET MARI]
NEW YORK BIOLOG

1922 LABORA

Miitiatare

LIBR:

eee nan

COPYRIGHT, 1922
BY
THE AMERICAN GEOGRAPHICAL SOCIETY
OF NEW YORK

Reprinted 1935

CONDE NAST PRESS
GREENWICH, CONN.

Reprinted from plates by the
LORD BALTIMORE PRESS, BALTIMORE, MD.

TO
PROFESSOR EDWARD CHANNING
OF
HARVARD UNIVERSITY

ae *
»
S

a,
- ee
- =
- '
+
4
- mee
et i
1
= + 1
—
, = hs
=i
Ww
>
as
1 =a -
a
- © ‘ &
i" =
1
_
: U
pk
: ,
‘> - :
: 7 :
Oe 7
nd ay =. ies 7
an NM oD i i ps )
: in a —
' i A! T 7 L mt, «
ey iy i (DS dangle |
{iy, 7 c
ao : " i mal —
in. ay wt 1 7 in & Nel
tas 'd/s ee A ietne
OT a 7 | ee)
Po "i sa y ne l 1 ‘ ’ The | ' a oe
oe i a i f
* sy CoN oan vie, @ . “7
a a 8a, ne 1

: a
} cD rn a fy a
‘ it iS) ae :
ee rae | ie ed

CONTENTS
CHAPTER PAGE
IRE ACE Pete) Se se eee it a i ects Pate oss ae 1X

Part I
The First Expedition, 1725-1730, and Its Setting

I THE GEOGRAPHICAL KNOWLEDGE OF THE NORTH
PACIFIC OCEAN AT THE BEGINNING OF THE

PIGHTEEN TH CEN TEURV lly len sa Alaaieiin ya, Rel I

II Berrine’s First EXPEDITION, 1725-1730 ..... 6

III GvozpEv’s VOYAGE TO AMERICA IN 1732... . oT
PART OU

The Second Expedition, 1733-1742

IV _ BERING’s SECOND EXPEDITION, FRoM Its INCEPTION
TO THE BEGINNING OF THE SEA VOYAGE .... 25

V THE Loc Book oF BERING’S VESSEL, THE “ST.
PETER,” AND OF HER SUCCESSOR, THE HOOKER

BOMPOEMER SMe tiie ci tyne tes) kav cn ecm a)
VI LIEUTENANT WAXEL’S REPORT ON THE VOYAGE OF

EENESS O1Ses EVES RAM As i ee ee, Boe) Sa IG)
VII THE JouRNAL OF CHIRIKOV’s VESSEL, THE “ST.

EAU ee a ih CR NAN i ue ane) nan Lae
VIII Currikov’s REPORT ON THE VOYAGE OF THE “St.

PPA UCR IO OU ateie maa AON fee bord Ns tas Mage oae
Pe LHe END OF THE PXPEDIRION) 4/2. 4) 2...) 20 328

NoTE TO ACCOMPANY THE CHART OF THE VOYAGE

OF BERING AND CHIRIKOV FROM KAMCHATKA TO

THE ALASKAN COAST AND RETURN, 1741, BY

THE LATE ELLSWORTH P) BERTHOLE |... . . 330
BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTE ... . Me SSSA

(Index to both volumes in Vol. II.)

Pe A ee ee a
1 it j - rian
7 eu,
5 7
4 -_
i .
' bs
«*
‘ =
if
4
‘ ee)
| , ai |
i |
a
1 rs | Mea ais

at) | ‘ ; ; sr ee ‘ il aa sg ag
by y ne Vy : - ‘ mths oar il ah aan

= \ ae - ‘ it rr,

aT : _

Fig.

ice)

II

LIST On TELUSERATIONS

Section of a map by Guillaume Delisle, 1714, to illustrate
contemporary knowledge of the North Pacific . facing

Facsimile of part of Peter the Great’s orders for the first
expedition, with comments in his own handwriting
facing

Map showing route of the first expedition from St. Peters-
burg to Bering Strait

Facsimile of a manuscript map showing the route of the
first expedition from Yudoma Cross to Urak near
Okhotsk. (Drawing by Spanberg in the Russian ar-
iPS Wha ieee te Mee RA ae reine M cram: am Ald Mae C28

Copy of the eastern section of the map accompanying
Bering’s report on his first expedition. (After Dall’s
facsimile.)

Facsimile of Berkh’s map, 1823, showing route of the
first expedition from Okhotsk to Bering Strait and
RE HIIETM a eke ee renee phen eran ye cn PACING

Facsimile of a manuscript map of the Harbor of St. Peter
and St. Paul (Petropavlovsk), 1740. (Drawing by Elagin

im the Russianiatchives.)im..,. 0... - -.. facing
The Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul. (From an old en-
EVANS ear MES SSP ek BIA ee abe let SU eetaees Sotto, TACIng

Facsimile of signatures of Bering and his officers. (From
the log book of the St. Peter: entry of May 4, 1741.)

Facsimile of a page of the log book of the St. Peter kept by
Varshin: entry of june 71741 9... 5. 5 . + facing

Facsimile of a page of the log book of the St. Peter kept by
Khitrov: end of entry of September 5, 1741, with map of
the Shumagin Islands. 244. . . . < ~ facing

Page

sae)

13

. 14-15

20

34

35

39

52

148

Vill LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Fig. Page
12. Upper: An Aleut in his bazdarka, or skin boat. (Drawing
on the chart of the voyage of the St. Peter by Waxel and
Khitrov in the Russian archives.)
Lower: A native of Unalaska in a baidarka. (Drawing by
Levashev in the Russian archives.) ...... facing 149

13, Facsimile of a page of the journal of the St. Paul: entries
Of July: WOaE 5 ul 74love ey fs atte . « ss « » dacing age

14 Amanof Unalaska. (Drawing by Levashev.) . . facing 304

15 Left: Inside and outside views of native hut, Unalaska.
Right: A native woman of Unalaska,. (Drawing by Leva-
lisse) eC nee ee eee ne ae eT facing 305

Jak
I Chart of the voyage of Bering and Chirikov in the St. Peter
and the St. Paul from Kamchatka to the Alaskan coast
and return, 1741, based on the log books and other orig-
inal records and adjusted to known physical conditions.
Mean meridional scale, 1:5,500,000. By Ellsworth P.
Bertholfe., « 2. 202 44.0 eee & em Se facing 348

PREFACE

THE discovery of the northwest coast of America by the Rus-
sians deserves far more consideration than it has yet received.
Our information on the subject is very fragmentary—a chapter
here and a chapter there in the histories of the Russian Far East
and the American Far West. This neglect is due not so much to
lack of interest as to lack of material and to the peculiar problems
which the handling of the material presents. But these difficul-
ties are gradually disappearing, and it is now possible to under-
take a task that twenty years ago seemed out of the question. In
this work the author has made the actors tell their own story of
the discovery of the northwest coast of America. It would have
been worth while to bring together all the interesting material
relating to the subsidiary voyages of Bering’s second expedition
—the voyages of Spanberg to Japan and the explorations along
the Arctic coast—but neither time nor space permitted it.

Volume 1 includes an account of the log books and reports of
the navigators, and Volume 2 deals with the journal of Steller,
which throws much light on the second expedition and furnishes
valuable scientific data. In the translation the terminology of the
navigators has been retained and their ideas faithfully rendered
in so far as it was possible, considering that their penmanship
was not always legible, nor their language grammatical, nor their
expressions intelligible. With these original data before him the
reader is in a position to form an independent conclusion respect-
ing the controversies raging around this voyage. This book is not
the last word on the subject, and it is hoped that other investi-
gators will use its material to make further studies in the field.

The late Captain E. P. Bertholf, until within two years of
his death in 1921 Commandant of the U. S. Coast Guard, and
an authority on the waters and shores of Bering Sea and the
North Pacific Ocean, has made a distinct contribution to science
by plotting out scientifically the tracks and landfalls of the

x PREFACE

St. Peter and the St. Paul. In addition he read the manuscript
and suggested improvements. Lieutenant Raymond Burhen,
U.S. N., and Captain Sam Hoyt, of Seattle, have helped in the
matter of nautical expressions. To all these gentlemen the
author is sincerely grateful. He takes this occasion also to
testify publicly to the courtesy and genuine good will of the
Russian archivists and scholars of the old régime with whom
he had contact in Petrograd and Moscow in his search for
material. They were ever ready to inconvenience themselves
to help him in his work. Some of these men have been forced
from their position and their country, and others, like Professor
Lappo-Danilevski, have died of starvation. They were real
scholars and true gentlemen, and it is with a feeling of reverence
and gratitude that this tribute is paid to them.

CHAPTER I

DHE GEOGRAPHICAL KNOWLEDGE OF THE NORTH
PACIPIC OCEAN AT THE: BEGINNING OF FHE
PIGHTEENTH CENTURY

THE numerous naval expeditions of the sixteenth century in
search of a short passage to Asia gave the geographers a fairly
good idea of the waters and shores of the Atlantic and of those
parts of the Arctic that were nearest to Europe and European
settlements. Equally helpful in making the Indian and the
South Pacific waters familiar to the educated world were the
voyages via the Cape of Good Hope route to the Indies, China,
and Japan, the annual voyages of the Spanish naval officers
between Mexico and the Philippines, and the occasional raids of
the English freebooters along the Spanish-American coast. From
the early years of the seventeenth century onward more or less
reliable maps existed for the Pacific Ocean south of the parallel
which runs through Cape Mendocino and the northern part of
the main island of Japan, but for the vast region north of that
line not a single map that could in any way lay claim to accuracy
was to be found before the time of the Bering voyages. It was
not even known whether the North Pacific area was all land or
all water, whether Asia and America were separated or united
(Fig. 1).

There were many reasons for believing that islands or a conti-
nent were to be found in that northern region. When the Jesuits
came to Japan in the middle of the sixteenth century they learned
that north of Japan proper there was a body of land called Yezo,
but they could not fully inform themselves as to its shape and
size. A somewhat similar report reached Europe from another
quarter. Richard Cocks, an English merchant in Japan, in a
letter written in 1611, made mention of “an island called Yedzo,
whichis thought to be rather some part of the continent Tartaria.”

2 KNOWLEDGE OF NORTH PACIFIC

But this was not the only vague information the cartographers
had to go on. The credulous were as eager as ever to hear of
islands with golden streets, and they accepted as a fact every
baseless rumor which helped to confirm them in their belief. One
of these rumors was that in the year 1582, or thereabouts, a
Spanish vessel in going from Manila eastward ran into a storm
which drove her to an island situated in latitude 37° 30’ N. and
some 400 miles east of Japan. The inhabitants of this island were
hospitable and rich to such an extent that even the pots and pans
were made of gold and silver.

VIZCAINO AND VRIES

The Spanish government attached enough importance to
current gossip to send Sebastian Vizcaino from Mexico in search
of the rumored El Dorado. He spent the autumns of 1611 and
1612 in cruising north, south, and east of Japan without, how-
ever, being able to locate the prize. In the meantime the Dutch
traders heard the story, and they in turn became interested. In
1639 the Dutch East India Company instructed Mathijs Quast
and Abel Janszoon Tasman to find the gold island, but all their
efforts were in vain. Four years later the company sent another
expedition in command of Maerten Gerritszoon Vries. He sailed
north and east of Japan, sighting the island of Yezo without, how-
came ever, being able to determine either its shape or its size, and
among (what are now known as) the Kurile Islands. One of these
he named State Island and the other (which he thought to be
part of the American continent) Company Land. But neither
gold nor silver did Vries find, though he sailed north to Sakhalin,
south to Formosa, and east 460 miles from Japan. The Vries
discoveries were put on the map by Jansson in 1650. The pre-
ceding year (1649) another cartographer, Texeira by name,
published a map on which he marked the discoveries (in the early
part of the seventeenth century) of a certain Juan de Gama just
about where Vries placed his Company Land, that is to say be-
tween latitude 40° and 45° N. (Fig. 1).

Ege
ea heey Ye
ee

my

Ss
PS canes
Fhe fox thet

TAVE -

ee

S ts gs
ME Dacer te Sa Hh Oe

4 16] HATE :
Meade MO at

Purest
spranetnls

Cir ot

Crea fa

ree Ie
Non %e

Per 2),

Fic. 1—Section of a map of the northern hemisphere by Guillaume Delisle, July, 1714, to illustrate the contemporary knowledge

ie” and the “Céte découverte par Dom Jean de Gama.”

Note the “Terre de la Compagn

of the North Pacific.

RUSSIAN ADVANCE IN SIBERIA 3

ComMPANY LAND AND GAMA LAND

It is no wonder that these three reports, that of the Jesuits,
Vries, and Texeira, of the three poorly described territories,
Yezo, Company Land, and Gama Land, bewildered the cartog-
raphers. They were at a loss to know whether the lands in
question were islands or continents, whether they were parts of
America or of Asia, whether they were three distinct lands or
one and the same. On the maps of the second half of the seven-
teenth and the early part of the eighteenth century all these
views, and many others besides, found expression. Johann Bap-
tist Homann of Nuremberg, on his map of about 1712, suggested
that Terra Esonis was probably the northwest coast of America
and the same land that Gama discovered; on the other hand Guil-
laume Delisle, in a memoir which he read before the Paris
Academy of Sciences in 1720, made the statement that Yezo
was a part of Asia and that Japan was a peninsula of it. The
difference in the point of view of these two men gives an idea of
the confusion on the subject that existed at the beginning of the
eighteenth century. There was only one way of clearing up
these difficulties, and that was by actual investigation.

THE RussIAN ADVANCE IN SIBERIA

During the century and a half that the cartographers were
losing themselves in their speculations and paper explorations
of the North Pacific the Russian trappers, traders, tribute
gatherers, and missionaries were wandering over the length and
breadth of Siberia and pushing their discoveries to the “Eastern”
Ocean. They had not, however, a clear idea of what they were
doing; they had not even a very good mental picture of the land
they discovered.

By actual navigation they had learned that the Ob, Yenisei,
and Lena emptied into the “Icy” Sea, that the Amur, Ud, and
Okhota flowed into the Eastern Sea; but they were ignorant as
to whether there existed a passage between these two seas. They

4 KNOWLEDGE OF NORTH PACIFIC

knew that one could go by water from the mouth of the Ob to
the mouth of the Lena, from the mouth of the Amur to the
mouth of the Okhota, but they did not know whether one could
navigate from the mouth of the Lena to the mouth of the
Okhota. They were not agreed among themselves whether
there was land to the north and east of the two last-named rivers.
Many of these Siberian hunters believed that not far from the
mouth of the Kolyma River a large continent (bolshaya zemlya)
extended northward and that the Asiatic mainland stretched out
indefinitely to the eastward. Something was also said and known
of the Anadyr and Kamchatka Rivers, but they were supposed to
discharge their waters into the Arctic. According to some
curious Siberian maps of the late seventeenth and early eight-
eenth centuries eastern Asia ended somewhere near the mouth
of the Okhota River and northern Asia close to the Yana
River, and the two parts together, where they joined, formed a
right angle. The areas which now go by the name of Kamchatka
and the Chukchi Peninsula were then unnoticed. This may have
been due to the Siberians’ ignorance of the country or to their
ignorance of the science of map making.

PETER THE GREAT’S INTEREST

When Peter the Great came into power he took deep interest
in the activities of his energetic Cossacks and tried to give them
intelligent guidance. He sent many of his Swedish prisoners of
war into Siberian ports to teach his subjects to build sea-going
vessels, to use nautical instruments, and to construct modern
maps. Between 1700 and 1715 Kamchatka and the Kurile
Islands were discovered and explored, and the terra incognita in
Asia was pushed still farther eastward. Reports of these dis-
coveries reached the scientific men of Western Europe, and when
Peter came among them in 1716 and 1717 they discussed with
him the question of the North Pacific and urged him to settle
once for all the problem whether Asia and America were united.
Peter accepted for himself and for his country the honor and the

PETER THE GREAT’S INTEREST 5

responsibility, and carried the undertaking through successfully,
although at the time his success was somewhat doubted. When
Bering’s second expedition came to an end in 1749, Bering
Strait had been discovered, the Arctic coast of Asia from the
White Sea to the Kolyma River had been charted, and the North
Pacific coast of America from Cape Addington to Bering Island
had been placed on the map. This was Russia’s share in the
work of discovery and exploration, and a very important con-
tribution to geographical knowledge it was.

CHAP TE Rall

BERING’S FIRST EXPEDITION, 1725-1730

ON his return to his capital in 1718 Peter the Great went
to work at once on the problem of the relation of Asia to
America. He ordered two of his officers, Fedor Luzhin and Ivan
Evreinov, to proceed to Asia to make certain investigations for
him and “to go to Kamchatka and farther, as you have been
ordered, and determine whether Asia and America are united;
and go not only north and south but east and west, and put ona
chart all that you see.”! They left Russia in 1719, reached
Kamchatka in 1720, cruised among and explored the Kurile
Islands in 1720 or 1721, returned to St. Petersburg in 1722 or
1723, and made a verbal report to the emperor. Just what they
reported is not known, but it is certain that they did not
“determine whether Asia and America are united.”

PETER THE GREAT’S ORDERS

This failure did not discourage Peter; it probably convinced
him that in order to be successful the undertaking would have
to be maintained on a larger scale than he had contemplated in
1718. The time was more favorable now than before for such
work; the Peace of Nystad gave him the leisure and the peace of
mind for planning great things. Unfortunately his health began
to fail, and, as he realized that he had not long to live, he made
more haste. On December 23, 1724,? he set matters in motion
by drawing up the following orders:

1 Polnoe Sobranie Zakonov Rossiiskoi Imperii, Vol. 4, Doc. 3266.

2In the present work the dates are according to the old style, at that time
eleven days behind the new style.

Ge: HsYicusget Den ee en
Han t CiaA Men Crnere no31066 hathernes 9
HoOrtiopol dst MOT6 THUAMO, YOO; ~ etuud| 2
Z.4rescrns Cnaryeoo fo. say owes Hes
Tho grea HeW Trp CMTE Tata’ “tea corns Moy.
/ Kanwe € cree Tpudortx
- Mapadaxs - NgAr Tit0210" :
_ Cunud OTS yp cuserre 6, 3
TWornuinogs Ap cdxxt-
Au Crp Sad furegér » KOTTIO-
pare” AOA CLE data > n=
Or, HO020 Ut crpreiseas cre: ay
pe ul: ee Marnpe 3 8

popes aa pL eS

pk 4 x un Se |

Du tte tm ba Gnd
A Ae fn g—

PEE

ae
ca Cy .
rt nomot Tep crropiysi = FTaucages Onvcrrisy, cee
eit Cras 6 OTrichs, cr née
More: trapScont . drone. :
Ltn, Sep ecomwd. jipoe fon”
Lalo, at AS oanonen A> aes
at Pobauysd . Awrur-
wish, M €3u,nov0 Ras 22.

Frog cnx d AUC Eite, se

Fic. 2—Facsimile of paragraphs 3 and 4 of Peter the Great’s orders of December
23, 1724, for Bering’s first expedition, with comments in his own handwriting.
For translation, see the text, p. 7. This document is found in the Archives of the
Ministry of Marine: Papers of the Admiralty Council, 1724, No. 20, Petrograd.

PETER THE GREATS ORDERS a

ORDERS OF PETER THE GREAT FOR THE SELECTION OF OFFICERS FOR THE
First EXPEDITION?

Peter’s Orders

1. To find geodesists who have
been in Siberia and have returned.

2. To find among the deserving
naval lieutenants or sub-lieuten-
ants such as could be sent to Si-
beria and Kamchatka.

3. To find among the appren-
tices or assistant master builders
one who could build there a deck
ship along the lines of the big ships
here. For that purpose there
should be sent with him young
ship carpenters, such instruments
as may be needed, one quarter-
master, and eight sailors.

4. Likewise to forward from
here one and a half* sets of sails;
blocks, cables, and such like; four
falconets with the necessary am-
munition; and one or two sail-
makers.

Reports

The Senate learns that the fol-
lowing named geodesists have been
in Siberia: Ivan Zakharov, Peter
Chichagov, Ivan Evreinov, who
died, Fedor Luzhin, Peter Sko-
beltsyn, Ivan Svistunov, Dmitri
Baskakov, Vasili Shetilov, Grigori
Putilov.

Admiral Sievers and Rear Ad-
miral Senyavin recommend among
the naval lieutenants Stanberg,5
Zverev, or Posenkov; among the
sub-lieutenants Chirikov or Lap-
tev. It would be advisable to
have over them as commander
Captain Bering or Fonverd. Ber-
ing has been in the East Indies and
knows conditions, and Fonverd
has had experience as navigator.

The student of shipbuilding,
Fedor Koslov, is able to build
either decked or open ships if he is
furnished with a plan.

It is very necessary to have as

navigator or assistant navigator one
who has been in North America.

Rigging is being sent.
*Two sets.

The rest is all right.

3 Archives of the Ministry of Marine: Papers of the Admiralty Council, 1724,
No. 29, pp. 129-130. In the left-hand column are Peter’s instructions, in the right
is the report of the Senate or the Admiralty Council. The lines in italics are com-
ments on the report by Peter made in his own handwriting (see Fig. 2).

4In 1720 or 1721 Evreinov and Luzhin, as stated above, went to the Kurile
Islands at the order of Peter. Soon after their return Evreinov died.

5 J.e. Spanberg.

8 BERING’S FIRST EXPEDITION

5. If there are no such naviga- Vice-Admiral Sievers has writ-
tors in our navy, a letter should be ten that he has among our men
dispatched at once to Holland that navigators who know the sea and
two men be sent who know the sea’ that he will send them without
in the north and as far as Japan. delay.

These men should come by the
admiralty post.

December 23, 1724.

UKASE TO THE GOVERNOR OF SIBERIA, PRINCE DOLGORUKOV®

We are sending to Siberia Fleet-Captain Vitus Bering with assistants
to undertake a naval expedition and to carry out such instructions as he
has from us. When he comes to you and asks help of one kind and
another for the expedition you are to give it to him.

January, 1725.

ACCOUNT OF THE EXPEDITION

On the strength of the recommendations of the Senate and the
Admiralty Council the tsar selected Vitus Bering’ to lead the
expedition and gave him as lieutenants Martin Spanberg® and
Alexei Chirikov. In the early part of January, 1725, he also drew
up and signed the instructions;® but, owing to his failing health,
he had to leave the execution of them to his friend Count Aprak-
sin.*? The death of Peter on January 28, 1725, did not in the least

6 Archives of the Ministry of Marine: Papers of the Admiralty Council, 1724,
No. 29.

7 Vitus Bering was born at Horsens, Denmark, in the year 1681. As soon as he
was old enough he went to sea and in 1703 made a voyage to the East Indies. In
1704 he joined the Russian navy with the rank of sub-lieutenant. He rose gradually
in the service, being made lieutenant in 1707, lieutenant-captain in 1710, captain
of the fourth rank in 1715, captain of the third rank in 1717, captain of the second
rank in 1720, and captain of the first rank in 1724, when he was put in charge of
the expedition. For a fuller account of Bering’s life the reader is referred to Peter
Lauridsen’s “Vitus Bering,” transl. by J. E. Olson, Chicago, 18809.

8 Spanberg was a Dane and Chirikov a Russian.

9Printed below, pp. 10-11, in Bering’s report. :

10 Nartov’s account of the last days of the monarch (Razskazi Nartova o Petre
Velikom, edited by L. N. Maikov, St.Petersburg, 1891, p. 99) shows how impor-
tant the latter regarded the expedition:

“In the beginning of January, 1725, Peter was realizing that he had not long
to live, yet his unconquerable spirit was busily at work for the good of the coun-
try. With his own hand he drew up the instructions relative to the Kamchatka
expedition, which should determine the relation between Asia and America.

BERING’S REPORT 9

disturb the plans of the undertaking. Catherine was determined
to carry out all the policies and ambitions of her husband. Al-
ready, on January 24, the vanguard of the party had left the
capital, but Bering and several others did not leave until Febru-
ary 5, the day the instructions were handed to him, as may be
read in the report of Bering which follows.

REPORT OF FLEET-CAPTAIN BERING ON HIS EXPEDITION TO THE EASTERN
COAST OF SIBERIA

To the Most Enlightened, August, and Great Empress of All the
Russias [is submitted] a short account of the Siberian Expedition under-
taken by Her Imperial Majesty’s humble servant, Fleet Captain V. I.
Bering.!2

On February 5, 1725, I received from Her Imperial Majesty the
Empress Catherine Alexeyevna,' of illustrious and immortal memory,
the instructions drawn up by the hand of His Imperial Majesty Peter
the Great, of deserving and eternal fame, a copy of which follows:

1. Build in Kamchatka or in some other place in that region one or
two decked boats.

(Footnote 10, continued.)

He also selected the officers for this work—Vitus Bering, Martin Spangenberg
{this was the usual way of writing it at this period], and Alexei Chirikov.

“I was then almost constantly with the Emperor and saw with my own eyes
how eager His Majesty was to get the expedition under way, being, as it were,
conscious that his end was near. When all had been arranged he seemed pleased
and content. Calling the general-admiral [Count Apraksin] to him he said: ‘Bad
health has obliged me to remain at home. Recently I have been thinking over a
matter which has been on my mind for many years, but other affairs have pre-
vented me from carrying it out. I have reference to the finding of a passage to
China and India through the Arctic Sea. On the map before me there is indicated
such a passage bearing the name of Anian. There must be some reason for that.
In my last travels I discussed the subject with learned men, and they were of the
opinion that such a passage could be found. Now that the country is in no
danger from enemies we should strive to win for her glory along the lines of the
arts and sciences. In seeking such a passage who knows but perhaps we may be
more successful than the Dutch and English, who have made many such attempts
along the American coast. I have written out these instructions and, on account
of my health, I entrust the execution of them, point by point, to you, Feodor
Matveyevich.’ ”’

Zapiski Voenno-Topogr. Depo, Vol. 10, pp. 69-75, St. Petersburg, 1847,
The original report in manuscript is in the Archives of the General Staff, Section
X, No. 566. [A translation of the published version appeared (pp. 135-143) in
W. H. Dall: A Critical Review of Bering’s First Expedition, 1725-30, Natl. Geogr.
Mag., Vol. 2, 1890, pp. 111-169.—EpiIt. Nore.]

12 Vitus Ivanovich Bering. Bering’s father’s name was Jonas.

13 Catherine I, second wife of Peter, who succeeded him to the throne on February
8, 1725, and reigned until her death on May 6, 1727

S" FIRST |EXPEDIRION

BERING’

10

(uydeyD Jojog ueurdiysprm Aq yday yooq Zo] ay} uO paseq st yoIyM ‘(Aydezsorlqiq
998) EZYI JO YIOM S,YYIeg SurAueduosoe ‘9 “31y ul psonposdas ‘dew ay} uo ‘aseAoa vas oY} OJ ‘pue ‘y1ode1 ssulleag Jo (Aydeiso

‘

“HGIq 99S) Se[qe} ay} pue YIWMoIOY 4X9} BY} UO ‘AaUANOL pur] ay} IOj ‘poseg) ‘uMOYs ST 93NOI preMyNO 24} A[uo ‘(ey eYyIUIey ssoi9e
PUP]IOAO) }eIIG SuUllog pue Ys}OYYO uUseMjaq ‘adeAOA vas ay} JO {UMOYsS aie SoyNoI WANoI oy} pue preMyno 3y} Y}0q ‘Ys}oyYYO pue
SINQSI9}Ig “IS UsaMjJoq ‘AouINOL purl 24} JO ‘000‘000‘0S:1 atess ‘UOI}IPsdxe JsIY SBUlJ9g JO aynNOI ay} Burmoys dep—E€ ‘o1y

ui

. om: ay~ \ W

\y * 8211 SS ow

\ al b ap maa 8 Lp €| Ainp- |) you » 8 fy spobs KATO a

itp ( y

§ a SS SS 6 \
ING & dt gy OFLI'! YISBIN Jey (iy

Tie oe ales

00s

000'000°0S:} efe9s \\
VOINAWY OL VISV 40 NOILWIGN AHLS
ININYRL30 OL \& &
(O€LI-SZZI) NOWIGIdX4 LSYid SONINIG \~ \ \~
40 J1NOU JHL ONIMOHS dV ON

wooo!

oe
DET SSOLI MOPS
WIYZDLG 09. shy

\

YSN

SS SY
MX gy ONE QOH TSS ~
SME OR RAN

BERING’S REPORT II

2. Sail on these boats along the shore which bears northerly and
which (since its limits are unknown) seems to bea part of America.

3. Determine where it joins with America, go to some settlement
under European jurisdiction; if you meet a European ship learn from
it the name of the coast and put it down in writing, make a landing
to obtain more detailed information, draw up a chart and come back
here.!4

In the orders given me by General-Admiral Count Apraksin!® it was
stated that I was to ask for mechanics and supplies from the provincial
government at Tobolsk and that I was to make monthly reports to the
Admiralty College.16

On January 24, before I received the instructions, there was dispatched
by the Admiralty College in the interest of the expedition one of my
lieutenants with 26 men and 25 wagonloads of materials. Altogether
there were under my command 33 men, and they were sent by way of
Vologda. From St. Petersburg to Tobolsk we passed en route the
following cities: Vologda, Totma, Veliki Ustyug, Solvychegodsk, Kai,
Solikamsk, Verkhotura, Turinsk (also called Epanchin), and Tyumen.!7

On March 16 Tobolsk was reached and there we remained until May 15
because of the cold weather. During the stay I requisitioned the neces-
sary material for the expedition. On May 15 we started down the
Irtish to Samarovsk in four boats, known in Siberia as doshchentki.'8
They were loaded with supplies brought from St. Petersburg as well as
other things gathered at Tobolsk. In the last-named city there were
added to my company, at my request, a monk, a commissar, petty
officers, and soldiers to the number of 34.

From Samarovsk I sent ahead my marine guard,!® who carried with
him orders from the provincial government of Tobolsk to the towns
along the way to have boats prepared at Yeniseisk and Ust-Kut,?° but

14 Polnoe Sobranie Zakonov Rossiiskoi Imperii, Vol. 7, Doc. 4640.

15 Reodor Matveyevich Apraksin (1671-1728), one of Peter’s right-hand men.
See also footnote Io.

16 The Admiralty College was created in 1718 and became a Ministry in 1802.

17 For the route of the expedition, see map, Fig. 3. Most of the towns named,
from Kai eastwards, were posts and stopping places for Siberian hunters and tra-
ders. Verkhotura (Upper Tura) was founded in 1598, Tyumen in 1586, and Tobolsk
in 1587. Turinsk was also called Epanchin because a Tatar chief of that name
lived here before the Russians came.

18 A doshchenik “is built of boards without a keel, flat-bottomed, about 35 to 40
feet long; rows and steers with long sweeps, two men to each; is furnished with a
mast, and one square sail, and named from dosok, a board.” (Martin Sauer: An
Account of a Geographical and Astronomical Expedition to the Northern Parts of
Russia, . . . by Commodore Joseph Billings . . ., London, 1802, p. 20, footnote.)

19 Peter Chaplin.

20 Ust-Kut (Mouth of the Kut), where the Kut falls into the Lena and marks
the head of navigation.

12 BERING’S FIRST EXPEDITION

he himself was to proceed to Yakutsk. After leaving Samarovsk
we went up the Ob to Surgut and to Narim, thence up the river Ket
to Makovska Post.?} Along the course that we followed from Tobolsk
to Makovska live the Ostyaks,?? who were formerly idolaters but through
the labors of Metropolitan Philophei?? of Tobolsk were converted to
Christianity in 1715. We proceeded overland from Makovska to Yeni-
seisk and there went aboard four boats and worked our way up the
rivers Yenisei and [Upper] Tunguska to the mouth of the Ilim River. On
the Tunguska ther2 are three rapids (poroga) and several rocky shoals
(shkver). In the rapids there are large submerged rocks across the whole
width of the stream so that a boat can get through in only one or two
places; the shoals likewise have rocks above and below the surface but
they [the shoals] are not very large. The shoals differ from the rapids in
that the former have little water and continue for a verst or two at a
stretch, which causes some trouble in getting over them. At Yeniseisk
I took for my service, in accordance with instructions from Tobolsk, 30
carpenters and blacksmiths. The rapids and shoals made it impossible
to go up the Ilim to Ilimsk, and on that account there were sent out
from that town smaller craft. On these the heavier materials were taken
to Ilimsk, but the lighter were transported to the same place in the course
of the winter.

Lieutenant Spanberg with 39 men, carpenters and laborers, was
sent overland to Ust-Kut, where, during the winter, they con-
structed 15 barges for taking the men and supplies down the Lena to
Yakutsk. With the other members of the party I wintered at Ilimsk
because there were not enough accomodations for all at Ust-Kut
and we could not go through to Yakutsk owing to the snow and cold,
the lack of teams, and the uninhabited country. According to orders
from Tobolsk we were to receive our food supplies from Irkutsk and
Ilimsk, as no grain grows at Yakutsk. During the winter I went from
Ilimsk to Irkutsk to consult with the voivode 4 of that city, who formerly
held a similar position at Yakutsk, about that country, of which we knew
very little, and to find out the best way of going from there to Okhotsk
and Kamchatka. Towards the end of the winter I took over to Ust-Kut

*1 Built as a palisaded fort (ostrog) in 16109.

#2 In the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries they made trouble for the Russians,
but they are of no importance now. In 1911 the total number of Ostyaks in Siberia
was 20,000.

*3 Philophei (Leszczynski) (1650-1727). In 1702 Peter put him in charge of the
Siberian missions, and it is recorded that through his efforts 40,000 natives were
converted to Christianity.

*4 Mikhaelo Izmailov, voivode from October, 1724, to April, 1731. In the Annals
of Irkutsk (V. P. Sukachev: Pervoe stolyetie Irkutska, St. Petersburg, 1902, pp.
133-134) it is recorded that sbanbetena and “Ivan Bering” were there in the course
of this winter.

fosnoy s$,J0]Id ‘zy furieae} ‘Gg ‘syoeiieq ‘D ‘ArojoUTED “g_ sosnoyoseaM'

PUREST PORE CS:

*) sefeay:
cone ye BY
Wenreied dane nr?

iauecrasamyng sliver yaetes : #
Hud aT. Maem ne ed

ee

: i

ff

\

| a

2 5 daa mp 2m

9 Betas T8200 60 G0 0629 9 29

‘syny dAT}eU ‘FT SsadAO[duIa JO sw001010}s
:(YeAE) JO oBeTIIA) YSU TMOT (*¥ VIP oY} Jo SsioJeMpRay

Chis

eee

39 0: 590 m0 ox

ee er

pi stactins oie atie

ALE

‘c) Sasnoyyyeq ‘Wy

94} 0} SSOID PUI
-OpNA WIOI} pose}
-10d oom spoos
IouruUIMS UJ *93NO1
TIJUIM 9} BOIDP
“UI SUT] poy}0q)
IOATY eWOpNA ‘f
sjny dATyeu ‘Hy
asnoypsens ‘47
(¢1e[[99) Wool
punois.1epun “47
syoeiseq ‘qd
SioyienD SulAlt ‘)
dsNOYoIeEM ‘GT
esnoy JespMod ‘py
:(SSOID PUI
-OpnA~ jo oBeIIIA)
YoT todd, -Kay
{O UO1MDISUDAT,
(peis
-O1Joq Ul QUTIe][
JO AI}SIUTJ OY} JO
SOATYDIY 9} ul FZ
‘ON Stoded sullog
oy} suowre punoj
stogqueds Aq
SUIMEIC)) “YS}OUY
-Q Jeou Yr, 0}
OAR Ye, 8}
jo ACM AC SSOID
euUopnaA UWors
C1eOS TOAOULS 9}
ssoloe UuOT}Ipedxa
ywIY s,sullog jo
oyNOI VY} SUIMOYS
dew jo oyIwis
-ey—_b ‘DIY

BERING’S REPORT 13

my whole company, which included 20 carpenters and blacksmiths from
Irkutsk and two coopers from Ilimsk.

Along the Tunguska, Ilim, and Lena Rivers, as far as the Vitim,”> live
the idolatrous Tungus who have deer for riding, but those who have
no deer make their homes along the banks of streams and subsist on
fi h and get about in birch canoes.

In the spring of 1726 we left Ust-Kut in 15 barges and went down the
Lena to Yakutsk. From the Vitim down along the Lena, on both banks,
live the Yakuts and a small number of Tungus. The Yakuts have
many horses and cattle which supply them with food and clothing, but
those that have but few of these animals live on fish. They are idolaters;
they worship the sun and the moon and, of the birds, the swan, the
eagle, and the raven. They hold in high respect their priests, whom
they call shamans, who keep in their possession small idols (bolvanov)
known to them as shaitany. They claim to be of Tatar origin.

On arriving at Yakutsk I called for help to assist my men on the barges,
and, as soon as they came, I dispatched Lieutenant Spanberg in 13
of the boats that were built at Ust-Kut and drew but little water
down the Lena to the Aldan and from there up the Maya and the
Yudoma. These barges were loaded with materials which could not
be transported overland, besides other naval and land stores. I had
hoped that this freight could be taken by water as far as Yudoma Cross,”
a much cheaper way than sending it by horses. That same summer
I, with a small number of my men, went from Yakutsk to Okhotsk on
horseback, taking with us a pack train, each horse carrying only a five-
pood?’ load, and in this manner we brought over sixteen hundred poods
of provisions. It was impossible to make use of wagons owing to the
mud and the hills. At Okhotsk Post there are only ten Russian dwell-
ings. Lieutenant Chirikov was left behind to winter at Yakutsk with the
understanding that he was to come overland to Okhotsk in the spring.

Towards the end of December, 1726, I received word from Lieutenant
Spanberg that his boats were ice-bound in the Gorbea River,** about
450 versts from Yudoma Cross, and that he had made sleds and was
hauling on them the most needed material. I made up a party from my
own men and those of the ostrog and gave them dog teams and supplies,
and sent them to the relief of the lieutenant. He arrived with his com-
pany about the first part of January, 1727, without, however, bringing

2 The Vitim isa right branch of the Lena flowing into it in 113° E. (see Fig. 3) and
is known for its fine sables. In 1911 the Tungus, including the Lamuts, numbered
75,204; the Yakuts 245,406.

2 At the headwaters of the Yudoma, where navigation ceases, there was erected
a cross, hence the name Yudoma Cross. For this part of the route, see map, Fig. 4.

27 A pood is about 36 pounds.

28 A left tributary of the Yudoma near its mouth. Probably the Derbi River
of today.

14 BERING’S FIRST EXPEDITION

Konider oUMennge
Facakhnie Naredi Ss

Her Finses dade Kullads Ollerat Van geslor lon vive Has

Shen ft Silty Ray Bofine Ajucprian LLY eee Ue
Pebmr dorechy Krutogorowr : ore ok Trithig Te cmckl
r on EY EPI REC) fou Faia =
A Cacho Sacafehnge 5
Stare Skene ops

°. Osnotj Ogul

Si mleKambatsKoe
OF vey | Csi of Li tel Ke teat

7 he Land of Lamahabng

Fic. 5—The eastern section of the map accompanying Bering’s report of his
first expedition. Reproduced from W. H. Dall’s facsimile (Appendix No. 19, U.S.
Coast and Geodetic Survey Rept. for 1890, Pl. 69) of a copy of the map pre-

BERING’S REPORT 15

.
.
.

pared for use in Sweden, with transliteration of the Russian names, in 1889 in the
collection of Baron Klinckofstrém. Compare with Bering’s route and the coast
outlines on Figs. 3 and 6.

16 BERING'S FIRST EXPEDITION

in any of the material, which he left in four different places along the
uninhabited trail. They had been on the road ever since November 4
and during that time had suffered greatly from hunger, having been com-
pelled to eat the dead horses that had dropped by the wayside, the
harness, their leather clothing, and boots. Fortunately they found at
Yudoma Cross the 150 poods of flour which we had left behind when some
of our horses gave out.

Along the Aldan and Maya live the same kind of Yakuts as those on
the Lena; but on the Yudoma, that part which is near Okhotsk Post,
are the wandering coast Tungus, or Lamuts, as they call themselves.
They have many deer, on the backs of which they ride summer and
winter and which, as well as the wild deer, supply them with their food and
clothing. Here, too, are to be seen the pedestrian Tungus who live
near the sea and along the banks of the streams and depend on fish
for their sustenance. They have the same religion as the Yakuts.

About the first part of February I gathered 90 men and several dog
teams and gave them to Lieutenant Spanberg with orders to bring in
whatever was left on the Yudoma. He himself returned during the
first days of April, but some of his men did not come in until the middle
of the month. Even then they failed to bring in everything, and it was
necessary to send another party of 27 men to Yudoma Cross, which stayed
away until May but brought in all the material on pack horses. In these
regions people never go in winter from Yakutsk to Okhotsk or other far-
off places on horseback; they go on foot, dragging behind them sleds—the
kind we used between the Gorbea and Okhotsk—with such things as are
needed, each sled carrying from 10 to 15 poods. A trip like this takes
from eight to ten weeks. The snow here is sometimes seven feet deep, and
in places even deeper, and people who travel in winter dig their way
through the snow to the ground and there pass the night.

On June 30, Lieutenant Spanberg sailed for the mouth of the Bolshaya
River on his newly built ship?? which was loaded with all the materials.
He had orders to discharge the cargo, send one of the petty officers with
carpenters to Kamchatka to prepare ship timber, and return himself to
Okhotsk.

Lieutenant Chirikov came from Yakutsk July 3, bringing with him
in accordance with my instruction 2,300 poods of flour. We loaded
the flour on Spanberg’s ship, which had returned, and on an old boat,?°
which had come in from the Bolshaya River, and sailed with my com-
pany for Bolsheretsk Post on August 21. The supplies that were
still in the boats on the Gorbea I sent back to Yakutsk in charge of the
pilot and the men who had been detailed to watch over them, with orders
to get a receipt for them and then hasten back with some part of the

29 The Forlune.
30 The Lodiya.

BERING’S REPORT 17,

supply of iron and tar and join me in Kamchatka in 1728. At the
mouth of the Bolshaya River we had to discharge the cargo into small
boats and take it to Bolsheretsk. This post had only 14 Russian houses.
The heavier materials and part of the supplies were loaded into small
boats and sent up the Bystra River,?! a stream with a swift current,
to within 120 versts of the Upper Kamchatka Post. That same
winter we left Bolsheretsk on dog teams for the Upper and Lower Kam-
chatka Posts. Each evening we made a camp in the snow and covered
over the opening. This country has some bad blizzards, called purgas,®
and if a person is hit by one of them in an open place without having
time to construct a shelter he is in danger of being snowed over and
freezing to death. In the upper ost’oz there are 17 houses; in the lower,
50; and in the other place, where the church is, there are 15 more. In
all three places there lived, during our stay, not more than 150 persons
[Russian]; their chief occupation is collecting tribute. The natives
who drove the teams that brought us over from Bolsheretsk prepared
300 poods of whale blubber from a whale that had been washed ashore
in the fall. In place of money they [the natives] were given Chinese
tobacco. In southern Kamchatka live the Kurils, in the northern the
Kamchadals. They have a common language, but there are a few minor
differences. A small number of these people are idolaters. The others
do not believe in anything and are strangers to all good customs (7
chuzhdi vsiakykh dobrykh obychaev). Neither the natives of Kamchatka
nor the Russians who live there sow any grain. Of domestic animals they
have only the dog, which is used for driving, hauling, and for furnishing
clothing. The food of the natives consists of fish, roots, berries, wild birds,
and sea animals in season. In the neighborhood of the Yakutsk monas-
tery, which is about a verst from the Kamchatka church, there are raised
at the present time oats, hemp, and radishes. Turnips are cultivated
in all three ostrvogs, and they reach such a size as is seldom seen in Russia,
four of them making a pcod. I took over to the monastery above
mentioned some rye and barley and had it sown, but whether it matured
or not I cannot tell, for sometimes early frosts kill the crop. In culti-
vating the soil the people are handicapped by lack of draft animals.
From all aborigines under Russian jurisdiction tribute in fur is col-
lected. The natives have many evil practices. If a woman or a beast
gives birth to twins one of them must be killed at once. Not to do so

31 The Bystra (Swift), a branch of the Bolshaya, is full of rapids and shoals and
is difficult to navigate. From Bolsheretsk to Lower Kamchatka Post the distance
is 883 versts.

32 “The poorga raged with redoubled fury; the clouds of sleet rolled like a dark
smoke over the moor, and we were all so benumbed with cold that our teeth chat-
tered in our heads. The sleet, driven with such violence, had got into our clothes
and penetrated even under our parkas, and into our baggage.” (Peter Dobell:
Travels in Kamchatka and Siberia, 2 vols., London, 1830; reference in Vol. I, p. 102.)

18 BERING'S FIRST EXPEDITION

is a great sin. It is a practice among the Kamchadals, if one of them
is very sick, even a father or a mother, to take him outinto the forest and
leave him there, be it summer cr winter, with just enough food to lasta
week, and as a result many die. The homes of the dead are not again
occupied, and the dead themselves are not buried but are thrown into
the woods, where the dogs devour them.3 The Koryaks burn their dead;
this custom is now forbidden, but the law is not strictly enforced.

When I reached Lower Kamchatka Post the timber for our ship was
in large part ready. We went to work on her April 4, 1728, and with
the help of God had her completed by July 10.*4 The timber we hauled
on dog teams. Tar, since we had not brought any with us and the
natives had none on hand as they did not know how to make it, we
manufactured out of a tree known there as listvennik.®® For lack of any-
thing better to take along on the sea voyage, we distilled liquor from grass
by a process known in that country;** salt we boiled out of sea water;
butter we made from fish oil; and in place of meat we took salt fish.
We had on board enough provisions to last 40 men a year. On July 14
we sailed from the mouth of the Kamchatka River out to sea and fol-
lowed the course laid down by the instructions of His Imperial Majesty
Peter the Great and here marked on the chart.

On August 8, when we were in latitude 64° 30’ N., eight men who
claimed to be Chukchi (a people known for a long time to the Russians
of the country) rowed to us from the shore in a leathern boat and, when
near, asked who we were and why we came. On being invited on board,
they put one man over, who, with the help of large inflated seal bladders,
swam over to have a talk with us. A little later the boat moved up to
us and the men in it told us that large numbers of Chukchi live along
the shore, that a short distance from here the coast turns to the west,
and that not far ahead of us is an island. We located this island, which
we named St. Lawrence, in honor of the day, and found on it a few huts
but no people, although I twice sent the midshipman to look for them.

By August 15 we came to latitude 67° 18’ N. and turned back because

33 A fuller and better account of the natives is to be found in S. P. Krasheninni-
kov’s “History of Kamchatka,” St. Petersburg, 1755, and G. W. Steller’s “Be-
schreibung von dem Lande Kamtschatka,” Frankfort and Leipzig, 1774.

34 She was christened St. Gabriel. 5 Larch.

35 According to Steller the liquor is made in the following manner:

“Der Brandtewein wird aber folgendermassen angesetzt. Man gieset auf 2

Pud siisses Kraut 4 Eimer warmes und laues Wasser, leget zum Ferment ent-

weder was von der Destillation iibrig geblieben hinein, wovon er aber einen

iiblen Geruch oder Geschmack bekommt, oder Beeren von Schimalost [“Shima-
lost” is the Kamchatka honeysuckle bush (Lonicera caerulea) which bears
delicious blue berries.—L. Stejneger.] wovon er sehr stark, angenehmer wird,
und mehr Brandtewein giebet, oder man fermentiret ihn mit eingesauertem
Mehl; nach Verlauf 24 Stunden wird er destilliret, und bekommt man einen
Eimer Brandtewein.” (“Beschreibung von dem Lande Kamtschatka,” p. 86.)

BERING’S REPORT 19

the coast did not extend farther north and no land was near the Chukchi
or East Cape and therefore it seemed to me that the instructions of His
Imperial Majesty of illustrious and immortal memory had been carried
out. Had we gone on and met with unfavorable winds we might have been
prevented from returning to Kamchatka that season, and to have wintered
where we were would not have been wise because there was no wood of
any kind and the native population does as it pleases, is not under Russian
control, and has nothing to do with the Russian tribute collectors.?’

From the mouth of the Kamchatka River to the point from which
we turned back the coast is mountainous, almost as straight as a wall,
and covered with snow even in summer.

On August 20 there came to our ship four boats containing 40 Chukchi
like those who had visited us before. They offered for sale meat, fish,

37 On August 13, having reached 65° 30’, Bering called his officers together to
discuss the question whether to go on or turn back. He said to them:

“Since we have come to latitude 65° 30’ N. and according to my opinion and
the statements of the Chukchi, we have reached and passed the most easterly
point of their land, the question is now, shall we go farther north? If so, how
far? When should we begin to look for harbors? Where does it seem best—
looking at it from the point of view of best serving our country—to go for the
winter in order to protect men and ship?” The officers were divided in opinion.
Spanberg, the senior officer, said: “Having come as far north as we have, and
since on the Chukchi coast there are no harbors nor wood. . . so that we
could preserve ourselves in such winter weather as we have in this region; and
since these natives are not peaceful. . . I suggest that after we have gone
on the course we are on until the sixteenth of this month, and if by that time
we are not able to reach sixty-six degrees, we should then in God’s name turn
about and betimes seek shelter and harbor on the Kamchatka River, whence we
came, in order to save men and ship.” Chirikov made this argument: “As we
have no positive information as to the degree of north latitude Europeans have
ever reached in the Arctic Ocean on the Asiatic side we can not know with cer-
tainty whether America is really separated from Asia unless we touch at the
mouth of the Kolyma, or at least the ice, because it is well known that there is
always drift ice in the Arctic Ocean. Therefore it seems to me that according
to yourinstructions we ought to sail without questioning—unless we are hindered
by the ice, or the coast turns to the west—to the mouth of the Kolyma, as your
instructions demand [a place under European jurisdiction?] But should the
land continue still farther to the north, it would be necessary on the twenty-fifth
of this month to look for winter quarters in this neighborhood, and above all
opposite Chukotski Cape, where, according to the accounts of the Chukchi
through Peter Tatarinov, there is a forest. And if up to that time winds are
contrary, then look there by all means for a place to winter.” (Zapiski Hydrogr.
Depart., Vol. 8, pp. 550-552, St. Petersburg, 1850.)

[For details on the sea voyage, the most important part of the expedition,
which Bering in this report deals with only briefly, the main source of information
is the midshipman Peter Chaplin’s log book, an abridged version of which, with
map (cf. Fig. 6), was published by Berkh in 1823 and translated by Dall in 1891.
Polonskii’s discussion of the first expedition, from which the above quotation
is taken, is likewise of value. A narrative based on Berkh and Polonskii will
be found in F. A. Golder’s “Russian Expansion on the Pacific,” pp. 140-147.
For the references, see the bibliography.—EbItT. Norte.]

20 BERING’S FIRST EXPEDITION

water, about 15 red and white fox skins, four walrus tusks—all of which
they disposed of to the crew for needles and such like articles. They
told us that their relatives go to the Kolyma on deer and not by boat,
that farther along the coast live some of their people, that they had
known the Russians for a long time, and that one of their number
had been at Anadyrsk Post to trade. The rest of their conversation did
not differ greatly from what was said by those who had been to see us
before. On September 2 we sailed into the mouth of the Kamchatka
River and passed the winter in the Lower Kamchatka Post.

Having repaired the ship, which had been laid up, we left the mouth
of the Kamchatka River on June 5, 1729, and set an easterly course,
because the inhabitants of Kamchatka said that in clear weather land
could be seen across the sea. We made a careful search for it over a
distance of 200 versts but could not find it. We circumnavigated and
charted the southern part of Kamchatka, which up to this time had
not been surveyed, and then sailed to the mouth of the Bolshaya River
and from there to Okhostk Post. At the request of the authorities at
Yakutsk I left with the government officials in charge of the posts of
Lower Kamchatka and Bolsheretsk 800 poods of flour, dried meat,
salt, and groats.

It was July 23 when we reached the mouth of the Okhota River,
where I handed over the ship and all that went with it to the officer
incommand. We hired horses and went to Yudoma Cross, and from there
we proceeded by boats and rafts down the Aldan to the portage (belskot
perepravy) and lower, where we again took horses and rode on to Yakutsk.
From Okhotsk to Yakutsk it took us from July 29 to August 29 and to
September 3.33 On September 10 we went in two boats up the Lena and
proceeded until October 1, when we were blocked by ice and therefore
spent a part of the autumn in the village of Peleduye.*® By October 29
there was sufficient snow on the ground, and the banks of the Lena were
firm enough on account of the ice to permit us to go on. We followed
the [Upper] Tunguska and the Yenisei to Ilimsk and Yeniseisk, passing
Russian settlements on the way. From Yeniseisk to Tomsk we continued
along the river Chulym,‘® meeting with more Russian settlements and
villages of newly converted Tatars. Between Tomsk and Chauska Post*!
we passed through other Russian settlements. From Chauska to Tara
we crossed the Barabinsk Steppe, from Tara to Tobolsk we followed the
river Irtish and met with Tatar villages. At Tobolsk we arrived January
10, 1730, and left there on the 25th of the same month for St. Petersburg,
going over the same country as on the outward journey to Tobolsk. On
March I we reached St. Petersburg.

38 Not clear. Possibly August 29 represents the break in the journey at the portage.

39 Peleduye is at the mouth of the river of the same name, a branch of the Lena.

40 A tributary of the Ob (see Fig. 3), lined with villages of Chulym Tatars.
41 On the Chaus River, founded in 1713. It is 223 versts from Tomsk.

XAPTA

soc fami a7

NVYTb KAU BEPHATA

ee dw ry enti,

eee

Aoaroma oma Tpeupnse |p Sauaay.-

6s”

170° 175°

Fic. 6—Facsimile of Berkh’s map of 1823 (see bibliography) showing the route of Berin
scale, 1:16,000,000 (original 1:0,000,000). The dates have been identified an
noon positions. Berkh’s plotting of the ship's tracks has been slig
10, 1728 (Bering's report implies that a landing was made on St.
tation. But otherwise, so far as known, Berkh's map is the st

expedition what Captain Bertholf's map (PI.

Chaplin;

a
# J otatore ‘
% oo 5 iS iu
Bees ilies
ce
7 S74 Y 7 | ']
See a ee LA, toh Recs
ugt 2 20-FR Mo -
rs 4&5 | iT
ee Oc Ca Laspeemaiia |
29 LL IH
2g Aug 27,0" lu
roatCyBartca
7 4
7" :
s e
Hy
j i?
| } H
| n &
| hl
ql
{
Hi}
HI
—
H
oO
ml .
niss

;
(]
fl
U .
65] | | 12 y NE
; aN ALES DRIRNGHES Fences Zt :
a 5 NL
H
i wid 30
| H /
(] fi ;
¢ a
1 Kpan, Qemurmicens / fi Ps V2 July
t] \ 2 ps “(| yaireasa 2B Qaareuncy
a ) ‘ co oy ee 23~22
U 24/*
! H 7 , (iar SW , 4; ve
I i] Scene) ic na vols \ ‘ x oly 23
gi ey v4 war: < veh 22 hug. 26
U rie 1 a ay 20 SN Crnomvpeturi
‘ 7 s 4 a
a < a 5 2 Be
L 0 ONEK 7, 4 he | a & 4
: t hug. 22 ~T727(0SP ‘ “
| 1 mn 2. arr ily 23,1729 |p Y aA 27
, 4
Hug2a, 72 Sze Z
‘ Tans v tb ae
\20 M.YxmonomenoN GS /’ ra 28
H i ie ; WI Cae Mepememnoe ny x Sune 61729 \ ries
8 _ 24 arr Sept 1728 U\ ~Avg.30
I * 6 apbimnoxs ered ey Suite .
ahr A pat 5 i
H a a OM LI Pima
7 \ 27 Otne, tar See woune 6,/729
5315 \ 3 CPt. > _ bg Oc. Bepnnroe,
FT Rae ‘
H Ui eae Ongn KOR 0c. Maawon
H (eas
q é y) 10
He wnlé 125 4420
() Nes Sse
| H "26; June>/2
q [1 7 it
i 1H Wg hee,
| iq L V5
iH Ne BN ls
i H Oe. Aetataar py a Aonam St
| I; Dts 17
bec LD
i
| Aoaroma Bocuoynas om a

Bo

Aug 15,

ye 5
LZ,
,
/4, Y

Uf, W

peep

ripuie

g's first expedition from Okhotsk to Berin
d added from Berkh’s abridged version of midshipman Peter Cha
htly modified for August 18-20 and August 20, 1728. It would also seem as if the po
Lawrence Island, cf. p. 18) and June 10-17, 1729 (Chaplin's log book) might be s
andard, and only modern, reconstruction of the tracks of Bering’s vessels on his first exped
1) does for the second.
The vessels in which the several sections of the tracks shown were sailed are: August 22-September, 1727,
it is this vessel's track that is shown); July Is-September 1,

gs S

Fortune (Bering and Spanberg) and nameless vessel
1728, St. Gabriel; June 6-July 3, 1729, St. Gabriel; July 14-23, 1720, St. Gabriel.

trait and return.

‘s log book. O

cep

and

Chirikov

Zh WoL DS
a al hil

Oe
ra hans

ans (ale

CHAPTER TIT

GVOZDEV’S VOYAGE TO AMERICA IN 1732
SHESTAKOV’S EARLIER EXPEDITION

After the Russians had conquered Kamchatka they pushed
northward and established trading relations with the natives of
East Cape. While they were in that neighborhood the traders
heard that across from the cape there was a large country (bol-
shaya zemlya), and occasionally they saw the inhabitants of
that country who were held captive by the Chukchi. The
adventurous Cossacks decided to subdue these people, as well
as the Chukchi, and force them to pay tribute. One of their
leaders, Afanasi Shestakov, went toSt. Petersburg to persuade the
government to let him undertake this task. On March 23, 1727,
the Senate gave him the necessary authority! and force for the
work in hand. It was Shestakov’s plan to attack by land and sea
the Chukchi and other hostile natives on the mainland and when
they were conquered to send a force to the land beyond East Cape.
With that in view the Cossack leader took possession in 1729 of
all the seagoing vessels Bering had left behind him at Okhotsk.

The campaign of 1730 ended disastrously for the Russians.
Some of the boats were wrecked, the land forces were either way-
laid or defeated in open fight, and in oneof these Shestakov lost his
life. Out of all this great undertaking only one important thing
was accomplished—the sighting of new land opposite East Cape.

GVOZDEV’S EXPEDITION

Shestakov was succeeded in command by Dmitri Pavlutski,
captain of dragoons and a well-known Chukchi fighter. In
addition to the other information about the “large country,”
Pavlutski had received in 1730 the report of one Melnikov on

1 Polnoe Sobranie Zakonov Rossiiskoi Imperii, Vol. 7, Doc. 5049.

22 GVOZDEV’S VOYAGE

that subject which tended more and more to confirm him in the
belief that such a bolshaya zemlya really existed. During the
winter of 1731-1732 Pavlutski sent word to the officers of the
St. Gabriel who were with the ship at Lower Kamchatka Post to
bring him supplies to the Anadyr in the spring and after that go
in search of the land opposite East Cape.2, When the time came
for sailing only one of the officers, Michael Spiridonovich Gvozdev
was physically fit for duty, and he took command of the ship and
set the course for the bolshaya zemlya. His achievement did not
impress Pavlutski very much, and it was not until several years
later that he was made to write out his report, which, with un-
important sections omitted, runs as follows:3

In May, 1732, we received orders from Major Pavlutski, who was at
the time at the Anadyr fort, to go aboard the St. Gabriel with the pilot and
underpilot and sail around Kamchatka Cape to the mouth of the Anadyr
and opposite Anadyrski Cape to what is known as the “large country,”
examine and count the islands there, and gather tribute from the inhabi-
tants. On July 23 we left Kamchatka River, and four days later Kam-
chatka Cape was doubled. We came to Anadyrski Cape August 3 and
from there went to the islands to collect tribute. Moshkov told us of
an island Bering had discovered, and we sailed about in order to find
it. By this maneuvering we reached the southern part of Chukotski
Cape, where, on August 5, we anchored three versts from shore. It was
calm, and I went on land to examine the coast and fetch drinking water.
Close to the shore we observed a small fresh stream into which we pulled.
The country seemed uninhabited; but not far from where we stood was
a herd of deer, numbering about 150 or more, guarded by two men, who
ran away on seeing us. I killed two of the deer, filled two barrels with
water, and went on board.

The next day two Chukchi came toward the ship in two bazdaras but
would not approach near enough so that we could enter into conversa-
tion with them. When they had looked at us for a time they pulled
away. On the morrow I, with nine men, went to the spot from which
I had seen the natives issue the day before, but all that we found there
were two huts of earth and whalebone. As we started back we caught

2 In the “Lettre d’un officier de la marine russienne,” 1753 (see bibliography), the
statement is made that Pavlutski ordered Gvozdev to bring the provisions left by
Bering to the country of the Chukchi, whom Pavlutski was fighting. Gvozdev

could not find Pavlutski and therefore started back and accidentally ran into the

American coast.
3 Archives of the Ministry of Marine: Papers of Count Chernishev, 1762-1768,
No. 367. See also Zapiski Hydrogr. Depart., Vol. 9, pp. 88-103, St. Petersburg, 1851.

GVOZDEV’S REPORT 23

a glimpse of two men who ran away on seeing us. We got under sail on the
8th, steering for an island on the course suggested by Moshkov. On the
following day Fedorov sent me a note saying that in his opinion we had
not yet reached the place in question [large country] since we were still
south of Chukotski Cape, and asked for my opinion. On the roth we
sailed back to the spot where we had been a few days before and took
on fresh water. Two days later we ran into a calm and anchored. On
going ashore we saw two huts and people, who, on noticing us, pulled
away from the land in three baidaras. We managed to get into conver-
sation with them and asked them for tribute, which they refused to give,
Having a fair wind on the 15th we went on our way and on the 17th
sighted an island, but on account of the head wind we could not approach
it but had to keep close to Chukotski Cape.

Here we saw many Chukchi, with whom we tried to enter into conver-
sation but without much success. When the wind shifted once more
to fair we steered again for the northern end of the island [one of the
Diomedes]. Our attempt to land was resisted by a shower of arrows,
to which we replied with muskets. After a great deal of difficulty the
natives told us that they were Chukchi and that some of their people
had fought with the other Chukchi against Pavlutski. In cruising about
the island, which is about two and a half versts long and a verst wide,
we came across other natives, but all refused to pay tribute. We madea
landing and examined their homes, and from the island we saw the
“large country”. It was near one o'clock of the morning of August 20
when we left the first island, and six hours later we anchored off the
second, which is smaller than the first, and about half a mile distant.
A ship’s boat and a baidara were sent to the shore, but meeting with
an unfriendly reception they returned.

About three o’clock of the afternoon of August 21 we sailed for the “large
country” and anchored about four versts from its shore. It was now
Fedorov’s watch, and he, without consulting any one, gave orders to
weigh anchor and approach the southern point of the shore. From
there we could see huts, but in spite of our best efforts we did not come
as close to them as we wished on account of the head wind and the shallow
water. The breeze veering to north-northwest, we were obliged to stand
out to sea on a southwest course and by doing so came to the fourth island
on the 22nd. A strong wind was blowing, and when we tried to approach
the shore the sails gave way. The sailors then came to me and asked
that we return to Kamchatka because of the lateness of the season and
the stormy weather. I referred them to the underpilot without whose
consent I could not order such a move. In the meantime there came
to us from the island a Chukchi in a leather boat which had room for
but one man. He was dressed in a shirt of whale intestines which was
fastened about the opening of the boat in such a manner that no water

24 GVOZDEV'S VOYAGE

could enter even if a big wave should strike it. He told us that Chukchi
lived in the “large country,” where there were forests, streams, and
animals. We had no opportunity of going ashore, and from the distance
we could not tell whether all that he told us of the “large country” was
true or not. When he was gone the sailors spoke to me again about
returning to Kamchatka, and I answered them as before. Then they
held a council and drew up a petition addressed to me and the underpilot,
enumerating many reasons why we should go back. Taking these argu-
ments into consideration we decided to return and entered the mouth
of the Kamchatka River September 28.

Outside of the islands enumerated we saw no others, and the reason
for not indicating their exact position is that the log book Fedorov
and I kept was sent to Okhotsk in 1733. Another reason is that Fedorov
when on watch often failed to make any observations in the journal.
On returning to Kamchatka I asked his aid in drawing up a map, but he
refused to join me; and it was impossible for me to undertake it alone,
for the reasons just enumerated.

From his own account it is quite evident that Gvodzev was
not aware that he had sighted the American coast. He thought
he had discovered an island. He says that after anchoring near
the first and second islands he steered for the “large country” |
[third island] and from there to the “fourth island.” This is all
that is known of Gvozdev’s voyage.

CEA Rare Ly.

BERING’S SECOND EXPEDITION, FROM ITS INCEP-
TION TO THE BEGINNING OF THE SEA VOYAGE

When Bering returned to Russia he made his report to the
Empress and to the officers of the Admiralty and the Senate and
tried to persuade them that “the instructions of His Imperial
Majesty . . . had been carried out.” Some clapped their
hands while others shrugged their shoulders. The doubters
maintained that as long as the coast and waters between the
Kolyma River and East Cape were unexamined the problem of
the relation of Asia to America was unsolved. They were not
without arguments. They called attention to the numerous Si-
berian rumors that a large body of land (bolshaya zemlya) existed
north of the Kolyma River and another east of East Cape. Were
these two or more distinct continents or islands or were they one?
Were they part of Asia or part of America? These and such like
questions were asked. They were fair questions. Bering was
expected to answer them but could not answer them satisfac-
torily.

BERING’S PROPOSAL OF A SECOND EXPEDITION

He was not altogether discredited; for it was realized that he
had done a good piece of work, even if he had not done it as well
as he should. That he had ability no one doubted, and it was
believed that with his experience and the lesson taught him he
would do much better if he were given another chance. Bering,
no doubt, desired another chance, and he submitted to the
Empress the following propositions! which would tend to encour-
age her to send another expedition.

1 According to Lauridsen’s “Vitus Bering,” Chicago, 1889 (note 40, p. 208), first
published in V. Berkh: Zhizneopisaniya Pervykh Rossiiskikh Admiralov, 4 vols.,
St. Petersburg, 1831-36; later reprinted by Sokolov in Zapiski Hydrogr. Depart.,
Vol. 9, pp. 435-436, St. Petersburg, 1851.—Epit. Nore.

26 BEGINNING OF SECOND EXPEDITION

1. According to my observation the waves of eastern Kamchatka
are smaller than in other seas, and I found on Karaginski Island large
fir trees that do not grow on Kamchatka. These signs indicate that
America, or some other land on this side of it, is not far from Kam-
chatka—perhaps from 150 to 200 miles. This could easily be ascer-
tained by building a vessel of about 50 tons and sending it to investiga-
gate. If this be so [the existence of such a country], a trade might
be established between the empire and the inhabitants of those
regions.

2. Such a ship should be built in Kamchatka, because the necessary
timber could be obtained more easily. The same holds true in the mat-
ter of food—fish and game are especially cheap there. Then, again,
more help may be had from the natives of Kamchatka than from those
of Okhotsk. One other reason should not be overlooked; the mouth
of the Kamchatka River is deeper and offers a better shelter for boats.

3. It would not be without advantage to find a sea route from the Kam-
chatka or Okhota River to the Amur River or Japan, since it is known
that these regions are inhabited. It would be very profitable to open
trade relations with these people, particularly the Japanese. And as
we have no ships there [in the Okhotsk Sea], we might arrange it with the
Japanese that they meet us halfway in their boats. For such an expedi-
tion a ship about the size of the one mentioned would be needed, or one
somewhat smaller might serve the purpose.

4. The cost of such an expedition—not including salaries, provisions,
and materials for both boats, which can not be had there and would have
to be taken from here and Siberia—would be from 10,000 to 12,000
rubles.

5. If it should be considered wise to map the northern regions of the
coast of Siberia—from the Ob to the Yenisei and from there to the Lena—
this could be done by boats or by land, since these regions are under
Russian jurisdiction.

The question of a second voyage must have been raised even in
1730, for early in 1731 arrangements for the undertaking were
already made. The desire to determine the relation of Asia and
America was not the only argument advanced in favor of the
expedition. Some of the reports on that subject submitted to the
Empress pointed out the benefits to be derived from territorial
and commercial expansion, additional naval bases, and the
discovery of precious metals. No doubt all these reasons had
their weight with those in authority.”

2 Archives of State, XXIV, No. 8, 1732; No. 9, 1732-1743.

LAND VERSUS SEA EXPEDITION 2

LAND VERSUS SEA EXPEDITION

Another question that came up was how this expedition
should be sent—by land or by water. There seems to have been
a difference of opinion on that subject. Count Nikolai Golovin ?
and Admiral Sanders submitted separate memoirs to Her
Majesty recommending that two ships with naval and other
supplies be chartered to go from Russia to Kamchatka by way of
Cape Horn and Japan. After discharging their cargoes and
resting the crews the ships could proceed on their voyage of dis-
covery in the North Pacific. Count Golovin even offered to lead
the expedition in person if the proper support were assured him.

A number of reasons were given why the sea route was prefera-
ble to the overland route. In the first place there would be a
saving of time. It would take from ten months to a year for
the sea voyage from St. Petersburg to Kamchatka and a year or a
little more for the work of exploration and the return to Russia;
on the other hand it would require two years to transport naval
and other stores overland to Kamchatka, two more years to build
sea-going vessels, and two more years to make the voyage and
bring back the results to St. Petersburg.

Why the propositions of these two prominent men were not
accepted is not clear. Perhaps because by 1731 and 1732 the
expedition had ceased to be regarded in the light of purely mari-
time and geographic discovery and had come to be looked upon
as one of scientific investigation in the larger sense, both by land
and sea, in the Arctic Ocean as well as the Pacific. It had been
decided to send along scientists of the newly founded Imperial
Academy of Sciences to make a study of the people and the
resources and to secure other scientific data about Siberia and
the lands to be discovered. Then, too, in order to settle beyond
dispute the much-debated question of the relation of Asia to
America, it had been determined to survey and chart the Arctic
coast from the White Sea to the mouth of the Kamchatka River.
It was assumed as a matter of course that the leader of the expe-

3 Archives of State, XXIV, No. 8, 1732.

28 BEGINNING OF SECOND EXPEDITION

dition could supervise its various activities, and therefore it
would be necessary for him to be within land reach of the differ-
ent parties. These may or may not have been the reasons, but
the fact remains that Bering and his parties were ordered to
proceed overland.

NAVAL PREPARATIONS

Because of the great distance to the Pacific, the difficulty of
transporting material, and the lack of laborers, skilled and
unskilled, for the building of sea-going vessels, the naval part of
the expedition needed most attention. On July 30, 1731,4
Grigori Pisarev (who had been appointed commander of the
port of Okhotsk on May 10, 1731)® was ordered to proceed to his
post and make ready for Bering’s coming. Pisarev was told to
take, from different regions of Siberia, Russians and Tungus and
settle them in the neighborhood of Okhotsk and Yudoma Cross—
the Russians to be put to cultivating the soil and the Tungus
to watch the flocks of sheep and the herds of horses and cattle
which Pisarev would introduce. For the peopling of Okhotsk
Pisarev had instructions to pick up at Yakutsk 300 young and
strong men from those who were in prison for debt or for other
crimes. In addition he was to take from Russia 20 ship carpenters
to build four or six ships, under the supervision of naval archi-
tects who were to be sent by the Admiralty College, and from
Ekaterinburg a number of iron workers to smelt iron and forge
anchors and such things.

OFFICIAL ORDER FOR THE EXPEDITION

The official order for the expedition, in which Bering is men-
tioned as commander, was announced by the Senate on April 17,
1732,° and this was followed up on May 2 of the same year by a
general outline of the undertaking.? On December 28, 1732, the

4 Polnoe Sobranie Zakonov Rossiiskoi Imperii, Vol. 8, Doc. 5813, St. Petersburg.

5 Ibtd., Vol. 8, Doc. 5753.

6 Ibid., Vol. 8, Doc. 6023.
7 Ibid., Vol. 8, Docs. 6041, 6042.

OFFICIAL ORDER 29

Senate issued the principal instructions,’ and a summary of the
main articles that relate directly to the voyage to America is
here given.

1. The Senate approves of the expedition in the hope that it will
really be for the benefit and glory of Russia. It has given orders to the
governor of Siberia, to the vice governor at Irkutsk, and to Pisarev to
assist Bering. It is sending members from the Academy of Sciences,’
students from Moscow,!® assayers from Ekaterinburg, mechanics, and
others. It confirms the project to examine not only the waters between
Kamchatka and Japan, Kamchatka and America, but also the waters
along the Arctic coast.

2. In the instructions which Peter gave to Bering it was evident that
Peter desired to determine whether Asia and America were united.
Bering says that he went as far as 67° N. and found no connection
between these two continents. It may be that north and west of the
mouth of the Kolyma the two continents do not join, but no one knows
whether this is so or not. In order to settle the relation between Asia
and America the Admiralty proposes to send exploring expeditions
along the Arctic shores from Archangel to the mouth of the Kamchatka
River.

4. It has been reported that opposite the mouth of the Kolyma River
there is a large land (bolshaya zemlya), that Siberians have been on it,
and have seen the inhabitants. It is ordered that Bering should investi-
gate this matter very thoroughly when he is at Yakutsk. If this is a true
report, he should send a sloop to investigate. If it is found that Siberia
really joins America so that it is impossible to proceed to Kamchatka,
then the investigating party should follow the newly found coast as far
as it can to learn in which direction it runs and return to Yakutsk.

If people are found there, they are to be treated kindly; they are to
be given presents; they are to be asked the extent of their country and its
resources, and they are to be invited to become our subjects and to pay
tribute. If they are unwilling to do so, they are to be let alone; and no
time should be wasted in arguing with them.

It is not at all likely, but it is possible, that by Haene the Arctic
coast our explorers may come to some European settlement. In that case
they should act according to the instructions given to Bering and Chiri-
kov. If the explorers ascertain that Siberia and America are not con-
nected, they should proceed to Kamchatka.

8 Polnoe Sobranie Zakonov Rossiiskoi Imperii, Vol. 8, Doc. 6291.

9G. F. Miiller, J. G. Gmelin, J. E. Fischer, Louis Delisle de la Croyére, and a
little later G. W. Steller.

10S, P, Krasheninnikov, author of the “History of Kamchatka,” was among the
number.

30 BEGINNING OF SECOND EXPEDITION’

5. In regard to going to America, it was ordered in 1731 that ships
for this voyage should be built at Okhotsk. If they are ready, Bering
should take two of them and proceed; if they are not finished, he should
finish them. If they have not yet been started on, or if they are not
seaworthy, the Admiralty College is of the opinion that the ships should
not be built at Okhotsk. Bering recommends that Kamchatka, because
it has more timber and a better harbor, should be selected as the place
for shipbuilding. Bering desires to have two ships for the voyage so
that in case of a misfortune to one of them the other would stand by.
If one ship is completed at Okhotsk, it would be a good plan to take that
and go to the Kamchatka River and there build the other one. Bering
is to be in command of one of these vessels and Chirikov of the other. On
the voyage they are to keep together, work together, and do all that
is in their power to advance naval science. To help them a member of
the Academy of Sciences [Louis Delisle de la Croyére] is sent along.

6. A late report of Captain Pavlutski, which was sent from Kam-
chatka, stated that recently Afanasi Melnikov with asmali party returned
from Chukchi Cape. This Melnikov was sent from Yakutsk in 1725
to bring the natives [Chukchi] under subjection and make them pay
tribute. Melnikov says that in April, 1730, while he was on Chukchi
Cape, there came over from an island in the sea two men who had walrus
teeth fastened to their own [pieces of walrus ivory in their lips]. These
men told Melnikov that it takes a day to go from Chukchi Cape to their
island, and another day from there to another island ahead of them,
which island is called bolshaya zemlya. On this bolshaya zemlya all
kinds of animals are to be had—sables, beavers, land otters, and wild
deer. All kinds of green trees grow there. There are many natives on
bolshaya zemlya; some of them have deer, and others have not. Al-
though such reports cannot be trusted, yet they should be followed up
and a voyage should be made in the direction of the islands. If they
are located and people found on them, they should be treated as the
instructions in Article 4 indicate. Goon [from there] to America and learn
whether there is any continent, or islands, between Kamchatka and
America; for, aside from the information furnished by Pavlutski, little
is known on that subject. On the map of Professor Delisle a sea is
located between Kamchatka and the Spanish province of Mexico in
latitude 45° N. Ifthe American coast is discovered, Bering should carry
out the instructions given him by Peter in 1725, that is to say, to go
to some European settlement. If a European ship is met with, he should
learn from it the name of the coast, write it down, make a landing,
obtain some definite information, draw a map, and return to Kam-
chatka. Be always on your guard not to fall into a trap and not to show
the people you meet with the way to [Kamchatka].

° . . . . . ° . ° . . ° . e . e

OFFICIAL ORDER 2h

9. Bering is to take with him 2,000 rubles’ worth of presents to be
distributed among the natives. Chinese tobacco, known as “shar log,”
is especially worth while because the natives are eager for it.

I1. In these voyages search should be made for good harbors and for
forests where timber for shipbuilding is to be had. Let mineralogists
with a guard go ashore and prospect. If precious minerals are found in
some place under Russian jurisdiction, the commander of Okhotsk and
the principal officers elsewhere should be notified, and they shall send
ships, miners, workmen, instruments, machinery, and provisions and
begin working the mines.

12. Geodesists should be sent to examine all the rivers that fall into
Lake Baikal from the east in order to find a nearer way to Kamchatka
than by Yakutsk.

13. Captain Bering and all the officers in command of ships at sea
should keep secret the instructions from the Admiralty College. For
Bering, Chirikov, Spanberg, and the officers in command of the sloop
which is to go east of the Lena to Kamchatka, special instructions are
issued, and these may be made public. These public instructions are to
state that at the request of the St. Petersburg, Paris, and other Academies
the Emperor Peter the Great, of deserving and eternal fame, sent, out of
curiosity, an expedition along his own shores to determine whether Asia
and America are united. But the expedition did not settle that point.
Now Your Imperial Majesty, influenced by the same reasons, is ordering
a similar expedition and for a similar purpose. If you should come to
settlements under European or Asiatic jurisdiction or if you should meet
with ships of European or Asiatic governments, and are asked the object
of your voyage, you may tell them what has just been said. If they
demand to see your instructions, show them. This will allay their
suspicions, because it is well known that European Powers have sent
out expeditions and that the question whether Asia and America are
united is still unanswered.

14. In order that the expedition may not be retarded on account of
delay in getting provisions and supplies of one kind and another, the
Admiralty College should send at once special officers to Yakutsk to
build boats and expedite the transportation of materials.

I5. Because this expedition is harder and farther than any that
have ever preceded it, will not Your Majesty reward with money all
those who participate in it and give them double pay during the time
that they are engaged, promote to the rank of sub-lieutenant the geode-
sists who have formerly been in Siberia, and to the rank of ensign"
those who go there for the first time? All officers should receive, either

11 Bering was made Captain Commander and Chirikov Captain Lieutenant.

22 BEGINNING OF SECOND EXPEDITION

here or in Moscow, a year’s pay in advance and, if they desire it, another
year’s pay in advance either at Tobolsk or Yakutsk, so that they may
get their outfits and depart in a contented frame of mind. Bering should
arrange with the governor of Siberia and the vice governor at Yakutsk
how the men are to be paid after that.

16. Louis Delisle de la Croyére,!2 at the recommendation of the
Academy, is to have charge of the astronomical, physical, and other
scientific observations cf that nature. Instructions for that purpose have
been given him.'? He is to have two geodesists to help him, Simeon
Popov and Andrei Krasilnikov, who have been studying in the St. Peters-
burg Observatory. Professor de la Croyére requests that he have an
interpreter who knows French or Latin and a mechanic who understands
repairing his instruments. These two men are to be furnished
him.

ADVANCE PARTIES

Detachments of the expedition began leaving St. Petersburg in
February, 1733, but Bering, who brought up the rear, did not-
get away until April, waiting apparently for supplementary in-
structions, which were issued in March, permitting him to build
the ships at Okhotsk or in Kamchatka. The route followed was
the same as the one taken at the time of the first expedition.
Spanberg was in the lead and had orders to hasten to Okhotsk
to supervise the completion of the ships which Pisarev was sup-
posed to have on the ways or perhaps launched. When Spanberg
reached his destination early in 1735 he found no Pizarev, no
ships, no quarters, no food, no Russian agriculturalists with full
granaries, no Tungus with herds of fat cattle, nothing but the
old cheerless and bare village that he had left behind him five
years before. He was probably not surprised, for he must have
heard on the way of the worthlessness and the evil deeds of
Pisarev.

12 Louis Delisle de la Croyére was the half brother of Guillaume Delisle and
Joseph Nicolas. Delisle, two well-known geographers of the first half of the eight-
eenth century. Joseph Nicolas was a member of the Russian Academy and was
instrumental in securing this position for Louis.

13 A copy of these instructions, drawn up by Joseph Nicolas Delisle, is in the
Library of Congress.

14 Polnoe Sobranie Zakonov Rossiiskoi Imperii, Vol. 9, No. 6351.

DIFFICULTIES 33

DIFFICULTIES

Not only at Okhotsk but elsewhere in Siberia the well-laid plans
of the Senate and the Admiralty College miscarried. Bering,
in place of being left free to look after the important work of
leader, had to tarry at Yakutsk and other such places to do the
work of a petty officer. He had to recruit men, requisition
horses and supplies, and start them towards Okhotsk. Either
the local authorities in Siberia could not or would not help him.
One blamed another; Bering’s own officers sided sometimes
with one and sometimes with another; and as a result the mail
carriers, especially provided for the expedition, were loaded down
with charges and countercharges instead of reports of progress.
The authorities at the capital were naturally greatly displeased.
They tried to help Bering by relieving him of the control of the
scientists and of the work of supervising the Arctic explorations.
' Notwithstanding this, month after month passed with compara-
tively little headway made. When the undertaking was planned
it was assumed that in four years Bering would be ready for sea.
According to Bering’s own estimates the cost would be 10,000
to 12,000 rubles; but at the end of that period he was no farther
than Yakutsk and the cost had run up to 300,000 rubles. At the
capital there was considerable dissatisfaction, which the Admi-
ralty College was made to feel. In 1738 the Imperial Cabinet,
after taking into consideration the cost up to that time, the bur-
den it threw on the Siberian people, the little progress made,
asked the Admiralty College “to look into the Kamchatka
Expedition and see if it can be brought to a head, so that from
now on the treasury should not be emptied in vain.”

The Admiralty had to throw the blame on somebody and,
justly or unjustly, blamed Bering and as leader held him respon-
sible and even went so far as to cut his pay in half from the
beginning of the year 1738 until July, 1740. Bering was caught
between two millstones which slowly but surely crushed him.

18 Opisanie Dyel Arkhiva Morskago Ministerstva, 10 vols., St. Petersburg, 1877-
190; reference in Vol. 7, p. 237.

34 BEGINNING OF SECOND EXPEDITION

When the time came for his sea voyage he was pretty much dis-
couraged and worn out, his physical strength was gone, and with
it went the initiative and daring so necessary for a work of this
kind. On his death bed Bering complained!® that too much had
been expected from him—a man already advanced in years—and
that those who should have stood by him failed to do so. In that
great Russian world he stood alone, the target of the malcontents
and the envious. That he was not wholly to blame may be seen
from the orders of the Admiralty College to the local authorities
in Siberia threatening them with torture unless they gave Bering
more help. Finally, in 1739, the Admiralty commissioned two
officers on special duty to go to Siberia to take charge of the trans-
portation of the supplies, and with their assistance most of the
things needed for the voyage were deposited at Okhotsk in the
autumn of 1740.

PREPARATION FOR THE SEA VOYAGE

Since coming to Okhotsk in 1737 Bering had been very busy
supervising the building of the two ships for his voyage to
America. In June, 1740, they were launched and named the
St. Peter and the St. Paul. Each measured 80 by 20 by 9 feet,
had two masts and was brig-rigged, and carried fourteen guns,
two and three pounders. All the needed supplies were loaded on
these two vessels and on two freight boats, and on September 4
this small squadron left Okhotsk for the Bolshaya River (Fig. 3)
in Kamchatka, where they anchored on September 20. Here Ber-
ing left the two freight boats because they were not strong enough
to weather the autumn storms, and with the St. Peter and the
St. Paul he sailed away for Petropavlovsk harbor in Avacha Bay
(inset on Pl. I) and made that port on October 6. Petropavlovsk
was a new harbor, having been surveyed and charted in 1740 by
one of Bering’s officers; and, judging from the sketch which he
made (Fig. 7), Bering and his company constituted the whole
population of that village. At this uninhabited spot the winter
Was spent in preparation for the great voyage.

‘6 See Steller’s account in Volume 2 of the present work

Translation of key:

9,Lieutenant
Waxel

TOP ke teee nas t
Plautin

II1,fleet-masters
and navigatcrs

12, quarters for the
crew and work-
men

13, blacksmith shop

14, medical quarters
15, guard house
16, lower officers

17, native Kamcha-
dal earthen hut

18, native summer
houses raised on
a platform and
covered with
grass

19, bath house

20,fresh-water
spring.

[In lower right cor-
ner:] Depth is
indicatedin
fathoms.

: A ae ee ; I, traveling church
2 eee 2. warehouse
New feet leone . ee Ses ee eee | 3, powder house
seo esee | 4 Captain Com
1 Astumen era. Phaddecvina gk
Se —“ PECE“#’L kov and Lieu-
rare ay tenant Chikha-
chev
7, professor of as-
Ee tronomy and ad-
ap junct
J ib 8, higher and lower
: : officers
NG
a
ca a

ROE

=

fe

=

Ler ceca

Sh ESB

Fic. 7—Facsimile of a manuscript map of the Harbor of St. Peter
and St. Paul (Petropavlovsk) by Elagin, 1740, in the Archives of the
Hydrographic Section of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd, No. 1957.

(‘BUIACIZUD PlO Ue WIOIY) “72ND ‘71S IY} pure 4ajag “1S 9Y} ATqeqoid
are Joqrey oy} Ul sdiys oy “(4 ‘Bly YM JO) AVG eYOeAW pieMO} YINOS Suryoo] ‘neg }S pue Jojog 3G Jo soqieH PY L—Z “IY

PREPARATION FOR SEA VOYAGE 35

According to Steller, one of the scientists who went along, it
had been Bering’s original plan to depart from Kamchatka for
America early in May, 1741, and, after discovering that conti-
nent, to winter on it and return to Asia in 1742; but owing toa
number of unforeseen accidents he was unable to bring this about.
While at Okhotsk he had prepared the sea biscuit for the voyage,
and these were lost at the mouth of the Okhota River in 1740
as they were being taken to Kamchatka. Then, again, because
the two freight boats were unseaworthy he had to leave them
behind at the Bolshaya River and have the supplies transported
by the natives in the course of the winter. This was sucha huge
task that even the much-abused natives revolted, and it was
some time before they were humbled and forced to do the bidding
of the officers. As a result of all these misfortunes Bering was
late in starting and not oversupplied on his departure.

On April 23, 1741, the navigation officers began to keep their
records, and from this date on we will let them tell their own
story.

CHAPTER V

THE LOG BOOK OF ‘BERINGS VESSEL, wie
"Sls PETER,’ AND OF THER SUCCESSOR:
THE, HOOKER, (ST) PETER?

The following is a translation, from the hitherto unpublished
originals in the Russian archives,! (1) of the log book of Bering’s
vessel, the St. Peter, covering the period from April 23, 1741,
to August 9, 1742, and describing the preparation of the ship
for sailing, the voyage from Kamchatka to the Alaskan coast
and return to Bering Island (June 4-November 6, 1741), the
wreck of the St. Peter and the death of Bering, the life of the
survivors on that island, and the building of a replacing vessel,
the hooker St. Peter; and (2) of the log book of the hooker St.
Peter from August 10 to September 7, 1742, describing the re-
turn voyage to Petropavlovsk, the home port in Kamchatka
(August I3 to 27), and the attempted continuation of the voyage
to Okhotsk and final return to Petropavlovsk (September I to 6).

THE Loc Book oF THE “St. PETER”

With the help of God this journal was begun this April 23, 1741, on the
ship St. Peter by Fleet Master Safron Khitrov, under the command of
Captain Commander Bering, in the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul,
which is in Avacha Bay, latitude 53° 1’ N; longitude, reckoned from St.
Petersburg, according to the observation of the professor of astronomy,

1 There are two log books, one kept by the assistant navigator Kharlam Yushin
(Archives of the Hydrographic Section of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: 1741-42,
Nos. 642, 643, 644) and the other by the mate Sofron Khitrov. Of Khitrov’s there are
two neat copies (Archives of State, Petrograd: 1732-43, XXIV, No. 9, and Archives of
the Imperial Academy of Sciences, Petrograd: No. 120, 32:16:19), and it is almost cer-
tain that they were worked out from a third copy, whether Yushin’s or Khitrov’s is
not clear. The Khitrov copies differ from one another in places, owing probably to the
fault of the copyists; and they are not as reliable as Yushin’s, which has all the earmarks
of an original. For that reason Yushin’s is here used and is supplemented by Khitrov’s
wherever the latter contains additional material. Differences of more or less importance
between the two logs are pointed out in the footnotes.

From April 23 to June 4, inclusive, Khitrov’s journal is used, however. “Journal”
is used throughout in this chapter the same sense as “log book.”

PREPARATIONS FOR SAILING 29

Delisle de la Croyére, 127° 31’; variation of the compass % rhumb
easterly.?

In the Harbor of the Holy Apostles Peter and Paul

April 23, 1741
Today with the help of God we began to load the ship St. Peter, on
which worked eighteen men. The main shrouds were made fast to the
mainmast, the preventer stay was also loosely secured; calked inside the
ship, and near the mainmast hole nailed blocks for opening the cannon
portholes; cleaned the hold, and in the afternoon took on ballast.

April 24, 1741
This day there were eighteen men at work, and they brought aboard the
ship various rigging, also topmasts and yards; the cannons were secured
on the port side while the starboard side was being calked. In addition
we took on ballast.
April 25, 1741
Sixteen men were at work on board the ship. They rigged the mainsail
and fore-topsail yards, worked about the rigging, and did some carpenter
work.
April 26, 1741
This being Sunday there was no work.

April 27, 1741
There were seventeen men at work. Water and ballast were put into

the hold. We rigged the fore and main yards; and other things were also
done.

April 28, 1741
This being the coronation day of Her Imperial Majesty there was no
work.
April 20, 1741
Twenty-one men at work, rigging shrouds, backstays, and stays to the
main-topmast and fore-topmast and stowing casks of water in the hold.

April 30, 1741

A strong unsteady wind from the NE accompanied by rain. We put
barrels of water into the hold, raised the best bower anchor clear off the
ice and secured it to the port side of the ship, and made fast the shore
anchor line to the anchor on shore.
_ 2?“Rhumb” is used in two senses in the log book: (1) in statements of the varia-
tion of the compass, as here and in the 24-hour summary at the end of each day’s log,
in the sense of “point”, or 1114 ° of angular measure; (2) in the 24-hour summaries and

elsewhere, in the sense of “course,” i.e. the angle formed by the ship’s path and the mag-
netic meridian.

38 LOG BOOK OF THE-"ST-PETER’

May 1, 1741

Put casks of water in the hold, broke the ice around the small bower
anchor, and let go into the water. Took on wood.

May 2, 1741

Eleven men worked today. In the hold wood was stowed between the
casks. To the mainsail and fore-topsail yards were secured ties and
blocks. We hoisted on board the spritsail yards from the ice, put the
jib boom in the hoop, hauled aboard the small anchor from the ice,
secured the hawser on the port side, did carpenter work in the cabin.
Four inches of water in the hold.

May 3, 1741
Sunday and no work.

May 4, 1741

A light wind from SW. Inthe morning there was frost and snow. Six-
teen men were at work in the boatswain’s storeroom, on the port side of
the caboose; doors were made; and on the starboard side beds for the
lower officers were furnished. Other work was done also.

This day Captain Commander Bering with Captain Chirikov and all
the higher officers and navigators held a council, to which was invited the
astronomer, Professor de la Croyére, to decide what course to sail first
after leaving Avacha Bay in order to locate the Terra de Gama, which
is indicated on the chart of the above-named professor and which extends
northward to latitude 47°. [The following decision was made.]

DECISION ON FIRST COURSE TO SAIL

On May 4, 1741, there was a council made up of Captain Commander Bering,
officers, the professor of astronomy, and navigators. After listening to the instruc-
tions given to Captain Commander Bering by the Imperial Admiralty College,
especially the nineth and seventeenth articles and the sixth article of the general
instructions of the Senate, it was determined in order to carry out the instructions
to find the American coast, to sail first after leaving Avacha SE by E, true, and to
continue on that rhumb. If no land is found by the time latitude 46° is reached to
change the course to E by N steadily until land is discovered. If land is found
either on the SE by E course or on the E by N course to coast alongside of it,
depending on its extension from east to north or from north to west; if it should
stretch between south and east, to leave the land and go east until we discovered
more land and likewise to follow that land in a northerly direction, to lati-
tude 65°, or as far as, with God’s help, time may permit. If we should reach
latitude 65° in good time, then we should go west to the Chukchi Cape so that the
distance between the American and Chukchi shores may be known, and from there
we should return to this harbor. If on the above-mentioned rhumb the winds should
be contrary we should keep as close to it as may be possible, and if with God’s

PREPARATIONS FOR SAILING 39

help we should discover land then we should make explorations as the instructions
to the Captain Commander recommend.

In making the voyage it should be planned to return to this harbor during the last
days of September.

[Signed on the original:] BERING
Captain ALEXEI CHIRIKOV
Lieutenant IVAN CHIKHACHEV
Lieutenant WAXEL
Lieutenant PLAUTIN
Fleet Master SOFRON KHITROV
Louis DELISLE DE LA CROYERE
For Fleet Master AVRAAM DEMENTIEV
Navigator ANDREYAN ESELBERG
Navigator IVAN ELAGIN

a aracr,
LA
‘>

Tis en x
heh,

uemey fia ? .
Feat ees Moyeta The Sink.

Apter Mecratph (gps perp CH

aon oe

°
t
i
'

Upet WE ashore

Fic. 9—Facsimile of signatures of Bering and his officers, probably from the
“Decision on First Course to Sail” of May 4, 1741, which see for names.

May 5, 1741

Wind from SW. Seventeen men at work. On the main and fore
shrouds the catharpings were fastened. Planed on the inside of the ship.
Strengthened the foremast and nailed planks near the windlass.

40 LOG BOOK OF THE “Si? PERER-

May 6, 1741
Wind from S. Gloomy weather. Seventeen men at work. On the
fore-topsail the hoop was repaired, on both masts the chain plates were
secured, and to the fore-topsail yards the gear was fitted. Water was
brought from shore and stowed away in its place.

May 7, 1741
Variable and uncomfortable SW wind. From shore there were brought
two cannon, two falconets, and three gun carriages. We did also other
kinds of work.
May 8, 1741
Wind from the NE and unsteady. Seventeen men were at work;
rigged the fore and main-topsail yards and topsail sheets and clew lines.
Stowed barrels of water in the hold, made fast two cannon, stowed 90
poods ’ of strip iron under the commander’s cabin.

May 9, 1741

Unsteady wind from the E and gloomy weather. This being the day of
Nikolai the Wonder-worker there was no work.

May 10, 1741
Wind from the S. Snowy weather. We hauled the ship farther from

shore and let out the spare anchor from the port side of the stern and did
other work about the ship.

May II, 1741
Wind from the E. The sky was overcast, and it rained and snowed.
Nineteen men were at work; they brought casks of water and ten barrels
of salt meat which they stowed aft in the hold, and they did other work
as well.
May 12, 1741

Easterly wind with gloomy damp weather. Nineteen men were work-
ing. They brought aboard ship’s stores. Scraped the foremast and
worked on the rigging. There was in the hold 734 inches of water, and
after pumping out there was 21% inches left.

May 13, 1741
Wind from the S and unsteady. Seventeen men were at work bringing
casks of water and stores from shore, polishing the foremast, putting in
place the running rigging. Today we corrected the compasses with the
meridian line—six of these compasses had a variation of 4 rhumb east,
and one ordinary steering compass in a copper case had 34 rhumb east.

3A pood is equal to 40 Russian pounds, or 36 lbs. avoirdupois.

PREPARATIONS FOR SAILING 41

May 14, 1741
Wind from the E. Seventeen men at work, putting the rigging in

order, stowing away the stores in the hold, greasing both topmasts with
fat, and fastening bull’s-eyes.

May 15, 1741
Wind from S. Eighteen men at work. The anchor which was down
forward on the port side was hoisted on board and put in the hold, and
in its place was secured the spare anchor. Spare yards and topmasts
were brought aboard and made fast. Ship stores were brought from
shore.

May 16, 1741
Light wind from SSE. There were eleven men at work who bent on the
mainsail and foresail, both topsails, and the skyscraper. Dried the
spare sails in the wind.
May 17, 1741
Sunday and no work.
May 18, 1741
Wind from E. Twenty-one men are at work. The port side of the

ship from the upper wales was calked and pitched. Stores were brought
on board. Water in the hold 5% inches.

May 10, 1741

Unsteady wind from ENE. Cloudy, but occasionally it lightens in the
E. Twenty-two men working, putting chocks under the longboat, calk-
ing and pitching the starboard side, bringing aboard provisions and boat-
swain’s stores as well as the articles to be given as presents.

May 20, 1741

No wind, wet snow. Twenty-three men were working. At the order
of the Captain Commander, Ensign Lagunov took out from one of the
casks on board a bucket of vodka and gave it to Adjunct Steller. We
floored the powder room, made a bed for Adjunct Steller in the Com-
mander’s cabin. Examined the leak at the bow near the foremast and
made repairs in the Captain Commander’s cabin.

May 21, 1741

Heeled the ship on both sides and greased the under side. Gloomy
weather and still. Twenty-two men were working today.

42 LOG BOOK OF THE TS PRE Re

May 22, 1741

No wind, cloudy weather. This day the crew with its bags came
aboard the St. Peter and did different kinds of work. Forward there was
8 feet 10 inches of draft, and aft 9 feet 4 inches, a difference of six inches.

May 23,1741
No wind. The crew has divided itself into two watches. Jib, main-
sail, fore-topsail, staysail, and main-staysail were bent on. The deck
over the crew’s quarters was calked and pitched from below. Six inches
of water in the hold.
May 24, 1741
This being Sunday there was no work. We hoisted the flag and the
jack and dressed ship.
May 25, 1741
No wind, cloudy weather with rain. At ten o'clock in the morning Cap-
tain Commander Bering inspected the crews on board the St. Peter
and the St. Paul, and as he left the last-named ship, of which Captain
Chirikov was in command, the crew gave five hurrahs for the Captain
Commander. From his boat the same number of hurrahs were given in
return, which was answered by one more hurrah from the ship. The
Captain Commander has moved his quarters to the ship. Powder, lead,
and shells were brought aboard. This day Captain Commander Bering
gave Captain Chirikov the signal code which is to be used on the voyage.
What follows is an exact copy:

SIGNALS FOR USE IN DAYTIME

1. When we shall wish to speak to you, Captain, we will hoist an ordinary
pennant from the main-topmast and crosstrees and fire one gun. If your lieutenant
should be needed the same pennant will fly from the same place and in addition the
ensign from the ens‘gn staff, but no gun will be fired.

2. If we should desire that you should take the lead, then the ordinary pennant
will fly from the fore-topmast crosstrees, and it will be accompanied by one gun.

3. If it should be necessary to anchor, there will fly from the flagstaff a tricolor
flag of long strips of red, white, and blue, and one gun will be fired.

4. When religious service is to be held, a white flag with a blue cross will fly from
the gaff and one gun will be fired.

5. If the Captain Commander should wish to talk to you so that you will have to
bring your ship near his, then, in addition to the signal for calling you, there will fly
a blue flag from the main yard, accompanied by a gun.

6. If we should sail close-hauled and you in our wake, and if you should see the
jack flying from the gaff and hear a shot, that is a signal for you to come about first.

7. If in stormy weather it should be impossible to come about against the wind,
we will signal to you to wear in succession, by hoisting a pennant at the stern and
firing a gun.

PREPARATIONS FOR SAILING 43

8. If in sailing close-hauled or free it should be necessary to sail with the wind
then a blue flag will be hoisted on the flagstaff and one gun will be fired.

9. If on going with the wind it should be necessary to come about close-hauled
on the starboard tack, having the sails on the port side, a red flag will fly from the
gaff and one gun will be fired; if it should be necessary to come about on the port
tack with the sails on the starboard side, a blue flag will fly from the same place and
one gun will be fired.

to. If a boat with men should be sent ashore for the purpose of exploring or
taking on water a wide pennant will fly from the gaff and one gun will be fired.

11. If onthe way we should become separated, we are to look for one another and
cruise for three days near the spot where we lost sight of each other; the latitude of
the place shall be determined and, by calculations, the distance and the rhumb from
the harbor or from whatever spot the reckoning is made. If during that time we
should not find one another, from which misfortune may God preserve us, then we
are to sail on the rhumb agreed upon with you and all the officers, a copy of which
agreement, with instructions signed by me, was handed to you. If three days have
passed without our finding one another and if, going on the course agreed, we dis-
cover land on the rhumb where we expect, we are to beat up and down the coast
for a day in order to wait for one another. If [land should be found] on the northern
rhumb, coast along it in a southerly direction for a day as long as it is on the rhumb
agreed upon, but do not spend more than a day in going south. But if [the land
comes to an end before the day is out] keep on the course until the end of the day
and after that continue on your course. If it should be found farther south than on
the rhumb expected, coast along in a northerly direction until the course agreed
upon is reached and there wait a day, and, if we should not find one another there,
then go your own way and act according to your instructions.

12. If after separating we do not soon meet again and we should be in a region
where foreign vessels might be expected, in order to recognize one another you
should fly a blue flag from the main-topmast crosstrees and fire one gun and we will
fly a red flag with a straight white cross from the same place and also fire one gun.

13. Signals which you, Captain Chirikov, while at anchor should give in order
to keep the Captain Commander posted:

14. If you should see ships or sea vessels of any kind, you should fly your flag
from the main-topmast and keep it there until it is acknowledged by one gun from
the Captain Commander’s ship. You should then dip the flag as many times as
there are ships in sight.

SIGNALS WHILE UNDER SAIL ~

How to identify one another is indicated above in the 14th [12th?] article.

If you see ships, you are to make the same signal as when at anchor and fire one
gun. If the distance between us is so great that the flag cannot be seen, lower
and hoist the topsail as many times as there are ships.

If the ship should spring a leak, from which misfortune God preserve us, or for
some other reason it should not be possible to follow us, then stop and fire two guns.

Should you in the daytime desire to speak to the Captain Commander, put up the
ordinary flag at the main-topmast or fore-topmast near the truck, hoist and lower
the mainsail or foresail, according as to where the flag is flying, and continue to fire
until you hear a gun in return.

44 LOG BOOK OF THE, SRePETER:

If you should see land fly both the flag and the jack and keep them flying until the
Captain sees them and koists his flag, and then lower yours. If, at the time, you
have up the flag and the jack, lower them at once and fire from time to time until
the Captain Commander hoists the flag and jack and fires one gun.

SIGNALS FOR DAYTIME IN FoGGY WEATHER

If any one should in the daytime see breakers or reefs, the ship should put about,
the jack should be hoisted at the main-topmast crosstrees, and the gun should be
fired twice. If, may God preserve us, the ship should run aground, lower all sails,
make the signal with the jack, and keep on firing until you make sure that the others
are aware of the danger and are out of it.

WHEN SAILING IN FOGGY WEATHER

If it should be decided to sail in foggy weather as before the fog set in, a gun will
be fired every hour, and you are to keep for that purpose a half-hour and a minute
glass, and as soon as you hear a shot turn your glass upside down and count the time
between the shots and then do likewise [fire].

If it is desired that you should put on more sail, a gun will be fired every half hour,
if to take off, every quarter of an hour, and you reply in like manner. During this
time there should be ringing of bells and beating of drums on both ships.

If it should seem best to heave to on the starboard tack, three guns will be fired,
if on the port tack, five; the beating of the drums and the ringing of the bells should
go on.

If in foggy weather it should be necessary to lower the yards, four guns will be
fired and the ship that is astern will in the meantime lower the yards.

If after drifting for a time we decide to make sail again, we should proceed as we
did before we drifted: if we sailed with the wind before, we should do the same after-
wards, each ship keeping in her position, so as not to become separated in the fog,
and following the course agreed upon. If in the meantime the wind has shifted, keep
on the course just the same, or if the wind is against you keep as close to the course
as youcan. Fire two guns, one after the other every six minutes.

If it is decided to anchor during the fog, the signal will be two guns, one after the
other. Then after we have been at anchor a half hour we will fire two guns and,
if you are far from us, will keep this up until you reply by a gun.

If in foggy weather it should seem best to get under way again, continue on the
course held to the time of anchoring, that is, if we sailed close-hauled, then keep on
the same tack on which we were until we anchored; if we sailed with fair wind, then
continue on that course so that the two ships may keep on the same tack and not
become separated in the fog.

Keep the course we sailed if the wind is favorable, if not, as near to that course as
possible. Fire two guns one after the other every six minutes.

To fall off from close-hauled to with the wind, the signal is three guns, one after
another every six minutes.

To head up from with the wind to close-hauled: if to the starboard tack, seven
guns, if to the port tack, eight.

If we should be sailing with the wind aft or on the quarter and should decide to
change course a few points, the following are the signals: for one point two guns, two
points three guns, four points five guns, five points six guns, and so on; in each case

PREPARATIONS FOR SAILING 45

the number of guns will exceed by one the number of points. If we are to go to the
starboard the gun will be every twenty-one [two?] minutes, if to the port every three
minutes. If, in thick weather, land or a reef should be sighted, make the same
signals which the Captain Commander would make in such a case, that is, lower the
yards and fire four guns. If, may God guard us from such a misfortune, you should
run aground, fire one gun after another so that we may put about or anchor, and
from the other ship acknowledgment should be made by four guns.

SIGNALS To BE MADE AT NIGHT WHILE UNDER SAIL

If it should be necessary to back the yards against the wind, then two lanterns
will be hung on the flagstaff, one under the other, and one gun will be fired. If with
the wind, one lantern will be hung on the gaff and the other on the flagstaff, and one
gun will be fired. You should also have lanterns at these places and keep them
there until we take ours down. That ship should put about first which is under the
wind, and care should be taken that at nighttime we do not run into each other.

If in bad weather it should be necessary to shorten sail and lay to, one lantern
will be hung at the mainmast and another at the foreshrouds at the same height
and ‘on the same side, and two guns will be given. At the same time you should
hang out lights from the same places.

If after drifting for a time we decide to make sail again, three lights will be hung
from the mainshrouds at the same height, followed by two guns. You should hang
your lanterns in the same place, and do not take them down until ours are down.

If in sailing with a fair wind it is necessary to sail close-hauled: if on starboard
tack, that is to say the sails on the port side, two lanterns will be hung from the fore-
shrouds accompanied by four guns; if on port tack, that is to say sails on the star-
board side, six guns will be fired. You should put out two lanterns at the same place.

If with a good wind at night we should be sailing free or with the wind on the
quarter and it should be decided to change the course and if we are in the lead, we
will hang out from the flagstaff as many lanterns, one under the other, as the num-
ber of points in the course to be changed. If two guns are fired, change the course
as many points to starboard as there are lanterns, if three guns are fired change
the same number of points to port. Should you be in the lead the signals as above
will be made from the jack staff, accompanied by guns.

SIGNALS To BE MADE aT NiGHT WHILE MOoRING SHIP, WEIGHING, OR
COMING TO ANCHOR

If at night it should seem best to anchor, three guns will be fired at short intervals
apart, and two lanterns will be hung in the mainshrouds. You should then hang
out one lantern from the same place. If the stream anchor is to go down, one light
will hang from the jack staff while the guns are being fired. In that case you are to
signal with a light from the foreshrouds and not from the mainshrouds.

To moor, or stand on two anchors, one light will be displayed from the mainmast
and another from the foremast, and one gun will be fired. You are to show a light
from the mainshrouds.

If at night it is necessary to raise one anchor, three lights will be shown from the
main-topmast shrouds, higher than the light in the main-topsail, accompanied by
two guns. You should hang out a light on the gaff.

46 LOG BOOK; OF (THE *SisPETER:

If at night the anchors are to be weighed, one light will be displayed from the
mainshrouds and another from the main-topmast shrouds, followed by one gun.
In this case you should show a light from the gaff.

If at night the yards should be lowered, a light will hang from each end of the
yards and so long as they are down. You should show a light at the stern during
this time.

If the topmasts are to be lowered, a light will be placed at the very top of each,
and the topmasts with the lanterns will be let down at once. You are then to show
a light halfway down the mainshrouds and keep it there so long as the topmasts are
down.

When the topmasts and yards are to be put up again, two lanterns, one above the
other, will be hung from the gaff, followed by two guns. You are to show one
lantern at the same place. When our lights are taken down then yours are to come
down too.

SIGNALS AT NIGHT WHILE AT ANCHOR

If at night the anchor should not hold or the cable should part, two lanterns are
to be lighted on the flagstaff and as many others as you have on the mainshrouds,
and these are to be kept until the situation is righted.

If at night there should come near you a strange suspicious craft and if it should
be impossible to notify us by the speaking trumpet or by sending the yawl, hang out
all the lights that you have and fire, gun after gun, until the Commander replies
with one gun.

SIGNALS AT NIGHT WHILE UNDER SAIL

If you find it necessary to drop behind us, fire once and put up three lights on the
foreshrouds.

If at night a ship should be seen, put up one lantern on the mainshroud and two
on the stern and explode some powder or light a fuse and while heading for that ship
continue to fire your gun, one shot after another. If we should also steer for this
vessel and should fire one, two, or three guns, you are to follow us.

In case one of our ships meets with misfortune, from which may God preserve
us, forcing her to return to the harbor, and conditions are such that it is impossible
to talk over the situation, if she can make her way back without help of the other
ship, a red flag should fly from the fore-topmast, followed by one gun. If, however,
the situation is such that it is necessary that the other should follow to be of help
in case of need, the same red flag should fly from the main-topmast crosstrees, and
one gun after another should be fired until the other does follow. Should the mis-
fortune happen at night or in foggy weather, eleven guns should be fired, and the
other ship must approach until she is in sight.

If one of the ships should spring a leak or meet with some other harm so that she
cannot continue the voyage, she should display two lights on the main-topsail yards
at equal height and continue to fire until the other ship comes to help.

Whichever ship sees land or a shoal at night should hang out as many lights as
she can, fire once, and steer clear.

[The original signal code was signed:] BERING

PREPARATIONS. FOR SAILING 47

May 26, 1741
Nowind. We dried the upper and lower sails. At three o’clock we took
in the sails. At six o’clock the wind was SSE. The Captain Commander
went in the small boat to look over Rakovaya Bay.

May 27, 1741
No wind, cloudy and sunshiny. Pitched the boat on both sides.

May 28, 1741

No wind, cloudy, thick weather. Members of the crew went ashore by
watches to havea bath. At ten o’clock the wind was SSE. At two o’clock
in the afternoon we hauled on deck the spare anchor, with the cable,
which had been down at the stern on the port side, and put in its place
the stream anchor with the hawser made fast at the stern. The best
bower anchor was lowered in the water to be cleaned and, after that, was
stowed away in the hold, and to it was bent a cable 150 fathoms long,
which had been unwound and spliced.

May 29, 1741

At four in the morning a shot was fired to signal the St. Paul for reli-
gious service. Half an hour later another shot as a signal to get under
way. (Main-topsail loose.) At six o’clock the small bower anchor and
the stream anchor were weighed, and we were towed out of the Harbor
of the Holy Apostles Peter and Paul into the roadstead of Avacha Bay.
After passing the leading buoy, leaving it to starboard, which was in 15
feet of water and had a white flag at the top, we entered the roadstead
and let go the small bower anchor and played out 20 fathoms of cable.
Took soundings and got 7, 8, 9, 10, 5, 3, 4, 9, 12, 13 fathoms and blue
slimy mud. When the gun was fired we hoisted the anchor flag.

May 30, 1741

At one o’clock in the afternoon the wind was S by E; at four o’clock SE.
Cleaned the small bower anchor cable. The Captain Commander issued
a supplementary signal order for Captain Chirikov. In case it should be
necessary to be towed, the ordinary jack should fly from the main-top-
mast-standing-backstays opposite the top. At four in the morning the
signal was made for the lieutenant of the St. Paul to come to us, and in
response navigator Elagin came and received the above signal order and
returned to his ship. From six to nine in the morning we warped between
Sand W. During that time we made three tows of 390 fathoms each.
From nine to ten we made two tows of the same length and then anchored
in 9% fathoms of water. The lighthouse at the entrance bore SE™% E
from us, and the native summer homes at the mouth of the Harbor of
St. Peter and St. Paul NE by E. The winds were unsteady and shifted.

48 LOG: BOOK OF THE ST) PETERe

May 31, 1741

Topsail SSE wind, cloudy weather, and occasional sunshine. Eight
o’clock in the evening the wind was from the SE but changeable. The
longboat, in charge of the quartermaster and six men, was sent ashore for
water and returned at two o’clock in the night with the water. At six in
the morning the wind was from the NE; we hoisted the prayer flag when
the gun was fired, let out a quarter of a cable on the small bower anchor.

While the ship was in the harbor it was loaded with all kinds of supplies,
materials, and provisions which were needed for our sea voyage. The
table below gives the kind and quantity of the cargo which we took aboard
the St. Peter. At the stern the ship drew 9 feet 5 inches, at the stem 9g feet
4 inches of water, difference of one inch. In addition there is the small
bower anchor with a half cable, the longboat, and the small yawl, all of
which are in the water.

TABLE OF THE MATERIALS, SUPPLIES, AND PROVISIONS TAKEN ON BOARD
THE “ST. PETER” FOR THE SEA VOYAGE

Units Poods ee
Ballast: Patience atene oo: Moan Coe ae eke ee 800
Strip PilOmey eek sick sic eck oes cum ee Lh Loe ee Beg eee 90
Groats Bee 52 \ DG /
Beef ieee 3248 Aes ante 455 eeeereee: 15 165

Barrels IBUELErS sf ao) eos tee Se Mo er eee II 80

ul IROPKY (Ge Sonct ee Go deena ee es 8 70
Saltv y=: Be anf Sac cea Seat ae te Lest eet ee 6 18
Flour... See hee bt ie I0o 250
Water (barrels, large) . Spe tae Chay take 35 \ 1434
Water (barrels, middle and small) Atri eee er ne OTs
Wood Say Re Ny Pee ee Ae atin ea ee 14% 990
Hardtack (sacks) . Ai ee ar A IRL A! SOE Peg AD GaSe o 382
Powder . . ARISE ERE Joy Bo OR Ste Os, Deo ae 10 34 17%
CARH OHMp Alle! eter ey ees eS ee as 679 57 BG)
Cartels ... SS AS ai Fie FE Seg ee pa: AQI 25 30
Cannon (3 pounders) . Rade Pipe ae ete) Geen Vole te 9 184 20
Cannon i(@ipounders)) 2 23 405 es) eee es 5 92 20
ialConetSaes 6 se poser ee dota nea ape wehbe 3 16 20 4

June I, 1741

At one o’clock topsail SSE wind, sun is shining. At five o’clock a very
light wind from the E, which shifted to ESE by eight o’clock. We raised
the small bower anchor in order to look at it and then let it goagain. The
lighthouse bears SE, the native summer huts in the harbor N14E. During
the whole twenty-four hours the winds veered back and forth between S
and E. In the hold there are four inches of water.

4A total of 4,907 poods and 24% Russian pounds (40 pounds to the pood), or about
88% tons.

PREPARATIONS FOR SAILING 49

June 3, 1741

At one o’clock the wind is SSE. At two o’clock we sent our boat ashore
for water. At six o’clock we saw a ship under sail in the S heading for
Avacha Bay, which proved to be the double sloop Nadezhda coming from
the mouth of the Bolshaya River. At nine o’clock the wind was SE;
our boat returned with water. At eleven o’clock we put out a lighted
lantern at the gaff for the benefit of the above-mentioned ship. At two
o’clock we took down the lantern. At eleven in the morning the Nadezhda
entered Avacha Bay and fired five guns as a salute, we replied with three;
when she had come abreast, those on board gave three cheers for the
Captain Commander, and we returned the compliment by three cheers,
and then they gave three more. At twelve o’clock the double sloop came
to anchor astern of us, and the navigator Ptichev came aboard our ship
to make a report to the Captain Commander, after which he left. At one
o'clock topgallantsail NE by S wind.

June 4, 1741

At seven o'clock the double sloop weighed anchor and sailed into the
Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul. At one o’clock calm. At two o’clock
we had the anchor apeak and beat nearer towards the mouth; at four
o'clock a gentle NW wind; we put up the fore-topsail and fore-topmast-
staysail and steered for the mouth. St. Paul did likewise. At five o’clock
the wind is WNW;; we hauled up the two topsails and were being towed
SE by S. The strong tide was the only obstacle to our going out, and we
were, therefore, compelled to warp SE by E with the anchor in 13
fathoms. At eight o’clock set the sails and were towed SE by E into 8,
9, 10,12,14 fathoms. Lighthouse Vaua bore N14E, Vilyuchensk Volcano
[SW34 W?], depth of water 30 fathoms. At twelve o’clock Vaua Light-
house bore NW by N¥%W, 2% miles, Vilyuchensk Volcano WSW, Burn-
ing Volcano N14W, Isopa Point S by W;; carrying all sails except the
spritsail.§

5 Yushin’s journal gives these bearings: Vaua Lighthouse NW%4N [the same as
Khitrov’s NW by N'’%WI, distant about 214 German miles [15 German miles to a
degree], Vilyuchensk Volcano WSW, Burning Volcano N%W, Isopa Cape S by W,
about 9 German miles. }

Vaua Lighthouse was located on Lighthouse (Mayachni) Cape at the entrance of
Avacha Bay. Vilyuchensk Volcano is south of Avacha Bay and about three or four
miles from the shore. North of Avacha are three volcanoes close together. According
to Steller (“Beschreibung von dem Lande Kamtschatka,” Frankfort and Leipzig, 1774,
Pp. 44) the most northwesterly of the three was called Strelechnaya, the one next to it
Gorelaya (Burning), and the third had no name. After reading the various descriptions
of Kamchatka and the log books of the navigators one is forced to conclude that there
was a great deal of confusion on the subject. Strelechnaya Volcano was sometimes called
Koryatskaya, Burning Volcano was also known as Avacha Volcano, and occasionally
one of the last two names was given to the third volcano, which was not supposed to
have a name. At the present time the names given to these mountains are: Koryatskaya,
Avacha, and Kozelskaya.

The term Isopa disappeared from the maps and the books soon after Bering’s time.
Isopa Cape, or Hook, judging from Steller’s description (“Beschreibung,” etc., p. 18) and
from early charts, is no other than Povorotni Cape of modern maps. (Mayachni Cape
and the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul, or, in its modern form, Petropavlovsk, may
be located on PI. I in the inset of Avacha Bay; Vilyuchensk [Vilyuchin] and Koryatskaya
Volcanoes, on the main map cf PI. I.)

50 LOG BOOK OF THE “SiV PETER]

Q June 5, 1741. After Midday®

y 3
| 2 Se) i 3
2 ° q =] o
i) q Rel ) a)
set (a S O 4
I S ESE Light wind and clear.
E Heavy fog. We beat the drum and rang the bell but
received no response from the St. Paul.
3 SE/S EVN
EY et lee oe 5 EIN zie
5 NNE Took aboard the longboat and yawl and _ lashed
them secure.
6 Fog cleared a bit.
7 Lowered topsails on caps, wind went down. Sz.
Paul N by E, about [734] German miles.
8 & Lighthouse at the mouth of Avacha Bay WNW 4W,
S 4 German miles, Isopa Point SSW.
9
Io Cloudy, stars out, St. Paul not in sight.
II
12 WSW SE/E Hung out a lighted lantern over the stern.
dh
~3/ | ||| [St Paul NE by N x mile.
ek 4 A ea || eee vee | la ee eel ee
BE Ena | aie wes [eo Seine
Os _WSW_ _ |__| Light wind, drizzly, cloudy.
72 | =a | ee ESE
PSs |e SS Wiet ___| Clear with passing clouds.
9
Io One gun was fired from the St. Paul; the ordinary
flag was hoisted from the fore-topmast crosstrees,
and the fore-topsail was lowered, which was the
signal that the officers wished to speak to us. We
fired one gun in acknowledgment and started for
ed ee eee ee | eco the St. Paul about eleven o'clock.
pie ee Pee ae E (emt Se 2 tise 2G es de se 2 eee
12 Shipunski Cape NNE3E, Burning Volcano NW

by W, Isopa Point SW%S.

6 Unless otherwise indicated Yushin’s log book is used on and after this date. The
log books were kept according to the astronomical day, which extends from noon of
the previous civil date to the following noon, i.e. June 5 of the log began at noon, June 4,
civil time, and ended at noon, June 5, civil time. In timing the events of the voyage
this should be borne in mind; also that the converted civil dates will be those of the
Russian calendar, at that time eleven days behind the Gregorian calendar. See also foot-
note 3, p. 332. The noon positions on the chart, Pl. I, are, as in the log, those of the
end of the astronomical day, and the dates therefore coincide with the civil dates.

The symbols preceding the date indicate the day of the week, as follows:

J 9 af g h

Sunday] [Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday

BEGINNING OF VOYAGE 51

h June 6, 1741. After Midday

g e
he 2 Ko) Z Es
= ° =| 3 o
° (=| Rel 3° co)
opal ae S O 3
I SSW EYN

ion S|. ESEvE lS...
3 SW |SE/E%E
4

Topgallantsail wind, cold, cloudy with occasional

sunshine. The St. Paul fired three guns, we replied
with the same number; we drew near and had a
conversation with Lieutenant Chikhachev through
the trumpet, about the reckoning from Avacha
and other naval matters. Later we signaled for
the lieutenant of the St. Paul by hoisting the ordinary
flag from the fore-topmast crosstrees. Captain
Chirikov said that it was not safe to send a man in
the small yawl and that it would take too long to
put over the large boat, and therefore the lieutenant
did not come.

The compass bearing of Vilyuchensk Volcano W,

Burning Volcano north of Avacha NW, Isopa Point
SW by W. We are ESE of Vaua, 103% German
miles, between these points the variation of the
compass is % rhumb E. Latitude at four o’clock
52°38’, longitude from Vaua 1°. This place is our
departure.

Topgallantsail wind, cool, clear with passing clouds;

6/2%
: carrying topsails, lower sails, jib, topmast staysails.
wl | BZ) SEES SE AES (ERE (ee nod eta ge ee Oe pe
8 3 Topsail wind, cold. By compass bearing the sun
went down W31°30’N; latitude 52°32’; true bear-
ing 40°48’; variation of compass 9°18’/E, or 34
rhumb.
A RR | I | OS ac |
Io | 134 Topgallantsail wind, cold.
Tea) |) a SW Clear.
I2|2%
I | 13% SW Stars shining.
2/1% St. Paul N by W not far from us.
3 | 2% ENO [edie oe 25 ot
4 3 Topsail wind, cold.
5 4 Sky overcast.
614% Sun shining.
Ma RAAB ea | |e
8 5 Reef-topsail wind, cold, weather as before.
2s Se
Io 5 SSW
Ir |4% Clewed up the mainsail and foresail in order to
wait for the St. Paul, which was astern of us.
Rica
In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation D =
ae ne Pe |) Gena eset ee EE: FE ei
ompass Rhamb 7 oF aa of == 3 Fey =b— 3 Sg
34 rhumb E yet a4 (aa em | ae = 25 eI 5
A" Ct gos Ao* e fe
By Dead S E SE /E pas
Reckoning SE/E 62% | 35’ | 51.8 | 84.8’ |52°03’|| 25% 3030/75) 2°24

7¥For different significance of “rhumb” in the log, see footnote 2, above.

By.

LOG BOOK OF THE "sl: PETERS

Ss: June 7,1741. After Midday

A Y 3
n
»| 2] z eB | 8
° 5 al fe) oO
ad S O =
I 4 SW ESEY%E Topsail wind, cold, cloudy. Signaled to the Si.
Paul to go ahead, which was done.
2
3 5 ESE4Y%E
A O78). |e i a
5 |534| SSW Wind and weather as before; carrying the topsails
at % topmast.
SORES |G Eye fall i ate ane
7 5 SW /S ESE
SD) es (a | eae ree
9 | 43% Light rain. The St. Paul is seen in the E.
BLOR | eae i | eee
pee oA se | (US rl ol | Po we a
T2 4
I 2 W ESEYE Topsail wind, southwesterly swell.
2|1%| WNW ESE
2 Z NNE Set the foresail, mainsail, trysail; hoisted staysail
and jib.
4 | 434 NE
5 6 NNE Reef-topsail wind, cold, weather as _ before.
6 | 53% Reef-topsail wind, cold; hauled down jib.
peed TOT AN Pee Seow J setmee eae eT
8 | 63 Undersail wind, weather as before.
9 7 Lowered the topmast staysails.
10 7 Reef-undersail wind; took three reefs in the main™
topsail, two in the fore-topsail, and then furled.
| Og | eee
1214% Undersail wind, cloudy.
ae In 24 hours ! From Vaua
veneer 5 a a aE B :
fe) ae) aye a | ao E rr
Compass g aq pol Og tq + | 585 =
34 rhumb E = as as AM ae a i oS é S
m g Solin AS re 4
By Dead SE/E Ss} E SE/E
Reckoning 3°42’E 8] 118 59’ 102 161’ |51°03"|| 5534 4°or’E 5°05’

8 Throughout the log of the St. Peter, the course from one noon position to the next
and the rhumb from Vaua are expressed, as here, in whole points of the compass modified
by that portion of a point (11° 15’) needed to define the course exactly to the minute.
Thus, SE/E 3‘ 42’ E, expressed in azimuth, would be 123° 45’—3° 42’ =120° 03’.

jt0d Ind 748 202+ Hea yor S|

Pewee (tra. Metre 1 aah i

. ie ae

on”. Ate reed “Wotera ediatan’ Me Hilersb Bub
Be henrcra st Gaunt Opens Geers 4B i
feeeearrela XG ( Avtteue Thank lass dove, © Nae

v atvecast Pues mh Mae) CHa eho
agae a, te

4

eS : : ae i ae
a iw oo U aetele ede

| Was =e AG titan GY
a 2
oe

sires,

~rreveceth dort fé Ras Gue~

tea nar catneomamgncrgns initia a SE EERES OSE RUSS

! Cio
| gpouee ured Mh etusncs 1 dard orw or.
ao . - 8

: By is recaneas nt pe wre hal Dens 40
TO Mia

LE di

se oe :

2s

ML iach 1a he ada

Rotor a

Gets 3 Va rice le
Crewe we : Ca

Pak. maa Scuak vere ace
5 fine Cele ee 2 Po. ae ates

: 9a aet ree a

| Gecer la ie ore Aaeey ot ees

ree << - cea

center

: Ga ee (>
E Pox: {tase é
700 #010) 53 y,

. NAA one a

4
|

BiG. Saas of a page of the log Beak ee the St. Peter kept = Yushin:
entry of June 7, 1741 (for text, see opposite page).

The present reprint of the log book differs from the arrangement of the original
in that the order of columns 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 in the body of the log has been changed to
I, 2, 5, 3, 4, and that, in the summary at the end, boxes 1, 2, 3 under “From Vaua”
have been transposed to 2, 1, 3.

Ly aaa?
i Day

BEGINNING OF VOYAGE 53

¢ June &, 1741. After Midday

a >
w 2 ue!) zg S
3 | 8 g 3 %
rs) S O 5
wren torn an Ni ESEne |
2 | G32 | ee a
8) || a
Pe Bes —
_5 | 434 Robot
6] 5
7 | 5s:| NNE lean.
_8 | 4% aa
_9 | 4%| NE/N pase
Io] 4
12 | 3% | aw
I | 2% N
| ae oe
21222) Se
VA s ees)
5 4
2 i a
76?) a a ie
oat) GU Ee ee
9 |-434| NNE
“to | 4% =
Peeler os
EN S37) aa
Variation a
of =| 5
Compass g ae
34 rhumb E = as
m &
By SE
Observation 4°o1’E 116

Undersail wind, sky overcast.

Reef-topsail wind, weather as before; clewed up
the mainsail.

Hoisted the reefed fore-topsail.
Topgallantsail wind, celd, sea from N.

Signaled to the St. Paul to take the lead.

Let out one reef in the fore-topsail and two in the
main-topsail.

Topsail wind, ccld, cloudy and sunshiny in turn.

Set the jib and topmast-staysail, hoisted the main-

Sun shining, took observation: zenith distance
26°20’, declination of the sun 23°27’, lavitude 49°
47' N.9

In 24 hours From Vaua
a8 es a2
Pease lace aie .
ee eo er ee eee eels
om O
olen ale am me
S) E SE/E
76’ 88 137’ 149°47’|| 83% - 0°20’S__ | 7°22’

s
9Khitrov gives zenith distance 26°59’, declination 23°27’, latitude 49°55’. This
figure for latitude has been used on the chart (Pl. I).

54 LOG, BOOK OF THE Sil? PETERS

S June 0, 1741. After Midday

1/4 | NNE | ESE?

p
es

Topgallantsail wind, cold, clear with passing clouds.

213% Lowered topsails, mainsail, foresail, jib, main-
topsail, staysail, and trysail.

313%
Av 32
250/03 ee, ESE
613% N Lowered main-topmast staysail, clewed up trysail.
Uae
813%
9,2% Clewed up mainsail and foresail.
Io | 2%
ane | sho NNW Hoisted mainsail and foresail.
874 |e} The St. Paul is about 1% mile away.
es | 522 | ae eee | ee ee eee
213% Topsail wind, cold, cloudy, and rainy.
313% ESEY%E Hoisted the jib, the main-topmast staysail, set the
trysail.
ee AS |e let hee
5 | 4% ESE |
6 | 534 Wind freshening.
ean DN SC ae eos eae eed ee
SEES 4) | eee | we ere
916 NNE Reef-topsail wind, cold, clear with passing clouds.
pel OIE Oak |(Peoee ees | ener eee «|| omer)
TE 474 nw) | ee EE—E—E——EEeeeee
12!}4% Same as before, clear. Took observation: zenith
distance 25°20’, declination of the sun 23°30’, lat-
itude 48°50’, variation of the compass 1 rhumb,
because in the course of the day and without inter-
ference the difference between the dead reckoning and
the observation was 9 minutes of latitude N. 10
ape In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation = a Nl 2 cr a
fo) a) 2 a a g Pes
Compass g as he Og te at -65 I
34 rhumb E 2 aM As Ax late} 5 2 3S = 9
re g Cis a AL m4 3
By SE/E S E SE/E
Observation 1°04/S 98.5 OTe 82 128’ |48°50’|| 108% 0°28’S_ | 9°30”

10 Khitrov gives the latitude as 48 °48’.

SEARCH FOR DE GAMA LAND 5

on

& June 10,1741. After Midday

2 g a

es. | 8 le

° S iS ) co)

sol s O a}

I vEyA| N /W ESE Topsail wind, cold, cloudy, light rain; carrying
eee ee ee topsails, lower sails. and staysails.

_ 2) SE eee

SaL5

4 | 4% Drew near the St. Paul and talked over our position
and the distance from Vaua. Agreed that the vari-
ation of the compass should be taken as 1 rhumb.

5 | 3% ESE“%E

615% ESE

715%

8 5 Reef-topsail wind and cold.

915% | Cloudy and rainy.

Io | 6 The St. Paul had out two lighted lanterns as a signal
that soundings are being taken; we shortened sail
and sounded in 90 fathoms, but no bottom.

Ir|4% Got under way again, took two reefs in the main-
topsail and a second in the fore-topsail.

E25) !

I 3% NNE
213% Two lighted lanterns on the St. Paul as a signal
otk | aa that soundings are being taken.

Seve NES as |__

nGbs|| he Ai

5 | 3%

6/4

714% Topsail wind, cold.

8}3%| ENE SE 1%%| Let out the reefs in the topsail.

9 |2%| NE/E SE/E 34| Topgallantsail wind, cold, cloudy.

Io | 23% I Sunshine.

Ir | 2 I Carrying topsails, lower sails, staysails, and jib.

Vee ae I Air clear, sunshine, took observation: zenith distance
23°58’, declination of the sun 23°29’, latitude 47°
27’, variation of the compass 134 rhumb, because
the difference between the dead reckoning and the

! observation is 28 minutes. 11
spaehn In 24 hours From Vaua
pene a g 2 : re E 5
Compass E oa | 88 Oe | ee I sEs E Fi

iI rhumb E = as aye QM As ay 2335 = s

pa g g BO pa
By SE S E SE/E
Observation 0°34’S I16 83’ 81 P22) \a7o274\| 13724 2°20'S | rr232"

11 Khitrov gives the latitude as 47°29’.

56

LOG BOOK OF ‘THE 7st, PETER

On June 11, 1741. After Midday

>

* a

a 3

3 g

O 4
ESE “a
3
%
1/4
7/2

“ESE% %

SE/EME | %

Topgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds;
carrying topsails, lower sails, trysail, and jib.

Topsail wind, cold, weather as before.

Signaled to the St. Paul to come towards us to
talk over the position, the distance from Vaua,
the variation of the compass. This was done. It
was agreed that, if at night bottom should be
found, a gun should be fired as a signal to heave
to until the other ship came up.

Took a reef in the topsails. St. Paul SE by S, two,
lights on it as a signal that sounding was going
on; we also sounded in 90 fathoms but no bottom.

n
2/2] =
m | M S
I | 2% NE
2/14
3)}4%
4|4%

5 | 4

6|3%
Sey
ase xa

9|2 NE/E

10 | 3%

Toten |S
T2)|| 2324 NE

1 | 234

BA eA

3|3%

4 | 2%

5 |.3%
esas

Ths}

8 | 3%
_9.|4_|_N/E
Io | 434
II | 4%

12 |4%
Variation
of
Compass

1% rhumb E

By Dead

ESE %
SE/EXE | %
23 ie Bo on bo en a
%| Topgallantsail wind, cold.
ESEYE %| St. Paul E by S, % mile.
%
%| Wind freshening.
%
moll E! ee Topsail wind, cold, cloudy.
ExXS me TA Wind freshening; carrying reefed topsails, lower
sails, staysails, and jib.
E/S
In 24 hours | From V,aua
ie 3 3 . | ae a
. , ‘Oo ; i an = 00
AR eco a ee ice | ad" |
SE/E s E } SE/E
2°54’S_ | 794 | 47.5’ 1 64 93’ |46°40’| 156% 2°47'S _113°05’

Reckoning

SEARCH FOR DE GAMA LAND

Q June 12, 1741.

37

After Midday

» y a

Belo y 5 é

° =] wo O° o

|| = O a

it |p al “"NE/N | ESE%E. Topgallantsail wind, cold, cloudy; carrying all
eisai va

ay ARAN ESEE 1%4| Clear with passing fog.

5 |4% E/S %

6 4% %| Topsail wind, cold.

7|4% es

8 | 43% _ la| St. Poul EMS, not far away.

9|3%| NNE | ES |t_

10 | 3 E Topgallantsail wind, cold, cloudy; occasionally the
moon and stars shine; foggy. Took a reef in the
topsails, during the fog bells were rung on the

Pb fe YN | St. Paul and on our ship.
EE || BAS 22S
1 | 14} NE/N E/S 2 Two lights on the St. Paul, which means that sound-
20 eee o ings are taken.
eee ice E cae

zymiiae 2 We also sounded in 90 fathoms but found no

em oem eee | bottom. Little wind, fog, wet, northerly swell.

A SS Ve 2

5.) %| NNE % ;
mon PL fsetel| eda ONE 9 es ee ee Let out the reefs in the topsails.
711% 1%| Topgallantsail wind, cold, cloudy and sunshiny
ea a ee and foggy.
8 Lael Ba ae
MONE Ee ee
EG). Sal | A | EZ
UGE [Nt ee ee 28

iy ||) te 1%] Took an observation: zenith distance 22°44’,

declination of the sun 23°30’, latitude 46°14’/N. 12

ee In 24 hours From Vaua

euation A e 3 a Eels a

pon E 25 ee a aa | 3 ges ; E 2

14 rhum a A An if lake ay 2S = S

charlie Pigv Wan ao Ee a

By . SE/E S E SE/E

Observation 5°16’/E 57 26’ 48 69’ |46°14’|| 170% 2°09’S) 1 14°14’

12 Khitrov gives the latitude as 46°09’.

58 LOG BOOK: OF THE Sl. PETERS

h June 13,1741. After Midday

a y 3
n
ele] 3] & 1é

© 5 = fc) ra)

m | 3 O 4

I 34| NNE E/S 2%| Little wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying
topsails, foresail, and trysail; northerly swell.

2|1%| NE/N 2%

3 |1% 2%

As er 2%

5 34 N ENE Unsteady wind and little of it, clear. Through
the trumpet had a talk with Captain Chirikov
about our position, course, and distance from Vaua.
It was unanimously agreed to change the course
and sail ENE13 Wind shifted at 5 o’clock,
and, because of the night, we took a reef in topsails.

OF | 2M

PRTG tore ine, PO A ee

8 | I 2%

Ir 4 2%| St. Paul NNE, % mile.
Tau 1 N/E E/N 2%

I yA N ENE 2%| Little wind, drizzly, toggy.

~2 |_% 24
3 34 2% Carrying lighted lantern at the stern as a signal
a) are to the St. Paul.
SGA ENE%E | 2%| Wind as before, only unsteady.
_6|_% __|2%
ce EZ 2% cae
5 ES ae
als eZ ENE
Io] % 2%| Very light wind and calm, air clear, sky overcast.
I2 4%
ath In 24 hours | From Vaua
Mesiation - 2 2 = F é é
na Gi a v -aon
prompas,| 5 | Ba |Se| Se /S8) | ges) & | &
2) P g | 7A Acs 4 a
By Dead SE/E S) E SE /E
Reckoning”:}| 0°09’E 17 O37 14 20’ |46°05’|| 174% 2°05’S 14°34’

13 E by N according to Khitrov. This is the change in course agreed upon on May 4
(see p. 38) in case Juan de Gama Land were not found by the time latitude 46° had been
reached on the SE by E course from Vaua. See also the journal of the St. Paul, under
June 13 (p. 286) and Chirikov’s report, p. 313.

COURSE CHANGED FOR AMERICA

ay,

S: June 14,1741. After Midday

y 3

Mw ie io] Zz Es

3 fe) S 3 ‘fs

e) Ss Re) (o) o

im | s ) =

I yy N ENE 2%| Very light wind and unsteady, air thick, northerly
swell; carrying topsails and lower sails.

3 a 2¢%

2 Gin | 2 ee a

Sy YEN a | Ie
RT be 2 abe ss ht 22 7) ee Ne a ee
7 yy NE ESE Light air, calm; took a reef in topsails; cloudy
and drizzly; St. Paul NW by W.
8 N24 2%

9 4 2%

Io y%| NE/E SE/E 2%

II %| ENE SE 2%

I2 wy) E/S S/E 2%| Calm; lowered topsails on caps, clewed up main-
sail and foresail, allowed for the swell which was
running from N to S. St. Paul W by N, % mile.

|| ee ENE SE 2%
9) %| E/N SE/S 2%| At times light wind and fog; set topsails, hoisted
foresail and mainsail.

3 |_% EZ

A E/N N/E I Topgallantsail wind, cold; tacked to starboard,
ne out the reefs in topsails, hoisted staysails and
jib.

6/3 Cloudy, drizzly, foggy.

G2

STZ ae (ees Ue SE

9/3] Topsail wind, cold, gloomy.

Io |2% E N/EYE

Ir |2%| E/N N/E I Topgallantsail wind, cloudy, foggy, drizzly.

I2 | 234 I

“7 In 24 hours | From Vaua
ariation
of 2 3 6 3 z oD A | 2 n <I oD
Compass | 2 | Be |ea| se (82) ¢ | ste | &

I4 rhum ao] (aya Q ie) roa oO a ae)

Ae ES ales ie clues UIA
By Dead NNE N E SE/E
a Reckoning 2°46’N 20 18.5’ | 6-5 9’ |46°23'|| 17234 0°40’S_ }14°43’

60

¢ June 15, 1741.

LOG BOOK OF THE “Sl. PETERe

After Midday

, y 3
ee n

310] = = 2

oO] §& iS ° v

sei | ae fies O =

Te Als ENE N 3%4| Topsail wind, cold, cloudy, air thick; carrying upper
and lower sails.

2y|Se4. 3%

Bl hester! 4 Clewed and _ brailed up the mainsail and set the
main-staysail because the St. Paul is dropping
behind.

4|3% 34

Smee NYE

6 | 334 E N/EXYE 34| Took a reef in the topsails. The St. Paul is by
the wind, about 2 miles away. We steered for her
about 8 o’clock, and when we had come closer we
put about and sailed again by the wind.

|B E/N | N/E

8 | 4% NNW %w

9|3% N/EME ;, 134

10 |3% 1%} Clear with passing clouds.

tT | 334 1%} Reef-topsail wind, cold.

T2) 3 1%4| St. Paul NW by W, 1% miles.

TOU It 3) a a %| Easterly swell.

2s 1%

_3 |_2% ee pee Oe
ease TMi 8 eee

See2ne 1%4| The St. Paul is by the wind from us, about 4 or
more miles distant.

6 | 23% 1% ies

7 O NNW %w On that account we changed our course so that
_the two ships might not become separated.

ek SE ne Py (el ee nee ee

O15 When we had come close to the St. Paul we put
about again and sailed by the wind.

Io |3% N/E 1%

Ir | 3% | 1%

Te 324) 114| Reef-topsail wind, chilly, cloudy, drizzly.

Ci In 24 hours From Vaua

Variation a a % ea ;

oO eI Ary a5 bb : gy g tb
guambe| 2 ~| Sa )ae| ea | es 18 | see) eecumeee

Tea oan rs AA} AX] A | 26 5

7 ae ig | oe | AG? % 4

By Dead N N | E | SE/E

Reckoning 6°12’/E 84 83’ 9 13’ 147°46’|| 16134 5°09’E_ 114°56’

COURSE CHANGED FOR AMERICA

S June 16, 1741.

61

After Midday

s y a
Bie | % LG
° 5 iS ) ®
sot a S o) a
I|2%) E/N N/E 1%| Topsail wind, chilly, drizzly, cloudy; carrying
foresail, trysail, main-staysail, topsails with one reef
ull in them.
2 | 234| 1
3 | ai a 1%
414% NNW Hauled around by the wind in order to get in touch
with the St. Paul, and as we drew near we backed
PP spict the fore-topsail.
SU ii2 ENE N 3%
6/1 NYE 1%| Talked with Lieut. Chikhachev of the St. Paul
: and told him that in case the wind should shift
to easterly and he should desire to communicate
with the Captain Commander, he should fly the
i eet cee aa eet Ve jack from the gaff and fire a gun.
8|1% 11%4| Made a port tack and gave the agreed signal to
the St. Paul to do likewise.
9 | 3% SE |1%
Io | 2 SEM%S 1%
100) |) 1%
12 |/2%| E/N SES 1%] Topsail wind, chilly, cloudy.
I 2% SE/S%E| 1%! The St. Paul is near our ship.
QW at eA 1%
3|1% E SSE4%E |1%
4|)1% 1%| Set the mainsail, hoisted the topmast-staysail.
5 |3% N/EM¥E|1%
6 vA 1%] Reef-topsail wind, chilly.
7|3% NNEME|_
8 |2% 1%
9 |1%| ESE NE Topgallantsail wind, cloudy, cold.
I0|1% 134| Light wind, clear with passing clouds and fog.
Ir |1%| E/S NE/N
I2/1I NNEYE Reet out reefs in topsails, carrying upper and lower.
sails.
oF In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a l g Z Fi F F : F a:
Compass | § |zelee| $8 /e2] ¢ | ste | & Fs
1% rhum a fay | jays 4 25 a 9
a Vee es poe ewes
By Dead NNE N E SE/E
Reckoning 3°47/E 18 16’ 8.5 12’ |48°o2’|| 16114 Gos |r5c057

62 LOG BOOK) OF THE ST. PETER’

§ June 17,1741. After Midday

5 y a

5/56 e 5 3

° S ae (e) %

soy hal 5 O a

wet; carrying topsails, foresail, trysail, and staysails.

2|2%| ESE NE 2

3/1% 2

A || 234 NEXYN | 2 Clewed and brailed up the foresail.

5 |2 NEXYE |2 |'Laid the main-topsail on the topmast, lowered the
—|__|____|__—*t_] _Staysails and jib in order to wait for the St. Paul. _
200) he |e 32 a | INE AES |e
STN 2S) fn pon i ae | Se ee ee

8 34 2 Took a reef in the topsails, set foresail, hoisted fore-
ee | eee | ee | SNe ete BCCDINASEs staysail.

a ONAN Es Sa ies ee ea)

10/2 _ DSH /Ea NE/EXE Bey, Set jib and main-topmast-staysail.

#1) 3__|_SE __|_ ENE | 14) _Hoisted mainsail. Se eee

I2 | 234 Lowered jib and staysails because the wind in-
creased, clewed up mainsail and foresail, lowered
fore- topsail, heaved the lead without finding bottom
in 90 fathoms, filled fore-topsail, and set the foresail.

2) |e, eee eee Ieee: St. Paul bears NNW.

_3 | 2%4|__SE 1%

~5)2%) |_| 2) Set the mainsail.

LOR Be eee ee on ON

Buia |272 _SE/S_ ENEX4E 1% Topgallantsail wind, chilly, cloudy, damp.

_8 | 2% 1%

9)1% E/N 2

Io |1% Light wind, weather as before.

Tr) |r SE ENEYE Carrying upper and lower sails except the spritsail.

The topsails have a reef in them.

e In 24 hours From Vaua
ariation
of 2 2 = 7) aS e nD E oD
fompass | ga |#a| $8 )22| ¢ | sf : z
144 rhum a AH ; As 4 re <i
a QA P Q P pa Age a 4
By Dead NE/E N E ESE
Reckoning 1°27'N 44 25.4’ | 36 54’ |48°27’|) 16534 1°25’S'/ | 15°39,

COURSE CHANGED FOR AMERICA 63

oO June 18,1741. After Midday

5 Y o
Bole:| a 5 2
iS} = = ) co)
PEE HM 3 O 4
a 2%| ESE its NE 1%| Topgallantsail wind, chilly, damp, cloudy.
Zl) BEA 1%
3|3% 1%
4 | 3% NEME | 1%
5 | 3%| SE/E NE/E Topsail wind, chilly, weather as before.
Giza i 1%
8 | 3% 134
9/4 je 1%| Reef-topsail wind, cold. =
SOMES) | aie (po ia SE AT es iad hen 2 ee he
Ir | 2% 1%| Lowered staysails, backed fore-topsail, sounded in
90 fathoms, but no bottom; filled fore-topsail.
; St. Paul NNW2W.
12 | 2% 1% :
r | 2% 1%
BEE 25 Pee |
SS [csi ind oe i a ee es ie ee
4|3% NE/N Sailed for the St. Paul, signaled her that we desired
to talk with them. We discussed whether we should
go to the 45th [46th] parallel on the SE /E course from
Vaua, as was agreed upon at the Harbor of St. Peter
and St. Paul.14 The wind being contrary, we decided
to sail between N and E until the wind was more
favorable.
CL es a ae a
6 | 4%| ESE NE ares a
CE SS || ae ee (0
BSR see NB gS |
mee ES a | eee | ee
Io | 3% I
SEM [5 22) | Ie a (OL LLIN ee eS
I2|4 x3 Reef-topsail wind, chilly, cloudy, foggy, wet.
~ In 24 hours | From Vaua
ariation
of =e ae . 3 é ; bb #4 3 rs )
Compass E 25 ee BW zs 3 Pg =i I g
1% rhum | fa =) Q 4 25 te a
= Be cues Am 8
By Dead NE/E N E ESE
Reckoning 0°53/E | 77.4 | 42’ 65 99’ |49°00’|| 175% 3°48’E_ |17°38’

14 Khitrov’s journal: “When we drew nearer we inquired whether they still agreed
to go on the northerly course since we had not yet gone in that direction as far as we had
planned. They were of the opinion that this course should be followed when the wind
was fair and, when it was not, we should keep more easterly.” See also the journal of the
Si. Paul under June 18 (p. 287).

64 LOG BOOK.OF THE sT Pirie

Q June 19, 1741. After Midday

o mal
u g so) iS Ss
s| 2] # 3 $
oof ier S O 4
Tao's Se NE |1 | Topsail wind, drizzly weather; carrying foresail,
nae mainsail, trysail, staysails, topsails, and one reef.
meen I
3 | 5% = pom
Saas | ce =m
Bale ae Lowered staysails.
~6|3%| SE/E | NE/E |1%
a “234| ESE NE 1%| Took two reefs in topsails.
_8 | 2% IM
Iol2_ 2 Furled fore-topsail.
foc ome “2. | Clewed up mainsail.
“I2- 2K ‘2 | Backed main-topsail; sounded in 90 fathoms and
no bottom; filled main-topsail and hoisted main-
noes staysail. ;
Te | 2043) ede | eee
2 ae aaa Ee
i Es ee ee
are 2% IM4 =
ee “2% NEYN “1%4| At the end of this hour we set the fore-topsail with

two reefs in it.

7 | 234 1%
8 | 3 NE/N | 1%
9 | 2% 1%
Io | 234 S/E 1%| At the beginning of this hour we came about on
the port tack;15 no signal was made to the Si.
Paul because she was so close that she followed us
without a signal.
Tie |e 1%
12|3% I%| 16
en In 24 hours | From Vaua
Variation z a a cr =
0. § Yo) 5 :O ‘oh a 9 g an
yon |e Be | Se | 8) es) a | sb 5 g
i4 rhum Ss AH Q Q | 2a <
x of elaine | Adm m4 4
By Dead NE N E : /
Reckoning 1°26’/E 57 30! Al 63’ |49°48’| 181 3°38’S | 18°41’

15 Called “backboard” tack in the original. :
16 According to Khitrov an observation taken at noon gave latitude 50°13’, but

owing to the haze on the horizon it was not used.

SEPARATION OF THE TWO VESSELS 65

h June 20,1741. After Midday

= Y 3
-_ n
5 | 3 = 5 2
S a! (o) rn)
m | S O 4
Eele3) E/S | S/E 2 Strong reef-topsail wind, wet; furled fore-topsail,
lowered main-staysail, set mainsail, took three reefs
in main-topsail.
2 | 23% 2
PSMA eS
4| 2% 2
5 | 2% 2 Undersail wind, gale.
6|2 2%| Furled main-topsail, carrying foresail, mainsail,
trysail. Because the St. Paul is considerable dis-
tance from us, we clewed up mainsail and hoisted
main-staysail.
GN 2 2%
8i2 E S/EME | 3
EU ees fe Se ;

Io|/1% 4%4| St. Paul NW, 2 miles; lowered main-staysail; clear
with passing clouds; hauled up the weather clew
of the foresail.

Ir|}1% 4%

12 4 4%

I
Te |l a SE/S 5%| St. Paul not in sight. Clewed up foresail, set main-
staysail, hove to; gale blowing.17

2d || a || ste 2 a
415 NW Get under way, hoisted foresail, sailed with a view
of finding the St. Paul which disappeared at Io
o’clock; failed to sight her; hove to under trysail
and main-staysail.
5|/1% SES 5%
S| Te eZ
de | EE | |S
oS | Ee I 23
Coy |e 5%| Strong reef-undersail wind.
(25) | eae ene (eZ
Ir | 1 5%4| Clear with passing clouds.
17) ||pae 5%
Vv In 24 hours From Vaua
ariation ;
of <2 2 3 a Ae a 7) a oh
1% rhum aS 5 An ; Q°8 q | 25 a
2 fal : Q 3 a5 | AGA 7 a
By Dead SW/S S) WwW | ESE
Reckoning 6°20’W 34 26.4” || 2205 35’ |49°22"|| 178% 5°12’E_ |18°06’

17 Khitrov’s journal: “At the beginning [of 10 o’clock at night] we lowered the main-
staysail, made fast the fore-sheet [in order to wait] for the St. Paul because she is from us
[?] and not near. At II o’clock she disappeared from sight. We carried the foresail with
the fore-sheet fast; mizzen sail against the mast. At 1 o’clock at the change of the watch
I learned that the St. Paul was out of sight and therefore clewed up the foresail and laid
to under the mizzen- and main-staysails. At 3:30 we hoisted the foresail and sailed in
the direction [?] in search of the St. Paul, because she had been seen on that course; at 4:30
ee erie’ the foresail and laid to under the main-staysail and mizzensail. Under-
sail wind.

On the separation of the two vessels see also Waxel’s report, p. 271; the journal of the
St. Paul under June 20 (p. 287); and Chirikov’s report. p. 313.

66

LOG: BOOK’ OF THE ST PETER

ic} June 21,1741. After Midday

carrying mainsail and trysail.

5%| Strong reef-undersail wind, cloudy and sunshiny;

514| Lowered the fore and main yards to half-mast; took
a reef in mainsail in order to be safe.

5%| Clear with passing clouds.

77 iia
eT
Ar
cs oe eee
I
ofa |e
Sale
9|1I
EOu el
Sige ee
as
se Wit
2) et
3 |I
4|1I

5%! Hoisted fore and main yards to their places.

ee | a) |

NW/W | 4 At the end of the hour we set foresaii; in addition
we were carrying trysail and main-staysail; sailed
NW in search of the St. Paul but could not find her.
When we hove to the St. Paul bore NW about 1%
German miles. According to our calculations we
are now SW and about 11 miles from the place
where we hove to, and the St. Paul is NW from us
about 4 or more miles. We kept this course until
noon; had a lookout at the topmast but could not

NW 4 see a sign of the ship.

4 Reef-topsail wind, cloudy, cold.

7
8/1 N/E
912%) NNE
TOM |e 4
ate | 2
I2|2%
Variation
of
Compass
1% rhumb E
NA
Observation

4 : Sunshine; furled foresail and hove to. Took observa-

tion: zenith distance 26°22’, declination of the

sun 23°08’, latitude 49°30’.

In 24 hours }
2 S 2 ° | ay 5 n
E | 22 |e | $3 /82] € | vee
a ea 1A a) _ Be
aisle en ake as*
NW /W N WwW
3°24’W 16 8’ 14 21’ |49°30’| 174%

From Vaua

ESE
5°28’/E

Long.

17°45"

RENEWED SEARCH FOR DE GAMA LAND _ 67

¢ June 22,1741. After Midday

ee

I N/E EYUN 5%4|-Reef-undersail wind. cloudy and sunshiny; hove
to under trysail and main-staysail.

———|{_—_————— |

I 5% Undersail wind, swell from NE.

our course had we not been obliged to look for

8
9 3% E 5%| Reef-topsail wind. We could have advanced on
the St. Paul.

ee ee ee

N/E 5%| Looked in vain from the topmast for the S¢. Paul.
It had been agreed that if we became separated
we should go back to the place where we parted,
which place is NNE34E, 9 German miles from us;
the latitude of that place is 49°25’, and longitude
from Vaua 18°20’. We cannot reach that spot be-
cause of the wind. Taking this into consideration
the Captain Commander, Waxel, Khitrov, and
Eselberg decided to go to the 45th parallel, the place
agreed upon, on the course SE by E from Vaua,
since the wind was fair. 18

5 |3%) N/W SSE ‘Set foresail and let out the reefs, hoisted topsails,
let out two reefs in main-topsail; topsails on the caps,
mainsail clewed up.

io) 2122) a ea
peers pam | aero a |
814 Reef-topsail wind, cold, drizzly, sunshiny.
eS | emesis NES Shey at aa 5 Td
Io | 23%| NW/N Topgallantsail wind, cold, weather as before.
Ir | 3% Topsail wind, cold.
12 | 3% j
In 24 hours From Vaua
Warietion A 3 g By fel, z
ponies) é 28 ay og ee 3 3 Bm a
I4 rhum ate =) Q Q ] 25 a
el ale ees ag™ | & is
By Dead S/E s E ESE
Reckoning 1°25’/E 40 S Se iaelesen, 13’ |148°5r’| 18034 2°95 TR Pee Sse

18 Khitrov’s journal: 4 A.M. “We looked in vain from the crosstrees for the S¢?.
Paul. According to the understanding we were to go to the place where she was last
seen by us, which place was by our reckoning NNE34E, 9 German miles distant, but
head winds prevented our doing so. On that account the Captain Commander decided
to go to latitude 46°N, on the rhumb from Vaua SE by E. We cleared the foresail and
steered SSE, lowered the foreyards, set both topsails reefed.”’

68 LOG BOOK OF THES Si PETER

& June 23,1741. After Midday

0 Y 3
hj} 2 se) K 3
=) ° Ss = oO
} rs Rel ) o
sof iar s S) =
1|3%4| N/W SSE Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying
foresail and mainsail; NE swell.
2a 276) i |e
Pe EE eee, [eee nee peter oes
4.3%4\_ | LEE
5 | 3% Ss At this hour the Captain Commander, Waxel, and
Khitrov agreed to sail the course indicated.
VOT NAAN eee oe | ee
7|3% |
8 | 2%) NW Topgallantsail wind, cold; hoisted topsails.
913% Set mainsail and foresail.
Io | 2%
Te |e | Hoisted staysail and jib.
I2 | 334 Sounded in 90 fathoms, but no bottom; let out reef
in main-topsail.
TE | 3%| W/N
213% Drizzly, wet, clear with passing clouds.
PS |S | Se ee ee es
414% Topsail wind and cold; all sails reefed; carrying
lighted lanterns.
5 |4% S/W Let out the spritsail.
PS (| OE ee ere A
7 | 434 W Strong topsail wind, cold; let out the last reefs in
topsails. -
Si) Sie | otis scold es Sees | ee
9|4% Cloudy, foggy, wet.
10 | 4%
Tr) | 332 Occasional sunshine.
E2005 Reef-topsail wind, cold, weather as before.
nee: In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation = a a | 8a a
of ro) Soke ro) ‘op | Ise 4) g oD
Compass ne | He | Ga | ee | 2 | ses E F
14 rhumb E a ax | AH | AM a3 ay 255 = 5S
ma g g Qo rs
By Dead S/W S WwW ESE

Reckoning 4°r0o’W QI 8755" | 2425 36’ 147°24'|| 18534 3951/Sila7222

RENEWED SEARCH FOR DE GAMA LAND 69

& June 24,1741. After Midday

o >
m 2 4S) Ke g
eee | 8 1k
ae | be S O By
ing topsails, foresail, mainsail, and trysail; westerly
swell.
5 Coa a nn B74
ae IEA ee
Til Gea eee S/W%W | %| Reef-topsail wind, cold.
msn men W Ez Took a reef in topsails; drizzly, damp.
=O) 4 ene |
of "2% SSW %W ees Took two reefs in topsails.
_8 [2% SSW | 4
ESR IRACA Tes (oe
_to_ 3% yee ei %| Sounded in 90 fathoms, and no bottom.
Ir |3% %
"T2_ oa mee Wind moderating.
I} 33% ZA
ee 3% _¥% Heaved the lead twice, and no bottom.
2354. a Ma
_4 14% ___|_%| Hoisted staysail.
EM EEA WINANS |
_6 | 4% S/W ___| Let out reef in mainsail.
an ae
8 [4% Pas
9 |4¥4 a
Io /4 WwW Topsail wind, cold, drizzly.
Gt. man W /N ~~ | Let out the last reefs in the topsails.
prcnlismn S/E4%E | _ | Sky overcast.
bens In 24 hours From Vaua
Wenation @ 3 3 7 | 3 E 5 A
Compas | § | ge |e] $8) 82) e | ste] & :
I m 5 D =
By Dead SSW S W SE/E

Reckoning 3°04’W | 102

190% 0°o9’E |16°18’

70 LOG ‘BOOK OF THE (ST-PE PER?

pull June 25,1741. After Midday

a >
| 2 ss) 2 §
=| ° ¢ 3 o
° < = io} ©
oa We s O a
I|4%4| W/N SEMYE Topsail wind, cold, cloudy, sunshiny; carrying the
fore and main-topsails.
24s] S| | oe |
3 |2% Saw many ducks.
Ais e222) | eee |e ue [peso
5 | 2% SE/S Topgallantsail wind, chilly, weather as_ before.
64 2
Tid es eke SNES ne Pe ne d
812%
9 |2% Little wind.
Io |1% Clewed and brailed up the mainsail; sounded in
90 fathoms, and no bottom.
LEG ell a ee Se | Se
T20| a
1|1% Warm, drizzly, wet.
Daler Now and then the moon and stars are seen.
3 34
4;1 ane -
5 |i. iol Hoisted the jib and topmast-staysail.
6 34
SERTAM e72)|| Aesedee alee eee ee |e
SPURS a ENN SW fal Se ee ee
9 calm ! Cloudy, sunshiny; lowered jib and staysail, clewed
\ up the fore and mainsail, lowered topsails on the
caps. No wind.
Io calm
II calm
I2 calm Weather as before, atmosphere thick.
a In 24 hours | From Vaua
Variation 5 g g 8 ie} ;
fe) & fe) ae) oD go & 0
a nee 5 25 sae oF fe 4 3x 5 S
114 rhum a a) iayab ere aS 4 29 KS S
= Pecos ieee asm = 5
By Dead S/E S E E/E
Reckoning 2°2s’E 7 35-8’ | 8.7 12’ |45°16’| 19814 1°33°S .6°30%

19 In Khitrov’s journal it is stated that at 4 o’clock in the afternoon Bering called
Waxel, Khitrov, and Eselberg into consultation about the course to sail. At the Harbor
of St. Peter and St. Paul it had been agreed to sail to the 46th parallel in search of land;
but this parallel had already been passed, and, though birds were seen, indicating that
land was not far off, land itself was not sighted. Taking all these points into considera-
tion the officers decided to continue on the southerly course until noon of the 26th, and
accordingly the course steered was SE by S.

RESUMPTION OF EASTWARD COURSE 71

Q June 26,1741. After Midday

Topgallantsail wind, cloudy, sunshiny; carrying all
sails except spritsail.

D i)
Me » ce) Zz
=} i) | |
3° S Lad °
ot a 3 Oo
~113%| SE/S ENE one
_ 3) |) 254) ed (eae pene
Gh) Ee |e |
5 | 3% SE
Gla ae
“714%! SSE |NE/EXE
a) asl Se re ae
STAN BS ie | | |
“EO! ae) SA | ee
S| CA ee a ie
t2|6%
nse |e a | NEE ZE
37 a a
ASS | LE ES ee
2) (A a ee
5 | 53% oh] RE Tar aed (ame!
6 | 63% aad
misma |) ENE |
8 | 5%
1S) 23 (Ee a
Gos |NE/EXE|
|G er a
craic
Variation =
of 2 a8
Compass E aS
1% rhumb E ie as
a a
By Dead /
Reckoning o°t7’N 122

Cold reef-topsail wind.

Fog; heaved the lead, no bottom in 90 fathoms.

Heaved lead, no bottom.

Took a reef in the fore-topsail; sounded, no bottom.

Took a reef in topsails.

Strong reef-topsail wind.
Undersail wind, drizzly.

Clear with passing clouds; took another reef in

fore-topsail.
Reef-topsail wind, chilly.

Let out two reefs in main-topsail.
Storm, sky covered with clouds.

In 24 hours From Vaua
2 BS a
ae 10) + 00 “83 20
Bi | So /22) 3) ges] 2 | 3
wm U
g 2 a6 ~Z =)
N E SE/E
24.4’ {119.6 | 171’ |45°40’|| 21734 3e5245) liros2r?

2 Khitrov’s journal: “Although on the 25th we agreed to sail south, yet we found
no land, which proves that the map of Delisle de la Croyére, which locates Juan de Gama
Land as far as the 24th [44th?] degree is not accurate. Under the circumstances we con-
cluded not to go farther south but instead to carry out the original plan made at the
Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul and sail between north and east.”

72 LOG BOOK OF THE “Si. RE RERS

h June 27,1741. After Midday

y ze
M 2 ue] Z 3
3 | 0 g = 5
° i] = fe) oO
mM s O a
114%} SE/S ENE Topsail wind, cloudy, chilly; let out all the reefs
pet 70 | Cs ee | pee
3.54) | | ETE
4 | 534 —_ Strong reef-topsail wind.
Beh) 6c | eee |e |
Sd 6) OL een Pees
7 | 54)|. _ |NE/EAER | eee
816% Reef-undersail wind; took a reef in topsails.
9 | 53%4|_ SSE Hauled down jib and main-topmast-staysail.
10 | 5% Sounded in 90 fathoms, but no bottom.
15 Cold reef-topsail wind.

12/5 Heaved the lead.

2/4% ie Heaved the lead, no bottom.
3 om Cold topsail wind; set jib and main-topmast-stay-
sail; let out all the reefs in topsails.
DA 454 ee eee
5 14% NE /EYE
6 | 4% Wind as before, drizzly weather.
oo PAPA | eee
8 (4%) |_| ee eee
9|4% Took a reef in topsails.
Io | 3% Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
ee ee es ee eee ee
12 | 3% Carrying all sails except the spritsail.
In 24 hours | From Vaua
Vanatien es g 3 e | F 5 3 z
pomp |. | Be | Ba | Bo | Se | | gee |
4 a oe
See i tials | ac ZZ :
By Dead E / N E | ESE ‘
Reckoning 0°16’E 113 21.6’ | 111.3 | 163’ |46°02’|| 23834 3°08’S) _}22°04

EASTWARD COURSE 73

SC: June 28,1741. After Midday

“A g a
s|3| = Be alts
° & o fe) co)
so} Ih dw s O =)
“1 | 4%| SE/S |NE/E%E| | Topsail wind, chilly, drizzly; carrying all sails except
= dsl ____| the spritsail. The topsails have a reef in them.
_2 | 4% Nee ee (eee
3.15
ma 4% k Ge Thick fog, wet, heavy SW swell.
5) | a ee
Onis Fog; sounded in 180 fathoms, no bottom.
Till Zl | en NG On
fier ane cs | Took two reefs in topsails.
ion 44% ‘i ~~ | Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
To || 57] a ee a
ica By eae eae (ann Topgallantsail wind, chilly, wet, foggy.
= 27 a a
I | 2%] SSE |JNE/EYE
eG ae fat Fog; sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
Ae “2% | Let out two reefs in fore-topsail and the second reef
aes Hawa in main-topsail.
2 | 2G eS a
MEOM Aenea
614% Let out a third reef in the main-topsail.
aga Cire ~~ | Set the spritsail.
28 (54 | Ss aa
DiGi NNN) be (
10 | 2% | ell Kies Clear with passing fogs.
Il | 3%
can 3% aay Carrying all sails except the main-staysail.
eee In 24 hours | From Vaua
enacion 3 2 a Hi l rE E 3 a
Compass | §& |e |8e] se |e) ¢] sks | 2 | 2
1% rhumb E 5 aN a a As =) 2 oe 5 3
By Dead E/N N E ESE
Reckoning 1°21’N 87 I9’ 85 1129.6’ 146° 21’|| 25334 0°17’S_ _124°07’

74
¢ June

LOG BOOK OF THE ST. PETER

20,1741. After Midday

v >
w | 2 Ke) S S
|e] # 3 2
ofa a S O 4
[Hellas SSW) (NEVE ape o
eat ae2 | as
je ll SAS ee 9 Cone [OPS ee
pws cA Sa | oe eh Ce |e
NS EIS | a oa Bree | eee
ONS | eae cele eee
“7 | 3% NE““E
CFE Bar?
ca eee a2
I2|3%
il S24 |e | ONE/E
Sr
SGUTA ite We PERE Oa
se SIA 74] eae ee ees
5 | 434) NEE
OG Ee ed |e Sea
(ite CS ieee eae cee
Ss ea ee ae
9 4s Ee | ee
[es ae toys
eae 2 soo ae
12 |4% as

Topsail wind, heavy fog, chilly; carrying all sails

except the main-staysail.21

Clear with passing clouds.
Lowered mainsails and jib.
Topgailantsail wind, weather as before.

Heavy and damp fog.
Took reef in topsails.

Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.

Sounded again, no bottom.
Topsail wind, chilly, foggy, damp.

Clewed up the mainsail.
Occasional sunshine.

Furled spritsail.
Reef-topsail wind, chilly, weather as before.

Se) a EEE
Carrying topsails; clewed up foresail and mainsail.

| In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation |
of 8 ieee ea ere ae ect A é
Compass & 82] es | ag | ee 3 | 8s E i
1% rhumb E = AU AS | Bag aoa 3S ges E
4 E Bue ad 2 2
By Dead ENE N E ESE
Reckon ng 0°03’/E 04.5 36’ 87.4 127’ 46°57! 268% 3°ca’E 26°14’

21 Khitrov’s journal: “Because

we had gone too far southward we agreed with

the Captain Commander to sail true ENE in order to strike the E by N course, as

planned.”

EASTWARD COURSE 75

S$ June 30,1741. After Midday

2 9 @
a] Se 5
° (=| io (co) oO
act I s O S
“zr |4%| SSW NE/E | | Topsail wind, chilly, thick fog; occasionally the
sun breaks through; carrying reefed topsails; fore-
ja EA) |e ea sail and mainsail are clewed up.
22 | 2) es ae
‘i 2 ig
i a ee
5|4
614% ae
Gigic eZ NEXYE ceca Sky overcast, wind as before.
xs VEX ~ | Took two reefs in topsails.
bron Sie Beagyi Fog, wet.
iron 54 a Reef-topsail wind, cold; sounded in 90 fathoms,
te eta no bottom.
a ise so
ae 74 eres ee Sounded again with the same result.
I|4% SW pene Topsail wind, chilly, wet, fog.
ee 4% teas Heaved the lead a third time, no bottom.
2 2 ae ae
4 | 43% Let out all the reefs in the topsails.
Tees NEP |e
ee Cs a
2024) eS
2) CSG | a (ee
9/3 Topgallantsail wind, chilly, weather as before.
Boulisin per
Gan) ious NE%%E | | Heavy fog, clear with passing clouds.

"T2- 3% “| Carrying topsails, foresail, mainsail clewed up.
ice In 24 hours From Vaua
Marigtion 2 g mi g a a F : :
pyompams,| | a | Se | Be) SE | a | ete | & | §
% a ae AH Ge a5 Age a 3

By Dead ENE N E E/S
Reckoning 0°02’N 1o2 | 39.3’ | 94.2 | 138’ 147°36’|| 28434 4°58’S_ 128°32”

76

LOG BOOK OF THE. “Si REDER]

% July1,1741. After Midday

Fa | SS

74 || eA
3|3%
Ages
5 | 234
6 | 2%
7\;1%
8 | 2%
914
Io | 4%
Ir | 4%
a
Tole
2/4
3|4%
414%
5 |5%
6|5
Ne
3%
4%
I0 |4%
Il | 4%
I2|3%
Variation
of
Compass

1% rhumb E

By Dead
Reckoning

Dist.

in Knots

Topgallantsail wind, wet, fog, occasional sunshine;
carrying topsails, foresail; mainsail is clewed up.

It was decided by the officers that the crew should
have for dinner watery mush and in the evening thick
mush, and because of the scarcity of water each man
was to havea limited amount of it. Ensign Lagunov
was commanded to see that the orders were obeyed.

Rain.
Set trysail.
No bottom at 90 fathoms.

Topsail wind, fog, heavy rain, high sea.

Heaved lead, no bottom.
Hoisted mainsail.

Reef-topsail wind.

Clewed up trysail.
Did the same to mainsail.
Wind and weather as before, light rain.

Sighted a piece of driftwood about two fathoms in
length, and this leads us to believe that the shore is
near.

Sounded with two lead lines in 180 fathoms but
did not touch bottom.

In 24 hours } From Vaua

in

Dist.
German
Miles

N E Say AS)
34.8’ | 83.4 | 125’ |48°rr’|| 29934 2°24’S 130°37’

2! Rhumb
Long

‘EASTWARD COURSE 7

NJ

Ue July 2, 1741. After Midday

e | 2
mile Ae) a 3
2) ° S = ©
° g Re) ro) oO
el |p he s O =
Tes S NE/E Topgallantsail wind, rain; carrying topsails, foresail,
| eee |e ee eee ancitny.sail:
2M | ken | eee [5 lt
S225 ESS eee ee
eA SB ee
Seed: Set jib and topmast-staysail, hoisted mainsail.
6|3%
7\2% NEMYE Topgallantsail wind, foggy, damp.
Sa Took reef in topsails, lowered staysails and jib.
a @) || 2 | eee
TOME Ame te Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
PEE | Ram | mmm Face fe a ah ec Oe eh ie
12| 1% ied poet || sbi, Sounded again, smoybotton =e ee
US SE | ae SNES brstae Little wind, SW swell, fog, and wet.
2 34
3 A Clewed and brailed up the foresail; did the same to
ee ek re | soe ce oe ee Oe BO ee Pe
5s cal ir Calm; lowered topsails on the caps.
6 yy N ENE r | Light wind; hoisted topsails and let out the reefs in
<1) |
eA eee ee
HoNAN ENE S|) E/N __|_t | Topsail wind) drizzly,
H® | Siew] ee I Took two reefs in fore-topsail and one in main-topsail.
Tire A! i | Lowered jib, took another reef in main-topsail.
cay ly) 2} t | Wind and weather as before.
ad In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation = a a Te a
of g : 6 5 eo “ag 2 g Ae
Compass 5 ae Hs aye te = pes = PI
1% rhumb E = Aas | aa | ati acl a as 5 s
m4 & & a RO me
By Dead E/N N E /
Reckoning 1°36/E 48 7.8’ | 46.9 70’ |48°19'|| 300% T9354S i 3Eca 72

78

LOG BOOK OF THEI STAPEDERe

Q July 3, 1741. After Midday

o >
Mw B uo) 2) iS
8; e| 3 9
og ae s O 4
_1|3%| N/E | ENEYE 1% Reef-topsail wind, cloudy.
3% I %| Took third reef in main-topsail, furled fore-topsail
ey ee ___| and main-topmast-staysail.
sca [ied 2 eee ee eee orc le,
SESE N ENE _| 1%| Wind increased. Rie
oO See SEE
_7|2%| N/W_|NE/E%E]1%| Heavy seafromN. |
Ts |ax| rw [|
_9 | 1% ae 2% Furled main-topsail.
Io | 1% 2%
Sr her Ey
wage I
ath 2674 NE/E |2_ | Hoisted main-topsail and put three reefs in it,
aad saat Fie | a eh nantes 228 hoisted main-topmast-staysail.
22 es ee vie
3 24 “2. | Hoisted fore-topsail and let out a reef in it, let out
rami S| sean eee: eS two reefs in main-topsail.
RS Ee eet (a ee 7
LON E07: | es | ies ee “11%4| Topgallantsail wind, sky overcast.
Se) Le Ge ae
_8 | 2%) NNW NE'%E | 1%%| Let out a reef in the topsails.
_9 | 2% NE “1%! Northerly swell.
10 | 13% Th

NNE“%E| 1%] Topsail wind, cloudy.

t2 |2%|NW/N| NE/N 1%

eee In 24 hours From Vaua
ee = a 2 7 a E : S
Gompas.| 8 | ee |e] 8/22) e | see | .§
1% rhum a A 5 fo) ‘ ae =
= Ae eae laos z
By Dead IDs S E /
Reckoning 1°37'S 52.3 TA! 52 76’ |48°18’|| 32134 16’

EASTWARD COURSE

h July 4, 1741.

After Midday

a ¥ 3
5/6 = 5 2
° & Re ° co)
so S O =
I | 2%) NW/N NE I Topgallantsail wind, cloudy; carrying all sails except
spritsail and main-staysail.
a Ve} I
3 |2% I Northerly swell.
4 | 2% I
5 | 2 I
6| 2% I
712% NEN |1 Took reef in the topsails.
8 | 13% NE I
9/1% I Occasional rain.
Io |1% I
Ir | 1% I Heavy fog.
12|2%
i ee a _NEXE_ peat, Light wind, cloudy.
SENS EE I EZ)
3)1% 1%
4|1% 1%
5 |1%
6{1 E/N 2 Wind and weather as before, clear with passing clouds.
7 Za 2
8 ¥y 2
(aye | fae SE 5 Clewed up lower sails, hauled down staysails and
2 fd EU oe = ew el a topsails.
AO: | | a I Sa Northerly swell.
2 PAARL | RST | PS
12 3 Cloudy and sunshiny. Took observation: zenith
distance 26°26’, declination of the sun 21°38’ N,
latitude 48°04’, ariation of the compass 14 rhumb,
because the difference in latitude by dead reckon-
ing and observation is 21’N. 22
Wariation In 24 hours From Vaua
of we) es 2 ; ees a
Compass re] ee ns ae ; 00 ; 80
¢ tr ¢ t& qd » c g c
I 3 = mm uv 4 a ext Fed =}
1% rhumb E 5 AM AS AM As 5 Be 5 8
2S = £ & RO ~
By Observation ESE Ss E /S :
(Yushin) ° "Ss , ’ ge , 3 ° 'S ° ,
72836 34 14 30 45’ |48°04’)| 33034 | 1°25 33°48
By Observation| SE/E S) E E/S
(Khitrov) 1°r0’S 36 21’ 30 45’ 147°54"|l 32234 TeAG!S) (339572

22 As indicated in the 24-hour summary, Khitrov’s journal gives latitude 47° 54’. This
value has been used on the chart (Pl. I).

80 LOG BOOK OF Til sit PEPER

{7} July 5, 1741. After Midday

ra) >
Mw 2 42) fe Ss
5] & 5 5 %
m | s O aa!
aL A SE zs Cloudy and sunshiny, northerly swell.
Tee ety Leeway until 8 o’clock was at the rate of 14 knot per
Ss Lo) oe hour.
_3|_%| 3 6)
_4)_%} 6 5st 2
5 % Z nee
ae ee
7a\\nare bene
iaee iM SE /E NE Light wind, sky overcast.
Te” TA | Hoisted topsails, staysails, and jib.
To | 1 | Hoisted foresail and trysail.
Gas. 1% ia,
T2 | 2 NE/E Ls Topgallantsail wind; set mainsail.
ate ae NE“%E
rues”: poe
~3 |1%| SSE ~ | Light wind; lowered staysails and jib.
ae eee | Saas
Gs)| 14| SE/E "| Hoisted staysails and jib.
a Ee ak
An os ae ea (et
sh IK Topgallantsail wind.
ou 134 meee Cloudy.
Trou oe, Sate
Gare |crae oom Carrying all sails except spritsail. °3
“212% Soa
Sida In 24 hours | From Vaua
Vadation 5 3 g | FE 5 7
Compass E ae EB] ag i = | SES E =)
1% rhumb E = Ax faye fal Qe =| 2s ss S
% E Bal cne | ad =
By Dead ENE N E E,/S
Reckoning 3°08/E 27 9’ 25.6 | 38’ |48°r3’!l 334% of%s51/S) 1342267

23 Khitrov’s journal: “Filled 39 barrels with salt water for ballast.”

EASTWARD COURSE 81

€ July 6, 1741. After Midday

2 y a
T ~
a)" |) WS) & 5 Z
e) i= = ° o
q | Ss ) 4
pees SE/S NEE Topgallantsail wind, cloudy; carrying all sails except
spritsail.
1G | S72| a es (ee
+ ©.) BA) ei ee (a
AL || B2G\ Let out the spritsail. 9
Sell 324 Unbent the fore-topsail and bent on the one we had
before and took three reefs in it.
S|. S24 | ee
024 (NE rs
8 | 3 Furled the spritsail.
LO) 2 22 | Ss a ee
HO || 222) ee
LT 222) eS (rr (a
I2|2% Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
a ea a is eb
212%
Zi inal Topsail wind, weather as before.
Be EE (ea! eae | ees
5 | 234 Topgallantsail wind.
MOOR IEZE ai eee
TEN Topsail wind, chilly, cloudy.
8 | 3% Clear with passing clouds.
fae | RS ie | memes eer cea ies Se a ee
Io | 3%| ESE NE 144| Topgailantsail wind, weather as before; carrying
all sails except spritsail and main-staysail.
EOD |] Si set | A ee ae 2
I2|2% %
: In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a aa
Q oy ~~ ac 2
® g ° -O bb eis g eb
Dee acre 5 2o |e) o9 | 8s] 6 | sb = g
I’ rhum a] 5 O4 Qs 2 Ok = ce)
@ |e Sebel |acm | 2@ | 4
By Dead ENE N E | E/S
Reckoning 1°13/N 72 29’ 66 G9’ |48°42’| 347% 0°48’E |36°05’

82 LOG BOOK OF THE STP EL ER:

&S July 7, 1741. After Midday

M be} isa) 2
3 ° rs =|
° =] = (>)
sof | Paw S O
—r [ 23 | ESE NE | %
= |3u|—__ [Nex |
ed
oe 234
Sie es bh Te, | | a2
aa
Se eee Saas Se
Sale | ee
9 | 2%| E/S NE/N | %
ois. _%
Tr |2% es
aie acl | ee
113%] ESE | NE%N
“213
S227 E/S NE/N
oa ut pee © NNE |i.
“2 ae Eas ea ae
mGn|2K%\) B/S) 9) NEYN® [ro
Te a a a NIN oo
wena eZ oa ena
913 a tes | ie eet
LON ae eee 1%
Braker Sas Ee
32 | 3% ean
Variation
of 2
Compass E
1% rhumb E =
fad
By Dead NE

>

3

3

(8)

vo
4

%| Topgallantsail wind, cloudy; carrying all sails

except spritsail and main-staysail.

4%

“%

4%

%4| Topsail wind at times.

1%4| Weather as before.

%

%

14| Took reef in the topsails.

1%4| Wind freshening; sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
%

A

“%

%| Let out reefs in topsail.

I

I Topgallantsail wind.

I Light wind.

I

I Topsail wind.

I Let out 4 inches in the mainstay because we notice
that when it was tight the vessel did not have a free
movement.

I

1%

1™%| Took reef in topsails.

1%| Topsail wind, cloudy and rainy.

In 24 hours From Vaua

= = oiele, 2 ;
7) g te ae t =) ra) : ee g Bo
ad | aa | a4 | as | 4 | Sues 8

Be
e aul oe | ad e% a
N E \ E/S

67 50.7’ | 44.4 68’ 149°33'|| 353 3°04’E _137°13'

MORE NORTHERLY COURSE 83

% July 8, 1741. After Midday

o ica)
M a ue) 2 g
3 ° ¢ 3 o
) S i! ° co)
mM S Se) 4
“zy 14%! E | NNE |1_ | Topsail wind, cloudy and foggy, carrying reefed top-
as sails, staysails, jib, mainsail, and trysail.
J | 04 ee a
_¢ |. i a
4|4% I Reef-topsail wind.
eer wi [in| | aLlnr {in| Wookitworeets in topsails.
THe || 227] Sate ee 1% Lowered jib.
Bice 1%
. Ol 2 a ae
fon “2% Messer fh “2% Took three reefs in main-topsail.
iron 2% an 2% Furled main-topsail.
| 27 aay EE
"T2_ 2% _ a | mage “2% Topsail wind.
can 2 3 Foggy and wet.
Te 257) el i as
“3 12%| E/N | N/E | 134| Hoisted fore-topsail with two reefs in it, let out three
reefs in main-topsail.
5 | 2% 1%] Sighted a good-sized piece of driftwood.
6 | 2% s ree
a ae “1%]| Let out two reefs in main-topsail.
a EEX es
“9/3 | ENE N RSZ
To. “23h 7 Sounded in 180 fathoms, no bottom. -
Gar ose. eee
“12 | 23% N%E_ | 1%| Topsail wind, drizzly, SE swell.
ane In 24 hours From Vaua
Varation B 3 | 3 % e a ‘ a
Compass E ee] #s | oe | eh 2 Bie E Sy
1% rhumb E = aM AN af ae Ss aos = 8
4 E on tein AG % 4
By Dead N/E N E E
Reckoning 5°12’E | 68.8 66’ | 10.4 | 30.4’ |50°39’|| 351% 6°31’S) 137°43

84 LOG BOOK On DHE’ Ss). PE RERe

pul July 9, 1741. After Midday

Y 3
wi) 2 se) i 2
a | 0 =| 3 rf
) = a fe) ®
miM s O 2
1 |2%| ENE N’%W 2 Topsail wind, cloudy, wet; carrying reef-topsails and
staysails, foresail, mainsail, and trysail.
224 | eee | eee |
ES 22 ree | ei |
4 |1%| NE/E N /W 2 Topgallantsail wind.
5 2 2 Weather as before.
6 2 N/WuW| 2
Giulia NE NNW Bi Little wind.
8 X¥% a 2 Sounded in 180 fathoms, no bottom.
9 % & Lowered staysails, clewed up mainsail and trysail.
Io Y% 2 From 9 to 12 o'clock we drifted about 34 of a knot
2 to NNW.
r, Z ay
II % ==
I2 | SSW NE Light wind, drizzly.
T/I Cloudy, stars out, topgallantsail wind.
2 ne SW Fog, wet.
3|1%
Aa2s4
ee (ia Let out three reefs in main-topsail.
Ob | 4 eee | ee
7a eer Heavy fog, clear with passing clouds.
3 EZ || Se ee || ee eer | ee
9 | 2%| SW/S Topsail wind, weather as before.
Io 13 ele eee
Ir |2%
212% Clear with passing clouds, sun shining. Took an

observation: zenith distance 30°34’, declination
of sun 20°46’, latitude 51°20’. 24

: In 24 hours From Vaua
Vanauon a E g * z a : =
Compass | § | ge |e | 82/82] 9 | gee] & 2

12a ey.e 5 (a) 3p a) A ay APRS = 3
x dee Neen AG? ~ =
By NNE N E E
Observation 2°02’N 44 AI’ 15.3 | 24.3’ |51°20'|| 351% 3°50’S__ 138°07’

24 Khitrov’s journal gives latitude 51°27’.

MORE NORTHERLY COURSE

Q July 10,1741. After Midday

o mal
M BZ ~ re g
eo) a| £ 5 ¢
ahaa RL s O a]
en 2h S/W NE Ta Topsail wind, cloudy, sunshiny, carrying all sails
fie |e e|| ee | | except spritsail and! trysail:
2) ai a ee a
se ee |e | Atitimes thick fos:
Ay 2% eee as | enn | ee |Phick Swetifog:
PA ee
26 oi a ae
Fa a as | ey || i | loud for Hitting.
2/5 a ee
_9 3% ___| Topsail wind.
Io | 3% ___| Stars out.
Il |3% Heaved lead, no bottom at 90 fathoms.
wen By en Lowered staysails.
_1I | 2% SW
2 1% Hee Topgallantsail wind.
_6 | 2 ee a
4 205 || NS ieee we eed
isu ie SES ats
er ey ae Let out three reefs in the fore-topsail.
nish 24% pea! Hotisted staysail and jib.
0 P22 ES es
Io | 2%| SE/E Cloudy and sunshiny.
a1 | 23%|_ESE ae
Fours ~ | Thick, wet fog.
bin In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation 2 g g r F é 5
Compass = ae | 84 Oe | HP = oES E =
oe ae) ea | a4 as | a i ees |) ce g
m & & fale) me 3
By Dead N E E
Reckoning |NE/E%%E] 57% | 27’ | 50.5 81’ |51°47'|| 362% 2°30’S) | 39°28’

86

LOG BOOK: OF THE “ST sPETER

h July 11, 1741. After Midday

Reef-topsail wind, cloudy, sunshiny.

ead |e
pede | eee

aE |S
paSaleze4
613%

eae faa |

8 | 4%

9 | 3%

10 | 3%
Sr
I2|}4%
rg] 527 ae
=n
_3 | 4%

4 | 4%

a 3%
~6|3%| SSE
77 /3¢@|. Ss
msaliass
~9|4 | S/W
sae) A

re |e

Heavy fog on horizon.

sietited a dead whale afloat, and on it were many
gulls.

Lowered main-staysail.
Topgallantsail wind.

Topsail wind.

Carrying all sails except mainsail and spritsail.
Hoisted main-staysail.

Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, heavy fog, rain.

Lowered main-staysail and jib, took two reefs in top-
sails; heaved lead, no bottom.

Let out two reefs in topsails.
Let out three reefs in main-topsail.
Topsail wind, raw, damp.

Carrying topsails, foresail, and mainsail.

12 !33%! SW/S

Variation
of 2
Compass E
1% rhumb E a
fas
By Dead NE/E
Reckoning taal a

Dist.

95

Clewed up mainsail, foresail, and trysail. 75

In 24 hours From Vaua
2 a a :
ae bb 33 on
ea | ga les | $ | ges eee
om OY
Cans ALG Z ie
N E | E
44.8’ | 83.8 | 137’ |52°32"| 378 0°490’S_141°45’

25 Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 52°40’.

MORE NORTHERLY COURSE 87

S: July 12,1741. After Midday

o mal

4 2 ue) S S

aia} 3 ¢

el |) 4 s O 4
eal aya MSW |MAIN| || Reef-topsail wind;/cloudy,._ | A
_ 8 | 22) ee

S|) A) |S ean
as BO SET | ais a nee Passed much driftwood.

SUN DN a RE
POu OWA MOON eeu) eats Wind freshening; took two reefs in topsails.
0 SES SOE RNR AEE nN A OL eM
2 28D |S) | A
9 4% ~ | Took three reefs in main-topsail.
Fey | AD Lae Se
Fe a (ee
rad 3% “Sw/S |... |_| Clewed up foresail.
cers ca pe ~—~| Furled foresail.
TEN USEXE | |6_

5) As) ee NE At 3:30 we clewed up trysail. ’
oa “|__| Set main and fore-topsails with reefs in them.
she ee s| ) oe | Le Rain, reef-topsail- wind, chilly. un tL nn
Oa a | Te ee

7 4% ~~ | Let out a reef in main-topsail.

Ore cy ~~ | Let out a reef in foresail.
Ton owe) ~~ | Let out two reefs in main-topsail. ;
“10 | 5% ~~ | Undersail wind.
Sag ens, ~~ | Set fore-topsail reefed.
prasi| ~~ | Reef-topsail wind, cloudy, and sunshiny. yi aey
; In 24 hours From Vaua
eee 2c) ae cal oo ae ene

Compass | §& |e |8e/ Se) 88] ¢ | see | & eg

1% rhum 5 oe AH AG as 4 AGA a =

By Dead NE/E N E E

Reckoning 5°56’E | 104 | 48.7’ | 92.3 | 154’ 153°2t'|| 304% | 0°58’N 144°13’

88

LOG BOOK OF THE.ST. PETER@

¢ July 13,1741. After Midday

| fF | |

— | | —— | |

2|5

315 Ww
ANG
5 | 43%4| WNW
6 | 434
7\|4%

8 | 434
9|4% Ww
10 | 4%

Il | 334

at2_} 3

2 “4

30.3

4|4%
514%
6|4%
7|4%

8 | 4%

Strong undersail wind, cloudy, sunshiny; took second

and third reef in main-topsail.

Sighted a piece of driftwood three fathoms long.

Heavy sea running.

Sunshine. Took the amplitude of setting sun
W24°N; latitude 53°39’; true bearing 35°38’,
variation of compass 11°38’E, or one rhumb.

Sky clear, moon,and stars shining.
Furled main-topsail.
Furled foresail because of darkness.

I yl W/S IN/W4W | 6%| Hove to, let out trysail.

Sounded, no bottom.

Got under way, set foresail and main-topsail and let

out two reefs, clewed up trysail.
Set mainsail and fore-topsail.

Undersail wind, wet.

Let out reef in mainsail, clewed it up and brailed it.
Sunshine.

Reef-undersail wind.

Clear with passing clouds; set mainsail.

SC ee ee (ee ee A
12 |43% Wind going down.
In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation D D Be
of Q ps) ve os ae | Baa 2 :
Compass, F 28 fa | oF He s | of 5 a
I rhum act 4 =) Ae Ss
a. | Cg eee aa Pe | ad= | & 2
By Dead N | E | E
Reckoning NE/E |101% | 56’ 84 142’ 54°17’ 415 2°52'N 146°41’

MORE NORTHERLY COURSE 8

Ne)

S$ July 14,1741. After Midday

5 2 g

Silesoaly ve 5 5

C) S Re } ro)

ao | 3 S) =

I | 4%) WSW NE Undersail wind, drizzly, sunshiny; carrying topsails
reefed, foresail, and mainsail.

NNN |,

PEI | 2A fi ID 02 SI ant kd a ee NS ee

414% j The Captain Commander, LieutenantWaxel, Master
Khitrov, and Navigator Eselberg had a consultation
and decided to steer N by E to the land sighted. 26

2850) 5G) EN 7

615 Took two reefs in topsails.

715% Reef-undersail wind.

213 |:574) oe a

(ON S24) Sa ae es

ROBES IA MRO SE

ETS of SECs | OS | (a

I2 | 53%

I|4% W Furled topsails, lowered staysails on the yards
because it was dangerous to navigate at night and in
the fog.

2/4 omen Re ears || hatee | |e ie Sol ee. Bi eae Be A de od es MO

315% Hoisted topsails with three reefs in each, hoisted
staysails and trysail.

25411 3s Cal |

Brom EGE A ANAS re aie Rett hl. i a RCs Ss ee

6/6 Let out a reef in main-topsail, clewed up trysail.

715% Sun shining; let out a reef in fore-topsail, hoisted jib,
let out two reefs in main-topsail.

1 <8 a a

22 Oi AVA SN (ee ee

10 | 4%

Ir |4% Let out two reefs in fore-topsail.

I12|}4% Reef-topsail wind, clear. Took observation: zenith
distance 36°11’. declination 19°50’, latitude 56°01’;
but no correction was made [in latitude by dead
reckoning]. Variation of the compass 1% rhumb E.

= In 24 hours } From Vaua

riation
Pace 2 AT pnu cee pee | #5. 2

Compass g Te es Od te = ou E a

I rhumb E = aM Aa QQ O° a) 7) pe ie fe)

me E Ci Bs AG 4 4

By Dead NNE N E | E

Reckoning 4°50’E 119 106’ | 54.8 96’ 156°03’| 423% 6°20’N_ 148°17’

eee ee ee Eb es A SONS OE OS 42374 VW Os2ZOUING 14 On Tie

26 Khitrov does not mention sighting land on this day. Steller says that he saw
land on the 1sth, but the officers paid no attention to him. It is possible that without
Steller’s being told about it orders were given to steer in the direction he indicated.

go LOG BOOK ‘OF THE (Si) PE TERe

July 14, 1741.
DECISION TO CHANGE COURSE 27

Captain Commander Bering, Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Khitrov, and
Navigator Andreyan Eselberg had a meeting to discuss the decision reached on May
4, 1741, in the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul. At that time and place it had been
agreed after leaving the said harbor to sail SE by E, true, to latitude 46° N, unless
land was found before; but if no land was sighted to sail from that parallel E by N
steadily until land was discovered. If land should be found either on a SE by E or
E by N course we were to coast alongside of it for as long a time as possible so that
we might return to the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul by the end of September.
After we left the said harbor we kept the SE by E course not only to 46° but even
to 45° without seeing any land. We then sailed E by N close to 9° of latitude
and 35° of longitude, but on this course we equally failed to discover land.
On that account we concluded to change our course one point and keep closer to N,
that is to go ENE, which course we are now holding as far as the wind permits. By
dead reckoning, we find ourselves at present in latitude 54° 34’ N. and longitude from
Vaua near 48°, a distance of more than 400 German miles. We had on board 102
barrels of water of different sizes, and by today, July 14, half of it has been used up
by the crew. What is left, even if the allowance were reduced, would not last longer
than August 25 or at the most until September, for we do not know whether the
barrels of water in the lower hold are full or whether some of the water hasleaked out.
Taking these points into consideration we have decided to sail northward by true
compass on the rhumb ENE so that we might in good time examine those northern
regions and see whether there is not some land, as we suppose there is, judging by
various reports. If we were to continue on easterly courses we should be sailing
farther and farther from Kamchatka and, not being able to replenish our supply
of water, we should suffer great hardships and, may God preserve us, extreme mis-
fortune. But in going northerly we stand a better chance of finding water for our
needs.

BERING

Lieutenant WAXEL

Fleet Master SOFRON KHITROV
Navigator ANDREYAN ESELBERG

2 From Khitrov’s journal, “The reasons for our action will be found in the exact
copy of the minutes given on the next page.” (Entry under July 14, 4 P. M.)

MORE NORTHERLY COURSE

% July 15,1741. After Midday

“ y 4
s/3| z SNe
° i= re ° co)
oe FS 4 O a
r/5%| W/S N/E Topsail wind, cloudy, sunshiny; let out last reefs in
topsails, hoisted trysail.
aNd ee PR ee Re
3) NE (ere a
AZ ee
ellr} NW |NE/E3%E Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
6/13
72 N NE /EME!] | Took a reef in topsails; sounded in 180 fathoms, no
bottom.
8|1% ENE %
9|1% “%
Io | 13% E/N Light wind.
ETE | LIE | elec ey eg eet eels ee
12 \y NE/N Lowered topsails on caps, took in all the cther sails
because of the calm.
I y e
2 4 i Sea running from SW. In 5 hours we drifted 1%
5 knots towards NE by N.
_3|_% Z aeeal
4 % Amplitude of rising sun 59°00’ N; latitude 56°30’:
true bearing 37°30’; variation of compass 21°30’,
or 1% rhumb, as we had a small sea. ade
5 %| E/S N/E Little wind, cloudy, sunshiny; hoisted topsails.
6/1% Let out three reefs in topsails, set mainsail, hoisted
jib and staysails.
SOLS) eS ee
814 Topsail wind, weather as before.
| Ze a
Io | 4 N%4E
Ir1|4 N/E Sky clear, sun shining.
I2|}4% Overcast. Zenith distance 37°08’, declination of
the sun 19°36’, latitude 56°44’.
apn In 24 hours From Vaua
Nauaon a 2 2 i F F z e
Gompas | § | ze) ee) 88/82] a | see] § zg
1% rhum = a 2 c 4 2s < 8
e aleia eeupmey ta leiaigt: | ad= | 2 Zn
By . NE/N N E E/N
Observation 6°12’E 53.5 41’ | 32.8 62’ |156°44’|| 429 3°30’E 149°19’

28 Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 56°51’.

92 LOG BOOK‘OF THE “STsPE DERe

Of July 16, 1741. After Midday

o >
ll pees So) ss
= ° < = | 0)
° S Rew O° oO
ew s Oo aay
Tees E NYE Topsail wind, cloudy, sunshiny; carrying all sails
2 | 4% vs.
414%) | _—__i_:- Furled spritsail.
i0| 074) So eee ee it
BeOn 5H | eee ee alee x Reef-topsail wind.
ei 7an | 05154: | ees | een | eee | Cloudye
om B4 72) Peat Se) Steet | ae Took two reefs in topsails.
Io E/N %| Strong reef-topsail wind.
Ir %| Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
1) wy
I ENE N I
2 NE/E N%W I Topsail wind.
i N /W I
4 N%W I Let out two reefs in topsails.
5 N T
6 N re
ti N%W I
8 N34 I Reef-topsail wind.
9 N /W 1%} Cloudy, sunshiny.
Io 1%| Took two reéfs in topsails.
Tk 1%
I2 1%| Drizzly, sunshiny. Took observation: zenith dis-
tance 38°49’, declination of the sun 19°23’, latitude
58°12’. No-correction made. 2%
In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation 2 g ae 2 ;
of 2 TEC) oe 50 oD ORG E bo
Compass E ae | eo 1 os | Sel a 3 Er I g
1% rhumb E a as ay) lal. As | Bes = 8
a4 A & AG m
By Dead /E N:| E | E/N
Reckoning c°18’N_ | 91.6 yo’ | 17.4 | 32.4’ 158°1r4’|| 42934 0°31’E |40°S5x?

29 Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 58°17’.

Footnotes to Log of July 17.

30 Mt. St. Elias. (Identifications in this and the next chapter by E. P. B.)

31 The bluffs just west of the entrance of Yakutat Bay.

32 By the calendar St. Aphinogena day is July 16, and St. Mariny day is July 17.
St. Mariny Point is Cape Suckling of today.

33 Khitrov’s journal: “Took observation of setting sun, W 15° N, latitude 58°30; true
bearing 39°30’; variation of compass 24°30’.”

DISCOVERY OF LAND 93

Q July 17,1741. After Midday

Leeway

SS | Ce a
4|2%|] N/E NW/W | 1
TE ero Sane eae ee
6/1% N WNW I

—— | ff | LE

8 NNW Ww I
“olr | NW |NNE%E/1
aah 1) a a a
Ta A NNE |i
a2| %| NNW NEG ine
Talay eek
mE BL Raz
See) S
————— (o) —s
_4)|_%4| @ Ey
eh eZ aoe
6 4

Se) 14 |) E NNE |1
"@)[S. en ae Ea
olla | ESE Nine |e
SESS N pie
oh (ee Fee

At 12:30 we sighted high snow-covered mountains

and among them a high volcano N by W.30 Topsail
wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying topsails,
staysails, foresail, and mainsail; sounded in 190
fathoms, no bottom.

Let out three reefs in topsails.
Topgallantsail wind.

Cloudy.

Light wind.

8 o'clock took amplitude of sun W 15°00’ N, true

bearing 39°30’, variation of compass 24°30’. or 2
rhumbs E. A point of the sighted shore which we
named St. Aphinogena3l bore N by E about 10
German miles; the mountains on it are lower than
those we had sighted before. The volcano bears now
N about 18 miles, and 5 miles inshore. At this same
hour of 8 we sighted another point of the same
shore in NW, about 12 miles from us, and this point
we called St. Mariny.s2 From this point inshore there
isa high elevation bearing NNW¥%W.

Sounded in 180 fathoms, no bottom.

Sounded again, no bottom. Clewed up mainsail and

trysail.
Sounded, no bottom.

Lowered topsails on caps, lowered staysails because
there is no wind.

Easterly swell. forcing us NE at the rate of 1% knots

in six hours.

Topgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds; set

topealls and mainsail, hoisted topmast-staysail and
jib.

St. Mariny bears NW by W, about to German miles.

Topsail wind; let out reefs in topsails.

Clear with passing clouds, air thick, impossible to
get a bearing because the shore is hidden by heavy
clouds. In marking the above-mentioned points on
the chart we took into consideration the variation
of the compass as 134 rhumb easterly. 33

In 24 hours

Variation

of 2 3
Compass 5 ae
134 rhumb E = lal.
me g

By Dead N /W

Reckoning 0°08’N 30

From Vaua

3 . SS 2 i
aS , _ o0 bo
Ba | Go| 58) 3) as] 2 | &

OH acres ao™ | a

E/N
29’ | 5.7 | 10.9’ 158°43’\| 42634 0°33’N_149°40’

(Footnotes 30-33 at bottom of opposite page.)

LOG BOOK OF THE *sil- PETERS

bh July 18, 1741. After Midday

j
*, >
n n is}
ple| Sa) “Se
° i= = ° co)
mi s O ra
I %4| N/E |NW/WuYuwW| 2 Light wind, cloudy; carrying topsails, foresail, jib,
{ and topmast-staysail.
2 A 2
3/1% I Heavy clouds, rain.
4)/1% I
5 |1% I Topgallantsail wind.
6/1% I
7 3%| NE/N NW %Ww I Light wind, weather as before.
8|/1% I Took two reefs in topsails, set mainsail.
cay || 3 N/E |NW/WYWII
Io|1% N WNW I Rain
II | 1 I
r2) |Z I Sounded in 190 fathoms, no bottom. Lost sight
of land owing to fog and rain.
I 4 I
2 y% I Light and variable winds.
ef | |eae NNE E I
4/1% NW I Tacked to starboard.
5 |13%4 I Let out all reefs in topsails.
6/1% I Topgallantsail wind, cloudy, rainy.
7|1% I Thick fog.
8 | 234] N/E NW /W %
9 | 2% %
Io | 2% N WNW 14| Passed a piece of driftwood 3% fathoms long
which we identified as pine.
Ir | 1% %
12|13%| N/E NW4w %| Topsail wind, fog, rain. Though the land is not
far away, yet because of the heavy fog and rain
we could not see it.
er In 24 hours | From Vaua
Variation a @ a | ere E
of g -6 , a) ah 5 = gD F 8b
Compass 3 ag es 25 ee ied | SES 2 g
2 rhumbs a faye Q ° } | @ Me a
m ’-| Pe eri (aes Me eto =
By Dead NW N Ww | E/N
Reckoning 0°45'’N 32.8 | 23.5’ | 22.90 43’ |59°06’) a1934 1°35’N_ |48°47’

DISCOVERY OF LAND 95

ics July 19, 1741. After Midday

Pal
()
g 5
2 o
) a)
@) =
NW I Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, rainy.
NW /N 7 Took two reefs in topsails.
Mase Eee SWi/Si |) Nt | Bor:
Let out reef in topsails, hauled down staysails,
clewed up mainsail and trysail.
SW /S Tacked to port, hoisted jib and staysail.

Fog; sounded in 190 fathoms, no bottom.

SSW %W | Sighted a small projection of land SW by W; 34
near it another point, seemingly on the mainland,
SW by W%4W,% a second point W; a third
point NW by WW, about 3 or 4 German miles
from us.
S/E%E Took two reefs in topsails, hauled down jib and
stay-sails.

2 Sounded and got 55 fathoms, bottom soft bluish
clay.
NE/N 1%| Tacked to starboard.

NNEME!I Set mainsail, let out a reef in topsails, hauled up
jib and staysails.

— | | —— | |

—— | ——— |__| |

S/E Tacked to port, let out two reefs in topsails; depth
60 fathoms. The projection of land is now WS,
and the point of land near it is W about 6 German
miles.

et ee

Topsail wind, cloudy, sunshiny.

SW Let out three reefs in main-topsail, clewed up
mainsail.

WNW Rainy and sunshiny. The projection bears N by
W4W about 2% German miles.

NW /W Took three reefs in main-topsail and two in fore-
topsail; depth 60 fathoms.

a | fl | |

ef |

Reef-topsail wind. Projection is now E™%S; the
point near it is E and is named by the Captain
Commander Bering Cape St. Elias; of the two
other points, one bears N by E%E and the other
NE by N. They are about 7 German miles, ora
little farther.

In 24 hours From Vaua
a

Variation
of
Compass
2 rhumbs E

in

German
Miles
Long.

E
s
s
a

Dist
in Knots
Diff
Lat
Dep.
in Knots
Diff
Long
Lat

2
5
3

cs

a4

Dist.

By Dead WNW N W E/N
Reckoning 2°20/N 28 11.8’ | 25.5 48’ |50°18'll 417% 2°12’N_ |48°09’

34 Pinnacle Rock off Cape St. Elias.
35 Cape St. Elias.

96
¢ July

LOG BOOK OF THE “si 72 bE Tile

20,1741. After Midday

Course

”
cs)
Xx

E/N SE/S

NE/E SE/E

N/W%w

NE |NNWENW| *%

NE/N E/S I
a2/1%|_____|_NW/N_|_%

T%| NE NNW ly
iia es ESE jose

NE/N E/S

t

—— | | | |

Topsail wind, cloudy, rainy.

Let out third reef in main-topsail and second in
fore-topsail.

Reef-topsail wind.
Cloudy.

Took second reef in fore-topsail and second and

third in main-topsail.

Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
Hauled up topmast-staysail.

Light wind, cloudy.

Let out two reefs in topsails.

Lowered the longboat and the yawl into the water.

On our track we got 30, 26, 22 fathoms, bottom soft
bluish clay. Came near the shore and dropped small
bower anchor in 22 fathoms about % mile from
land, payed out 34 of a cable. Khitrov, with the
assistant navigator and several members of the
crew, was sent ashore. The point of land nearius
bears S%W, % mile, second point NNEYE 1
mile; the island in the middle of the bay bears N
34 of a mile. 35

Khitrov and I were sent to the island bearing N 34

of a mile, to survey the channel; for from where we
were it seemed as if there was a bay which would
offer safe shelter in case of need.

During the day we came about every two or three

hours in order to get closer to shore.
Sent the yawl ashore for water.

The yawl returned with water, and the crew reported
having come across a fireplace, human tracks, and a
fox on the run. Adjunct Steller brought various
grasses.

Topgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
Took observation: zenith distance 41 °o1’, declina-
tion of the sun 18°26’, latitude 59°27’, which we
corrected on the 22nd.

In 24 hours

Variation
of
Compass
2 rhumbs E

_ Dist.
in Knots

Rhumb

NE/E

36 Khitrov’s journal:

16
“At six

Byes.
Observation

dropped the small bower anchor in 22 fathoms of water. . i t
i The Captain Commander sent me in the longboat to examine the strait

St. Elias.

and to find an anchorage among the islands seen by us in the N.”

From Vaua

in

German
Miles
Rhumb
Long.

Dist.

N E/N
8.9’ | 13.3 26’ |159°27'\| 416% 2°24’N_ 148°35’

o’clock we came within % mile of the island and
We called that island

July 20 is St. Elias day.

“The island in the middle of the bay [which] bears N 3 of a mile” is Wingham Island.

LANDING ON KAYAK ISLAND 97

S July 21,1741. After Midday

Reckoning 4°54’W I5

(Footnotes 37-41 on next page.)

ae
wel el] og z 3
= ° c 3 oO
° 5 = io) Y
fachil | h s s) A
| eo ee ee Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
2
fae 3 | (see pel te tn eee Se, Senor esse ee ee
4 The men who returned on the small yawl announced
the finding of an underground hut, something like
a cellar, but no people. In this hut they discovered
dried fish, bows, and arrows. The Captain Com-
mander ordered the boatswain to take to that hut
a number of government things: 16% arshins 37
of green material, 2 knives, Chinese tobacco, and
IE SER es pipes. 38
po ce |f 7 AA
6
MRE is | ESB eA ks | BB IS
8 —— | —— a
9 Khitrov returned and reported that he sounded on
the way over to the island and got 20, 18, 15, 10, 8
fathoms; in the very narrowest place 3, 3%, and 4
fathoms; and from 4 to 4% fathoms near the island;
bottom sandy and in spots clayey. The island is
sheltered from many winds. On the island was
discovered a summer hut made of boards, and out
of it was taken a wooden basket, a shovel, and a
small copper-stained stone.39 This island ex-
tends NW-SE. It measures 1 mile in length and
¥% mile across.
pe | icin | Re oes | 0h
II Clear with passing clouds.
I2 Stars out.
oo UES) | ES
2 Topgallantsail wind.
3 Cloudy.
4 Took on board 35 barrels fresh water, have 70 barrels.
SR NYE Se
6 Sunshine.
7|1% WuN Weighed anchor, set topsails and foresail, set jib and
topmast-staysails.
aS eee [eee ere
9|3% Took longboat and yawl aboard.
Io | 2 Hauled down staysails and jib.
Ir |2%| ENE WSW
I2]/3%| E/N Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds. Cape St.
Elias bears SEE, about 4 miles; of the two points
sighted one, which I call A40 bears WNWMW;
and _ the_ second, which is ‘marked _ B,4! bears
WSW. Between them is an island and near them a
bay.
any In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation n a
of 4 3 ‘ — aie Sista a :
Compas E DG he og we = oes é =
a 5 am | AH aS AE) yeas A 8
a A's Metin ad pa =
By Dead WNW N W

? , ° ’ I E/N ° ’
4.6 14.5 28 59°3r'l 412% 2°40’N_ 148°07

98 LOG BOOK‘ OF THE Si. PETER!

Footnotes to Log of July 21 on page 97.

37 An arshin is equal to 28 inches.

33 In 1790, when the Billings expedition visited this island one of the old natives
said that “he remembered that when he was a boy a ship had been close into the bay on
the west side of the island and had sent a boat on shore; but on its approaching land
the natives ail ran away. When the ship sailed, they returned to their hut and found
in their subterraneous storeroom some glass beads, leaves (tobacco), an iron kettle, and
something else” (Martin Sauer: An Account of a Geographical and Astronomical Expedi-
tion to the Northern Parts of Russia . . . by Commodore Joseph Billings, London,
1802, p. 194.)

Bering’s coming must have made quite a stir among the natives of Alaska. The in-
habitants of one of the islands in Prince William Sound told Sarychev (one of Billings’
officers) that a ship came to Kayak Island and that the people came ashore and left
some ae (Sarychev: Account of a Voyage of Discovery, London, 1806, Part II,
PP. 52-53).

39 Khitrov’s journal: “I came aboard from shore in the longboat and reported to
the Captain Commander that the channel to the island has a depth of 3,3%, and4fathoms,
that the bottom is sandy and in places slimy, and that it is sheltered from many winds.
I reported also that I found on that island a hut made of hewn boards, the floor of the
hut being also of boards. In place of an oven it had a kind of fireplace. From this hut
I brought along to show Captain Commander Bering a wooden basket, a shovel, a small
stone which had copper stains on it, and one common round stone with a hole. All of
these things I gave to the Captain Commander. During the whole time that we remained
at anchor we took in 35 barrels of water. At seven in the morning we weighed anchor,
set the topsails, foresail, mainsail, jib, and staysails, took on board the small and large
boats, and sailed away. . . That which happened to me on that island is noted down
in the report which I made on the island of St. Elias.”

40 A point on the mainland.

41 Cape Hinchinbrook.

LANDING ON KAYAK ISLAND 99

July 21, 1741
REPORT ON ST. ELIAS [KAYAK] ISLAND4

The island of St. Elias lies NE and SW. It is about 3% miles from the mainland
tothe bay. Itis about 34 German miles long and not more than 3% versts across.
According to my calculation it is in latitude 59° 30’ [or 49’—not clear] and 48° 42’
of longitude from Vaua on the course E by NWN, distant 416% miles from the
northerly point. This island stands out alone in the sea like a stone column;
extending from it a submerged reef of rocks may be seen in low water. From its
northerly point about 14 of a mile there lie, in the bay between the island and the
mainland, other islands which offer shelter from winds. To one of these islands the
Captain Commander sent me with several men in the longboat to examine the strait
and to find a good anchorage. In going there between N and E, the depth of the
channel was 25, 22, 18, I0, 7, 6, 4, and 34 fathoms where it is possible to anchor;
and in going to it one should keep in the middle between St. Elias and the island
and watch out for the projecting cape of the island, because running out from the
middle of the island of St. Elias and this island are submerged reefs. On this
island there are many trees, namely, fir, larch, cedar, and other kinds, but little
of it is good for shipbuilding because we had occasion to look for a piece of timber
for the topsail yards but did not find it. Wecame across (on the island) a hut which
was made of hewn boards; the floor was also made of these boards. In place of an
oven there was in one corner of the hut a fireplace. Near the hut was found a
wooden basket in which were shell fish, which showed that the inhabitants here used
them for food. We did not see any people, but it was quite evident that they had
been here shortly before our arrival. I brought from this island, in order to show
our Captain Commander, one basket, a shovel, a small stone with copper stains
on it. It was not possible to tell whether there was or was not suitable timber for
shipbuilding on the mainland; which land is two miles from this island. The main-
lan 1 has high snow-covered mountains and volcanoes, and, from this as well as from
the fact that the material for the hut and floor was of good wide boards, we may
assume that there may be good timber there.

On St. Elias Island there is also plenty of wood. On that island there was dis-
covered an earthen hut containing dried fish which were cured this summer. On
the beach were seen human tracks in the sand, a fireplace, and running foxes. From
all this it may be reasoned that the natives, on seeing us, ran away and hid or that
they have their habitations on the mainland and come to the island in summer to
catch fish and other sea animals. The Captain Commander decided to send to that
hut, in order to please the people, several of the things which we had to give as
presents: namely, 1634 arshins of green material, 2 iron knives, 20 Chinese strings
of beads, 2 iron pipes for smoking Chinese tobacco, called ‘‘shar.’”’ All these things
were left there. The attached sketch map gives the position of the bay and the
islands and their relation to the mainland.

42 From Khitrov’s journal. Khitrov’s sketch map, mentioned in the last sentence of
this report, was published by Sokolov in Zapiski Hydrogr. Depart., Vol. 9, St. Petersburg,

1851, and reproduced by Lauridsen in his “Vitus Bering,” Chicago, 1889. In style of
execution it resembles his hitherto unpublished map of the Shumagin Islands, our Fig. 11.

100 LOG BOOK OF THE VST)PETER.

% July 22,1741. After Midday

4 y 3

io] » be} Z 3

3 ° i] 3 o

° S = ° co)

mi M s Oo 4

Tes E/N WSW Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying
topsails and foresail.

2 | 23% SW /W%w

3|3% Reef-topsail wind.

4|4

5 | 4

6/4 SW /W Point A43 bears N%E, about 4 miles, point B 44
bears W about 4% miles.

7|3% Took a reef in topsails.

8 | 33%4| ENE SWS Sighted a point of land opposite us SW%S45
about 6 German miles; we see also a small
bay 46 the middle of which is W%N about 5 Ger-

pee 0 | eee ees | soe ete ee | eee | LAT miles. 47
9 |4% tk SS \VVeeee pais Took second reef in topsails.
DEON S04) Sa eee en Ee,
LLP 3 | Sek ob ie ee Ze | Took third reef in topsails and furled.
E22 SE 2%| Set trysail and main-staysail.
1|/1%| NE/E SE/E 2%| Undersail wind, drizzly.
2|2 2%| Sounded and got 40 fathoms, bottom sandy and
PSS lee en cee ee Suet rocky.
3:| 24) 2 NE |. ESE.) 24) 7 es ee eee
4 2%] Stormy, squally, rainy. The strait which we

had seen at 8 o’clock is now NW by W;; one of
the points of the bay NW%W, and the other
NW by W%W, about 6 German miles or less.48

5 |1%| NE/E SE/E 3 Took a reef in trysail and clewed it up.

_7|2_|_ENE | SE} 3
8 | 2 3 Set the trysail.
9 | 13% SE%S 21%| Strong undersail wind, drizzly, rainy.
tio | 1% 21%4| Wind going down.
Ir | 13% 2%
12 |1% 2%| Sounded in 45 fathoins, bottom sand and small
rocks.
In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation
of z lie eee #ag re vi
Comes. : a6 | Se) eg | Se) 8 |g Ex eg 5
2 rhumbs a ~ ays Q fa) ro oe =
a al < c 4 AGA a a
By Dead SW S) WwW E/N
Reckoning 0°44’S 49.5 | 34.6’ | 35.5 68’ 158°57’l| 403 1°44’N_ |46°59’

48 Some point on the mainland.
AiG ABeRE Ch DTCoL \ See log of July 21. last hour.

45 SE point of Montague Island.

46 The strait between Cape Hinchinbrook and Montague Island.

47 Khitrov’s journal: “Point E [easterly point] bears SW%S, 6% [miles]; the
strait WYN.” |

48 Khitrov’s journal: “The strait bears NW/W, Point D NW%W, 6 miles.”

SKIRTING THE ALASKAN COAST 101
MM July 23,1741. After Midday
io >
aeeni ee
° S wt ro) oO
m|M S ) a
“iz |2%| ENE | SE™%S_ | 2%| Undersail wind, drizzly; set topsail reefs; depth
8) aes ___| 50 and 60 fathoms, sandy bottom.
_2 | 2 2%
ae OS SE/S | 2%
ere TH _2%| Topsail wind, heavy swell.
_6 | 1% 24
_7|2%| E | S/EXE | 2%
nse ian _2%| Let out reef in trysail.
oulienn 2%| Hauled up staysails.
LST) “2% 2% Hauled down staysails, furled fore-topsail.
at | 2% 244
2 ane 2% Set the fore-topsail reefed, hauled up fore-top-

pe mast-staysail.
S02 E/N SSEYE 2 Topsail wind.

Lae 2 Drizzly, rainy.
5 |2% re
_6 | 2% = “2 | Hauled down fore-topmast-staysail.
Was fai
_8 | 2% ae
Os 2% “2 | Reef-topsail wind.
“to | 23% “2 | Drizzly, rainy.
It 3% “2 | Hauled up fore-topmast-staysail.
ey || 2 al| Soe ea
sees
In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a Fi
of a a3 ae 3 ay as/tele e 2
pm 20 aa |a4 |g lae! & ieee |) el | 8
n
z ae AH Bk: AA 4 Aga a aS)
By Dead SSW S) WwW E/N
Reckoning 0°35’S 54.6 | 50.7’ | 20.4 39’ 158°06’|| 400 0°02’N_ |46°20’

102 LOG BOOK; OF THEY SiPETER

Q July 24,1741. After Midday

S Y 3
D
s/s] Bliss
° S = ° Co)
fet i, s Se) 4
P| 2 E SSE 2%| Reef-topsail wind, sky overcast, rain; carrying the
fore and main-topsail reefed, trysail, and fore-
topmast-staysail.
2r\n2 2%
3° 2 2%
4|1% 2%| Light wind, easterly swell.
5 |1% 2%
6);1% 2%
7|2%| E/S S/E 2%
8 | 134 2%
oy | 33 E S/EY%E | 2 Strong wind and rain.

ee ie ae 2
Toe 2 Furled topsails.

Le SS So eres

acs 7 ees ees

_4|1%|___|———s«d 3._ | _Heeaved the lead all night without finding bottom. _
Sos 3 .| Topsail wind, swell.——=«s=s EE

(A ead ere, eee ae

_7|2%|_ E/N SE/S 13

eS) 94: 3. | Reef-topsail wind.

_9|1%| ENE | SSEY%E | 3_ | Gloomy.

Io | 1% 3 _| Topsail wind.
Ir |1% 3. +| Easterly swell.

Furled foresail and hove to under the main-staysail
and trysail on account of the drizzly weather and
wind. It had been our purpose to sail between
N and W to observe more carefully the coast, but
the fog prevented us from doing so. The land
we saw [on the 22nd?] bears by true compass N
by E, distant 27 German miles.

4
Ny
Lal
x
Ww

ele In 24 hours | From Vaua
Variation zi a lanene
of 2 3 = : | Agu 4 :
poripas. E ENG ee i 5 = SES 5 Sy
2 rhumbs = = G2 | aM | as a | Qh i S
% Oe Cokie athe % el
By Dead SSW S Ww | /
Reckoning 3°o1’S 45 | 42.3’ 15 ( 28’ 157°24'|| 39734 1°290’E 145°50’

SKTRTING THE ALASKAN COAST 103

h July 25,1741. After Midday

a

wn n
Lo)

=e Pea et aa hes

) {Pr fs) i ae Cees |e)

ac} | Ss es Oy a =)

I|1%| ENE | SE/S%E|5 Undersail wind, drizzly. We are hove to under
main-staysail and trysail; set the mainsail reefed.

2 |1% mole
GI eae
ae I% aon Coming up to SEE, falling off to SSE.

5 | 1% 5
eh a

7_| 1% ce
~ Go| ae eee fs
Oui er or Wind going down, weather as before.

“uay |) ee a a Naas
Tr || | ee a oe
iad yess, ES At times the stars are out.

Er 5 ee
ee anay ron From nocn until 4 A.M. the course was held be-
Seal i ae ae |peween! coming up to and falling off to.

3 Za 5
ay ey E “5 | Captain Commander had a consultation with his

officers, and it was agreed, while the misty weather

prevailed, to sail SW by compass, which would

take us towards Kamchatka; but when the weather

cleared and the wind turned fair to sail N and W
in order to observe the American coast. #?

5|2% SW Furled mainsail, took two reefs in main-topsail and
hauled up, set the foresail and let out a reef in it,
hoisted the yards in place, clewed up trysail.

6|2%
7 2% SE WSW Set fore-topsail with three reefs.
8 | 3% Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
9/5%| SE/S SW Gloomy; set the main-staysail.
Io /5 Strong reef-topsail wind; furled fore-topsail.
Ir |1%! SSE 1%] Tookthreereefsin main-topsail,furled reefed foresail.
T2023 1%| Undersail wind, drizzly, wet.
Seon In 24 hours From Vaua
ariation
a Ame a Vee ae Seal tee 3
Compas, | & |gei#a| osteo] a | see] & 2
2 rhumbs & 5 Aa lear Qs = Aah a S
2 ae g | 7A ade ~ x
By Dead SW /W S WwW E/N
Reckoning 5°31’W | 390.9 | 18.9’ | 35.2 65’ |57°0r’|| 380% 1°sQ’E |44°47’
49 Khitrov’s journal: “Got under way again. With the Captain Commander

it was agreed while this gloomy weather lasted to hold the course SW in order to keep
off the land about which we knew nothing, but in clear weather to hold a W by N course
in order to see the mainland.”

iT: ”
104 LOG: BOOK: OF THE: <*ST2PETER
i July 26,1741. After Midday
fal
a)
™ g Ge) o g
so) ° (| a oO
} fs = i) o
cae s O a
I | 2%4| SE/S SW 2 Undersail wind, cloudy, wet.
2% 2 Carrying main-staysail, trysail, and the foresail
oe ee reefed.
eet S | 2B oe | eeeneee | Ree |
4° 1% es eer 2% Light wind, heavy SE swell.
et) 4 ee |e (2
8 ZZ Sa oe 2% Drizzly, wet.
_. 1K eee a ere ee 2% Undersail wind, weather as before.
Ir |1% 2%] Reef-topsail wind.
I12|1% 7 2%
© | 172 E SSig; 2 Depth 40 fathoms, pebbly bottom. Hauled up
topsails and let out the reefs, set mainsail, let out
a reef in foresail, went on the starboard tack;
en (eee Ae SAN eee depth 35 fathoms.
fa | eal | Pee NI ee
wa] 2 |) NNE OD) 2) ee eee
4|2% SSE 2 Tacked to port; depth 40 fathoms; took second reef
in topsails; depth 40, 45, 50 fathoms, bottom
gravelly; took third reef in topsails. Sighted high
land NE by N50 about 4 miles or more, but soon
lost sight of it owing to the mist.
5 |2%| E/N SE/S 1%
6 | 334] ENE SES 1%
7 | 43% 1%
8/5 SE 1%
914% SE/S 1%4| Strong reef-topsail wind.
10 | 4% 1%
TE | ea! E SSE 1%| Strong topsail wind.
213% 1%| Gloomy.
eee In 24 hours From Vaua
ariation
of <= 3 ms 3 ae . San = a
Compass, = ee) ee) o8 | 82 | a | sts E E
2 rhumbs = A AS Qa Qa a ok a °
[ee Nace bean pat ies aé= | 2
By Dead SW /S Ss W E/N
Reckoning 4°29/S 41 B47 24 53’ 156°31’|| 383% 3°07’E |44°12’

50 Black Point, the southern extremity of Sitkalidak Island.
“Sighted land NE by N, about 8 miles away.”

Khitrov’s journal:

STANDING OFF SHORE 10

on

€ July 27,1741. After Midday

A Y 3
»| 3] z Eg
° S ie fe) o
eh (EY 3 S) A
I1|3 E/S SY%E 1%4| Reef-topsail wind, cloudy, wet; let out a reef in

topsails.

3 13%| SE/S |SSW%4W|1%| Let out two reefs in topsails.

_4 | 2% SW/S 1%| Set jib and fore-topmast-staysail.
Ses x eae
_ OU _1¥%| Sounded and got 70 and 60 fathoms.
_7 | 3% 1%
WES5 i374) _1%| Topsail wind, cloudy.
WOU EEA _1%| Took two reefs in topsails. 51
I0 | 2% SE SSW 2 Depth 40, 35, 40, 45 fathoms, gravelly bottom;
oe a ___| hauled down staysail, took three reefs in topsails.
a1 | 2% S aes
BUZR|e2m |e Sr S 2 Heaved lead, no bottom.
MTZ. S“’%w 2
213% “2 | Hauled up fore-topsail; depth 40 fathoms; furled

fore-topsail; undersail wind; lowered foretop-
staysail, furled main-topsail.

2% 3 Set _Main-topsail; reef-topsail wind, clear with
passing clouds.

but saw none. In clear weather land might_be
seen about 5 or 10 German miles from us. The
lead line is all we have to go on.

BLOM Foy sme Slee a
Il | 3% 2 Let out two reefs in topsails.
I2 13 2 Reef-topsail wind and a head swell, drizzly, rainy.
a In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation 3 D =e
of Q 3 Sh 5 = oD 2
Pompase E LG He Sie = 2 = sis E =
2 rhumbs Zz A An M ° a 25 Ss 9
7) QA P QA c As AGH ae a]
By Dead WSW S WwW E/N
Reckoning 5°05’W 67 20’ | 63.8! | 114.7'|56°11’|| 370% 33°77 la2or7

51 Khitrov’s journal: “Sounded, but no bottom. We are in danger of running on
sand banks and therefore cannot keep close to land, hence have kept off a few points.”

106 LOG; BOOK OF THE SsisPETERe

S$ July 28,1741. After Midday

; Y a)
he a} ko] z 3
S| ° q 3 D
° S Rew fo) o
re s Oo 2
Eae224)| SS/s E/S I%| Strong reef-topsail wind, drizzly; tacked to
starboard.
27244. I%| Carrying reefed topsails, reefed foresail, trysail,
and main-topmast-staysail.
3 | 2% 1%
4.|3 EMS 1% =
ee 1%
6 | 3% 1%
a || Zig E/S 1%| Wind freshening, drizzly, wet.
8 | 3% 1%
9|3% 1%| Took three reefs in topsails, hauled down main-
Pee eee | eee, es ak | topmast-staysail.
EOS 74 |e a 1%) SE swell.
12, 3K pte | a ae 1% Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
| 224 14
es? 13 1%
35.72) 1%} Sounded again with the same result.
4|4% 1%| Tacked to port, let out a reef in main-topsail.
5 |2% SW /W 1%
612% 11%] Let out one reef in main-topsail and two in fore-
pene | Eas | ened | Ne Lylentee es hos topsail.
msitis ELS Meee 1%
_8 | 2% BNF cock Ap Savoye eerie (Phe Topsail wind; hauled up staysails.
~9)|3 | ss] SW /W2W | 1%) Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, wet.
220.) 374 |S 0 WSW aa ee eee
Ir|2% ESE““%E 1%| Tacked to starboard, took two reefs in main-
12 | 2%| S/E E/S 1%
; In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation D D ad
of < e . = “Bo a a
Compass é a5 ts o5 we | < Ses E e
2 rhumbs 2 a Ay) ae SS 25 a 8
2 Q P Q Q P os AeA a 3
By Dead ESE S) E E
Reckoning 2°30/E 38 12.8’ | 35.4 65’ 155°58’]| 3804 625'7°N WA3e23"

STANDING OFF SHORE 107

& July 29,1741. After Midday

Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; let out
two reefs in topsails.

Wind and weather as before, wet.

Took two reefs in topsails.

Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.

Sounded a second time, no bottom.
Let out two reefs in main-topesail.
Set the jib.

| EE SS ee ee ee — — — — —

—_——— | fF Ef EEE

Topsail wind, drizzly.

n
53 | 3 =
° S —
ac} || PS 3
I|3% S
2 | 334
313%
4|3
5 | 2%
6 | 2% S/E
7|2%
8 | 24
9|2
Io | 13%
Ir | 1%
sem eA
I] 13%
2 1%
3)1%
4|)1%
5 |1I SE/S
I SE
6|2
7 | 2%
812%

Took a reef in main-topsail.

Reef-topsail wind, weather the same.

10 14% I user ancther reef in fore-topsail, hauled down
ee eek ee be
ISL Oma EMeM MN yc [CE Took another reef in main-topsail.
1215% 1 Strong reef-topsai!l wind, drizzly.
panes In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation = =
at r 2 3 ; BE ow 2
peo ees E oe) ee | oe) ee] ¢ | sks : a
1% rhum a Ah An v7 ae = oe =
eh lee Beas ad™ | ;
By Dead SSE Ss E E
Reckoning 7°02’E | 34.5 30’ 17 30’ |55°28’| 387% SoAat NAS oss"

“ ”
108 LOG BOOK OF THE “ST. PETER
Y July 30,1741. After Midday
>
Y
n nD iy}
e/g] = Ey ace
te} & ie S) Vv
oefh (Ie s O fe
113%) E/S S/W %| Strong reef-topsail wind, rain; hauled down stay-
sails, took three reefs in fore-topsail, furled fore-
topsail.
2)4 %
3/5 Ss) %4| Undersail wind; took three reefs in main-topsail,
furled main-topsail and foresail. =
413 4%
5|1% SSE 514| Hove to under main-staysail and trysail on
account of the gale. Coming up to SE by S,
PD) See | (nce ene Ee falling off to S by E.
ee ORPEVON aa F |e S e ae o S
7 4% SE/E S/W 3 Su pns reef-topsail wind; set foresail and main-
sai
8 | 1% S/Wuw | 3
9/|1% 3 Hauled up the main-topsail reefed and main-
Pete | eee (RON eee eee |e topmast-staysail.
LON 2 73) wae | Pee 3, a ney ee ee
era ime SE SSW 2 | Set the fore-topsail.
12 | 234 SSW %W_| 2
o||2 _SE/S _ __ SW/S | 2a Topsail wind, drizzly, wet.
_2 | 1% = ee
Pec es | ee ee Heaved the lead all night, no bottom.
ic 5) ee |e
+8) 2% a ae re LWA Let out a reef in topsails.
eS SWS __| 1%} Let out two reefs in topsails. Te
Tia 13/72)|pe ae ci; enee in Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, rain.
BSS 39a ee iS 8 ec
_9 2% re PUSWISS lk’ Took two reefs in topsails. no ate
ELON See |e 1%
peso) (hz) (eee Pye | no ee re
I2 13 SW%S 1%4| Tacked to starboard, let out a second reef in
fore-topsail.
pak In 24 hours ! From Vaua
Variation a 7 \Ere
of 2 Sem Wee Sori eee sh ee hee ¢ re)
Roma E ee) ee] S65) ee | 3 seis E =
1% rhum = 5 na e oy ok = fe}
7) Ae a) AN Qh Agm wv 4
By Dead SW /W Ss w } E
Reckoning 2°47’W_|_ 58 31’ 50 | 90’ 154°57’! 375% | 4°42’N_ |42°23’

STANDING OFF SHORE 109

Q July 31,1741. After Midday

2 y 3
wn
5| 3 z 5 z
SG S ic} o
ne, || s ) 4
I|2% Ss ESE 1™%| Topsail wind, clear.
_ 2) Pea TE ES
28.) A) a a eso
413% 1%| Wind as before, overcast.
Salis 1%
6|3 1%| Chilly, damp.
7 | 2% 1%
8 | 23% 1%| Took an observation: amplitude of_ setting
sun W 7°o’ N, true bearing 27°30’, variation of
9|2% 1%| Reefed fore-topsail and trysail.
10 | 2% ESEY%E 1%4| Hauled down staysails.
II | 2% 1%4| Stars out.
I2|2% ESE 1%
ee Ss Mesa dy sae eee ok eae
2 | 23% 1%| Topsail wind; set the staysails.
3)2% ESEYE F/ 1%
4|2% ESE 1%| Drizzly.
5 WBA ESEYE 1%
6 | 2 S/E 1%| Let out a reef in topsails.
7|2M% 1%
8 | 2% 11%4| At the end of the hour tacked to port.
9 | 1% Ss WSW 2 Let out two reefs in main-topsail, set jib.
Io | 1% 2 ,
Il | 2%| S/W Ww/S 2 Clear with passing clouds; let out third reef in
I2 | 234 2 Topsail wind. Took an observation: zenith
distance 39°23’, declination of the sun 15°26’,
latitude 54°49’.25
See In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation = = We]
a aoe eeaown
ompass _ Oe me ag fq » : ES <
13% rhumb E e aM 145 | aM | ae 5 253 = 8
fo A's ae 4 AS@ io ‘s
By . E/S Ss E E
Observation 0°02’S 4I 8’ 40.3 | 70.5’ |54°49’|| 385% 4°16’N_ 143°33’

52 Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 54°46’.

110 LOG BOOK OF THE “ST. PETER”

h August 1, 1741. After Midday

n v a
n
s|3| ¢€ z g
oO] § ria ° o
oft S S) 4
1/3 SE WI4N Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carry-
ing all sails; the fore-topsail has one reef.
2 |3
Sia|3 Lowered two cannons with their carriages into
the hold.
4|2
5 |1% Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
6 | 1%
Nees Light wind, clear with passing clouds.
8) 1% Took two reefs in main-topsail.
9 |1% Ww Hauled down jib and topmast-staysail.
Io 4 Light wind, thick mist on the horizon.
II %
12 = Calm, stars out.
a Clewed up trysail.
25 ENE WYN Light wind, cloudy.
3 |1%
4 | 13% WNW Topgallantsail wind; let out two reefs in topsails.
5 | 234 NE Set the trysail, jib, and topmast-staysail.
OA
elas NW /W%w Topsail wind; let out third reef in main-topsail,
ne ea oe lame sat Send | ihn selec hauled up spritsail.
ma pons ss Let out third reef in fore-topsail.
9 | 4% \ Reef-topsail wind. ae
Io | 5 Let out reefs in foresail and mainsail.
Il | 434 Drizzly
12 14% Fog, damp. i,
ee In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a a
Q ae a
of e = ae - 42) 2) &
somes m 5 2G He Oa | He 4 SES g S
134 rhum = = fa} 5 M ae a as a fe)
2 Q = H 1A > Sy Age Z 3]
By Dead N/W N WwW E
Reckoning 7°29'W_| 54 33’ 43 75’ _155°22'| 37334 5°41/N_ 1|42°18"

LANDFALL: CHIRIKOV ISLAND igi

{2} August 2, 1741. After Midday

g 3

vy iiss no} z >

3/8 5 5 ¥

sofa | s O 4

TS 4 NE NW /W zw Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carry-
ing all sails.

2 || SS a eer Eee
2S) |[2 254 USS Eee [eves

4|4%

5/5 Furled spritsail.

6 | 4% Hauled down staysail and jib, took two reefs in
topsails.

7 | 3%4| ENE

8|1% Thick, wet fog; sounded and got 35 fathoms.

914%| E/N SE/S 34| Tacked to port; depth 30, 35, 28 fathoms, sandy

oe bottom.

Io | 4 ENE SE vA

Ir |3%| E/N SE/S 3%

12 |2% 34| Sounded and got 30, 28 fathoms.

Teo | ae 34| Light wind, fog, wet. Sighted land SE by E,
but, owing to darkness and mist, it was difficult
to determine whether it was an island or a part
of the mainland. Tacked to starboard, furled
the sails, and dropped the small bower anchor
in ae fathoms. 53 Tide was running from N
to Ss.

2|2 E NNE 34

3 TF

eu B | pana ghiateel
S| PS ie
6
——__ | ———_ io] —s
Ch \ al ae al as an AIA MSP ch at se NR Nc wie FD rls Series a
8 3 Decided it was an island, extending from E to
° W. It was about % of a German mile in size
Z and 1 mile from us. The W point of the island
bore S%E, the E point ESE; near it is a reef
about 34 mile long. 54
2 ee ie

Io Heavy, wet fog.

Ir Clear with passing clouds.

I2 Warm. y

rea In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation = = Hie
of a = . 3 aie “a0 Q
roe E BG ee OG eel < sfx E a
13% rhum a} ~ a aye} ey 2S a= <
m4 C g B S AS a 4
By Dead NW /W N WwW E
Reckoning 4°560’W 23 rr’ 20 35’ 155°33’|| 368 6°12’N__141°43’

53 Northern end of Chirikov Island, so named by Vancouver on April 4, 1794, in
honor of the commander of the St. Paul (George Vancouver: A Voyage of Discovery to
the North Pacific Ocean . . ., 3 vols. and atlas, London, 1798; reference in Vol. 3, p. 87).
For the names given by Bering and his officers, see footnote 56, below.

54 Khitrov’s journal: “8 o’clock in the morning. One point of the island boreS™“E,
1% miles, another point ESE, 2 miles. From the first-mentioned point there is a rocky
reef to the N, 1 mile.”

112 LOG, BOOK: OF THE: STsPERPRa

¢ August 3, 1741. After Midday

5 9 3
“lee (lee 5 2
© 5 ms ) ®
mit S Oo =)
I ig Clear with passing fog.
o4 =
3 ° Weather as above, wet.
4 Z.
5 SW Light wind, weather as before.
©} | No Loe
7 wind
8 ]1 S/W NNE Topgallantsail wind, cloudy. 8:30, weighed the
anchor, set topsails, foresail, and got under way,
having 18, 20 fathoms of water on our track,
bottom sandy and shelly.
mite Ge Se | eee eee
OR | EZ | eee | Dee aeeaenmeneeanen | eBera
Ta |e N/E Depth 20, 24, 26 fathoms, bottom as above.
Ta 2
I % S NNE Light wind, 25, 22 fathoms, bottom of small
rocks. Topgallantsail wind, cloudy. Depth 20,
21, 19, 18; bottom as before, in places shells. 55
2\2 N/E
SEN ie | Reece | Ree ee | ae
413 SW NNW
513% WNW I1%| Fog, wet; 17 fathoms of water.
6|13% 1%| 20, 23, 25 fathoms of water, bottom of small
pe ee 0th Ee eee
713% WNW 4%WwW %4| The island where we stood, and which we
named Archdeacon Stephen,56 bears now, the
center of it, S about 7 German miles. From
the crosstrees we could see no other land be-
cause the air was not clear. 28 and 30 fathoms.
8 | 3% 3
013 WNW %| Topsail wind, cloudy, foggy.
Io | 2% %|35 and 4o fathoms, sandy bottom; carrying
trysail, staysail, jib, mainsail; sounded, no bottom.
Il |2% yy
I2 | 2% 4%
baw: : In 24 hours | From Vaua
Mariavion 5 a g SZ z < =
Compass, | 68 | ee | ee | SE) eR) gd | wee] OE g
ee s AA a) 4 25 s
ps sc eal ae AGA % n
By Dead N/W N W E/N
Reckoning 6°06’W | 33.5 227 me) 17.8’ |56°05’|| 36414 3°43/E |41°25’

55 Khitrov’s journal: “The going out of the tide as well as the fog and rocky bottom
made our situation critical. On that account we changed our course to NNW.”

56 Archdeacon Stephen day is August 2. This island, the modern Chirikov Island,
would, according to Khitrov (see footnote 60, below), seem to have been named Tumannoi
(Foggy) Island. Cf. also Waxel’s report, p. 272.

LANDFALL: SEMIDI ISLANDS

6 August 4, 1741.

After Midday

i12

— | — $s | — |__| —_

—_ | | | |

Sighted a

>

@

3

vo

(0)

4

%4| Light wind, fog.

%| Clear with passing fogs and clouds.
high volcano57 in WNW2i4N, about 15 German
miles away.

%| Have all sails set except spritsail.

%| Topgallantsail wind.

%| Let out three reefs in topsails.

%

%

%| Went on the starboard tack.

%| Took reef in topsails.

Hauled down jib.
Light wind, stars out.
Calm, wet, fog.

%| Hauled down fore-topmast-staysail.

%

%| Topgallantsail wind.

4%| Came about on the port tack, set jib, let out
reefs in topsails.

%

Heavy, wet fog.

Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.

Sighted

two points of the shore; one bore NNW about 8
miles, the other WSW%S about 9 miles; be-
tween them was an island WYN about 4% miles
from us. About noon we sighted five islands 58
not far from the above-mentioned island. These
five islands bear SSW34 W about 5 miles; the most
northerly bears WSW 4 miles, and we named

it Theodosius Island.59

wn
5 | 3 z
fo) fo] =~
miM 3
I/|1% SW
2%
3 )}2%) S/W
413%
5 | 23% Ss
6 |3
| 2ea
8 | 2% S/W
9) 1%
Io | 2
Ir |1% S
I2 Calm
I | 2 SE/S
2/1%
3.|1%
4 | 1%
5 |2 SE
6|2%| ESE
7|2%
8 la E
9 | 4%
Io | 3%
Ir | 3%

12 |2%| E/N
Variation
of
Compass

134 rhumb E

By Dead
Reckoning

SSEYE

6°1r1’W

57 Mt. Chiginagak.
58 Semidi Islands. Named the Eudoxia Islands according to Sokolov, Zapisk* Hydrogr.
Depart., Vol. 9, St. Petersburg, 1851, p. 388.
59 Khitrov’s journal: “Sighted five islands; the southern one SSW34W 5 miles, the
northern WSWW 5 miles.”

60 Khitrov’s journal:

_ Dist
in Knots

Light fog.

no bottom.

Every hour of the day we sounded but found

The island Archdeacon Stephen bears E by S. 60

In 24 hours From Vaua
2 gs a
Bt o'tG) . on 5 ™ gO ra} =
Ai | de) 28) 3 | 28s] 2 | 8
= O <a
Bc) oe Aas™ 4 a
S) Ww E
23.4 |) 12:8" | 22:4" lisiso42%||- 362 6°at’N 1|41°03’

“Foggy Island where we stood at anchor bore E by S.”

114 LOG BOOK OF THE “STZ PE Pak:

fo} August 5, 1741. After Midday

Ll 2 g 3

Al e| = 2 |

boy ok 3 o) =)
_1|2%|__E SSE | 1_| Topsail wind, fog, wet, rain.
ol AK ow Took two reefs in topsails.
Ass I __| Reef-topsail wind.
5.372 S/E¥% I Fog, rain.
Sone | ne
wee ass S/E I__| Strong reef-topsail wind.

8 14 ESE S I Cenmins topsails, foresail, mainsail, and stay-

sail.

fo Joe S129 (aad mae Oe eee, (PS
Io | 1% SE NE/EXME |1 Io 30, tacked to starboard.
£2 a
_1I | 23% Ti Topsail wind.
2 (2% rT | Wet fog.
pes |2e4i SSW ‘| At the end of the hour came about on port tack.
_4 | 2% Ex
a Ail ae ___| no bottom; let outa reef in main-topsail.
_ 6 iE SEE S/W4UW II Sounded and got 40 fathoms, bottom of gravel.
Oe SE/S E/N “2. | Came about on starboard tack.
_8 | 2% Com Heavy S swell.

9 | 2 ENE’ “2 | Topgallantsail wind, heavy fog.
oi ou ae Sas

Tue eo “2. | Clear with passing fog. Since 12 o’clock we

have sounded but found no bottom.
flees ENG ee j
In 24 hours | From Vaua
Variation Di D | ee
of 3 ee = ae . achat a ;

apompas | 2 | Be | SS | S188) e | gte| 2 | 8

By Dead / S E | E

Reckoning 3°58’E |30% | 29.4’ 8 14’ |55°13’| 36434 5°28/N larer7:

KEEPING OUT TO SEA 115

Vf August 6, 1741. After Midday

n
fal 2
ao ps s

2 SE/S

2% SE
eS ESE
413
5 2 SE

Dist.
in Knots

>
3
3
o
Vv
ra
Topgallantsail wind, wet, fog.
Set jib; carrying topsails and staysails, foresail,
mainsail, and trysail.
1%} Came about on the port tack.
1%
1%] Sighted sea otters, whales, and sea licns.
Light wind.
2
2%| Tacked to starboard.
2%] Light wind, heavy fog, wet.
2%] Stars out.
2%! S swell.
3 Heavy, wet fog.
3
3 Clewed up mainsail, foresail, and trysail.
3 Hauled down staysails because of lack of wind.
3
3 Lowered topsails on the caps.
3
3 Sounded in 120 fathoms, sandy bottom.
3 (Jr sat ee Re NG SOE Tell”. te
3 From _1 o'clock in the morning until nocn we
took into consideration, in making our calcula-
tions, the heavy swell from S to N
In 24 hours From Vaua
ns aid a
»~
os ° : on “83 bo
at |Ae|Be| a | gee) 2 | &
ae (3) He}
a i ad fe =
SS
SS) E E
1.4’ 1.6 2’ 55°12’ 366 Sy222Nia|4Tero!

8 | 1% S SW /W 4Ww
ez. || a iin 4
"HO || ie Ll eae a RN (4
“en, |e | pe | eae (ed
aS ns [a eee
aml ae E/S

3 %
2B ce ee a

6 yy ENE WIL
| 26) ee (Sa

8 YG NE
“OT i ae ce
Sroninas
“He |) || (ea
aes eS hn

Variation S

Compass z
134 rhumb E a

faa
By Dead SE
Reckoning 3°490/E

116 LOG BOOK’ OF THE “ST. PETER?
Q August 7, 1741. After Midday
=
o 2 ro 2 g
3 | 8 : 3 g
m 1M s O rl
ean Th SE/S E/N 1% Light wind, clear with passing fogs and rain.
2 |iK 1%
~3~ r3o7 SE ENE 1%|(Set the jib; carrying all sails except spritsail
cay and main-staysail; let out three reefs in topsails.
SR Nae, 1%
igs “234 Sra Topgallantsail wind, wet fog.
6 Bor Eren Topsail wind, took a reef in topsails.
7 | 4% ie
5 ea “rt | Hauled down jib.
~o14 | SE/E | S/W%W |1 | Tacked to port.
Io evan I Took two reefs in topsails.
folie poe
“2 | 2% aay
1|2%| SE/S | SSW%wW Topsail wind, drizzly.
2 | 2% rae
= 2%| SSE E%S “~%] Tacked to starboard.
Ta 2% “| Let out two reefs in topsails.
3) Siz ES aioe
= can Gob ESE%E |1 | Let out third reef in main-topsail, set the jib.
a 3% io Topsail wind, drizzly.
eoulesra ‘| Clear.
oe Qa ‘| Heaved the lead all day but found no bottom.
Wolls ae
Thu Bo ~~ | Saw a small dead whale.
cca a ee SE/EXZE |a
es In 24 hours From Vaua
Maneton a a g | a ‘ Fs
Compas.) § | Be] ee) ss) Sb) a | ste] a
13% rhum De
& zi ae An (a) > AS a) AGn yw 3
By Dead ESE Ss E E
Reckoning 1°04’S 39 15.7’ | 36 64’ 154°55’| 376 4°37'N_|42°23'

KEEPING OUT TO SEA EL

h August 8,1741. After Midday

_— | | | |

— | —— |J | EEO

n
Z| 2| =
| 5
1 S/W
2h
3 | 2%
4|3
5 | 3%
6 | 23%
7/| 2
8 | 13%
9|)1%
I0|/1%
Ir] 2
I2 1%
I | 2%
2 | 23%} SSW
3 | 2%
4 | 23%| SW/S
5 | 2%
6)1%
7|1%
8} 1%} SW

>) Sess EEE

Variation
of
Compass
134 rhumb E

By
Observation

Rhumb

SE
0° 23'S

Dist.
in Knots

3
3
%
4
I Topsail wind, cold, wet.
I Carrying all sails except sprit and main-staysail.
I
I
T Topgallantsail wind, weather the same.
I
I
I Took two reefs in topsail.
I
I
I
Topsail wind.
Let out two reefs in topsails.
Heavy wet fog.
I
I
Topgallantsail wind, drizzly.
Sunshine.
Sounded all day, no bottom.
I
Topgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
Took an observation: zenith distance 41°24’,
declination of the sun 12°57’, latitude 54°21’.61
In 24 hours From Vaua
es 3 "OD & a a) = my)
P J AGn Z 4
SS) E E
34’ | 33.5 | 58’ |54°21’|| 38634 3°12’N_ 43°21’

61 Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 54°11’.

118 LOG BOOK OF THE “ST, PETER?
ic} August 90,1741. After Midday
>
ate as : 2
° a cal (o) oO
ae [ate s O ay
~r |13%| SW/W S%E |i | Light wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying
all sails except spritsail and main-staysail.
2 ot ee Pees
Scr Es ee SE, Fa)
“4 |r|... |..." || Bogiwet... ee
2 a a en a a,
aon rae
“7 | 1%] WSW S4E ca
8 | 1%] SW/W S/E ‘I | Took a reef in topsails.
olla S/E“¥E |i | _
or 3% SVE ts, Topgallantsail wind.
Tt TH Tea Fog, stars out.
od Co ee ea
I|}1%} WSW > I Light wind.
So oe eas Sea coe
Slo a Sa ee
rio in, W/S S/W “T +| Let out reefs in topsails.
scm mx cre) Cloudy.
err ae
“7 | 1%) WSW S%YW |i.
snes 5 coe
on “1 Calm | Calm, foggy.
to! %| SW SSE ‘r | Light wind.
Fam ee WSW S erase Fog, wet.
2/2 | W/S S/W ‘1 | Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
ae In 24 hours From Vaua
cee 3 ee ee Sa,| 2 a
comp,| 2 | a; Se) 82/82] 4 | etc] 2 | &
1% 3 a AR le AS) lege 4 a
E
Pees 4eae'W 30 ae nf 3’ 153°51'|| 38634 2°04’N_ 143°18’

DECISION TO HASTEN RETURN

119

¢ August 10,1741. After Midday

% P 3
= ie ae:
° =| ke! ° co)
aM |) O 4
_1 | 2%| W/N | SSW%W _ |__| Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
baa. SW/S I Ge vite topsails, staysails, foresail, and main-
sail.
ee aa ee
a zr |NW/W| SWYw ___| Wet, foggy on the horizon.
aR te “W/N | SSW%W_|1_| Light wind, weather the same.
Gr 2h hn a ae __%| Topgallantsail wind.
1) 22 ae a EZ
a Ee |_| Tooka reef in topsails.
_9/3_|WNW| SSW ___|_%| Cloudy.
zo) 4 "ae oo | eae ae Topsail wind.
aa 3% PG wl ee es Moon and stars out.
32/25 | ar ae
a || a _W/N_ AP es Reef-topsail wind.
_2 |S) ee | Ce
|| Co |S Se Pees
AL 2 eS a
Sais SW /Siz W Topsail wind, cloudy.
6 | 2%| WNW. ~ SW |. 34] Let out reefs in topsails.
== SF | aa ee
asi 1% ~~ | Topgallantsail wind.
_9|1_| NW/W| SW/Wew | 1%
10| % aOR
az |1%| W/S | S/W%W |__| Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
T2 TH | S/W ‘T | Variation of compass 1%4 rhumb easterly.
In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation # D aid
of 2 aon i aos iets aD 2 :
Compass | § | ae) ee| ss] SF] a | ete] & e
1% rhum Q
; Z ae ae 0 AA} 4 | ade , A
By Dead Ww S W E
Reckoning 3°12’S 58.3 | 43.5’ | 38.0 | 64.6’ |53°08’|| 3814 0°32’N 42°13"

62 Khitrov’s journal:

“Captain Bering with the rest of us signed the decision we
came to, an exact copy of which is here attached.”

(See next page.)

120 LOG; BOOK, OF THE Si rE iis

August I0, 1741

DECISION TO HASTEN RETURN &8

Captain Commander Bering, Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Khitrov, and
Navigator Eselberg met to discuss the agreement reached by us, together with
Captain Chirikov and the officers of the St. Paul, on May 4, 1741, in the Harbor
of St. Peter and St. Paul. It was then agreed that while at sea we should keep in
mind to return to the above-named port towards the end of September. Now it is
August 10, which is regarded as already autumn, and according to all calculations
we are not very far short of 400 German miles [from our destination]. Although,
according to our former decision, we should still spend some time in examining the
discovered American coast, yet we find this to be dangerous because of the violent
autumn storms and continuous heavy fogs. It is not safe to approach the land, for
we do not know the lay of it. There are many sand banks and islands, as may be seen
from the chart which we have drawn up. We do not even know where to look for
shelter. The assistant surgeon, Betge, has submitted a report in which he says
that there are five men on the sick list, totally unfit for duty and that, of the others,
sixteen are badly affected with scurvy and if we continue at sea until the late
autumn these men too will be unfit for service.

On examining the log book we notice that up to now the winds have been easterly,
and we fear lest the westerly winds may set in soon and prevent us from reaching
port before the late autumn. We summoned before us Ensign Lagunov and all
petty officers, namely, Assistant Navigator Yushin, Assistant Skipper Khatianintsov,
Assistant Constable Roselius, Boatswain Nils Jansen, Boatswain’s Mate Alexei
Ivanov and read to them our arguments just mentioned. They agreed with them;
also in the idea that we should steer for the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul along
the 53rd parallel of latitude, or as near to it as the winds will permit, because the
last we saw of the American coast was on the 55th parallel and by going to the 53rd
we may learn if the coast extends that far.

BERING
Lieutenant WAXEL
Fleet Master SOFRON KHITROV

Navigator ANDREYAN ESELBERG
63 Khitrov’s journal.

HEAD WINDS ALONG 53rp PARALLEL 121

S$ August 11,1741. After Midday

” Y 3
s/o] 2 3 2
° i=) al ° oO
sof aS S O zy
foresail, mainsail, and main-staysail.
alr I
BRE I
4|1 I
5 |1 I
6 A SW SSE I At times no wind.
Gi Wize WSW S) I
8 | I I
9 34 SM%E___|1%| Moon and stars out.
Io 44| SW/W S/E 1%
II A 1%
12 ‘A SW SSE 1%] Light wind, cloudy.
I A 1%
2 yy 1%
3 % 1%
4 % WSW Weather as before. Clewed up mainsail and
~~ trysail, hauled down jib because of lack of wind,
q sounded in 180 fathoms without striking bottom;
raed = _____——i|__| heavy passing clouds overhead.
SEE Z4| |) TO ee
Ones |) A
| 24) 2 Bk RR ah eo nO eee oe
8]/1%) S/E SW /W I Set the jib and hauled up foresail, mainsail,
2 | nn ene (SO and trysail.
ern eee aE | WSW. |
28) 22289) | Ee (eee Pere Topgallantsail wind.
Bele sewen | ee Cloudy:
I2 |'2% 64
ee In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation ow a
of a a : = hs ; daleis a S
Compass | £ | Behe] Se) 82] = | see] & e
I% rhum = A An 59 a) ge = )
= ee Telos aG™ % 4
By Dead SW Ss W E

6 Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 52°40’. This value’has been used
on the chart (Pl. I).

122 LOG BOOK’ OF THE st PETERs
& August 12,1741. After Midday
n Y a)
H/o] ¥ : :
° = = i) %
m|M 3 O 4
I|}2% E WSW ~ | Topgallantsail wind, cloudy; carrying topsails,
fetes he ___| foresail, mainsail, trysail, and topmast-staysail.
_ 2 | 2% ___| Clewed up mainsail and trysail.
Bull
_4 | 1% nen
5 |1%|_ SE a
2:3 657i ime
PST STAN ee nee I a oe a ee eae Light wind, drizzly, wet.
oe ec) nee) eee eee ers
o| Sw |2 | Clewed up foresall, lowered topsail on caps be
hed cause of little wind.
10 |_ % Z 2
II 4 = 2 E swell. From 9 o’clock until 3:20 we allowed
ie ° ___|_% knot to S.
12) _ 4% Zz 22
Lee 2
ee (EE) ete (ee eee hi
st LEA WSW S4YE 1% Light wind; set topsails.
_4/_% 1%| Cloudy, atmosphere heavy.
5s |_%4|_SSw Ww 1%
_6 | %] SW WNW __| 134| Set foresail and trysail.
_7)1_ | SW/S W/N ‘1%| Hauled up mainsail, set jib and staysails.
_8]1%| SSW Ww i
BEORIOEYS WN |x
=O) 200 SW WNW co Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
Tr | 1% ‘1__| Clear with passing clouds.
12 | 1%41 SW/W NW /W hil Light wind, weather as before.
we In 24 hours | From Vaua
Variation a 4
Coupes E 38 ws | 62 | uh] os 5 : g z Es
: 3 2 a3 0,5 = a 7S ake! 3 =
By Dead WNW N Ww E
Reckoning 9°32’W 22 4.9’ | 21.3 | 36’ | 53°0’||-373% o°12’N_ _|41°19’

HEAD WINDS ALONG 53rp PARALLEL 123

DE August 13,1741. After Midday

D 3
5/3 z 5
° S — 3°
fot ||} 5 O
url 3%| Sw WNW |.
Seyi | iswiSs| wasn ||
ae ed\SSSw | We
BA ons. | Wwesy lk.
—5|1%| SW/S| WHN |
Tae ye EA
“7/13 | SSW | WN
S| 57 i irs Fi
en a ES WNWor | ale
“10 | 4% WNWW | 1%
“ar | 2% SY%E
“x | 2 a
1/3 |SW/w S/E
= 5 | a
Bsn 2% Piet Pees ae
ea a || SES line.
ree ee SE:
SRE Be |WIN 2 Wo
—? | 27 ee a
_o | 2 a a
9 | 2%
Io|3 | WSW | NwW4w ls.
1/3 | W/S NW/w | 1%
“t2 |2%| WSW S Tree
Variation 7)
of 2 2
Compass E ae
1% rhumb E = ay
™ &
By Dead NW /W
Reckoning 8°56’W | 19.5

Light wind, cloudy; carrying topsails, foresails,

mainsail, trysail, jib, and topmast-staysail.

Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
Topsail wind.
Took a reef in topsails.

Sounded in 150 fathoms, no bottom.
Reef-topsail wind, wet.
Made a starboard tack at I1:30.

Drizzly.

Hauled down jib.

Wind going down.

Set jib.

Came about on the port tack at 6:30.

Clear with passing fog.

At the end of the hour tacked to starboard.

In 24 hours From Vaua

2 ga 2
ao) of ~ Sy to

Sel Se) Fe) e | stel| 2 | 8

= = OU

lL ale fe a

N WwW E

8’ 17.7 | 28.7’ |53°08"| 372% 0°32’N_ |40°50’

124

LOG BOOK OF THE (ST) PET ERG

Q August 14, 1741.

After Midday

uw 2 19)
eae,
mI] M S
2 W/S
2%
Bae
4|2%
5|2% W
6 | 2%
7)|}2%| W/S
See
9|2%
TO |e2
Il | 2%
12 |2%
I|2%
23 \ | A
3) [MAA W
4|2%
Sues
6)/1%
G32
8] I
9 | 2% WwW
Io | 2%
Ir | 134
ined | 13
Variation
of
Compass

1% rhumb E

By Dead
Reckoning

Dist.

Pal
3
S
in
ra)
=
1%| Topsail wind, cloudy.
1%| Carrying topsails, staysails, foresail, mainsail,
and trysail.
1%
1%
1%| Foggy and wet.
1%| SW swell.
1%
Took a reef in main-topsail.
1%
1%
I%| Cloudy.
1%] Stars out.
1%
Topsail wind, drizzly, wet.
1%
1%| Let out reef in main-topsail.
2
Lowered jib.
Thick wet fog.
2 Clear with passing clouds.
2
2 Lowered two cannon with their carriages into
the hold; topgallantsail wind.
Drizzly.
In 24 hours From Vaua
n aa
_ F “gn Q 4
ee | ge} ee} @ i gee | § 2
A. 1a4é | asi a | 2es = 9
5 3 Ad rm r
WwW E
49.8’ II 18’ |52°18’| 372% 1°237S) 402327

HEAD WINDS ALONG 53rp PARALLEL 125

h August 15,1741. After Midday

5 Y 3
si/o| = 5 z
© & is ) o
ah ba S O S)
_1|1%|_WSW Ss “1%| Topsail wind, cloudy, wet.
_2 | 2% SW /W | NW/W4%w ____| Tacked to port.
3 | 2% I Carrying topsails, foresail, mainsail, trysail,
saline) ___| jib, and topmast-staysail.
eA | NW
_5 | 2%| WSW_| NW%W_ |__| Fog, wet
Gee 5 NW ats
a es ea NWN |e
_8|4%|_ W__| S/wW¥%Ww_|__| Starboard tack.
_9 | 2 a ae Fa
LO) || 63 ot Light wind.
“a1 | 234 SSyviiaa ie
"T2_ 23% roan Drizzly, wet.
|| S| aa a
2, 7 i a
| 222 Se ER EE
ge 24% 1% Let out a reef in topsails.
SOS 22) ea aaa
ae 1% | tery a a eRe a ees Topgallantsail wind.
5 | 7 ie ae
S | 22 ae a Sas
to 13 NN SUNN Topsail wind, fog, wet.
T2 | 2% | SW swell.
eels In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation $ 5 ae
Cotas Fe 39 Hs a8 HY] na 5 g # bb
1% rhumb E 2 m RIG co AO & Ee = 3
a an An a A) | ya ee 5 Q
By Dead SW /W S Ww E
Reckoning 3°21’W 26 13.2’ | 22.5 | 35.8’ |52°05'|| 36634 1°56’S) | 39°56’

126 LOG ‘BOOK OF THE “St PETER‘
is} August 16,1741. After Midday
a g a
B/ ei) 8 3 g
=| S S) 4
I | 2%] WSW NW ap at Topsail wind, cloudy, wet; carrying all sails
eet Loaee except main-staysail and trysail.
£2) Be Eee
_3|3 |SW/W| NwW/w [i _
5 | 3% WNW2N | 1_| Hauled down jib.
pel BES ; I
pair) CS ae (aie |
ali ‘i | Reef-topsail wind.
BETZ a
11 |2 | WSW NW | 1%
12 | 2% “1%4| Sounded but did not strike bottom.
_2|2% NW___| 1%| Hauled up jib.
_3 | 2%| SW/W NW/W_ | 1%4| Let out a reef in main-topsail.
42. |\Csw WNW | 1%
Sg WNW2EN | 1%4| Topsail wind.
613% 1%| Reef-topsail wind, fog, wet; took a reef in main-
mee | ee topsail.
ee Ee eee nin
AS Es eae eee ee
ee WNW ___|1_| Hauled down jib.
snOn Sl | | Clears chilly.
i | 24 a eWies y
I2|2% W/N 1%| Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
ee In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation = =
eee # 38 ts a8 ay oo 2 3 : v € ba
1% rhumb E 2 x aS 1A 55 S BEE I Q
Sa 5 Aw Aad} ed | os) 4 | ees] 8
By Dead NNW N WwW E
Reckoning 7°06’W | 62.3 | 54.2’ | 30.8 | 50.3’ |52°50’|| 353% o0°12’N_ |{39°06’

HEAD WINDS ALONG 53rp PARALLEL 127

¢€ August 17,1741. After Midday

I |3%4| SW/S

W/N 1%

3%| SW WNW'Y4W | 1%

313%

4|3%| SW/S

W/N 1%

5 | 234

6|2%| SW WNW'MW 1%

9]1I SW /W

Io | 1
Ir |1
12/1

in Ge

21;1%| W/S

3|1%

4|1%

5 | 1% Ww

611%

711%) W/N

8/1%

9 | 1%4| WNW
I0o|1%
Ir|/1%
I2|1%

Variation
of
Compass
1% rhumb E
By Dead
Reckoning

Reef-topsail wind, fog, wet.

Carrying reef-topsails, foresail, mainsail, trysail,

and staysails.

Took two reefs in topsails.

1%| Hauled down staysails.
WNW 1%| Furled topsails, strong gale.
S/EYE 5 Reefed foresail and mainsail and hove to under
mainsail, trysail, furled foresail.
5 Coming up to §S, falling off to SE by S.
5
5
S’%w “5 + Real storm.
5 Coming up to SSW, falling off to S by E.
5
5 Cloudy.
SSW 5
5 Coming up to SW by S, falling off to S by W.
SSW4W | 5 Coming up to SW,, falling off to S by W.
5
SW% 5 Coming up to SW by W,, falling off to SSW.
5 Gale, cloudy.
5 Clear with passing clouds.
5
In 24 hours | From Vaua
4 als Sri Er, 4
Ee |a8|8¢|68)82) ¢ | ste| 5 2
Rese adie el tel pee fee el ONE A
Ww E
WwW 7.0 0’ 7.0 11.7’ |52°59’l| 35134 o°12’N_ |138°54’

128 LOG BOOK‘ OF THE>'SP. PETER?
S August 18,1741. After Midday
s g 3
Beles || oe 2
} q = ) ca)
mM s O 4

“zy /qr | WNW SW%S 5% ea clear with passing clouds; carrying main-
sail.

es Ct ee ee en ee

3. ri “514| Reefed trysail.6s

41% “54| Coming up to SW by W, falling off to SSW.

ms “514| Wind falling off, heavy SW swell.

eco 1 eae eee ee eee

Tapas Ww SSW %W ioe Hauled up fore and main-topsails reefed.

3 6 ae es

on |Z SSW ew Topsail wind, cloudy.

“a1 |1%| W/S S/W4W 13 Moon out.

Oe eel eats | ae eee

I | 13% 2 Set fore-topsail.

“B12 “2 | Hauled up topmast-staysail.

Son ae (oe (ea ee

ae eres. es Topgallantsail wind, heavy swell.

5 | 134 S/W “2 | Cloudy.

eons, “1%| Let out two reefs in topsails.

aaa “1%4| Set jib.

TS] ae Te

ace wae SSW “114| Five men on the sick list.

“To | 2% SW ‘T | Clear with passing clouds.

ics | SW4W [1 Lowered into the hold two cannons with their
carriages.

TI2/2_ ~ | The assistant constable, Roselius, reported that
all is well in the powder magazine. Took an
observation: zenith distance 42°40’, declination
of sun 9°37’, latitude 52°17’.66

In 24 hours | From Vuaa
Variation a = era
ot z ie Ueceeas faeces mere eas) | “= 8
fmmee| 2 | Be) 88 | gb] Be | 2 vee | 2 | 8
é ra arriiee Mec fae Gea se. ~ =
By S/W w | E
Observation 2°20’W | 42.7 42’ 8.5 | 14.4’ }52°17’|| 353% 1°30’S)_|38°40’
65 Khitrov’s journal: “Hove to.”

66 Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 52°07’.

HEAD WINDS ALONG 53rp PARALLEL 129

% August 19,1741. After Midday

o >
pay [oad Se] z S
2 ° S a! Oo
) re a i) o
mi{s s O 4
“rz 11%| WNW SW “~%| Topgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
aoe 1% aA Carrying topsails, foresails, mainsails, trysail,
bu thos 1 bovis. jib, and topmast-staysail.
3|1% 1%
mat ny “W/N | SW/S_ | “7%4| Let out reefs in foresail and mainsail.
Bien ine EN swelll
_6|1%| WNW | SWS | 1%
ne aw. SSW | 2. ‘| Took a reef in fore-topsail.
_8|_ %|_W/S | NNW%W | 2_| Tacked to port at 8:30.
onl Ww NNW | 2_ | Hauled down jib.
TO a ee a (ea
“ir | %| WSW NW | 2__| Light wind.
2, aus SW /W NW 4w ed Drizzly and rainy.
I iy 2
Mio i ee
mush eK ~ | Clewed up mainsail and trysail.
4y Eo W/S___ |__| Lowered staysail.
ea 2% WwW pent Topgallantsail wind, rain.
SOMA TES Ww ~ | Set mainsail.
etl 5% "| Hauled up fore-topmast-staysail, set trysail.
_8 | 5%| NE fans
9|5% ~~ | Reef-topsail wind; let out reef in fore-topsail,
zs) i eee ___| hauled up spritsail and jib.
Io | 5%
feast
I2|4 NNE ~~ | Clear with passing clouds.
tye In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation = a
of 1 ae) : a are 22 3 G .
anes Be ee ee lee (sen) sale sce 1) 28
1% rhumb E 5 aN Aw a as ey A ge = S
By Dead W/N N Ww E
Reckoning r°2r’W | 43.6 Tal 43 66’ |52°24'|| 342% TerTo;S) B37s34¢

130 COG BOOK(OF THE: si PEGE Re

a August 20, 1741. After Midday

z y 3
= eal ea 5 2
° =] = (o) o
ata Way S O a
aie 3% NNE W Dag Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carry-
ing all sails.
‘alae <= |. ea
nes 1% ee See aaa Topgallantsail wind.
247) 234) NWN) WIS ae
25 1% “| Furled spritsail.
_6/1% ____r| WSW2Ww “1 | Sounded in 180 fathoms, no bottom.
are E: 2 ales
8 7, ee ~ NNW |2_ Heavy SW swell.
wees ——
e748 Fo 2
10 4 = 2 Sounded, no bottom.
11 |r |SW/W| NW/w |31%
a. 1% bee Light wind, clear with passing clouds.
meta |e2 WSW NW ie Topgallantsail wind and unsteady.
2| 2% WwW NNW ae Passing clouds.
a. i ee Cees ee
_4|1%| W/N N/W. Jia
eo 1% W NNW ree Wind and weather as before.
m08 1K NW SW “1%4| Tacked to starboard.
_7|1_|NW/W|_ SW/W_|1¥%
_9 | I’) WNW SW%W_ | 1%| Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
Jo} 1% 1% Passing clouds.
ae oe SW “1%| SW swell.
12 | 13%4| W/N SW/S |1%
In 24 hours | From Vaua
Variation a a
of a oe sell war fae 1 2
wgvembE| 3 | 2a |#8 | 59/28] 3 | ste] 8 S
4 5 Ae A Q P as acm o ns
By Dead W/N N WwW E
Reckoning 2°23'’N 21 4.9’ | 20.2 | 33.8’ |52°290’|| 337% 1°04’S- | 37°0”

HEAD WINDS ALONG 53rp PARALLEL

Q August 21, 1741.

After Midday

131

5 y 3
| Se Eee
) f= a ) o
oh al S O 4
Aran ea WwW SSW 1% Light wind, cloudy, heavy SW swell; carrying
topsails, foresail, mainsail, trysail, and topmast
bie Sak staysail.
2 | 1% 1%
a eam SSW4W | 1%
411%!) W/N Sw/S_ | 1%
Pree Bry WwW SSW _1%| Topgallantsail wind.
Tl ae S/W%W_| 1%4| Drizzly.
“7 | 134| WNW N _1%| Tacked to port.
~g|2%| NW WSW _1%| Tacked to starboard.
ar “2th WSWS | 1% Took reef in topsails.
“ro | 1% BA
a1 |z | W/N SW/S__| 1%4| Light and shifting wind.
0 07 a SSW 14| Sounded, no bottom.
yn ee S/Wu4W | 1%
“2 |2% N/W%W _ | 1%4| Tacked to port.
en as 1% Hauled down jib.
Tee nes SSW 4% W 1% Starboard tack at 4:30.
5 | 1%| W/N SW/S__ | 1%
eon: W S/W 4%w 1% Light wind and unsteady, drizzly, wet.
_7|2%| W/S | NNW¥%W |1_| Port tack.
gs | 2% NW /N I __| Topsail wind.
mou 2%| WwW SSW _I¥%| Starboard tack.
“10 | 2% NNWW | 1_| Port tack.
“ar | 1%| W/S | NWYN [a
Shoe oe I Topsail wind, cloudy, SW swell.
In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a 5
of = ne = he Hele 2
compas | 2 | 85/83 | se | 2) o | ges | §
1% rhum D
cj z ae AH ae as a] Age a
By Dead W Ss W E
Reckoning 4°16’S 13.5 pid 13.4 21’ |52°28')) 334% TLO7S

“
132 LOG BOOK OF TEE St. PEPeky
h August 22,1741. After Midday
ina)
M 4g Ge) 2 S
3 | © a 3 o
CS) rs Rel ) o
ra, 3 O 4
I | 33%) WSW NW Topsail wind, drizzly, wet.
2 | 23% Carrying topsails, foresail, mainsail, trysail, and
staysails.
3 | 2%| SW/W NWuwW |
413% SW swell.
ea AVEY oe INE <
6 | 23% SW NW /W4w
GAVE SW /W NW %W I Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, wet.
a el (eae Pee
eS a (CR) 2) (eS
Io/1%4| W/S SY%wW 1% Pishe wind, sounded but no bottom, starboard
tack.
II Furled sails and hove to under mainsail and
I S/W 51%4| trysail because of darkness and danger.
12 Coming up to SSW, falling off to S.
rT || i WwW 5%
2|1%| WSW NWuUN Set topsails, foresail, and staysails; tacked to
port.67
3 | 2 NW /N I
4|2% NWYUN I Sounded, no bottom.
iB) 7 (epee | Ses
6|13%4| W/S NW //N Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
7\7 4%| WNW N a 1%| Came about on starboard tack at 7:30.
8 | 134] NW/W SW /W I%| Let out reefs in topsail.
9 | 134| WNW : SW 1%| Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
Io | 2 NW/W| SW%w 1%
Ir | 134 1%] SW swell.68
I2 | 2%| WNW SW
: In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a =
of = ae : +5 are : Fay ir j
Compass | 5 oe) ee | oe | Se] 8 | ses : 2
I% rhum a ~ me Q ° = B bal a °
me oP aie Ma lies Aon | oe ©
By Dead NW/N N WwW E
Reckoning ToA7TIW. 3257 |\:26:6" 19 31’ |52°55'l| 32634 0°03’N_ 136°08’

67 Khitrov’s journal:
tacked to port.”

68 Khitrov’s journal:
Siberian soldier.”

“At the beginning of this hour we got under way again and

“On sick list, two sailors, two grenadiers, two marines, one

HEAD WINDS ALONG 53rp PARALLEL

133

iS August 23, 1741. After Midday

az g 8
Bale |. 3 5 é
° Ss es ° co)
m|M S O a
ca a 2% WNW SW “134| Reef-topsail wind, clear with passing clouds;
took a reef in topsails.
4|2% Sey
5 |2%|NW/W| SW/W_ |__| W swell.
SGN i227 Ten
— FeBA SW14W | 2. | Took two reefs in topsails.
mSulia ea
mor Tae “2 | Topgallantsail wind and unsteady.
“to | 1%4| WNW Sw “2 | Heavy SW swell.
“ar | 2%| W/N | SSWHW | 13%
Cen ee W SSW “2 | Clear with passing clouds.
nal eA “w/S |NNW4Ww ~~ |"Tacked to port.
~2|1%| WSW NWN | 114| Let out two reefs in topsails.
Wen tres NW pen
Cea 2 | SW ~ | Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
“Ss” = SW /S NW%W |__| Topsail wind, drizzly, wet.
6 | 2% Nw/w |
ee 2% SSW “| Let out third reef in topsails.
melias4 eeu
9 | 3% WNW |
cron A%y aa Topsail wind, drizzly, rainy.
a1 |4_| SW/S |WNWyYw| |
I2]|4 SW /W NW /W “a Took a reef in topsail, weather as before.
foe In 24 hours From Vaua
ea : Ser hes ling | loaner 2
promises | a 26 |8e |) 35 | Se] ae | sts 5 E
I’ a oe AH a as 4 hte 3 5)
By Dead W/N N W E
Reckoning 4°50’/W 38 Ofte |F37-4 61’ |53°01r’|| 317% o°19’N__|135°07”

134

LOG BOOK ‘OF ‘THE “STVPEVERS

¢ August 24,1741. After Midday

a 2 2
S/3o| 3% 5 2
° =I Red {o} Oo
Go feat S O 4
~1 | 4%|SW/W|_ NW/W_|1_| Topsail wind.
2|4% “rt | Took two reefs in fore-topsail.
~3 | 4% NW/W¥4W| 1
os 4 ‘I | Reef-topsail wind; reefed mainsail and foresail,
| | nauled down jib. ee
5 22 ee ee
ION 4% “| Took two reefs in main-topsail.
~7 |3%| SW “r | Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
Sal eq. 6 i
amigas SSE “2 | Starboard tack.
“To | 134 “2 | Because it was not safe to go fast at night we
clewed up the mainsail and hauled down the
el staysails.
Sa es eee ie
Erg BrZs ~~ | Sounded in 90 fathoms, no bottom.
Paes
ior 3% SSEYE in, At end of the hour tacked to port.
a7 334 SSW WwW eee Let out two reefs in main-topsail.
279 CG een eae eee
mn 3% I Heavy rain.
6|3%| SW/S W/N eieo4 Reef-topsail wind and unsteady.
7 |4_|SW/W|NW/WYwW| 2
a0 4 “| Took two reefs in main-topsail.
9|3% NW/W |1_ | Sun out; took three reefs in topsails.
“to | 334| SW WNW |i a
Seria rte NW%W | | Reef-undersail wind, furled sails and hove to
hae 5% under mainsail and trysail.
Tr From I1 to 12, coming up to WNW, falling
off to NW by N.69
— In 24 hours From Vaua
Waration a 3 2 S a 7 ms
Compass | & | #8 /ee| do |22| 2 | sef| & | #
1% rhumb E ‘S fal A fal.) As nay abs a 8
ms £ é-| RO m4
By Dead NW /N WwW E
Reckoning 5°22’W 49.6 | 38.5’ | 31.3 53’ |53°390’|| 307 2°06’N_ 134,14

69 Khitrov’s journal gives an observation for latitude, 53°37’.

HEAD WINDS ALONG 53rp PARALLEL 135

6 August 25,1741. After Midday

o pal
Me 2g ko} Z iS
=] ie} < Ss o
(e) f=] Re ° o)
mx s O es
pare TK WSW SY%E “5% Gale, clear with passing clouds.70
7s nar Ba Carrying trysail and main-staysail.
aan Trad 5% Heavy squalls and waves wash over the deck.
5 |/1% 5% Coming up to S by W, falling off to SSE.
en he 5%
7 )21%| W/S SYW | 5%
Srshinez 5%
~~?” 1% “5% Gale, squalls.
“to | 1% “5%
Fea bs 5 14| Clear and chilly.
“l2_ cree 5% Coming up to SSW, falling off to S by E.
mired || 8%
“2 | 1% eA Rain an
2 2 | a a ee
4 [2% 54
aca Al W S/W4%w Gale and heavy sea.
ies ns 3% Hauled down main-staysail, set up mainsail.
ies, 1% A Wind going down.
an ee 5%
on TOA 54%| Coming up to SW by §S, falling off to S.
To | 1% Sz
Th | 1% elias Strong reef-undersail wind, clear with passing
clouds; began to count 1% rhumb asthe varia-
eames ee i tion: of compass.
“r2|1% oe
ered In 24 hours From Vaua
Mariation 5 2 a a Tee iS
Compass g ge | Hs a2) ue 2 : Ee g EY
1% rhumb E i aM | AS | AM | AM] A | 255 = S
= E Cae: ad A
By Dead SE/S S) E E
Reckoning 4°40/E 29.6 | 23.2’ | 18.4 | 30.6’ |53°16’|| 313 r°or’N_ |34°45’

70 Khitrov’s journal: “Hove to.” | ee
71 Khitrov’s journal states that nine were on the sick list,

136 LOG: BOOK OF THE Siz PETE ke

& August 26,1741. After Midday

2 2
Ww 2 eo] ee 3
a e) re 3 D
° a Re! fe) )
aoe (a S Se) 4
16 | (Me W S/W 534| Strong undersail wind, squalls, clear with pass-
ing clouds.
2/1 5%4| Carrying mainsail and trysail; coming up to
SW by S, falling off to S by E.
pars) Sg ames | Steen ee es
A Ee | ees eee
5 %| W/S S%wW 5%] Wind falling off, passing clouds; coming up to
SSW, falling off S by E.
6 4 5%
7 a 5%
8 % 514| Topsail wind, cloudy.
9 “ 5%
Io % 5%
II 4%) WSW NW At 11:30 hauled up topsails reefed and foresails
and made a port tack.72
i2|1% NW %w BD
iDEA 2
25) 236 2

Be SW /W NW 34 W 2 Drizzly; let out second reef in main-topsail and
first in fore-topsail.

4|2% 1% | Hauled up topmast-staysail.
5 | 2%| WSW NW 1%] Reef-topsail wind, cloudy.
Oulrs 1%
7 | 2% 1%] Light rain.
8) 2% 1%| Took second reef in main-topsail.
9|3%| W/S NWuYUN 1%] Took three reefs in fore-topsail.
10 |3% NW /N I Hauled down staysails.
Tere) |} 33 W NNW I Hauled up main-topmast-staysail; clear with
heavy passing clouds, SW swell.
12 | 334 a
In 24 hours Frem Vaua
Variation
of =e re nee 2 + op & a “s 3 ob
poe | 8 | Ae Pee | ea | he | 8 | ees | Se
4 ac ao
x ae Salsas AS ey =
By Dead N N W E
Reckoning Be530W. 29.6 | 29.5’ 2 37) |sscai5¢||| srr 2°21’N_ |34°42’

72 Khitrov’s journal: “Got under way again.”

LANDWARD FOR WATER

137

De August 27, 1741. After Midday

Dn Y a
ae: ae:
° a onl rs) oO
ote aks 5 S) &
erairse |W N/wWu4w {i
Beier)
3 -2h%| NW/W| SW/W 1%
~4|1%| WNW SW
| nae Swus |2%
a an ea
a a Swale
8 |13%4| W/N Sw/S alfa
WWonli13% 2%
To | 13% Tare
ies x 2%
T2 | 2% 2
Tan || aes 2%
235. | co a LE ES
2 aS em ee 7)
5 | 134 ue
6/0 a a
_7|3_|WNW] SWS [2
813 “1%
Bou Es A a | NG WW
aronlGa|oe al No |.
“tan || 752 | ne SE a UE
~ F205) || ce [ce (RE

Variation
of
Compass
1% rhumb E

By Dead
Reckoning

2
5
3

Ss

%

SW
2°07’S

73 Khitrov’s journal:

that which we agreed upon, a copy of which is here attached.”

Dist.

Reef-topsail wind,

wet.

Starboard tack, squalls.

clear with passing clouds,

Took third reef in main-topsail.
Hauled down staysails, topsails, and furled.

Hauled up main-topsails reefed.
Reef-topsail wind.

Stars out.

Furled main-topsail.

Set main and fore-topsails reefed.

Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.

sails.

Tacked to port.73

I1.5

a
Ee
| | s
S) Ww
8.4’ 7.8

eee eee ene a —————Eee
Hauled up topmast-staysail, let out reef in top-

5 oc ,
£8 z ob
255 E 8
= OU ~
AG 2
E
310 1°59’N__|34°30”

“Together with the Captain Commander _we signed today

(See next page.)

138 LOG BOOK OF -THE “ST. PETER?

August 27, 1741

DECISION To LAND IN ORDER To TAKE ON WATER “4

Captain Commander Bering, Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Khitrov, and
Navigator Eselberg met to talk over the decision, which we with our petty officers
came to on August 10, relative to our returning to Avacha harbor. Our decision
at the time to start back, though it was yet early, was based on the fear that west
winds would begin to blow and hinder us. Since then this has happened, and now
we have of the water taken in America only 25 barrels, which is not enough for
returning to Avacha if the contrary west winds continue to blow.

The American coast which we last saw was between latitude 55° and 56° N, and
according to our reckoning it is not more than 60 German miles from us. There-
fore we, the undersigned, have unanimously agreed for safety’s sake to go nearer
the land with a view to finding good anchorage where we might take on water
enough to last until our return so that in case of head winds we should not suffer
extremely.

BERING

Lieutenant WAXEL

Fleet Master SOFRON KHITROV
Navigator ANDREYAN ESELBERG

and petty officers.
% Khitrov’s journal.

LANDWARD FOR WATER

Q August 28, 1741.

139

After Midday

|

——— | ———_ |__| |

2 a
b= 5
2 v
i) ca)
oO 4
N/E %4| Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; let out two
reefs in fore-topsail.
I I
SWS “a Tacked in succession.
N/E 1%
%| Carrying topsails, foresail, mainsail, trysail, and
staysail.
1%%| Took all the reefs in topsails.
1%| Clear with heavy passing clouds, squalls, rain.
%
4%
NNW 1%| Furled topsails.
1%| Strong and cold topsail wind, squalls, passing clouds
and rain.
3
3 Heavy passing clouds and rain.

| —— |

» i) ew),

2) ce

im | M 5

1 |3%| W/N

2 2%) WNW

3] 5 W/N

4|5

5 | 4%

6/4

Ta

8 3% W

9 |2

10 | 1%

Ir] 1

m2 |t_

ma 1%

2)1%

3) 1%

4)1%| W/N

Smiles:

6 | 3%

7|3%

8 | 4

914 WwW

to | 3%

ite |||)

I2|4

Variation
of

Compass

1% rhumb E

y
Observation

2%| During the night we heaved the lead but struck no
bottom.
2%
2%) Topsail wind, cloudy.
2%} Set topsails, hauled up staysails and jib.
%
1%4| Let out all reefs in topsails.
1%
I Clear.
%
%| Hauled up spritsail.
¥%4| Clear with passing clouds. Took an observation:
zenith distance 48°14’, declination of the sun 5°51’,
latitude 54°05’, variation of the compass 1% rhumb
easterly because at noon the observation was S by
EYE.
In 24 hours From Vaua
ve) : : . 00 : o im)
aoa ee S| S| eee | 2 |
) om OU
EO amma taiie eae ale r a
N E E
41.7 | 28’ 31_1 52.7’ |54°05’l| 31444 | 3°14’N_ |35°23’

7% Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 54° 07’.

140 LOG BOOK OF HES. PETERZ

h August 20,1741. After Midday

w >
»] 3 co) 2 g
= ° Ss = vo
° =] Heal }° oO
eft [as s O a
I | 2% W N Topgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carry-
ing topsails, staysails, and lower sails.
EIS |S Is ee es | eed ie
BN ec ee) ee (ee ee
4/4 Light rain.
Bes Squalls, rain; took a reef in topsails, furled spritsail.
OLS eee ee ee
7 |3%| SSW
8/3 Wind freshening; took two and three reefs in topsails.
p90) Sone | ee es ee es ee eee
Io uy Heavy passing clouds; furled foresail and topsails
and hove to under trysail and main-staysail because
of the night time.
ele |
reap |e Clewed up trysail.
Ealet2| ee | EEE EEE
2\/1% SW During the night we sounded with a go fathom lead
line but found no bottom.
3 | 1% a ee
4 yy Sounded in 75 fathoms, bottom of sand, clay, and in
places gravel.
5|1% NW /N Topgallantsail wind, heavy passing clouds.
6|3%| WSW NW Sounded and got 73 fathoms, set the foresail and top-
sails, and let out a reef in each.
pt S74) eT eee
813% SW Let out two and three reefs in topsails, sighted
many islands of which the most easterly was NE
about 6 German miles.76
9/3 Depth 65 fathoms. The easterly island bore NW by
N about 4 German miles.77
Io |4% Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; depth 55,
50, 45 fathoms, sandy bottom.
nr) | 3s WwW N/E%E
Ton e2 Light wind, weather as before; depth the same.
The easterly island bears NE by E 5 German miles,
the westerly island WNW%W 2% German miles;
between them are 5 or 6 islands which seem to be
neither very high nor very large.78
be In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation * a =
of so} i 5 ee 5 a “= og fe) Si
Compass, | EF | ee lee] se) 22] ¢ | ste | & 2
I’ rhum = 5 AH as ay oy = ce)
z | 5 Ae | Pe Aét 7 R
By Dead N N E E
Reckoning 3°57’E 54 _|53.7'|1 3.7 | 5.8’ 154°59’l| 31434 | 5°50’N_ |35°20'

76 Shumagin Islands. Khitrov’s journal: “Saw many islands of which the southern-

most bore NE.”

77 Khitrov’s journal: “Looked for islands teward the N; the last bore NW by N.”
73 Khitrov’s journal: “Southernmost island NE by E. Northernmost WNW %4W.”

LANDING ON SHUMAGIN ISLANDS 141

©: August 30,1741. After Midday

o >
u £ ue} 2 Ss
3 ° q 3 o
° S = ic) Oo
ae | s O 4
IJi1%] W/S NNE Light wind, clear; carrying all sails except spritsail
and main-staysail. On sounding we got from 40 to
15 fathoms.
2!) 5 | een
3 ]2 N I was sent in the yawl into a small bay about %
mile from us.79
2G) ES ee oe
5 ]1 That bay does not offer safe anchorage because of
See pee |). ithe rocks ‘and! gravelly bottom 20
6} 2 NYE I was sent again on the same boat to find anchorage
in the strait between the islands.
aNd I NN 82
8 es Dropped the small bower anchor among the islands
in 20 fathoms of water. It was not safe to go farther
because of the darkness. For the same reason we
could not get our bearings. I returned to the ship
and reported that I found a good place for anchor-
ing which was secure from many winds and hada
good bottom and was less than % mile from us.
Ao pe A A A RE ees
Io
Ir We made ready the spare anchor in case of need.
12 Clear with passing clouds.
I W Light wind, cloudy and chilly.
2
33 Fire on an island NNE about 1% mile away.83
Gh cy EE a5 Vn LAP ad RR id oe ee eae ee Da Mealy: ls
5 We sent the longboat in charge of the navigator with
Io casks to bring fresh water.
OF cme
7 The navigator returned and reported that he found
a lake about 100 fathoms from shore. We took on
board the ro full casks and sent back 16 empty casks.
At this hour we took the bearings of the island where
we were at anchor;84 one point of the large island
bore S%W 2 miles, the second point N by E 1%
mile, the small island with its projections NE“%E
1% mile. The small but high island near us bore
E by S % mile or % mile. The boat returned from
shore with 10 barrels of water.
eS)
9
Io
Il Khitrov went in the boat to the island on which fire
was seen, and with him went the constable, one
sailor, one cannoneer, one interpreter, one armed
soldier. The Captain Commander gave them in-
structions what to do and in addition gave them
various articles such as tobacco, small bells, boxes,
needles. red cloth, mirrors, and knives.85
12
ches In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation = a Be
of Q 5 6 oo =“ gD c .
{Compass E gs | #3 oe we | 3 SES 5 2
1% rhumb a aMae Q° = ay a )
a ae Srila ao* = 5
By Dead NNE N E E
Reckoning 4°33’E 10.6 | 9.4’ 4.8 7.7" 155°08’|| 315% 6°06’N_ |35°37’

(Footnotes 70-85 at bottom of next page.)

142 LOG BOOK OF THE “ST. PETER;

August 31,1741. After Midday

n v is
Dn
s/o] 3 5 2
° =| i ° v
sete |e s O i
I S/W Light wind, clear with passing clouds; 10 more casks
of water brought on board; the sick were taken
ashore.
2)
RAR | (RIOR (UNerR sacar gee el
Ae a ES dightwain, 0 eee
_S|__|__ |_| Phe boat returned with 10 more casks of water.”
6 ——
eat | coe Ss |__| 10 empty casks sent ashore.
8 ——
9
Io S The quartermaster returned to the ship with ro more
casks and reported that the sailor Nikita Shumagin
died on shore. He was buried on the island, which
was named Shumagin after him.86 The small boat
was tied astern.
II
I2
I
2
3 31 casks were filled.
4 During the night we had a lantern on the gaif so
Bet | Gee ce Khitrov could see it.
on |e SE fe ee Sent the boat for more water.
6 E
7 II more casks were brought from shore.
8
9 Sent 10 empty casks ashore.
10 Wind freshening, payed out 34 of a cable.
II Io more casks taken on board with which we filled
if the casks in the hold.
12

85 Khitrov’s journal: “He was buried on the island, and over his grave a wooden
cross was erected.” The name Shumagin is now given to the whole group of islands, and
the island which used to be called Shumagin is now known as Nagai.

Footnotes to Log of August 30

79 Khitrov’s journal: “Lowered the small yawl and sent the assistant navigator in
search of good anchorage.”

8 Khitrov’s journal: “Took in all sail, dropped the anchor in 24 fathoms, and
payed out % cable. The assistant navigator returned and reported that he failed to
find a good place to anchor. Put over the longboat into the water.”

_ 81 Khitrov’s journal: “Weighed anchor, set sails, and steered between the islands
inte the bay, getting as we went along 24, 25, 20, 15 fathoms, bottom gravelly and
shelly.

82 Khitrov’s journal: “Went in tow; and, when we came within % mile of one of
the islands, we anchored in 20 fathoms and payed out % cable. Because of the fog we
could not get our bearings.”

83 Khitrov’s journal: “Saw a fire on one of the islands about 2% miles away on the
rhumb NNE.” d

84 Between Near Island and Nagai Island. This anchorage is marked on Khitrov’s
map, reproduced in Fig. 11, by an inverted anchor at the 19 and 20 fathom soundings.
Khitrov’s journal: “When fog cleared it was possible to get bearings: the southern point
of the large island bore S!4W; the northern point of the same island bore N by E; the
small island with its projections N by £14E; the southern point of the island where we
are at anchor bore E by S.”

8 Khitrov’s journal: “Captain Commander sent me to the island_ on which fire
was seen and which is from us NNE. In case I found human beings I was told to be
kind to them and was given for distribution various presents, namely % pound Chinese
tobacco, 5 copper oells, 160 beads, 20 needles, 2 arshins red material, 5 small mirrors,
and 5 knives. I went in the small yawl and took with me 1 assistant constable, I sailor,
I cannoneer, 1 soldier, 1 Chukchi, and 1 Koriak interpreter.”

LANDING ON SHUMAGIN ISLANDS 143

S September 1, 1741. After Midday

—_ | — | ————— | ————————————__ | ——_

Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.

Boat sent ashore with empty casks.

Wind freshening; tightened the topmast shrouds

because they were weak, greased the topmasts, over-

hauled the ropes. The boat returned with the water.

Altogether we have taken on 52 casks of water. The

boat was sent back for the sick and others who were
ashore, and when it returned we took it on deck and
lashed it secure.

Storm; made ready the best bower anchor.

The yawl on which Khitrov went has not returned,

probably because it could not get off shore.

Heavy fog, wet; had a lantern on the gaff all night. "i

I2 men on the sick list.
Gale blowing.

Took two reefs in topsails; and furled on the yards,

reefed foresail, and made ready for whatever might
come.

3 inches of water in the hold.

144

LOG. BOOK OR RHE Sil PEG Re

S September 2,1741. After Midday

NE Reef-topsail wind, cloudy and rainy.

wW

as

on

an

Wind going down.
4 inches of water in the hold.

I

oo

E Unsteady wind.

NS NEE EE —————————
Began to warp the anchor because it was dangerous
to remain where we were.

Weighed anchor, set the sails, and started for the
island in order to protect ourselves from the wind.
From 6 o’clock until 8:20 we sounded as we went
along and got 20, 17, I5, 13 fathoms; rhumb E by
NN; advanced 34 of a German mile.

Thick wet fog.

Dropped anchor in 16 fathoms, & took in the sails,
payed out 34 of a cable; bottom sandy. Because
of the fog could not get the bearings.

Do) Gens ON ee ok Se EEE
Put over the boat into the water, sea going down.

Soy Sent the boat ashore for Khitrov.%8

87 This second anchorage is the one marked on Khitrov’s map (Fig. 11) by an anchor
lying on its side at the 16 fathom sounding.

88 Khitrov’s journal: “The longboat was put into the water and sent for me on
Shumagin Island because I could not get on board in the small boat, owing to the gale.
High sea going down. Bearings from anchor: S point Shumagin Island S by W, N
point of the same island N %E, the N point of the two islands from Shumagin NNE.”

LANDING ON SHUMAGIN ISLANDS 145

On September 3, 1741. After Midday

” y a

Se hae 5 2

) S a } o

arf fae S O a

I SSE Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; let go the

Jian spare anchor and payed out % of a cable.

|| se BS) iS el

eS |e | See re

| ee Fog, wet.

5] } __}:~ Putt the anchor which we raised in its proper place.

6 Wind has shifted, squally; saw two fires on shore not
far from one another, and we decided that one was
made by Khitrov and the other by the party sent to
him. Heavy sea running; lowered the main and
fore yards, payed out % of a cable on the small bower
anchor and on the spare anchor, made ready the best
bower anchor. A regular gale blowing.

wa OF | fe VP
asi
poe Te eee Oe
Io
SEO SSW Terrific squalls.

i2 Payed out 34 of a cable on spare anchor.

oth) Ce pire

2 Wind going down a bit.

pe S| eae | ae |e

4 Topsail wind.

5 SW /S Weighed the spare anchor, heaved in cable of small
bower.

6 SW Made fast the best bower anchor at 34 of a cable as
before.

7 WSW Khitrov and his party returned, but the yawl was
left ashore. He reported that he could not bring
it because of the heavy surf. He also made a report
of his expedition to the Captain Commander.89

oS Ny ES |
wD | a a A Re eer ee ee

10 W Took the boat on deck, weighed the small bower
anchor.

Tol Hoisted the sails and made for the open sea, for we
were afraid to remain here longer waiting for fair
winds. We sounded and had 16, 18, 19, 20 fathoms;
course ENE; bottom small rocks, sand, and shells.

12 |

89 Khitrov’s journal: “I reported to the Captain Commander that while I was on
the island to which I was sent I saw a fireplace and many other signs of human beings
but no human beings themselves. I sighted the mainland back of the islands about 12
miles away.”

146 LOG BOOK OF THE “ST. PETER”

Q September 4, 1741. Afiery Midday

Light wind, clear with passing clouds.

Reef-topsail wind, weather as before.

Realizing that we could not get out and that it was

not safe to remain under sail during the night, we
dropped the small bower anchor in 20 fathoms 9
and paved out 3% of acable. Bottom sandy and
shelly.

Light wind; took all the reefs in topsails to be ready

for whatever might happen; but, in the meantime,
furled topsails.

Heaved in the small bower cable to %.

Put the boat into the water, and I was sent to ex-

amine what seemed a bay in NE in order to find
shelter from whatever wind may come along.

I returned to the ship and reported that what we

sighted was not a bay but an open passage and that
the depth was 15 and 16 fathoms.

Weighed the small bower anchor, set the sails, and

steered W; let out all the reefs in topsails. From
8 to I1 o’clock we sounded as we went along and
had 15, 20, and 25 fathoms.

Topsail wind, clear.

Came about on the starboard tack, because we could

not get around the island with the wind as it stood,
and went easterly.

90 Off Bird Island. This third anchorage is marked on Khitrov’s map (Fig. 11) by an
anchor at the end of the arrow pointing north.

FIRST MEETING WITH NATIVES

147

h September 5, 1741. After Midday

Knots
Wind
Course
Leeway

Tn SS a a as

mn

ee es

On

ee ee ee

x

oo

SS ee eS

ve)

— | | eee

Io

It

I2

E/S

ee
— | —_—__ | —__ —

ee eS ee EOE

12 SSW
(Footnotes 91-93 on next page.)

Topgallantsail wind, sunshine;
staysails, and lower sails.

On our track we get 16, 13, 26, 30, 38, 25, 22 fathoms;

carrying topsails,

gravelly bottom, in places shelly; rhumb E by N.
Se ee CEE EEE Ya Neie

It is clear that we cannot get out to sea because of
the contrary and shifting winds.

We sailed back to the island where we were the night

before and let go the small bower anchor in 21
fathoms, bottom sandy, and payed out 3 cable.
We heard the shout of human voices,and a little later
two baidarkas,9! one man in each, paddled towards
us and shouted as before.92 Our interpreter called
to them in Chukchi and Koriak, but they could not
understand him and pointed to their ears. After
this they went ashore, and we followed them in the
ship’s boat in charge of Waxel, who took with him
different things to give as presents. When he
returned he reported that they would not accept his
presents and that they tried to drag our boat on
shore and detain our interpreter, but Waxel did not
know the reason for their actions. Under the cir-
cumstances he gave orders to fire from two guns.
At the discharge they fell on the ground and let
go of the interpreter. One of the natives was offered
a drink, and after tasting it he spat it out. Because
of the heavy surf our men could not go ashore. In
the end our men had to cut the cable in order to get
away.93

Fire is seen on the island.

Of the two men who were near the ship one stood
closer and the other farther from the ship. The
Captain Commander ordered that they be given
4™% arshins of red cloth, 2 mirrors, 3 strings of
Chinese beads, small bells. These things were tied
on a board and lowered into the water. He accepted
these presents with pleasure. He threw on deck
2 polished rods; one had tied to it falcon’s feathers,
and the other a bird’s claw. After this they left us
and waved their hands to shore. Waxel followed
them at 7 o’clock as has already been noted.

Heavy squalls so that we were obliged to lower the

main and fore yards.
Topsail wind.
Drizzlv.

Warped the small bower to % cable, put the yards

back in their places.
Light wind, foggy.

148 LOG ‘BOOK. OF THE “Si PERE

Footnotes to Log of September 5

91 A baidar (Russ. baidéra) is a large open_skin boat able to accommodate a number
of passengers and a considerable amount of freight. A baidarka (Russ. baiddrka) is a
small skin boat covered all over, except the round openings at the top to admit the paddler
or paddlers (cf. Fig. 11). The baidar is related to the Eskimo umiak, the baidarka to the
kayak. Baidars may be seen today in the Bering Sea and baidarkas in the Aleutian Islands.
When the Russians first came in contact with the Aleuts the baidarkas were all of the
“one-hatch” type, that is, large enough for one person. This type has almost entirely
disappeared and has been succeeded by the “two-hatch” baidarka, and occasionally one
may even see a “three-hatch” baidarka. These little boats are very light and strong,
and the Aleuts are very skillful in handling them.

Sauer, who visited Unalaska in 1790, has left a full description of these skin boats:
“The baidars, or boats, of Oonalashka, are infinitely superior to those of any other island.
If perfect symmetry, smoothness, and proportion constitute beauty, they are beautiful;
to me they appeared so beyond anything that I ever beheld. I have seen some of them
as transparent as oiled paper, through which you could trace every formation of the
inside, and the manner of the native’s sitting in it; whose light dress, painted and plumed
bonnet, together with his perfect ease and activity, added infinitely to its elegance.
Their first appearance struck me with amazement beyond expression.” (Martin Sauer:
An Account of a Geographical and Astronomical Expedition to the Northern Parts of
Russia . . . by Commodore Joseph Billings, London, 1802, p. 157.)

92 This was a form of greeting more or less common to all the natives of the north-
west coast of America. Cook met with it in Nootka Sound. “On their first coming,
they generally went through a singular mode of introducing themselves. They would
paddle, with all their strength, quite round both ships, a Chief, or other principal person
on the canoe, standing up with a spear or some other weapon in his hand and speaking,
or rather hollowing, all the time.” (James Cook: A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean, London,
1794, Vol, 25 Ds 27/35) ‘

93 Khitrov’s journal: “At 4:30 we heard shouts of human voices from the island
alongside of which we were at anchor.

“At 6 o’clock two baidarkas were seen coming towards us, one man in each boat, and
when they were within 50 fathoms of the ship they stopped and called in their own
tongue, but our Chukchi and Koriak interpreters could not make out what they said
nor could they make themselves understood when they shouted to them [the islanders],
because they pointed to their ears and to the island. On the island people were also
calling. One of the two men just mentioned paddled up close to the ship but not quite
alongside. At the order of Captain Commander Bering we threw overboard a piece of
board on which were tied a number of presents, namely, 5% arshins of red material,
2 small mirrors, 2 strings of Chinese iron beads, 20 small copper bells and 5 [knives?].
The American received these things with pleasure and in return threw to us as a present
two thinly shaped rods to one of which were tied bird’s feathers and to the other bird’s
claws with feathers on them. The feathers we identified as those of the falcon. When
we had taken these things they paddled away for the shore and called to us and pointed
to the land. We lowered the longboat into the water for the purpose of going ashore.
In the boat was sent, by the order of the Captain, Lieutenant Waxel, who took with
him several members of the crew, (who were armed), a few presents, and Russian liquor.
He was gone about two hours, returning at 8 o’clock and reporting to the Captain Cant:
mander that when he came to the island on which were the Americans he offered them
presents but they would not take them. He offered one of the islanders a glass of liquor,
but as soon as he tasted it he spat it out and returned the glass. The lieutenant allowed
several of the men, among them being the interpreter, to land; but he himself remained
in the boat which he anchored out a little distance from shore, for owing to the strong
wind and submerged rocks near the beach it was dangerous to approachit. The Americans
led the interpreter to their camp and gave him whale blubber, but when he attempted
to leave them to return to the boat, nine of the Americans seized him and would not
let him go, which shows that they regarded him as one of their own people even though
he is a Kamchadal by origin. In order to free the interpreter an order was given to fire
off several guns in the air, and when that was done the Americans fell down on the ground,
letting go of the interpreter, who hurried to the boat. When our party was ready to
leave the Americans seized the painter and started to haul the boat ashore. Seeing this,
the order was given to cut the painter and leave the anchor and pull for the ship. In
the drawing attached is given the position of the bay and the island [Fig. 11], anda sketch
of the Americans and their hair-seal skin boats.” (See Fig. 12, upper.)

Kalo $60 On C6u% .

Ck Aa otat TPKE ear cord ocrcte”

tee

ce

ct i}
OOe Mei fee 04 Exmeto ochE toga,

eu Tp podee Totges Fre Ban cxodgy|
S : CG6crraunls sector CEB keconen pytYe Kean
SEctteckeco SGuo “lotsa ONC Ech Sttaau Kase”

SO O09 rec ocdaSence |
Crear etre Core. clo my i

iru G03 Gpalucen Mec ddU cxccevech 0 2 Cech. ae
wx), €03 pa neu a

tpornx! dome ugse peu Ene L

pees ot UP RA ey Ck Srmicers ce <r
Be - opi 3crerré ere

TPOTCCUDI. Socan un3e) Poukns a

Cyxcerl ee ocerparca x
oe “eeWrrr EE., og Jewsteay

Fic. 11—Facsimile of a page of the log book of the St. Peter kept by Khitrov:

end of entry of September s, 1741, with ma
see opposite page, footnote 93).

p of the Shumagin Islands (for text,

este

110 GE Poe An overt’
be

Fic. 12—Upper: An Aleut in his baidarka, or one-hatch skin boat. From an
unpublished drawing on the chart of the voyage of the St. Peter, by Waxel and
Khitrov, 1744, in the Archives of the Hydrographic Section of the Ministry of
Marine, Petrograd, No. 1940.

Lower: A native of Unalaska in a baidarka. From a book of unpublished draw-
ings of Alaskan scenes by Levashev, 1767-1768, in the Archives of the Hydro-
graphic Section of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd.

FIRST MEETING WITH NATIVES 149

ic} September 6, 1741. After Midday

a D
we » Lo) ua
3 ° S 3
° S tel io)
fe) |), (vs S O
I SSW Light wind, fog.
2
3 WSW Topgallantsail wind; weighed anchor and tacked
with a view to finding shelter from the wind. When
we had come to 17 fathoms we took in the sail and let
go the small bower anchor, bottom sandy, and payed
out 34 cable. Seven baidarkas, one American in
each, came near the ship, two of them quite close.
The Captain Commander ordered that they be
given an iron kettle and needles. They gave us
two wooden hats, on one of which was fastened a
small ivory image resembling a man.
AGN 29 eS | EE (Bete
Peo Bee ere es
6
7 W/S
8 —
SES) ee a ee ea
Io
II W
i2
I Light wind.
See eee hee | |) Cloudy.
2 | SA ca eel (a
4 Began to heave in the cable.
5
6 iS Heaved anchor and set the sails.94
7 W/S SSE Let out all the reefs in the topsails and got under
pees ee || ay Devine under ie. 18 12052525, 30 fathom”
8 S)
9 WSW
10 S%E
II
12 Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds. At noon
we were by cross bearings, from Shumagin Island,
where we stood on the 30th, NWN about 7 Ger-
man miles.
ae In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a =
of 4 J ; 8 ae Fae < :
SaaS E AG tHe og a 8 = SES 5 Et
1% rhum el Ak On M ae ~) Os = °
Bed os og le as=| 2 | A
By Dead SS) E E
Reckoning SSE 28 26’ II 18’ |54°42’|| 319% 4°s1’N 1|35°55’

% Khitrov’s journal: “Got under way.”

150 LOG BOOK OF THE “ST. PETER”
€ September 7, 1741. After Midday
ral
Dn o {a}
5/6 i = z
fo) S = ° g
el 3 fo) ms)
ia 3%| SW/W S/E 1%4| Reef-topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carry-
ing lower and upper sails; SW swell.
213%| WSW SY%E 1%! Took two reefs in topsails.
313 1%
413% 1%
5] 374] __ 114| Wind and weather as before.
6 | 3% 1%
a \e3 1%
813 Wind comes in gusts, moon and stars out.
9 | 2%
Io | 2%] SW/W S/EXE 1%| Westerly swell.
Il | 24% 1%] Hauled down staysails.
I2/|1% SW SSE 1%| Changeable wind, squalls, rain: furled topsails.
I | 2%| SW/W S/E 3
242 SW SSEYE 2) Heavy passing clouds with squalls.
3} 2%| WSW S 3 Stars out.
4 | 2% 3
5 |1%| W/S S/W 1%
6|2% 1%| Set topsails.
713 1%] Took three reefs in fore-topsail, hauled up topmast-
staysails.
813% S%w I%| Reef-topsail wind, cloudy; lowered staysails.
913%| WSW S) 1%
Io | 3 Undersail wind, squally; took three reefs in main-
a ec 2
12 | 13% (ln a lea leona
Roe In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation mi 7 =a
of 2 = ee: oS { pee , cea a) Q 5
Compass E ae tHe 7G RoI 5 = oes E 2
1% rhumb E 3 aM | AS | 0M | a2 | a aos i fC)
x £ ale RO ps i:
By Dead S S) E E
Reckoning 5°S7’/E 61 60.5’ | 6.3 11’ |53°42’|| 322% 2°08’N_ |36°06’

CONTINUANCE OF WESTWARD VOYAGE

USE

S September 8, 1741. After Midday

a 9 a
ele) : 2
° S RS) fo) oO
ea | S O 4
a ere W S/W4w 2% Reef-undersail wind, clear with passing clouds,
westerly swell; reefed foresail, furled foresail and
mainsail, and hove to under main-staysail and
) | Rook trysail.
a eae ~~ | 2%| Coming up to SW by W, falling off to SSW.
_3|1%| W/N | SSwyuw
_5|1%| WNW! SWS “5%4| Heavy storm.
a 35%
HE 5%4| Cloudy, air thick.
OS) 22) aera: 5% Stars out.
Oe nla | Povo
nz} 1% Wind decreasing.
11 |1%| W/N | SSW%W | __ | Coming up to SW, falling off to S by W.
Gey ren 5%
ere | ~——!"6_| Undersail wind, weather as before.
a om
2 aa om
iit h| rea Topsail wind.
eon ETA SW /S 7 Hoisted topsails, let out a reef in topsails.
6 | 2%| WNW swys Ree Histed topmast-staysails, set foresail and main-
eae ae W/N SW/S “1%| Wind unsteady and in gusts.
Io | 3 1%] Clear with passing clouds.
25) 2) is ea ae
re ~ SWS “1%| Westerly swell.
be In 24 hours | From Vaua
Variation oI a aie
of Q 2 : 2 ele = 30 ne! F
Gompss | & [2g | Se) se | ef) 2] ste | &§ 5
IA om
ry) ae AH ale As 4 Aon = K
By Dead S/W S W E
Reckoning 22372 WilsOn lis 7e7alnnO 15’ _153°04’l|_ 32334 | 0°24’N_135°5s1’

152 LOG BOOK/OF THE “STARE VERY

& September 90,1741. After Midday

s y ao
sl2}z] 2 Ug
m|M 3 O 4
I | 2%| W/N SW /S — Topsail wind, cloudy; let out two reefs in topsails;
carrying topsails, staysails, foresail, mainsail, and
rae eee ___|_trysail.
pe} 2a) —
_3 | 2% Ww SSW 1%
_4 | 2% os
meas We SSW %W 1% Wind comes in gusts, westerly swell.
mE ee ee
_7| 2% SW/S | 1% ise
_8 |} 2 1% Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
9|2 SSW %W 1%] Took two reefs in topsails.
“To | 2 1%
Ir | 1% Ww SSW 1%| Light wind, cloudy.
sted || ane 1%
7 ae W/S S%wW 2__| Drizzly, rainy.
_2)r WSW SYE 2
_ 3} 4% | Sw SSE 2
_4|_¥%l SW/S SE/S | 2 | Hauled down staysails.
= Eno wind on Clewed up mainsail and trysail.
_7|2 | ESE Ww/S ~~ | Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
ee "| Let out two reefs in fore-topsail.
295/73. ~ | Let out three reefs in main-topsail.
10 | 4% pa Reef-topsail wind, wet; took two reefs in fore-
topsail, set trysail.
Goa ies a eae
“12 | 5% ess
ee In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation = = ene
of 2 = ¥ oa ae gD 6
pemmes,| § | 39/88 | 83/88) 3 | she | 2 | 8
2
a 1g Pe Re Pe | aoe | pale
By Dead SW /W S) W E
Reckoning TeA2/S A4I.7 24’ 34 55-8’ |52°40'|| 31634 0°38’S) 134°55’

CONTINUANCE OF WESTWARD VOYAGE __ 153

ous September 10, 1741. After Midday

|g 9 @
alectle. & 3 g
° S te ° oO
a} [ abs 3 O 4
I|5%| ESE WSW | Undersail wind, drizzly, rainy; carrying reefed
ces i laa topsails, foresail, and trysail.
2 | By ne as
Beas SET ae
4a se | WSE/S SW /W 1%| Set mainsail and topmast-staysails.
5) Sa aos S 1%
6 | 134 Ss WSW “1%| Topgallantsail wind, weather as before, damp,
Roten Naveae eels heavy swell from SE
_8|2%|_ S/E SW /W 1%
Tioy 2% 1% Drizzly, wet.
to | 2 ESA
Ir |1% S WSW _1¥%| Southerly swell.
1 an aT (TEs
an a, 2 | Light wind, weather as before.
ara Perez
ean STW, WISH
_4| 2%! SSW Ww “1_| Topgallantsail wind.
Se |e _1_| Let out two reefs in fore-topsail.
_6 | 2% I Set the jib.
_71| 2% ‘t | Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
_8 | 374 ad
_9 | 3% Ss WSW “1%4| Southerly swell.
Ir | 2% IK Wind decreasing.
I2 | 2% WSW'’4w | 1%) Fog, wet.
Lapis In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a aA Pe ae
ot = Sale Sc lyase aul eae 2 | »
commen | 2 | ea |e | a) as | 3 | sees | &
Z ae aa a See Soa aee ~ 4
By Dead W/N N W E
°r4’S 33°17’

Reckoning 3°02’W 6.1 8.7’ 60 98’ |52°49’|| 301% fo)

154 LOG BOOK’ OF THE "ST. PETER®

Q September 11, 1741. After Midday

2 g 3
=| 2] = 2 | 8
m | M S O sa
ae ae ae) S/W Wis iene Topsail wind, foggy, clear with passing clouds;
carrying reefed topsails, foresail, mainsail, and
staysails.
_2 | 2% aa
3/3 | SSW _ _ WHN | ae Wind unsteady and in gusts.
wale Sa ee a eee
—Si3% Reef-topsail wind.
_6 | 334 We Salem ae
Sas Sve SW/W fi
_8|/2%l os WSW |__| Topgallantsail wind, wet.
_9 | 3%\ S/E Sw/w |i
tio |1 | ENE SW ___| Light wind, weather as before.
11/2 | NNE SW /W ~ | Sounded, but no bottom.
I2|2% pei Topsail wind, cloudy.
pale |Pone ae Occasionally the stars are seen.
_2)3% N ee Let out two reefs in main-topsail.
3.) 3% Drizzly, wet.
“4|4_|NW/N ay
ol es NNW WSW oan Wind unsteady.
_6|s%\_N a
diel Weta ___| Let out two reefs in fore-topsail.
Snilice ies
SEGRE" 2 ___| Strong reef-topsail wind.
EO! |e eee ee
1 | s_ | NNW_ __| Drizzly
12 15 ~— | | Wet
Lore In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation = a z eae =
Gamnass & 38 ter a8 pr 2 ~ ie £2 § bo
1% rhumb E Fi a mS x 50 S BES 2 i}
ie 5 jat | en }et as} = | asa] 2 8
By Dead W/S S Ww E
—Reckoning |_5°13’W_| 83.7 | 8.8’ | 83 | 140’ |52°4o’l| 283% | 0°43’S_|30°57’

CONTINUANCE OF WESTWARD VOYAGE | 155

h September 12, 1741. After Midday

>
3
o
4
I Topsail wind, drizzly, wet; carrying topsails,
staysails, foresails, mainsail, and trysail.
I
I
I Northeasterly swell.
I
I Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
I
Light wind, weather as before.
Northerly swell.
Cloudy.
I Took two reefs in topsails.
I
==
I Weather as before, moon and stars out.
I
I Heavy clouds from the west.
I
I Topgallantsail wind.
I Changeable wind, cloudy.
I Clear with passing clouds.
I Let out second reef in topsails, tacked to port.
I
I Topgallantsail wind.
I Cloudy, wet.
In 24 hours From Vaua
2 AS a
as -5 ARG a) .
Bila |e2| 3 | eis] 2 | &
Eases aS %
S) WwW E

oO
m 3 ko) Z
t=] ° fo] |
° S Lal °
mi 5 o)
maiissc uN WSW [i
72 | 23 a ae ee
Sas ckNNw |.
~4|1%| NW SW/W |i.
~sil3 |NNW WSW |i
Ais] | EE | Wc |S eieiie) bet SE a
1S) 2 en a ee
9 %
—ciieicCalm ol). otha.
“a1 |1%| W/S SuW oii
0) 1 | oi aa Wiccan bo aa
ima Bs S/W
A a a Fa
3 |22| wesw [sia
4|2 Ww SSW rae
C2 Es Se a
7 | 1% S4YW fit
_8 | 2%| WSW SE lire
_9|1%|SW/W| NWuw fo
_to | 2 pres
It "2 | Dae ell ces be ee
“2 |2 | WSW NW ran
Variation =
of 2 >
Compass E as
1% rhumb E 2 AM
x a
By Dead SW /W
Reckoning 3°06’/W | 31%

156 LOG BOOK OF TE Sl PETER

i} September 13,1741. After Midday

a y 4
nD

=

4 | 3 z 5 2

o| § eel fo) o

mi M 3 O 3

rT | x SW /W NW 4%w 1%| Topgallantsail wind, cloudy, wet; came about
on the starboard tack.

2 Ee ae Sa Ee
3|_% 3
ean 74 fee Drizzly, wet.
_s|z | SW/w S/E___| 1%4| Light wind.
6 | 234 S/EY¥E |1_
7 I_| WSW NW%W | 1%| Came about on the port tack.
8] %| SW/WINW/W4w|___| Cloudy.
So. “1% “| Moon out; took two reefs in topsails.
itor | a ‘r | Topgallantsail wind.
“a1 | 2% rae
220 Nw/w_ |
I/ 14 S/E cr Made the starboard tack.
“3.2 | Sw Ssh ola
a7 4 oe eee ea
_5|_%4l | WNW 3
6| % 3. | Light wind.
Se S WSW14W | 134| Let out second and third reefs in topsails.
207 eee | eeu saoey
_ 9 (2%! S/E WSW ~ | Topgallantsail wind.
Io iB “| Clear with passing clouds.
“12, “3% | Topsail wind, weather as before.%
— In 24 hours } From Vaua
Waren — z g ‘ = q ; m5
pmee| 2 | Be | Se] Be | Be] S| ste] 2 | g
‘ Z A P ell ie: g a AGm z 2
By Dead
Reckoning W/S Ss) WwW |
__(Yushin) | _6°20"W_| 18.3 | 3.5’ _|_18 | 28.8" |52°23"/_ 2724 |__1°38’/S_|20°44’
By
Observation SW /S S WwW
(Khitrof) 2°38’W 29.8 24! 17.7 28.8" 52°or"!| 271% 2°48’S_120°35’

_ % As indicated in the 24-hour summary, Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observa
tion 52° o1’. This value has been used on the chart (PI. I).

CONTINUANCE OF WESTWARD VOYAGE _ 157

¢ September 14,1741. After Midday

n v 4
5 | 0 & i 3
} rot Ae = vo
mi|M) O 4
ed oa A SSE WSW ae Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
2)5
Bsns. "| Let out a reef in main-topsail.
_4| 5% "| Took three reefs in main-topsail.
6) SSS neat Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, wet.
va a
_7|2%| SSW WwW “1 | Topsail wind; reefed mainsail; foggy, wet.
BOR EZ “1%| Clear with passing clouds.
Bad EY Ee NWN es a ee
II % Ww S%E ‘2 | Light wind and unsteady; came about on the
ee ee starboard tack.
_i2 | 1% S/W%W | 2
i} %| Wi/Nn SW /S “2 | Clear with passing clouds.
_2)1% ~ | Let out two reefs in topsails.
_3|3 | WNW Sw ~%4| Topsail wind, wet.
5.64 ~ 1%] Hauled down jib; westerly swell.
_o | Sa ee eas
7_| 234| NW/W|__ SW/W_|_34| Reef-topsail wind, cloudy.

813%) NW |SW/WY4wilt Took second reef in topsails.

9 | 234] NW/W SW /W 1%| Clear with passing clouds.

Io | 2%4| NW WSW 1%| Took third reef in topsails.
II | 2% 1%4| Reefed foresail, furled fore-topsail.
12 12% 2 Gale; furled main-topsail.
itt, In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a 7 Ta
of 2 ay5 yet 215 ae “de ra eb
pune = 5 BG ee oF a ie ss E E
IA rhum a ~ Qn Q ° me a) he a °
GE peed a sor ak as le
By Dead WSW Ss WwW E
Reckoning 5°52’W 60 17’ 57.6 92’ |52°06’ 258 2°40’S _|28°12’

158

S September 15, 1741.

LOG BOOK OF THE “ST. PETER”

After Midday

wo o ra)
ms} wo
s/2| x ee:
° S Lad (} ro)
mis s 5) 4
Ij2 NW WSW%S | 2%| Reef-undersail wind, clear with passing clouds;
hauled down staysails; squally; furled foresail,
hove to under mainsail and trysail; coming up
to W, falling off to SW by W.
PL INAEA 24%
3|1%INW/N| WSWYW ] 24
41|1% 5
5 |1% = 5
6/)/1% 5 Lowered the foreyard.
Z| Stormy.
8 | 1% 5%] Furled main-staysail.
SBOE EZ4| So eee |e oe
Io | 1% 5%| Clear with passing clouds.
rine |) A 5%4| At times light rain.
3 J ee
rz Wind decreasing.
2 I 6
Salat 6 Stars out.
4]1 6 Chilly, damp.
5 | 1% Undersail wind; hauled up foreyards.
6 34| NW WSW 3 Set foresail and mainsail.
7\|1% 3
84) | 3s Sun ating.
9|2 WSW %S | 2%! Topsail wind, cloudy; set main-topsail and let
ee | a SEs | ae ee le ee |), Out wo reefs.
10 | 1% _ | si] 2 | Set fore-topsail reefed.
ca | RAIN (ER acres ee AAS ON
I2 | 2% Northwesterly swell. Took an observation: zenith
distance 52° 20’, declination of the sun 1° 06’,
latitude 51°14’.
he: In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation 5 a Sie
a of rs 3 in 3 ig aay E a
ompass ae tee Oe te = offs Pa
1% rhumb E = AM rae Si ane) 5 23s = S
Z a Are | AA Ad* z =
By . SSW S) WwW E
Observation 1°28’S 56 52 20 32’ |51°14’|| 2564 5°36’S__|27°40’

CONTINUANCE OF WESTWARD VOYAGE _ 159

& September 16,1741. After Midday

y 4
w ra oO ‘a BS
= fe) ¢ =|
° = me fo) oO
tM S Oo 3

Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; let out

a reef in fore-topsail.

2)2% 14%
aa ra SW eA Sea running from NW; carrying topsails, stay-
sails, foresail, mainsail, and trysail.
4 | 2% nes
= rer eA Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
GEA oy
Sa ne W SSW aay Took three reefs in fore-topsail.
~8|1%| WSW S fae
ol hat NW ahd Light wind, made the port tack.
To |}1%| SW WNW | 2_| Drizzly, clear.
“a1 | 2%| SW/S SAIN) Pe
Pats 1% SSE W/S ee Let out two reefs in tore-topsail.
oy 3
eh 3% “ESE ||. | Let out a reef in main-topsail.
mal “4% ae | eet Pawel Topsail wind, drizzly.
eA i Ys |
6 | 434 SE
en eA ae Reef-topsail wind, weather as before.
me "534 SE/S | Let out a reef in foresail, set jib.
_9|5%|_ SSE aay
Exo 3%| SW/S W/N ~~ | Topsail wind.
mire 3% SW WNW | %4| Took reef in main-topsail.
12 |4%|SW/W| WNWEN | | Reef-topsail wind, drizzly.
In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation = = pia
of 2 ~ = on a2 =
eee SE ea |e) Se | 82] ¢ | sts E z
1% rhum D
; gO | aoa neo | epee al os 4
By Dead WwW E
Reckoning W 60 o’ 60 !} 96’ |51°1r4’|| 241% 5°57'S' _|26°04’

% Khitrov’s journal: “On sick list:

160 LOG BOOK OF: THE “ST PEVERG
Vf September 17, 1741. After Midday
>
v
“7) D iv)
5 | € 5 2
° S om fo) oO
oil (ae 3 O ea
Il4 SW WNWEN |1 Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, rain.
2 | 33%| SW/Ww NW /W I Took second and third reef in topsails.
Siles WSW NW I Hauled down jib.
4 | 33% SW WNWEN | 1 Let out reef in topsails.
SaIEEA WNW I
(oy | SW /S W/N I
7|3% SW WNW I Took third reef in topsails and in foresail.
8 | 33% I
9 |3%| SW/W NW /W I Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, clear with passing
showers.
Io |4 I
Il | 33% NW/W4WI/ 1 Wind comes in gusts.
I2|2%| WSW NW I Rain, southwesterly swell; tacked to starboard.
I | 2% Ss 2
2);2%| W/S S/W 2 Heavy rain; let out a reef in main-topsail.
3|1% WwW SSW 2
4|13%4| W/N SSWYW | 2 Topsail wind; let out two reefs in main-topsail.
SE (22 ee (een) [ee
Os) 1% ee eee een Let out a reef in fore-topsail.
pert eZee SWS 2 Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
Oo. |'2 W SSW 2 Let out third reef in main-topsail and second in
fore-topsail.
Io |1% 2
Ir |2%| W/N SW /S 2 Wind freshening; took first and second reefs in
main-topsails and second and third reefs in fore-
topsail.
I2|1% WwW SSW'’%W | 2
i In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a a He
of a Ss ; 5 nes “an = 4
scope g AG 2 a5 fe eS 3 Em 5 rs]
1% rhum Ar Re ays yf 25 a °
@ oF ae rl AGA ~ A
By Dead WNW N W z : E
Reckoning 1°03/N 33 Bie 30 48’ |51°27'l|_ 233% 5221'S l25un67

CONTINUANCE OF WESTWARD VOYAGE 161

Q September 18, 1741. After Midday

0 2 a
s|o| = = z
° i= = ic) i
so S ) 4
“rtl2 |WNW SW Tek Strong reef-topsail wind, westerly swell; carry-
ing reefed topsails, foresail, mainsail, trysail,
or and staysails.
22.7 a ea fd
_3 | 2% 1%
_4|2%| NW/W|__ SW/W__| 1%4| Took three reefs in topsails.
6 | 2%|_ NW WsWw_ | 1%
ees) | WSW%S con Hauled down fore-topmast-staysail.
eaS2 (20) “2%| Gale, heavy passing clouds.
9 | i% “2%| Wet; furled fore-topsail.
Io | 134 “21%4| Wind decreasing, air chilly.
Ir | 1%| NW/W SW/W_ | 214| Hauled up fore-topmast-staysail.
= BE.
_ 1 | 134| WNW SW 214| Set fore-topsail.
_2|1%| W/N Sw/S | 13%
pe saieci “134| Topsail wind.
4 |2_|_w__|_sswiew_| a3
mom 274) SSW “134| Let out a reef in main-topsail.
6] 2 Ww /S S/W “134| At the end of the hour we made the port tack.

—— | —<—<—S | — |__| ——

8 | 2%) W/S NW/N 1%| Topsail wind.

913% 1%| 97
10 | 3%4| WSW_|_NW2N_| 1%) Reef-topsail wind.
Ree sr4i | eee DaizzZly-
I2 13 NW 1%] Wind comes in gusts.
her as In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a 7
of a a ; - ae soi St a :
oss § as | #8 a3 He 3 Seas 5 2
I% rhum a] AN / 2) M r~me) =) Q 5 a 3°
27 ee eae Ao a .
By Dead WSW Ss W E
Reckoning r°r9’W 27 10’ | 25.6 ar’ \5r°r7’|| 22734 6°07’S) |, 24°35’

97 Khitrov’s journal: “On sick list: 14 men”.

162 LOG BOOK’ OF THE Sil PETERY

h September 19, 1741. After Midday

4 y e
7) uv
Slee ee 5 e
) is: = fe) ra)
of Ie S O 3
I |3%| WSW NW 2 Reef-topsail wind, squally, drizzly; took three reefs
in main-topsail.
73, \| 5 NW'UN 2
3|2% 2 Squally; furled topsails; heavy westerly swell.
4|,1%| W/S NW /N 3
51}1%| W/N SW /S 3 Topsail wind and unsteady; came about on star-
board tack, set topsails reefed.
6/1%)| WNW SW 3
BEA SW%S zB} Gale, cloudy.
8)}1%| W/N SW /S 2)
9 34 W SSW 6 Furled topsails and lowered sails, hove to under
trysail and main-staysail; coming up to SW by S,
falling off to S by W.
SRO) TE ep oe at oe Oe
ale Preece I eas RIO ween
12 |r W /N SW /S Coming up to SW, falling off to SSW.

ale WNW SW %W 6 Coming up to WSW, falling off to SW by S.
Clear with passing clouds.

2/1
_3]1 | NW _|SW/WuwW]6 |
moka 6 | Coming up to W by S, falling off to SW.
Sole “6 | Reef-topsail wind, cloudy.
mOF 7 WSW “2 | Set foresail and mainsail.
ih ia “1% Set topsails and let out a reef in them.
8.| 234 “IK _
_9 | 2%| NW/N W/S | 134| Reef-topsail wind, cloudy.
10|3%| NW | WSW [1%
“a1 | 3% “~%| Clear with passing clouds.
con ee eee Se er
In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation 7 D |—se
of =e so 0 ob | “38 e bb
poo bene ee 5 oo |e | o5)Se] ¢ | gee 5 5
1% a A AH Se Aas 4H | AGA a =
By Dead SW /W 3 Ww E
Reckoning 0°04’W | 21.5 T2/ 18 28’ |51°05']| 22434 6°s58’S) }24°07’

CONTINUANCE OF WESTWARD VOYAGE _ 163

i: September 20,1741. After Midday

= y aj
ai a7 AS 5 z
° =] tal (o) o
ccf ae S fo) =
re || 2} NW WSW 1%
2% 1%

AE SE a ey (2

(© [52 a cen
_7 | 2%| NW/W| WSWHS | 1%
~gi2 1%

Topsail wind, cloudy.
Let out two reefs in topsails.

At the order of the Captain Commander there

were shifted from the hold aft to the bow 31 sacks
of provisions and 3 jacks because the bow was not
sufficiently down in the water.

Gusts of wind and rain.

Topgallantsail wind, heavy passing clouds from

the west.
Took two reefs in topsails.
Light topsail wind.

in the south was seen something that looked like

flashes of lightning.

eee (24h | __ SW/W_| 1%] Chilly, clear.
ee) ZG “1%| Squally and rainy.
fist sa NW | WSw dines
= 21 (a (|edit ba 2
rie Ge 34 WSW%S 1%
Oe WSW%W | 114] Let out two reefs in maintopsail.
Se 1%
Siisiow “1%| Sunshine.
“9 | 23%| NW/N Ww/S “13%| 13 men on the sick list.
to |2 | NNW w Era
au | 2 |NW/N W/S__| 134| Topsail wind, cloudy.
I2 | 2 NW WSW%W | 134| Clear with passing clouds.
In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation 7 a ae
ot e 38 50 | ait 88 = x
pecmees| | a | Aa | Sa) aa Se) & | ete] 2 |e
: es Se ee eet cet wales 2 4
By Dead SW /W Ss WwW E/S
Reckoning 4°47'W 62 30’ 55 85’ |50°35’| 213% 1°53’E (22°42?

164 LOG BOOK OF THE FSi PETER?

¢ September 21, 1741. After Midday

z y 3
s|2| 2 : :
io) = Rel ° ®
ep ban’ s O a)
air thick.
2|2% WSWYuW | 1%
3 | 23%) NW WSW 1%] Wind in gusts.
4|2% SW /W%W | 1%} Heavy westerly swell.
Sn le2e4. WSW 1%
6)2% 1%| Took one and two reefs in main-topsail, a second
tal ea af | oe eee | Enea es eee reef in fore-topsail.
semen) NW EN | UWSWi4 Will
18 (29 (cee | eae
O22 Eee eae be Light wind, clear with passing clouds.
SEOn | A ee ee
REG | a ee eee
I2 34| NNW W 134| Let out the second and first reefs in main-topsail,
pee ee hoisted jib.
I 4| NW/N WSW 2

2 Clewed up trysail, hauled down topsails and stay-
sails because there was no wind.

eis ea bees
a | = ene
Balle ¢ 9 Northwesterly swell.
6 3
ae 2 eee
8 Unbent trysail because it needed repairing and in
its place bent on another.
2 —————— —_
Io I3 men on the sick list.
a |
3 S/W W/N opel wind; set topsails, staysails, and lower
sails.
ney In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a A a
of 2 5 P a5 o . aga S &
pommase| & | ze) Se | Se) 88] 3 | te | & | 8
I4 rhum a aya) Q Q ° zy az} a 2
By Dead W/S $s WwW E/S
Reckoning 5°0'S 25 af 24 37’ |50°28'|| 208% I°ro’E |22°0s’

CONTINUANCE OF WESTWARD VOYAGE _ 165

S September 22, 1741. After Midday

2 g €
Bulec!| og 2 Z
° & S ) o
lacy os O 4
Rie TA S) Wi/N Laer Topgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
= Se a
3 | eles SE ee Let out three reefs in fore-topsails.
ah a amt eae
5 %) ENE Hauled down staysails and jib, clewed up main-
sail and trysail.
_ 6 | 4 i a
712 a | Tee ad he
8) 1% | Took two reefs in fore-topsail and one in main-topsail.
om T% NNE ~ | Set mainsail, trysail, and staysails.
eo a ane
re | oN a
es | Light wind.
Sar liere aN Ww. aa
(2) 2 as ae ce
_3|1%| NNW | W___|2_| Hoisted jib, let out a second reef in fore-topsail.
a 1% ivednae a “t | Moon and stars out.
5 “2% NW SW/WKWIT Chilly and damp.
6), 2% ~~ | | y | Let out third reef in main-topsail.
713. |WNW| Swyuw fi,
eK 2% a | ae hee Topsail wind, squally.
_9 | 2%| NW/W|_ SW/W_| 1%| Took a reef in main-topsail.
10 | 234] NNW Ww Box
“Tr | 23% [| Hauled down jib; reef-topsail wind.
“T2, 2% NW /N W/S 1% Took second reef in fore-topsail.98
In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation 7 3 se
of ar 38 zie 5 ae ag rs =
mame) 2 |aelae|geisae| § | eke] 8. | &
z ae A Q P a aS z =
By Dead W E/S
Reckoning W 36.5 0’ 36.5 57’ |s50°28’ 200 0°44’E |21°08’

98 Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 50° 27’. The noon position for this
day is therefore indicated on the chart (Pl. I) as based on observation.

166

LOG, BOOK OF; THE sl PETER

fe} September 23, 1741. After Midday

0 9 a
ee lee 3 2
° & Ge (e) oO
miM| ¢ ) 4
~T | 23% NW /N W/S eH Topsail wind, clear; carrying reefed topsails,
oS staysails, and lower sails.
2|1%| NW Wwsw {1%
a pe “1%4| Westerly swell, reef-topsail wind.
4 | 2% SW/WHW] 1%
5/3 |WNW| SWYw [1%
6 2% foe Took a second reef in main-topsail.
| (a aes ae,
_ le “1734| Came about with the wind and made the port tack.
9|1%| W NNW4W | 2
“ro | 134 Cie
“Tr “2% WSW NWN _ | 1%4| Took three reefs in topsails.
a2 SW /W NW /W ~~ | Furled topsails; wind freshening.
wee “2% Squally.
Vary NW%W | 2 | Set the main-topsail reefed; reef-topsail wind.
_4|1%| SW |INW/W¥wW| 2 |
__5 |1%| SW/W|__NW/W_| 2 _| Set fore-topsail. a
_6 | 2% 1%
ale NW/W%W | 134| Topsail wind.
_8 | 2% “13%| Drizzly.
Ona NW/W__| 134
PLO 2 “134| Wind freshening.
Ir | 2% NW/W%W | 134| Undersail wind.
12|2% = Heavy swell from SW; furled topsails. a
et In 24 hours | From Vaua
Variation 7 a ale
of rs aC 0 ob ; ts rs bb
wipe! | 2 4 ag | 28) 82 | See ) See | see
: ci ace eee sas Manor ic. |
By Dead NW N W 1D
Reckoning 6°11’W 30 19’ 23.5 37’ |50°47'|| 190234 14°6’E |20°31’

CONTINUANCE OF WESTWARD VOYAGE

167

V{ September 24, 1741. After Midday

a
3
g

-

2%] Strong undersail wind, drizzly, wet; furled foresail
and mainsail, hove to under the main-staysail and
trysail; coming up to W4N, falling off to NW.

5%

5%

5%| Gale.

5%] By the will of God died of scurvy the grenadier
Andrei Tretyakov.

51%%| Coming up to NW by W, falling off to NNW.

6

6 Wind going down a little.

6

6 Drizzly.

6

6

6 Undersail wind.

6

31%| Set foresail, mainsail, hauled down staysail.

134| Set main-topsail with three reefs in it.

I H%

134

1%| Set fore-topsail with three reefs.

1%] Hauled up topmast-staysails.

1%| Reef-topsail wind, cloudy.

11%4| Let out reef in topsails.

1%| Lowered the dead body into the sea.

1%] Clear with passing clouds.99

In 24 hours From Vaua

7 4 Me ; eid on a ;
fe | se|22| 4 | eee] F | 8

S ae Aj) 7 | ad 2 a

N E E
39.7’ | 8.7 14° |51°27'| 19934 6°30’S__|20°45’

a ee 2
3 |) SS Z
oll) at 3 S)
~r11%| SW |NW/WYw] 2%
_2/1%| SW/S |NW/WKW| 5%
Beye 5%
5 |1%4| wWSw | NwW% “5%
[Sap aaa
Pall) a NIWISN | 6...
“So 4 a | ae Te
5) | 27) a ae
10 |1%
Baars ‘oun
T2|1% ou
males [om
25 || 157) ar aaa (ir. all
4/27 at ae er 74
Ss 2) i ee
2O) 23 ae ae Fr
Ae 1%
So 2 Es as ES
So ce ae 1K
10 | 2%] W/S NW/N | 1%
“Ei || Z| | oe Ea NCTE
2 |3%| WSw NW 1%
Variation a
of fe) +S)
Compass E ee
1% rhumb E = Ax
™% &
By Dead /E
Reckoning 1°06’E 40.7

99 Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 51° 30’.

The noon position for this

day is therefore indicated on the chart (PI. I) as based on observation.

168

LOG ‘BOOK OF THEMST PEREZ

2 September 25, 1741.

After Midday

n v ay

s|s| & 5 2

fo) & =< ° oO

pang i 3 iS ay

1 | 2%) WSW NW 1%| Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; let out
two reefs in main-topsail.

2 | 324 1%

3 | 24| SW/W NW /W 1%| Sighted land W by S and ENE about 7 miles.
We take them to be islands,!00 and between
these islands are other islands. On the land
in sight there is a high snow-covered volcano
WNW4N 12 German miles. 101 We _ think
the volcano is on the American mainland.102

4|2¢4) SW SSE 1%| Sounded but did not find bottom, made the

Le starboard tack.

5 |2%| SW/S SEY¥%S 1%

6}12%| S/W SE/E%YE [1%

7 | 234) S/E E/S 1%| Took two reefs in main-topsail.

8|3% 1%| Undersail wind, drizzly, wet; we were obliged
to carry topsails because of the land sighted in
the far distance.

9 | 3% SS) ESE 1%

70, | 324 SE/E%%E | 1%| Took three reefs in topsails.

Ir | 23%| S/W SE/E 1%

1a || A SE/EYE | 1%| Heavy rain.

I | 2% 1%

212% SE/EXE | 1%| Squally, rainy, gale biowing; furled topsails.

301274) eee ESE 1%

oA | 2 Ks es Ee eee
5|1% 3 Strong undersail wind and a heavy swell.
mE ES 5 ee erase be ee

7 | 13% 3 Clear with passing clouds; looked for land from
the main topmast but did not see any though
we could see 5 or 6 German miles away.

8 | 1%] S/W SE/E 2%

9/2 S ESE 24%

to | 2%} S/W SE /E 2%

Ir | 3 S ESE 2%

I2|2% SE/EM%E | 2%| Wind freshening, heavy swell.

Ve In 24 hours | From Vaua

Variation a = lmmara

of s ; ays ae : “a2 ie 8

Beet E 2g Hes a5 as = ees E re]

1% rhum a} 5 5 S Qs Ss 25 s g

cle tar cane eee res Aon |r eae

By Dead ESE S) E E

Reckoning 8°07’E 40.5 | 10.4’ | 34.3 | 62.7’ |51°17’ll 202% 6°53/S; [2rsast

100 Probably Adak and Atka Islands.
lol Probably the volcano on Great Sitkin Island.

102 Khitrov’s journal:

“Sighted land, W point W by S, and E point ENE about

8 miles, which seems to be an island; a snow-covered mountain, which we think is on
the mainland, WNW3N 12 German miles.”

LANDFALL: ADAK AND ATKA ISLANDS 169

bh September 26, 1741. After Midday

oY mal
M Be Ko] Zz S
5/2 8 3 g
mf 5 O a
Sanja, SW SSEYE eon Reef-undersail wind, squally; carrying foresail,
ee ee ) mainsailireefed, and trysail:
_7 | 2 a es Ee
eS El fh
Su 2 3 Heavy storm.
ee ae ae Furled foresail and mainsail, hauled up main-
___| staysail, and hove to.
masz we | ssw is
_0 | 27 Re nee 7
| | a 4 eae
Io | 13% 5% Wind going down a little, drizzly and chilly.
7a | 3 | ee a ee en RADE Gees
12 | 1% Ce
7 a ae oe
2) ol a ae 2
3.) 2 6
ane baer, Set foresail and mainsail, lowered main-staysail.
nce Ee W/S S/W cae Reef-topsail wind, set reefed topsails with all
reefs in them.
=, 7] a OE
7|1% 2

8 | 1%| SW/W S/E%YE 2 16 men on the sick list.

Io | 2 1%| Reef-topsaii wind, cloudy.
Ir |2%| SW/S SE/S 1%
I2 | 2% 1%
Sere In 24 hours From Vaua
ariation
° a eS : 2 : Op ; ais; I =)
1% rhum a a An (SOON ES) 25 a g
aa Ae | OS Am z =
By Dead SE/S S) E E/S
Reckoning 0°04’S 49 34’ 22.6 | 36.7’ |50°43')| 210% 2°T8’S |22°25"

170 LOG BOOK OF ‘THEY Si. PEMER.

ic} September 27,1741. After Midday

>

=| Z| 2 g :

zl/Z| 2 6 3
“zr |2%| SSW SE ‘1%| Topsail wind, cold, cloudy; carrying reefed top-

___| sails, staysails, and lower sails.
2) 2% SEME |1%
aa rrr _1%| Took three reefs in topsails.
e522 | VV | a | Gale, squalls, heavy swell; furled topsails.
Se Fe ee es 28
_8 | 1% 3 __| Wind going down a little.
229) 1% SSW SE 3%%4| Reef-topsail wind, cold.
10 | 1% 3%
“a | 1% "34| Rain.
12|1%| SW SSE 314| Shifting winds, drizzly.
r | 1% SSEYE | 3%
_2/1%| SSW SE 3%
_3|2 | swis SE/S__| 3 _| Squally, stars out.
4s “2% _3__| Set topsails with three reefs in them.
_5|2%| SW SSE4“%E |1%
26" 2h _1'| Strong reef-topsail wind, cold.

8 | 2% 1%| Furled fore-topsail; clear with passing clouds;
Reed | ee: nee furled main-topsail.

9} 1% 5%| Heavy storm; furled foresail and mainsail; hauled
Rares eee __|_up main-staysail, and hove to. me
to | 1% 51%4| Coming up to S by E, falling off to SE.

Ir | 1% 7 Strong gale blowing, heavy sea running, clear
with passing clouds; carrying trysail and main-
kee > staysail.
12 | 13% sez
In 2, hours From Vaua
Variation a = Te
of a » P =] mee =on 2 | 5
emeabe| 2 | 2/88 |S | 82) 8 | ges] 2 | 8
1% rhum QD
; SED ee PePaee mew coe ee 2
By Dead SE/E S E E/S
Reckoning 2°33°h 46.7 24’ 40 | 60.4’ |50°19’| 22134 re CAS | 23°25"

DRIVEN BACK BY STORMS Iza

¢ September 28, 1741. After Midday

| 2 g 3
~
ae'| s 2 |
oo S O 4
Berea. WSW S%E “5% Heavy storm, clear with passing clouds; carry-
ais |__| ing main-staysail and trysail.
<2 | 2 a a
ai |2 tetes| Se
24) Bonen 5%| Coming up to S by W,, falling off to SSE.
ima ia | ss wer,
BAGn 2 5% eee ne ee
7 aoa S “5% Lowered fore and main yards on account of the
eds] Santos storm.
OE 5%
_9)2 5% Squalls, rain and hail.
10° Rone. 74 Coming up to SSW, falling off to SSE.
Za | 257) eased) RS Seana VEZ
r2 | 2 5% Stars out, chilly.
Naa 22 | wW/s S%WwW 5%| Coming up to SSW, falling off to S by E.
meta. Ww S/W%W_| 5%4| Coming up to SW by S, falling off to S.
ES ea 37
_4 |'2_ | W/N SSW 4%W | 5%! Coming up to SW, falling off to S by W.
_5|2 |__| SSW%W_| 5%| Coming up to SW by S, falling off to S4E.
Ee Su
| 2S a a
_ 5) By ae as
Ex Em SSW___| 5%| Coming up to SW, falling off to S.
On|) 2s 74 Heavy storm, occasional rain.
Je 3%
I2 | 2 “534| Carrying main-staysail and trysail.
In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation 7 a aS
of i ee | eee ew elt oe ge peed ie
eaamcpe) | 2) | ee | se | 8G) 88 | 3 | gee (e.g. | 8
By Dead SE/S Ss E E/
Reckoning | 4°48’E 46.5 | 36.6’ | 20.2 46’ |49°42’|| 23134 0°42’S }24°rr’

172 LOG; BOOK OF THES sit PEERS

S September 20,1741. After Midday

ro) ina)
= 2 igo) 2 S
a/ 2) = 3 8
any at 5 S) a
TES 2 W /N SSW “5% Heavy storm, squalls, rain, and hail.
<a ae) ee 7
=o aan 5a Carrying trysail and main-staysail.
4|2 5% pe ees
aoe a “5% Coming up to SW, falling off to S.
Go Bers 5% Heavy clouds overhead, chilly, clear with pass-
Peres | SS | aoe | vee | ing clouds.
pe E24 | | | oe
8 [1% 5%
9 | 13% “si At times the wind comes in gusts.
“To | 1 344 74 Clear with passing clouds.
cae ey “5% Occasional rain.
2 | 1% 5% Strong reef-undersail wind, weather as _ before.
_1}|14%|_ WNW |_SSW4W_] 5%
2 || aA 5%
3 | 1% _5%| Coming up to SWW, falling off to S.
4)/1% “5% Squalls.
ea 1% WwW S/W4%W “6 | Undersail wind, clear with passing clouds.
_6 | 1% ieee cee EON
7 | 1% 6 _| Coming up to SW by S, falling off to S¥E.
8 1% 6 | Clear with passing clouds.
Q9|/1I W/S SS) “Si Wind going down; set mainsail, hauled down
ee eee ee ee ey Ree eee. ee oh staysail.
Jojr | |_| 5:4) Coming up to SSW, falling off toSSE.
ar{i | |_| 5 %| Wind in gusts, heavy passing clouds.
T2aeL WwW S%W “5% Coming up to SSWW, falling off to SE %E;
heavy swell from W. ae
2 od In 24 hours From Vaua
Wanation e a 2B = q z e
I rnum 12)
4 iS Q z AH Q 2 as 4 A= a s
By Dead SSE S IK E/S
_Reckoning | 6°08’E_|_36_| 31.5’ | 17.2 | 26’ I4o°rr!ll 238% | 2°16’S__|24°37"

DRIVEN BACK BY STORMS

173

fo} September 30, 1741. After Midday

Topsail wind, cloudy; carrying mainsail and

trysail.

Wind tore the catharpings of the shrouds on

the right side of the two main shrouds, on which
we made a shroud with knob.

Westerly swell.
Wind going down.

Weather as before; from noon until midnight
we laid the course on the average between com-
ing up to and falling off to the wind.

Undersail wind; set foresail, made the port tack,

set mainsail.

Reef-undersail wind, squalls, wet.

Heavy storm, rain and squalls.

Furled foresail and mainsail, hove to under try-

sail; coming up to SW by S, falling off to S by
Wuw.

n
s/ 2} =
m | M S
I]. SW /W
2
3
4|1I
|| ae
6/1
7 %
8 %
9 %| SW/S
qe) A
it % S)
12 34 SW
it ||) 1034 SSE
2 \2
3.|.2%
4|2%
Sue: SE/S
6] 5
711%| SE
8 | 1%
9 | 1%
10 | 1%
Ir | 13! S/W
I2 13% |
Variation
of
Compass

1% rhumb E

By Dead
Reckoning

In 24 hours

n
»
Hl °
He | Se} ee! «
Baas. as 1a
=|

Coming up to S by W,, falling off to SW by W.
Because of the gale the fore and mainyards were

lowered to half-mast.

Reefed trysail.

Terrific storm and squall.

From Vaua
a

in

German

Miles
Long.

&
3
s
4

Dist.

E/S
2°25’S

236 24°20"

174 LOG BOOK OF THE “ST. PETER”

Uf October 1, 1741. After Midday

| 3 a
3 | 56 z 5
° & tee! i)
miu 3 O
Tr 2 SSW W “6%4| Frightful storm, heavy squalls, waves washing
es | ees ___|_over the deck.
aes |e
pee SS) Ce | See (eee ee ee
44,2 _ “6%| Clear with passing clouds.
_5]2 | SW/S WAUN 6% Heavy clouds, squalls.
E90) 2 Be a ete ee ae
_7|2 | SW_| WNWXW |! 6%
_ 8) 28 “6%| Terrific storm and great waves.
2 95|2 6%
e100 20 ie ees | ee oz
It} 2 6%4| Heavy rain.
I2 | 2 “6%| Drizzly.
eelaeZi Sani rats an
2/2 | | WNW4wW lou
et a ee ee (7 en
442 6% Heavy clouds, wet, stormy; one of the lanyards to

the main shroud on the left side tore loose; also
the main-topmast stay, which we repaired.

Smee SW/S INW/WYw

9|2 SW/W| NW%4%wW On the right side the gun port bulwark was carried

out to sea, and we nailed boards in its place.

Io | 2 ee
II | 2 Heavy gale, wet, squally; all day the waves from
both sides washed over the deck.
I2]|2 SW NW
Pesan In 24 hours | From Vaua
Variation a = aa
of 2 ee cent ae dy ao alee
ompass, | | Be | ea] Sel ee] e | ste] &
1% rhum = 5 a Q° 4 25 is 9
z Q P Q an a] AGA a a
By Dead / N E E/S
Reckoning §°13’/E 46 | 44.2’ 13 20’ |49°55’|| 230% 0°16’E |24°40’

DRIVEN BACK BY STORMS 175

@ October 2, 1741. After Midday

g a

u | 2 Es) g PS

2 ° =| = o

° i=) Lal ° 0)

sofa aS 3 O a

I|2 WSW NWUN 6%4| Terrific storm, heavy squalls and high seas,
drizzly; carrying trysail.

BRCM i | ieee el | ace SOS he TS ee ed ee

3/2 614| Unbent the sprit and took a reef in it and made it
ready in place of the trysail, because in this storm
it was not likely that the trysail could hold out.

whol) 2 ee ne Naa SP
25 || 2 ee ee 24
MEGUIE 2s ern Os

7|1%| W/S NW /N 6%| Sea going down a bit.

8 | 13% 6%| Weather as before.

9|1% 6%

Io | 1% 6%| Heavy clouds, rain.
Ir | 13%| WSW NWYUN 7
12 | 13% 7 Strong gale, stars out.
1|1% Gi Cloudy, chilly.
AB AS EES ae ee
3|)1% 7 A regular storm.
25 SA) ee al SE Tea (ir 280

5 |1% 7 Cloudy

6/1%|SW/W| NwW3w 7

7 |1 7 Clear with passing clouds.

8 |r SW S/E%E 6 Gale blowing. At 8:30 set fore-staysail, came
about with the wind, and hove to on the star-
board tack; examined the damaged shrouds on the
left side and repaired them.

mon Ee | SSE}
200 | a ee
20 | ee ee Oe
E2)) | ex 6 Clear with passing clouds.
Went In 24 hours From Vaua
ariation Se
of el Ra eae ae] 2 |
Compass | 8 | eo) ee} £2) 22) 8 | sks F eg
14 rhum de rl] Q 4 it) us|
ee ar gd ee i AS m 8
By Dead NE/E N E E/S
Reckoning 0°23/E 134% 19’ 28.7 44’ |50°14'|| 240% 1°40’E |25°24’

176

LOGBOOK OF THE 7st PEER

h October 3, 1741. After Midday

fon

on

Undersail wind, heavy SW swell.
Drizzly, rainy; carrying trysail and main-staysail.

Wind going down; set mainsail, lowered main-stay-
sail, patched the trysail which had been damaged.

Set trysail.

Undersail wind.
Wind freshening.

Set foresail, came about with the wind on the port
tack, and went our way; heavy rain.

Undersail wind; starboard tack, hove to under
trysail, furled foresail.

Heavy clouds, rain; set main-staysail.

Very chilly and damp.

This day while we were hove to we laid the course
on the average between coming up to and falling
off to the wind.

In 24 hours From Vaua

S) E E/S

iate| eo es) 2
=| Ye) ¢ 5
° S Lead fo}
ep ae S O
_t{t_|_S/W_|_ SE/E | 5%
I fe Ea
3 “a
4 rz
5 XK
6 %
a 3%4| S/E E/S
8 34
9 34
Io | 1
rr |r
12 |1
I|4%| ESE SW
Co eee See Ce
eya|iae SW SSEYE
cn ee eas ee
—5.|1%)_ SSW_|_ SE%E | 6 _
SELOE Eat een ee | Os
pos | ETC | come Ae |e
BETA ase | ee = Sele
9|1%
I0o|1% SW SSE
Ir|/1%
i2|1% S/EY¥E
Variation =
of 2
Compass E aa
1% rhumb E = as
- E
By Dead E/S
Reckoning Oba BL Dy 15

Long.

S

sg]
os =
6 Z

Dep.
in Knots

i 14.7 | 23’ |50°13’||_ 24334 1°45’E 125°47’

DRIVEN BACK BY STORMS

177

ic} October 4, 1741. After Midday

a) 4 2
So) 3 E EF
) i= Rel io) oO
m|™ S O 4
r | 134| SW/W S/E 6%4| Strong undersail wind, rain; carrying trysail and,
se eae oe ___| main-staysail.
_3|1%| W/S S%w 6%! Squalls.
EGA 6%| Storm; hauled down main-staysail.
7s |2%| Ww ssw__| 6%
1G) |TE 6%) Wind as before, drizzly and very chilly.
7 [2% 6%
_9|1%)| W/N_| SSW34W_| 6%
Io |1% _6%| Light rain.
SLE E) _6%| Clear with passing clouds.
2 | 2% 6%
2B 1K SW //S Li7aes Reef-undersail wind, heavy sea, drizzly and rainy.
See S va eR AN I
4/1% _7__| Wind comes in gusts.
Ts |r. SSW'%4W | 6 | Undersail wind, chilly.
aS hee “6 | Hoisted main-staysail.
= ae fey Set mainsail, hauled down main-staysail.
oo oe 5% At the end of the hour set the foresail.
om os W/S S/W 1% Hoisted topsails with three reefs in each.
“ro | 1%] WSW 5 1%
"Tr |r YG 14
Fic en SW /W S/E ares Strong reef-topsail wind, drizzly.
ae In 24 hours From Vaua
Warlation A s | ag i as : 2 .
ete le | 86 | 28 | 8a | See | cea pe |g
i Pe ce aleeieculee dieses) We ee
By Dead SSE S) E E/S
Reckoning 7°20/E 30 26’ 15 23.3’ |49°47'|| 24034 0°28’E |26°10’

LOG BOOK OF THE “ST. PETER”

€ October 5, 1741. After Midday

2 g a
H|3| z : 2
° & = i) o
m)M S Se) ns)
I|2% SW SSEYE = Reef-topsail wind, westerly swell; carrying fore-
sail, mainsail, reefed topsails, trysail, and top-
eae eel ___| mast-staysails.
_2|3 | ssw SE |_ 4
aai|/2 8 %
_4| 2%) S/W SE /E _1%| Lowered staysails; rainy.
Salis 7 Ss WSW _I’%| At the beginning of the hour made the port tack.
_6/3 | S/E WSW'4W | 1%
_7|3%| SSE SW%W_| _1%| Strong reef-topsail wind and rain.
Se Sas SW /W 1%| Squalls.
_9 13% _1¥%| Furled fore-topsail.
Io |3 SSE SW 2&| Furled main-topsail; reef-undersail wind, heavy
es downpour.
el a (7
2 || 2% Furled mainsail, hauled up main-staysail.
ts S WSW _2%4| Light rain.
_2]/2 | SSW W _2%| Set main-topsail reefed.
_3|2 | SW WNWEN |} 2%] Chilly, clear with passing clouds.
_5 | 23%4| SW/W NW /W _2%| Storm, furled main-topsail.
_6}1 | WSW = 4 __| Made starboard tack.
ea ei ae S#E_|4.— ere
S74) 4 __| Strong reef-topsail wind.
9 | 1%| SW/W S/E%E 4
S07 pe ea
1r|1% ie Storm; furled foresail, hove to under main-stay-
ae) |S on sail and trysail.
19) | ae WSW S4%E 5%
Varian In 24 hours From Vaua
=e tae 2 se ee Bas E 2
rymumbE| 2 | 24/89) ae /a5| § | gs] 2 | &
| Pe OF | Se | OA | ee) ee
By Dead WSW Ss WwW E/S
Reckoning 0°39’S 16 6.2’ | 14.5 22’ |49°41’|| 246% 0°02’S) |25°48"

DRIVEN BACK BY STORMS

179

S October 6, 1741. After Midday
o >
s| 2] g :
i) & is ) ca)
sof hat s O 4
Wasa FEZ WSW S%E "5% Stormy, clear with passing clouds, wet; carrying
kf fa PI trysail and main-staysail.
2 2) | | EZ)
_3 |1%| SW/W|_S/EXE | 5%
mena 54) Reefed trysail:
5 ||2t || a eee LO) |tsaualls:
Ln6) 1% id 6 _| Heavy clouds, chilly.
7T)1% 6 Waves from both sides washing over the deck.
5/7 a ae Te
Bor 1% SW SSE”#E | 6_| Heavy storm, wet.
I0o|1% _6%| Hauled down main-staysail.
ines 6%
oma 1% 6% Clear with passing clouds.
Tz | 6%
4 7 ae mm 652
_3|1%| WSW S/E___| 6%] Wind going down a bit.
_5|1% 6% Light rain.
76 [1% 6%
_7|1%)|_ W/S SW 6 | Stormy, set main-staysail.
8)/1% rome
ace Te 6 | Clear with passing clouds.
io | a a
ane 1% “6 | Weather as before, wet.
I2 “Iu te Heavy westerly swell.
eas In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation £ a of 3 a = E : : :
pare Sao | ae | Ba ae)) & | eee |) es. |S
goci| 22 | 2" | 9a 055 |e Paeel alee oe
By Dead ESE S) 1 E/S
Reckoning 0°08/E Sig) 12.5’ | 30.4 | 45.7’ |49°29’|| 25534 o°21’S- | 26°34’

180 LOG BOOK OF THE ‘ST PEGER]
% October 7, 1741. After Midday
5 g 3
sis | a 5 2
© 5 is ) ®
mM s O 4

pat |e ___| ing trysail and main-staysail.

pall) aes E Ron

Ds eee 6 _| Chilly.

74 [3% “34 Rain.

25: | 34 _5%| Terrific storm.

7 | 134 _5%| Squalls and rain.
_9 | 1% ios
ro || io!
era As 6 _| Storm going down a bit.
12 | 1%|_WSW SY%E 6
_x{z | _w/ss S%W___|6_| Undersail wind.
2} x pieceareaiece: ee

3. 1% W S/W'u%W _|5__| Set mainsail, lowered main-staysail.
EEA ee eM oes ee ee

5 |1%| WNW| SWS _ | 5 _| Reef-topsail wind, cold.

6 | 2% NW/W]__SW/W__|_134| Set foresail and reefed topsails.
i oa SW %W oLe4) Hauled up topmast-staysails.

"ie. “2% SW /W 134| Rain, heavy westerly swell; during the day the
course was kept between coming up to and
falling off to. Took an observation which gave
latitude 48°43’, but on account of the swell no

—___} account was taken of it.
2297 eee enero
I2 |2% 13%
Mee In 24 hours From Vaua
ee te ae foes 2] .5\, |e
ymuape| #& | ae | As |e | As] § | ges | 2 | 8
tole a [PEI PT | SE IAS] | eee] 2 | 4
By Dead Ss E E/S
Reckoning 8°36/E 30 29.8’ | 4.5 6.8’ |48°590 2590 1°52’S) |26°417

DRIVEN BACK BY STORMS

181

Of October 8, 1741. After Midday

o al
w 2B eo} Z Ss
Salant ia 3 g
so | 3 S) a)
ae 2% NW /W SW %W Ea Topsail wind, cloudy, chilly; carrying reefed
topsails, foresail, mainsail, trysail, and topmast-
staysails.
wn EA “1%
gt 23K 1% Heavy clouds, squalls.
ea 2K _1%| Strong westerly swell.
ee 2% IM The trysail stay parted, which we repaired.
6 | 2% 1%
peral|eae| 1%
pists cam
ou er74 omy Squalls and rain.
“10 | 134| WNW SW en
22) ee ee
12) ||. 2 SW%S 2
1]/r%| W/N SW /S 2 Topsail wind and unsteady.
Be Ary
4|1% 2
7S 7 ae SSW___| 2_| Light wind, cloudy.
no, wy) W/S NW /N “2 | At 6:30 we wore ship and made the port tack.
7 1% SW WNW ira Let out two reefs in topsails.
on ie SSW WYuN 1% Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
on 2% W 1%
“10 | 3 |_S/W W%S _|a_ | Reef-topsail wind.
i 4% “rt | Took two reefs in topsails.
I2|4% W/S “y | Wind freshening; hauled down topmast-staysails,
took three reefs in topsails.
ets In 24 hours From Vaua
Meration z s | g ies EE E Z g
ymumbE| = |ae|A9| ge) ee) § | s6s |} 2 | &
BA 4 ce A ap ASS AGE 5 ie
By Dead SW WwW E/
Reckoning 2°43'S 41.7 | 17.8" | 37.8 58’ |48°4r’|| 25134 2°18’S) 125°43’

182

LOG BOOK’ OF THE) Si, PEMEPRe

2 October 9, 1741. After Midday

oO >
M ie} a} eo sg
=| ° re =| o
° 1 el ro) o
ot | ews 5 s) A
I/4%| S/E WSW it Topsail wind, cold, drizzly; carrying reefed top-
sails, foresail, mainsail, trysail.
2, | 334 I Furled fore-topsail because of the gale.
313% 1%| Furled main-topsail.
4 | 1% 1%
5 | 2 SW /WiW | 6 At 5:30 furled foresail and hove to under main-
staysail and trysail.
6/1% 6
7|/1%| SSW WuUN 5 Heavy swell from south.
8)/1% 5 Set mainsail, lowered main-staysail.
9|1% 5 Drizzly and rainy.
Io |1% 5 Wind freshening.
Ir |1% 6 Furled mainsail, hauled up main-staysail.
12 |1%| SW/S |WNW4EW 1! 6
Ir|/1% 6
2/1%| SW NW /W%Y4WI 6 Terrific storm.
3 )1% 6
4)/1% 6 Heavy squalls.
5 |1%| WSW NWuUN 6
6/1% 6 sh ee EEE
711%| W/S NNW 6 The lanyard of the main shroud on the left side
are eee) fee ees eee eed parted, which we repaired.
28.) 1) W | NIWAW 60s eee
9 | 13%| W/N N’%W 6%| Terrific gale blowing; hauled down main-staysail,
aes Ses ET) eee (ee carrying only the reefed trysail.
CUO | SEMA ee oe) See OS.

SE YE ae | OT ie I ee ee
I2|1% 6%| Heavy squalls, and the lee side of the ship is
under water.

a In 24 hours | From Vaua

Variation = D Tee
of 2 5 hate a ae . | ade a .
gompass, | 6B | ee | ee | SS] SE | a | eee] OE |
1% rhum a a la a 2 s S
PZ Solna anes ss | ad" | x e
By Dead N N W E/S
Reckoning 8°30/W 22 Py or fPNee 5’ |49°03")| 249 2°10’S) |25°38’

DRIVEN BACK BY STORMS 18

WwW

h October 10, 1741. After Midday

" $ 4
53 | 3 3 iS 2
° <q Red ° oO
ae} | 5 S) ea)

I} r1%| WNW NY%E 6 Storm and squalls, clear with passing clouds.

_3/1% 6 __| Carrying reefed trysail.

4 [2% | om

mein 1% home Thick clouds, rain.

—@ | 202 a Sn LS

za 1% W/N N’%wW _5%| Storm.

_8 | 1% 5% Hauled up main-staysail. .
o|1% _5%| Hail, squalls.

“to | 1% Sis

165, || GBA 6 Terrific storm, lowered main-staysail.
I2|1¥% NOs:

2222) Saas ron
3|)1% “6 | Have difficulty in carrying trysail because of

the strong wind.

5|1%!| W/N N 6 Frightful squalls.
6|1% 6 Hail.
7|1% 6 Snow, cold.
8/1% 6
9|1% 6 Clear with passing clouds.
Io |1¥% 6
Ir|1% 6 Heavy sea running, washing over the deck from
both sides.
I2|1%
hin In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation D =
GE 2 2 3 ee AG 2
compass | 8 | ze | ee) so) S2 | ¢ | sts | &
I% rhum = 5 } M Q 5 25 =| 9
5 Aw | as | oe | 88 Bee 5 8
By Dead / N E B/S
Reckoning 1°14/E 34 6’ 33.4 51’ |49°09’|| 256 1°27’S |26°20°

184 LOG BOOK OF THE “Si, PETER

{} October 11,1741. After Midday

y 3

rw 2 e) x 3

2) ° S 2) o

(3 5 al ° co)

mM s S) oy

1|1%| W/N N’%W 6 Storm, squalls, clear with passing clouds; carry-
ing trysail.
ba ee ee re oe
68 |e) ee | ee Oe
4)|1% WwW N/W4wW | 6 Storm.
Ey || 184 6 Hoisted main-staysail.
ad cd Ie (Riemer pec
SUE OR Gl we Oe ee Ore
8 |1 6 Reef-undersail wind.
(o) || ae 6 Cloudy.

Io | I N /W 6 Gusts of wind, heavy clouds.

oy (Ee OE ee oy

T2010 6 Stars out, chilly.

I % 6%
2 4% 6%} Undersail wind, westerly swell.

3 a N/W4YW | 5%] Set mainsail.

4 yy 514] Hauled down main-staysail.

5 |}1%| W/N SW /S I%| Reef-topsail wind, set foresail.

6 | 2%) NW/W!| SW’%w 1%| Came about with the wind and lay on the star-
board tack.

712%| W/N SW /S 1%]! Set topsails reefed, hauled up topmast-staysails.
8 | 2%] WNW SW I%
9 | 2% 1%

Io | 2% 1%| Let out a reef in topsails.

Ir | 2% I%

I2 | 2% 11%4| Reef-topsail wind, clear with passing clouds;
from noon to 5 o’clock in the morning we kept
the course on the average between coming up
to and falling off to the wind. Took an observa-
tion: zenith distance 59°14’, declination of the
sun 10°59’, latitude 48°15’. From the roth until
this observation we kept the course by reckoning.

In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation
of c 2 e 3 eh ; & 3: u 2 -
1% thum 5 5) AA as a 25 aa 8
% = g B g a aG* % 4
By Dead SSE Ss E
Reckoning A203: II 10’ 5 8’ |48°%590/ 26°31'
By SSE S E | E/S
Observation 4°03/E 61 54’ 27.5 | 41.7’ |48°15’|| 268 3°50’S 27°11"

WESTWARD AGAIN

185

¢ October 12, 1741. After Midday

4 : y 3
S|) | Bee g 2
° & Re! fe) co)
oo) |S s O 4
a “2% NW/W| SW%w Gon Topsail wind, cloudy; carrying topsails and lower
sails reefed and topmast-staysails.
= a eT
2) 2 a ina
peed ee 2) SW Wa
_5 |1%| WNW_ SW 1%| Topgallantsail wind; let out two reefs in topsails.
(ON (22874 1%
mea 1% swiss) 2 Took two reefs in topsails.
_8 | 2% Was
is, eo 2 Light wind.
10 ~~ ~__ | Clewed up mainsail and foresail.
aie ae oe eal Eo Northwesterly swell.
U2 2 kl 3 ___|_ Lowered staysails.
I 34 Ss W/S Light wind; set foresail and mainsail, hoisted
topmast-staysail.
imei | -SSE poe!
ae 4% ~ | Let out second reef in topsails.
74.|@_)_ESE __| Cloudy, rainy.
s [siz sual
6/6 SE Reef-topsail wind.
ea “7K ~~ | Hauled down topmast-staysails.
aos “7% SSE “| Took second reef in topsails.
moO 3%| SSW Ww 34 Drizzly, rainy.
Io 3% ee Reef-topsail wind.
err 3% "_3%| Weather as before.
I2 3% S/W W/S ~~ | Hoisted fore-topmast-staysail.
Variati In 24 hours From Vaua
“oo ae eS ene will aera) aio Tle
sqmumbE| 2 | ge) 28 | 2c )58| § | ghee | = | &
: 2 te (Pea eee ee eaCecle ee eles
By Dead WwW S W 2 /
Reckoning 4°47'S 60 SY 59.8 | 89.7’ |48°10"|| 25434 4°56’S) |25°41’

186 [OG BOOK OF THE. Sl RETER@

S October 13,1741. After Midday

113 2 8
213) 2 3 g
3 a
mi MM Ss 2) 4
I13%| SW/S W/N re Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, rainy; carrying top-
paeral| (iets ___|_sails and lower sails reefed.
ee A e829 NY WNW I
—3.|.3%4 WNW Wt
_4/3%| SW/S W/N 1%| Strong reef-topsail wind.
psd (27) ea 1%
6 | 2% 1%
St Ea WNW 4W | 6%4/ Hove to.
9|1%4|SW/W| NW% 16
Sass | oes no fo
ow 1% “WSW_ _NWEN _ cour
hats 1% | 6 | Storm
_1! | 1%|SW/W|_NWuw_| 6
2) 1% ee
a a 5 eee a 6
5 |_%|_W N/WW | 6%
aby ea | TS
SUN 284 NNW #%W | 2 | Hoisted mainsail and foresail.
28: a4 “2 | Hoisted main-topsail.
_9 | 1%| WSW NW___|2__| 21 men on sick list.
£0.) f°. |W NNW |2_
ir | 2%{| W/S | S/W%W_|13%4| Tacked to starboard.
12 12% “1%4| Westerly swell.t03
In 24 hours \| From Vaua
Variation 7 a
of a Deel pice Coe eas: a2 = os
sgmumbE| 3 | 29/28 | 89/88) 3 | ges] 2 | 8
= pu} at | ad | as] 3 | ees | 3
By Dead N/W Se as | E/
Reckoning 5°40’W | 24 | 23’ 7 10’ |48°33’| 25034 3°50’S__|25°31"

103 Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation, 48°37’, used on the chart (PI. I).

WESTWARD AGAIN

fe) October 14, 1741. After Midday

187

5 Y 3
»/2| 2 os
° S = ro) 9
ae s O ay
enna) W/S | S34 W ee Rect topeail wind, heavy passing clouds, westerly
swell.
aay a 1%
Sia | “2% SW /W| NWY%w 1% Carrying topsails and lower sails reefed.
ware “1%
~5|2 | SW | WNW2N | 1%| Rain and hail.
~6|2 |SW/w NW/W | 134| Squalls and rain, hail.
TGA “T3%| WSW NW "2% Furled topsails.
are aa 2% Storm.
9 | 2% “2%4| Moon out.
To |2_ “2%
Pimeion: “2%
Reali 1% NW4N_ |3 | Undersail wind.
1 |1%|SW/W | NW/W |3_ | Wind varying.
may bre) ison
as, “1%| WSW NW ean Thick clouds, heavy squalls, rain and hail.
_4|2_|SW/W|_NW/W_| 2%
7s | 2%| WSw NW | 19%
6/2 NW UN rica Set topsails reefed.
<7 Gen SW /W NW /W THK Let out reef in main-topsail.
a) “2% “[3%| 24 men on sick list.
9|1%| WSW | NWYW | 1%
To | 13%| Sw/W NW/W | 134| Let out reef in fore-topsail.
ea ea "T34| Topsail wind.
12 | 2%| WSW NW%4W | 134| Cloudy, heavy westerly swell.104
Pare In 24 hours From Vaua
Lane Z ae seaiealta aves me :
wero | 2) | aa | a8 ae Seles ieee | 2 21 ee
; 2 Seva any 2 seat lsc % 4
By Dead N /W N WwW E/
Reckoning 3°ss’W | 30% | 37.7’ | 10.3 | 15.6’ |40°11’|| 244% 1°56’S__|25°rs’

104 Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation, 49°17’, used on the chart (Pl. I).

188

pul October 15, 1741. After Midday

LOG BOOK OF THE SsivVPETERY

. y 3
ee B | 8
° S = fo) oO
clay Ea S O 4
“T |2%| WSW | NW2N | 1%4| Reef-topsail_ wind, clear with passing clouds;
carrying reefed topsails, lower sails, and staysails.
Ee rs
3 | 23%|SW/W| NW/W 11%
~4 |2%| WSW NW “134| Thick clouds, squalls, hail.
Ss. "2% “134| Southwesterly swell.
“6” “2% “134| Took three reefs in topsails, lowered staysails.
We eee ney
os 2% “734| Clear with passing clouds.
9 | 2% NWN | 1%
to | 134| SW/W NW /W “2 | Squalls, rain, snow.
11 | 2%] WSW NW 1%|
rele. i 134 | Topsail wind, cold.
I | 132 ner Topgallantsail wind and changeable.
ears “134| Thick clouds, wet.
ey ee WwW NNW %W | 2. ‘| Squalls, rain.
mises NNW |2_
Worn Tayo “2. | Topgallantsail wind.
Gotan NNW %4W | 2 | Wind in gusts.
“7 |13%| WSW | NW4%N |2_ | Wind shifting.
~g|2 |WNW N 134] Clear with passing clouds.
ou i | WSW S%W ~~ | Made the port tack, let out two reefs in topsails.
“to | 13%4| WNW SWw%sS |/2_
Ir |z | WSW S%W ~~ | Light wind, clear with passing clouds.
Ses ee W S/W'4W |3 | Westerly swell. Took an observation: zenith
distance 62° 18’, declination of the sun 12° 22’,
| latitude 49° 56/.105
33 In 24 hours From Vaua
Maranon | 3 2 g e Er : : e
yomabe| 2 - | 2a | ee | ee Aes lee | eee
1% Z ar AH ae na AG” 2 2
By N N WwW E/S
Observation | 5°20’W 46 45’ 4.2 6.3’ |49°56’|| 239014 0°33’E_ |25°00’

105 Khitrov’s journal gives latitude by observation 49° 58’.

WESTWARD AGAIN 189

Q October 16,1741. After Midday

2 3
hi 2 so] Z PS
=} ° is) 3 of)
() S = ° o
mis S S) 4
I 14| WNW SE/E Calm, chilly, clear with passing clouds.
2|2 SW%S 1%

302 NW /W SW /W 14| Topsail wind, thick clouds, snow, squalls.

Sule _I’%| Variable.
PRG lam 1%| Took second reef in topsails.
ge FR “2%| NW IN W/S “1% Reef-topsail wind; took third reef in topsails.
8 | 234 ny
miroul|iasZ “11%4| Squalls, snow.
“to | 2% 1% Moon and stars out.
“a1 | 2%| NW WSW “13%4| Squalls, snow.
em oa ees | |e
I} 13% ran Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
es Fe 1%
a ESA NNW W%S “T34| Let out three reefs in main-topsail.
egal ar “1%
5 | 13%| NW wsw | 1%
Gn 234 NW /N W/S 1% Let out all reefs in topsails.
7 | 2 ie
~“gil2 | Nw WSW ees Clear with passing clouds.
9 | 2%| WNW SW “1%| Topsail wind.
To | 1% SW %S “2 | Topgallantsail wind.
Sar ae eae Light wind, clear, sunshine.
T2_ lime SE%E “2 | Took observation: latitude 49°34’, but made

no change in the dead reckoning because of the
slight difference.

Vatiati In 24 hours From Vaua
aoa Z g e rE q i =
jGompass | £ | false | oe | ee) a | sta) -.8 3
1% rhum = Ay Q 4 2S ic S
e Ae Bashi am % 2
By Dead SW /W S WwW E/
Reckoning 8°35/W 44 | 18.6’ | 39.6 | 59’ |49°37’l| -232 -1°0’S _|24°ro"

190 LOG BOOK OF THE “ST. PETER”
h October 17, 1741. After Midday
>
rm) 9 6
»| 3] § e oe
° Si Rel fo) ©
anh 4) ol 5 ) 5)
I Clear with passing clouds.
E aa
3 3 At times calm; repaired various damages caused
° by the storm.
pee ee mame
ose Yo a a | tay Se ne ee
Gnle2 S W/S Topgallantsail wind; took second reef in topsails.
7!3%! S/E
8/4 Topsail wind.
9|4 Drizzly.
TOMES Reef-topsail wind, thick clouds, wind freshening.
Ir |6%
I2|6% Hauled down main-topmast-staysail.
1|6%
216% Cloudy, rainy, wind in gusts; hauled down fore-
topmast-staysail, topsails on the caps.
316% SE
IR) ZS Ee a eee, et
5 |6% Gale, rain; took third reef in fore-topsail.
6 | 6%
715% E Furled main-topsail, clewed up foresail because it
was torn in one place.
eS) Selle eee
9|4% Strong reef-undersail wind. ws
cL i TS ne
Ir | 3% Wind going down.
I2 | 3% Let out reef in fore-topsail; reef-topsail wind,
drizzly, rainy.
ney In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a mm ae
of = aS par 5 Sy : gO ‘= tb
a ata & a4 | An AS} xH | #8 5 8
ee ae Ag | ac | £
By Dead N Ww E/
Reckoning WKN 95 4.7’ | 94.8 142’ |49°42’|| 210 1°58’S) |21°48’

WESTWARD AGAIN

—

ic: October 18, 1741. After Midday

5 2 3
ie | § ai
° < ont fo} 6
mis s O ea
Manis | CEN Ww/s ie, Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, rainy.
2/4 NE/E WSW Furled fore-topsail, set foresail and main-topsail,
PO | | iff ks clewed up mainsail.
8.2 a ci ee
SAGs NNE w/S ee iGale:
|e | Ne NW /W 6%4| Furled the sails and hove to under reefed trysail.
25/3 a aa rs
7 | 1% N WNW %W | 6%4| Storm.
RON 6% <<
EuOn hea “6%4| Drizzly, wet.
Say EN we 16%
mB2n TZ) 64% At times the moon is out.
7 6%| Stormy.
eral lo, NW/N_ _WSW2%W_ “7 | Strong reef-undersail wind, cloudy.
2 ck ETRE [ee Pa
WOUREA W/Ss “2 | Undersail wind; set foresail and mainsail.
7 | 2% a
8 | 2% “2 | Examined main-topsail shrouds which were
ChE eee damaged .106
ona % WSWHwW | 2
Econ zee “2 | Northerly swell.
Ir | 134 “2 | Repaired main-topsail shrouds, set both topsails,
eed | Sok and let out a reef in each.
12 |1%| NW WSW ae
In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a a ae
of Vee eae ae eal 48 g
vrmmeen| 2 | 29/83) 83/88) 3 | abe) 2 | &
7) re ay) oe as AGn Z ras
By Dead Sw /W Ss Ww | E/S
Reckoning 7°25'W 43 19! 38.4 | 57.6’ |49°23’| 203 3°49’S__|20°S50’

106 Khitrov’s journal:

“On sick list:

Captain Commander and 32 men.”

192 LOG BOOK OF THE {ST PBRTER?
€ October 19, 1741. After Midday
p>
a 2 ww B g
eal ve 2 | 8
oa] s O 4
“zy 12%| NW/W| SWx%W rae Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carrying
topsails and lower sails and staysails.
~212% ins
—3 | 23%| WNW | SWS [a
ae 2%) W/N SW /S i Thick clouds, squalls, wet; hauled down staysails.
ae Swus_ |1% hii
a Pe 1%| Light wind, drizzly, wet.
Sails | ee
~~? |1%| SW WNW _2__| With the change of wind we made the port tack.
“ro | 2 | SW/S W/N | 1%
Ir | 3%| SSW WYN 1 | Topsail wind, cloudy.
“12 | 3%| SSW Ww ie
a 33%| S/W Reef-topsail wind.
a 334 ae Drizzly, rainy.
A A i em
a5 Cc a a eam |
55 Strong reef-topsail wind.
6" “5% ~ | Weather as before.
age Po ~~ | By the will of God Alexei Kiselev died of scurvy;
29 men on the sick list.
Sas | = SS ae
~~? ies | | | Wind going down; let out reef in topsails.
lor aee| oe eae ee
alee | ee Raine
213%! &4| | | Southerly swell; hauled up topmast staysails.
eas In 24 hours From Vaua
veneron 2 g = g = as : Z ‘
wymumbeE} £2 | ae /A§| gales] § | she] 2 | 8
: | Pe | Pe ae | aoe eee
By Dead WwW N W E/S
Reckoning 5°44’N 70 “! 69.8 | 107.6’|49°30’ 186 4°40’S' _|19°02’

DEATHS FROM SCURVY 193

& October 20,1741. After Midday

y 3
Dn
3 | 9 = 5 2
° [=] Re! ro) 0)
mM S O =
I|2% S W/S ¥%4| Topsail wind, drizzly, rainy; with the change of
wind we made the port tack.
2nle3 NW WSW I
3 |3% I Undersail wind; lowered staysails.
ADik3 WSW ¥4W I
5 | 2%) NW/W SW /W 114| Furled topsails.
6/1% 1%| Thick clouds, squalls, wet; furled foresail, hove to
ee (a under the mainsail and trysail.
2 a cay MC
MEST a |S is | Storm.
_9 | 1%| WNW_ EASWi2sSi (is i Clear with passing showers.
OMe
ou 1% ENE RIA: foe ee Thick clouds, hail, rain.
eT Ee ee eens pe Ya
PEO eT lbeerctt Joe Pi aS, Wind going down.
eS Lea pe de le | Pde |
_3 {1 | W/N_|_SSW%W_|5__| Undersail wind.
_4)2_) W_ | S/W%W_| 5 _| Cloudy.
SOM tenes |e | as |i Heavy northerly swell.
MORE SW/S ah SW is
_7 |. %|_WSW_|_ NW ___| 4 __| Reef-topsail wind, set foresail,
8 | 134| SW/W NW /W 2 Set topsails reefed; Nikita Kharitonov died by
the will of God.
9 | 2%) S/W W/N
Io |4 Ss W Clear with passing clouds; took three reefs in fore-
topsail; heavy squalls which obliged us to ease up
on the lanyards to the topsail shrouds; tacked to
yl) le a eee (mer port.107
iTS. || 2a
12134] SSW I
In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a a ie
of aQ ks 5 “5 ago Q °
1% rhum a | Q Q 4 3 c
2 ele e| 3 aé= | & A
By Dead WSW WwW ; E/S
Reckoning 2°51’W 29.7 Io’ 28 42’ |49°20’|| 180% 5°590’S'" _|18°20’

107 Khitrov’s journal: “On sick list: Captain Commander, petty officers and men to

the number of 32.”

194

LOG (BOOK OF THE “SISPELTER”

& October 21, 1741. After Midday

5 Y 3

5| <3 = iE 2

° & Real fo oO

mis = O 4

I] 1%! SW/S | WNWEW | 2 Topgaliantsail wind, wet, sunshine.

25024 2 Took three reefs in main-topsail.

3) 1%) SW/W NW /W 2

4 |2%| W/N N “ZW I Ree clouds, squalls, rain; made the starboard
tack.

5 | 23%| NW WSW 1%

6|2% 1%| Stormy, wet.

7 | 13% 3 Furled topsails.

8/14 3 Cloudy, rain, hail.

9/1%| NW/W| SWY%w 5 Gale; furled foresail, hove to under the mainsail
and trysail.

Io |1%| WNW SW %S 5 Stormy.

Tr) 24 5 Squalls, rain and hail.

12 |/1%| W/N SSW %W 5 Stars out.

I/1% WwW SSW 3/2] Reef-topsail wind; set foresail.

2/1% 3%] Clear with passing clouds.

3;21 | W/S S’%WwW 3!4| Came about with the wind and made the port tack.
4 | 134)}SW/W| NWYUw 2%

5 | 134| WSW NW 21%! Set the topsails reefed.

6 | 344| SW/W NW /W 1%| Hauled up topmast-staysails.

712% NW 3, W 1%| Thick clouds, hail, snow.

8|/2% 1%| Clear with passing clouds, reef-topsail wind.

9 | 214 NW /WYW) 1%

Io | 2% NW /W 1%] Thick clouds, squalls; at times we were obliged to
ease up on the lanyards to the topmast shrouds;
westerly swell.

rere || 1%

I2 | 234 NW%W |1%| Took an observation: latitude 49° 27’, but be-
cause of the small difference from the dead reckon-
ing it was not considered.

Pan In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a = =e

of z as) ue ae a) . Bal ity <3 0
jGompass, | 6G 6 ee | Sd] 88) 82) =e | ste] § et

1% rhum x AY Q Q 4 eg Ss S

% a ae a Ad re a
By Dead NW /W N W E/
Reckoning 3°49’N 16% | 9.8’ 12.9 20’ |49°30'|| 17634 5°32’S 18°0’

DEATHS FROM SCURVY 195

al October 22, 1741. After Midday

reefed.
= Ee na a rs
32 ~|[ [Ww | NNW ae
_4 | 13%| WNW_ SW _2__| Made the starboard tack.
~s |2%|_ W SSW KW | 1%
mOn 2 “T%| Topsail wind.
ee SSW. | 1%
pO Lu2e. rey Thick clouds, squalls, and wet.
Io | 2% “1%4| Undersail wind, weather as before.
Ir/1% S/W ’w “6 | Furled topsails, foresail, mainsail; hove to on the
oe a CO main-staysail and trysail.
2) 14 6
_t| 1% fom
_2|1%|_W/N | SSW%W_|5%| By the will of God died the marine Luka Zaviakov.
_4 | t% “534| Storm, squalls, hail.
_5|21_|WNW] SWS _ | 5%4| Very chilly.
CE eB) “514| Wind going down a bit.
RET (EEK: 5%
BESE ebay “514| Undersail wind.
_9 | 1%|NW/W!__ SW/W “2 | Set foresail and mainsail.
10 | 1% “2 | Clear with passing clouds.
58 | “2 | Set topsails reefed.
12 |1% “2 | We wrapped the dead marine and dropped him
into the sea.
ae In 24 hours | From Vaua
Variation ai =
° 2 2 {le eel ee 5G 2 2 i
pres | 2 | ol Se se 183) 3 | ste | 2 | &
Eis ical ac as cal
By Dead S/W. S WwW ESE
Reckoning 7°11’W 22 ar’ 7 10’ |49°09’|| 172% 4°o0’E 17°50’

196 LOG BOOK. OF THE “ST PEPER?

Q October 23, 1741. After Midday

Y 3

h 2 Me} 2 2

ba] ° = 3 o

° a iia ) co)

m|M S O a

1|}1%| NW NNE 114| Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds. At the
beginning of this hour made port tack. It was
agreed that we should keep close to the land be-
cause we had only 15 casks of water.108

2|2% 1%

3 | 2%) NW/W N/E 1%

Mh \\ 3 WNW NYE 1%

5 NW NNE 1%

6/1%4 1%| At the end of this hour we came about on the star-
board tack because the wind was unfavorable for
going ahead.

7|1%|NW/N W/S 2

8 | 1% 2

On| er 2 Light wind, clear with passing clouds, thick clouds

pe te il en ee Aline ae Sl overhead, wet, westerly swell.
10) | NW |) WSW a) eee
II In 4 hours we made leeway at the rate of half knot
per hour E by S.
119 4 se Clewed up mainsail and foresail.
=a ae ee as
is) a ° a
3 Z poe
aedalae 2 eae
Feet eR Mee eee eee | TET.
0} 4] SE | WNW__ |__| Light wind.
aT Fel ee | Cloudy a eee
_8| 2%) S/E |) |__| Topgallantsail wind; let out two reefs in topsails._
sO D4 facade | eis WOON a EET
—105| 374 SE ae N ae ead |e Topsail wind, cloudy.
I2 | 3% Today I became ill with the scurvy but am not
counted among the sick.
Vv In 24 hours From Vaua
ariation
of 2 3 | 3 7 2 2 n s A.
jfompass | ee) 8a) 8a | 82] ¢ | ee 2
DL Aeraump ys Ss aye) | tel AS 4 25 Ss 3
ee af Pa lia. ao* | 2 =
By Dead NW/N N W ESE
Reckoning 0°04’N 18 15’ 10 15’ |49°24'|| 173% A253 Baali7esse

1088 Khitrov’s journal: “We and the petty officers had a consultation with the
Captain Commander, The winds had continuously been contrary and of water we
had only 15 casks. It was dangerous either to go on or to wait for a change of wind.
and we therefore unanimously agreed to sail N in the hope of finding a place to take
water, without which a great misfortune would overtake us.”

DEATHS FROM SCURVY 197

h October 24,1741. After Midday

a y ze
alee) B |e
° =] al fo) oO
miu s O 4
hated a SE W/N Keane Topsail wind, chilly; carrying topsails, foresail,
mainsail reefed.
_ 2) St aan anaan (aie
3 2 er ee
aeAy 4% E/S ___| Strong reef-topsail wind.
6 Took second and third reefs in fore-topsail;
jie heavy clouds, wet.
_6 | 4% ee
_ 7 | a a
EA ___| Clewed up mainsail.
eR Rouen Mecrpers es ea
Io | 434 Rain, heavy passing clouds.
= a a Ps
ea a | | Snow.
EA Clewed up mainsail.
2 ae a
38 (om E en Undersail wind, drizzly, rain.
4|6
_ 5 | Cl ae a ae
_6|7%| ENE W/N |__| Storm, gusts of wind.
7 | 634 earra
S| CL ae | (OT
_9 | 5%|_ NE WNW |__| Squalls, rain, snow.
1@ || SF pies Took three reefs in main-topsail.
ae 4 ___| Set mainsail.
12 |4% Reef-topsail wind, weather the same.
iA In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation = a ame
Crenass z $e ae ag oe) = if = g z EY
1% rhumb E 5 Z 45 < a8 § wee a 8
as eS an Ax an a = aon zi =)
By Dead WNW N Ww E/S
Reckoning 0°34’W 123 46’ |114.3 | 177’ |50°10’|| 14234 5°28’S _|14°38’

198 LOG: BOOK ‘OF THE. “SIvPETER:

{} October 25, 1741. After Midday

5 y a
uo ae] 4 3
=| ° S t= oO
) = Rel ) o
oye ees S O =
mainsail.
2)\4 Squalls, snow.
p2Be Soe |. Se oe ee EEE Eee
413% N Set mainsail, hauled up fore-topmast-staysail.
5 | 3%
6 | 2% Northerly swell.
8|2% 34| Heavy passing clouds.
Io | 2% 34| Reef-topsail wind.
AD N30 ee eee
1213 34| Strong reef-topsail wind, ccld.
3 34
ee el Ee Ween pa 8
Bers 34| At times the moon is shining.
413 34| Northerly swell.
Suies N /W W/N I Large hailstones coming down, cold, heavy
passing clouds.
Wer OE Sia Nhe eeteoed fo || pene are ca RE
7 | 23% I
8 | 2% I Clear with passing clouds. At 8 A.M. sighted land
covered with snow in NW by N. 10
9 |2% I Reef-topsail wind, gusty at times.
10 | 2% I
Ir |2%| NNW W se Clear with passing clouds. Took an observa-
tion: Zenith distance 66°24’, declination of the
sun 15°34’, latitude 50°50’.110 The land which we
sighted in the morning bears now N by WywW
about 8% German miles. We take this land to
be an island and named it St. Markiana.11
12 13% I
t In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a D ae
of = 5 are e = go 2 ar
oecmmbe| 2 | 22/28) 82/88) 43 | gt) 2 |:
4 < = U cs
me as lees Aé= | .
By Dead WNW N WwW
Reckoning 3°04’/N 69.6 | 29.7’ | 62.7 | 98.6’ |50°40"|| 12°59’
By . NW /wW N WwW E/S
Observation 1°20’W 60.6 40’ 56.9 | 89.6’ 150°50’|| 12534 3°024S 0 ltss007

(Footnotes 109-111 on pp. 199-200.)

LANDFALL: KISKA ISLAND I

8

(€ October 26, 1741. After Midday

f(a es a 8
—
eie| = Ales
oof aa S O s
I | 2%| NNW W “T%| Reef-topsail wind, cloudy, squalls, snow; carry-
eo tl ea ___| ing staysails, topsails, and lower sails.
__ 2 || 2h oa VES are ner)
=) C025 er ets, | Uhl
gh ZEA 134| Northerly swell.12
_5 | 23%) _ N/W W/N 1%
eS 7 1K
NS NNW W ine Heavy passing clouds and snowstorm.
9 | 2% non Clear with passing clouds.
as 2 a
Ir | 2%) N/W WHN | 134] Wet
12_|_2%4 14 a RS US 7
ee ae W/N | 13%
eak2) 2% 1% Heavy passing clouds aad rain.
PES 2 ernie ete SMa tla
_4 | 2% WuUN 114] Heavy passing clouds, wind in gusts.
_5|24| NNW | W | 1%
_6 | 2% 1% Snow
ie 4 1%
8 | 2% por Reef-topsail wind, clear with passing clouds. 30
EE pe on the sick list.
to | 234] N/W W/N__| _1%4| Chilly.
AL “~%| Topsail wind, weather as before.
I2|2 1% Topsail wind.
eke A In 24 hours From Vaua
Maration 5 ; E z i eiciean| ae eaae ee #5
mopar) = (2a (ae acl agile ste | 8 |
ne a AT AX A AA | 4 | Aga SI 4
By Dead WwW N W E/S
Reckoning 25°6'’N 58.6 | 2.9’ | 58.2 | 92.6’ |50°53’|| I11% 4°290’S__|11°36"

12 Khitrov’s journal: “4 o’clock in the afternoon sighted an island; southern point of
it bore true N.” [The “island” sighted was probably the southern end of Kiska Island,
I,200 to 1,500 feet high and with a radius of visibility of about 40 knots, and was not
recognized as part of the same island of which it was the northern peak, 4,050 feet higk
cae with ia eee of visibility of about 70 knots, that had been sighted eight aours before.
—EpiT. NOTE.

Footnotes to Log of October 25

seg ~ Khitrov’s journal: “Saw land in NW by N, 8 miles distant, which we took for ar.
island.

110 Khitrov’s journal: “The island we sighted is high, rocky, treeless, and covered with
snow. Latitude 51° 11’ .. .” This refers to the latitude of the ship at 8 A.M., when
the island was first sighted (see Waxel’s report, p. 275); on the chart (Pl. I) the October
25 noon position has been plotted accordingly, as this brings the subsequent landfalls
into better agreement with the actual conditions than the observed latitude of 50° 50’,
which was probably a poor observation, and the recorded day’s run of 69.6 knots, which
probably underestimated the current and was too low.

11 Kiska Island. [Sokolov (Zapiski Hydrogr. Depart., Vol. 9, St. Petersburg, 1851,
Pp. 394-395) identifies St. Markiana Island as Amchitka and St. Stephen Island, sighted
on October 28 (here interpreted as Buldir), as Kiska. If the arc of visibility be plotted

(Continuation of footnote on p. 200.)

200 LOG BOOK OF THE “ST. PETER’

4 October 27, 1741. After Midday

a
| zs o) ra
| 2% IN /W WUN rar Topsail wind, drizzly; hauled up main-topmast-
staysall; carrying topsails, foresail, mainsail reefed,
staysails, and trysall.
2. 2 1%
“3 | 24| NW/N Ww /S 1%
a es | pce ec ee ee ee
ia se NW WSW 2 Light wind, drizzly.
fo (2 Se EES AEeoL ese
_7 | 1 _| NW/W) SW/W__ 2
68|I : oe en
_9° _K i ae Clear with passing clouds,
x1 Calm) 2
12 1%| SW/W. NW /W Zan eLoOp allantsail wind; made the starboard tack.
ee Se es ee 2) en SN
uae re SW NW/W’WwW 1%! Stars out, heavy passing clouds, rain.
pe Ja) | SW /W_ _NW/W BIA Topsail wind.
6 ges SW /S WNW 1 | Rain,
TAA rc I have such pains in my feet and hands, owing
to the seurvy, that I can with difficulty stand
oes ee ___|_ my watch. 32 on the sick list.
6) 4 _ een 1
Ool|4% T Strong reef-topsail wind, drizzly; hauled down
eee, aes topmast-staysails,
11 | 4% 1 Clewed up trysail,
i214 1 Reef-topsail wind, heavy passing clouds,
In 24 hours From Vaua
wea (a4 1 a | fleala | mel 2
A Sompass : - is ae K Gi “| ahr 5
1% rhumb K 5 aN Aid Ai aS 5 zoe 5 5
By Dead NW /W N Ww E/S
Reckoning 1°36/(?JN | 57.6 | 27.1’ | 38.2 61’ |51°20'|| 100% 2°18'S) |10°35’

of the highest point of each of the two islands (Amchitka: height 1,008 feet, visibility
radius 32 knots; Kiska: height 4,050 feet, visibility radius 70 knots) with reference to
the probable course of the St. Peler as adjusted to the latitude of 51° 11’ and the bearing
NW by WN at the time of sighting, it seems probable, however, that the island seen was
Kiska and not Amchitka. This would also seem to be indicated by the characterization
of the island as high. “Amchitka is ...low... The offshore navigator can not
expect to see Amchitka at all as there are no commanding elevations” (United States
Coast Pilot: Alaska, Part II, rst edition, U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Washington,
D. C., 1916, p. 222).—Epit. NoTe.}

LANDFALL: BULDIR ISLAND 201

fo} October 28, 1741. After Midday

ae
ee |) : g
° q roe ()
mim| s O a
1|3%| SW/S WNW I Reef-topsail wind, heavy passing clouds; carry-
ing topsails, foresail, mainsail, and trysail.
213% I
Seiten Sastre | ere ere | Ee ee | ee
LESS eae AE A se ee et nee ey ree nee
Cay I Undersail wind. Owing to the squalls we were
obliged to ease up on the lanyards to the top-
mast shrouds; furled topsails.
| 2S a es We
712 SSW W/N 3
Ic es re i Tae
9/|1% 3 Drizzly.
10 | 1% WU4AN 3%] Wind as before.
Ir |/1% 3'4| Reef-topsail wind.
ra |.2 3'%| Southwesterly swell.
I|}1% ie Ww 3%
2/1% 3%] Wind going down a bit, drizzly, rainy.
Riri (merce | em ges | cae ke A A [te a ee 2 aa ee
4/1% 314| By the will of God Stephen Buldirev,!!3 naval
1s cooper, died of scurvy.
5 | 1% 3%
612% 314| Set topsails and topmast-staysails.
7 At 7:30 sighted high land,'!™ one point bore N
by W4W 2 miles, another point NW4W.
8
9 Clewed up foresail, mainsail, and trysail because
there was little wind.
2 ee ee
Il Drizzly, wet; sounded and got 63 fathoms.
I2|2%| SSE W/N Set foresail and mainsail; topgallantsail wind.
Of the land sighted earlier, the first point bears
ENE 2 miles; near it are three small islands to the
east not far apart; the second point NNE4E
1 mile. We named the island St. Stephen,!15
Vy, In 24 hours From Vaua
ariation
ompass ag | He 5 eq 1 wi Ar I q
1% rhumb E 5 AM | AQ vy, fa) we] 495
a | Pe Rg | BA ao" | kz 4
By Dead NW /N N WwW E/S
Reckoning 5°40’W 45 34.8’ | 28.6 | 43’ |sx°ss’ll ors To sate 0°52’

113 Another reading is Stepan Bogdriev. See, however, next footnote and entry under

12 p.m.

hi Buldir Island. ‘

5 Khitrov’s journal: “Land sighted proved to be an island extending WNW-ESE,
the western point bearing NNE, the eastern ENE. From it were seen three small islands,
distant 3% or 4 miles. The longest seemed to be 4% German miles.”

202 LOG BOOK OF THE “STSPETER?

DE October 29, 1741. After Midday

Z y 8
i n

s/o] & 5 a

io) S| = 5 ig

m|M S o) rm)

I | 3%] SE/S W/N Topsail wind, drizzly, rainy; carrying topsails,
foresail, and mainsail.

2 ee | eee |
ee 2 ec re ee ee
eA 7A el | ee eee ee ee eile.

5 |5%4 Took three reefs in topsails.

6 5%

"|S WwW Drizzly, rainy; furled topsails on account of
darkness and heavy gale.

8 | 4%

Io | 43% W/S
Il | 43% Sounded 70 or 80 fathoms but did not strike
bottom.
I2 | 434
sake i er. Se RR aes joer | (Rerew Dy DiRMND
2|3% Wind going down, clear with passing clouds.
pute Rs | OR] Meee eee eee 2) pe

414% Sounded in 60 fathoms, no bottom.

5 |43%4| SSE W /N

6 | 4% Gale, drizzly, wet.

7|3%

813 Topsail wind, cold, air thick.

9/1I 35 fathoms of water; because of the fog we could not
see anything and therefore hove to; clewed up
foresail and mainsail.

m0) cA S Sighted a low island the middle of which bore
W 1% miles.1!6
Ir |4% W N’YW When the fog lifted we sighted land in the west;
set topsails and foresail.
sees il N Reef-topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
The island!l? sighted at to o’clock bears now
WSW 2% German miles; we named it St. Abra-
a ham. Near it is a projection like a cape.
ee In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a a Ale
Q rs) Q
of ae 5 2 = OD 2
|Compass E ae | 8 | Be | He = Ses E 8
174 rhumb E a 4 An Qs ae 4 | 25s = )
4 & I a RO m =
By Dead WNW N Ww | E
Reckoning 0°50’N 90 | 35:7’ | 82.8 | 135’ |52°31’|| 6034 4°44’S |.7°37'

116 Khitrov’s journal: “Sighted an island; northern point W by N, Southern point W
by S 3% miles. At noon the northern point of the island bore WSW.”
117 Easternmost of the Semichi Islands.

PrP eeASih SURE TCE 203

Q October 30, 1741. After Midday

o >
a g ~~ ra Ss
3] 8 S 5 %
mii M S O 4
ie om ei, a “N/W%W in Reef-topsail wind, drizzly; carrying topsails, fore-
PCa ee Pie ee, sail, mainsail, trysail.
2 | 27) a es E74
SSAA W /N N /W _1%| Topsail wind, weather the same.
aioe | 24 | Rain.
15 2 a ae ee
56) 25) a a S74 BEE
7. || BEA W NNW _1%| Southwest swell.
_f | 2) 2 a 321 re i re
AOR 2%|_W/S NW/N 1% Reef-topsail wind, clear with passing rains.
5O)| 23 ee ae ET Ti pes Se a
Il | 2% 1%| Sounded in 70 fathoms, no bottoin.
fx ed
Ey S%w _234| Made the starboard tack.
2 a TS ET:
ee 24% 234| Clear with passing clouds.
Bae iowa pn Stes ee eee
sift SW /S W/N 2 pieke wind, weather the same; made the port
ack.
GE a | Bo
7a 22a | SSW, W I%| 18
Seiisee TK _Reef-topsail wind.
_9 | 2% 1% Hauled up topmast-staysails.
0° 3% I Drizzly, wet.
LAs ‘T | Strong reef-topsail wind.
I2 | 2% Fan
tae In 24 hours From Vaua
pareeion rs g g e ce : 2 i
pores 2 |ee (a5 |82|e2| 2 | ees] 2 | 8
eA aaa cial aap ae ee gee a
By Dead NNW N Ww | E
Reckoning 1°18’/N 35 237 | 12:8 21’ |53°04'|| 65% 2°rr’N 7°16"

us Khitrov’s journal gives observed but discarded latitude 52°27’.

« ”
204 LOG BOOK OF THE “ST. PETER:
h October 31, 1741. After Midday
al
a)
n nD a
si 35| = 5 E
) r= = io) a)
mi s O a]
113%] S/W Wx%S 114| Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, rain; carrying topsails,
|| | ee a eee | oo foresail, trysail, and staysails.
0) E25) a | eerie) (7
4] 2%) |: WNW4W | 1% Hauled down main-topmast-staysail.
2051254) SWIWo) NW |
7) 2%] | | Wind as before, heavy passing clouds.
8) 2%) | NW2#W_ | 1%
082274 | lee ee | Stars out.
TOs | 5270) ee eee CE
ary 2 } | OU NW/W_| 134! Topsail wind.
i ee Oe
_1|2%)_SW_|NW/W%W | 1%! Squally clouds; occasionally the stars are seen. _
—2)2%) |_ sit %| At 2:30 made the starboard tack.
23 | 24 | SWIW)T Sih 2 as
SR | 2 Oe) eres | Bee ees | Oia,
_5 | 2%) WSW] SS _i|_234| Squally clouds, snow, cold.
SON Bie Woe aan eo eo OS,
ee Ee ne | enn e
Sex 234) At 8:30 came about with the wind and made the
port tack; unbent the foresail because it was no
longer seaworthy and bent on a new one. By the
will of God died the Yakutsk soldier Karp Pashen-
Peeks | ia, S| Ac tak) Nee eee Re oe || noi, and we lowered him into the sea.
229 E72 2 SSW Wes Ee
SEO 2731) NV) WIN |
eT aN eee |e Ee eee
I2|3% S W 1%4| Reef-topsail wind, snow, squally clouds; at times
v the sun is seen.
In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a a aa
of ra a : ee re ' AE on a :
epee E BG | Bs oe we} 2 | see E Et
1% rhum =z 5 omen (ate Qe a) a & 3
=m) ea Dee eo AG 2 =
By Dead NW/N N WwW E/N
Reckoning 1°23/W 37% | 30.7’ | 21.6 BOL Sse35) 6034 1°32’/E 6°40’

thik EAS) StRE TCH

205

ist November 1, 1741. After Midday

119 Khitrov’s journal: “On the sick list:

z g a
ee | 8G
mie 5 O a
eh a hee WSW NW “2 | Furled topsails; gale blowing, squally clouds;
pc oa ay char § hove to under the main-staysail and trysail.
_2/1%| W/N N%w 5%
macs 4 Wilh. Se mA Reefed foresail.
cE SE I STR SS Er a Se LS ee
511% Ww NNW 3%| Undersail wind, cloudy; set foresail and mainsail,
Ade ex ties hauled down main-staysail.
Loa Zs ROLLS Ee ee
TN? W/S NW /N 3%| Squally clouds, snow; occasionally the stars shine
ral fo tee foee through.
8 | 2 W NNW 3%
ior ree 3% Squally clouds, hail.
to | 1%) _W/S_ | NW/N | 3%
Ir | 1%| SW/W NW /W 3%
12 |1%| W/S NW/N | 3%] Undersail wind.
via ay WwW "NNWi4W 3% Clear with passing clouds.
73_|_ NNW 3%
pean 1% 3% Reef-topsail wind, at times comes in puffs.
| 2A) Ss ne (25
6 | 1% N/WuW | 3%
Se “2% NNW 3% Set main-topsail.
a “2% 3% Squally clouds, snow.
Shee 7, WNW NYW 3% Clear with passing clouds; unbent the main-top-
pie sail in order to mend it.
to |2_|_W/N_|_N/wxW | 3x! 0
1z1|1%| W NNWW | 3%
“12 ‘eA 3% Reef-topsail wind; the sun is barely seen.
Soi ry In 24 hours From Vaua
Vadeton A is = 3 oe | aa ; a E
eee te ed | Salles |e eee a | oe
a CY SEMI see oe he yale 2% 8
By Dead NE N E E/N
Reckoning 7°24/E 37 32/0 |18t4 31’ |54°07’| 66% 4°30’N ha cael!

the Captain Commander and 36 men.

With great difficulty the others manage to run the boat.”

206 LOG, BOOK OF THE -SizPEMDR#

‘@ November 2, 1741. After Midday

. Y 3
he So] n
3|2| & 5 z
5 = fo) o
mie S O 4
re |) e374 WwW NNW 314| Reef-topsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
2% 134| Set topsails reefed; carrying foresail, mainsail,

and trysail in addition.

_4 | 3% (i427

511% W SSW 1% qorealianteall wind, cloudy; made the starboard
ack.

_7|1%| Sw/w Sipe aee

_8 |} 1 | SW/S W/N 2 Light wind, stars out; made the port tack.

9 | 1%|_ SSE wsw_ | 4%

G08 | 24 ee |e es
TE Toe Stars shining.

HH
Ny
NS
x
X

Westerly swell.

EAA ASA WSW 4W 3% | Topsail wind.
2 | 23% 3
3 |3%|-SSE WSw Reef-topsail wind, chilly, drizzly.
7 A 2a a as
male | SE/S_|__SW/W
6/4 I am altogether exhausted from scurvy, and I
| stand my watch only because of extreme necessity.
_7|4 | eee
814 |
914 Southerly swell. By the will of God Ivan Petrov,
the naval carpenter, died.
10 14%
Er 3 Strong undersail wind; furled topsails; lowered
the dead body into the sea. :
12 |3
Vv In 24 hours From Vaua
ariation
re | a | afleal leg! o |ose
{Compass E Ee fe | Ss ee | 3s 3 E
1% rhum = 4 pa QA i 25 =
| era ee ale AS 2 4
By Dead W/S iS) WwW : ENE
Reckoning 5°07’W | 48.7 | 5.2’ | 48.4 82’ |54°02’| 54% 4°22’E 5°40’

THE LAST STRETCH 207

S November 3, 1741. After Midday

—- |_s_ —— | — ———————_ | ——_—_——__—__—_ | -——

I|3%] SSE SW /W iT Reef-undersail wind, squally clouds, rain; carry-
ing foresail, mainsail, and trysail.

| EA eae nal SR
Sua SE 61%} Gale, cold, rain.

A Ee ee 2 3

eam (AN (fuel ners tet (OF ee ee
6{1 E/S S%YE 6%] Furled foresail and mainsail; hove to on the try-

sail because of the strong wind. It is dangerous
to go on our way especially at night.

i aa a ra
i | ie eI os
Oe) | 51 a a 4
ae as E S/E 6% Wind going down, drizzly, rainy.
2a 6%
En ae pan fer
ii | SEN SSH ts ra | ERain
mee Sa La Pines ce
er |e ENE SE/S%E 6% Undersail wind, clear with passing clouds.
|| ne 6% Drizzly, rainy.
LO) a as ea 57
PN EA WSW ~ | Set fore and main-topsails.
813% ee. Strong reef-topsail wind.
222) G2 | ee | eee (ear
HO || Za Clear with passing clouds.
ar | 4% ~__| Undersail wind.
I12/|4% rar Drizzly, heavy easterly swell.
In 24 hours From Vaua
Variation a a ane
of Fs cae Saleen eae s = eA
ormpe| 2 | 2283) 82/88] 3 | gee] 2 | 8
4 5 AM | ar; ae) as] 4 | 238 = 8
By Dead W/S S Ww ENE
Reckoning 2°17’S 155% r3/ 54 or’ |53°49'|| 403% 2°s50/E 4°18’

Gs
208 LOG BOOK) OF THE ST PETER.
& November 4, 1741. After Midday
>
v
* 48 ie Ke) g
| ° =] =| oO
° S = ° co)
6.5 Wa S 3S) 5]
Tees ENE WSW Strong reef-undersail wind; carrying main-topsail
and foresail. The drummer Osip Chentsov, of the
Siberian garrison, died.
£2) 594) Se
3 | 43%) NE
ANA eee
5) s72 Lowered the dead body into the sea. Furled
main-topsail because it was dangerous to have it
up at night. According to our calculation the
Kamchatka shore is nearing.
eat) 2 a ee ene pe
TEN AB re a |
EE (ee, Pee ees Re
par OA 2a | ees | Sees were | eet
TOME? NE/N
Ir | 1% Topgallantsail wind.
ned | fac Light wind; set main-topsail; drizzly, rainy. By
the will of God the Siberian soldier Ivan Davidov
died of scurvy.
LR | eee ee | eee eee | eee
pe 2h) ed ee | ee eet
ac Sl Ea res ee | eee
Jl \ | eA Changeable wind. =
See ESE The grenadier Alexei Popov died of scurvy.
SON Seca see Tae |e Bn ene ea
7|3% Set fore-topsail and mainsail.
8l4 Let out reef in main-topsail. Sighted land,120
bearing by compass SW by S, 4 German miles.!21
On this land there is a mountain ridge covered
with snow. Wethink this land is Kamchatka;
it lies, however, between N and W, and it seems
as if the end of it is not far. On the sick list are the
Captain Commander, several officers, and 32 of
the crew.
EON Ae A ae lh WINE
OAV ee ee ee eee
TT Let out two reefs in main-topsail, clear with passing
clouds.
I2|3% Took an observation: Zenith distance 72° 59’,
declination of the sun _ 18 °29’, latitude 54° 30’.
The daily record was adjusted to this observation.
es In 24 hours From Vaua
Mariation F zg = e - r E is Z
Compass | & |gel|ee| Se | ee] 2 | ste | § a
1% rhum = } re Q al f2D) S .
% acu (uae be a | Ag* me =
By Dead w N |_w aa |
Reckoning 4°21'N 66 ine 65.7_| 111.7'|53°54’ 2°26’
By NW N Ww NE
Observation | 6°36’W 66 Axl 51.7] 88’ |54°30']| 3434 1°20/E 2°50!

120 Copper Island (Medni Island).
122 Khitrov’s journal:
S 7 German miles.”

“Sighted land with high snow-covered mountains SW by

LANDING ON BERING ISLAND.

209

gig November 5, 1741. After Midday

5 g 3
wie) 2 g Z
° i= re ° co)
mi s O 4
Tt hess E/N SSE E I Reef-topsail wind, clear with passing clouds. ~
pF | ES ee | ee ee a ee
Bailes ENE SE I Let out reef in fore-topsail.
= Ed he on |e i a ee
_5.|2%) E/N | N/E | 1%) Tacked.!”
6|2% 1%| Took second reef in main-topsail.
7 |2%| ENE N 1%| Clear with passing clouds.
8) 2%) |_| 2%) Took all the reefs in topsails, furled fore-topsail._
9 | 234 2 Stars out; furled main-topsail; squally clouds,
snow, undersail wind.
10 | 2% 2%
LE | 2261)" 01 sort Ee SR 25 ee re i ee eg CN Lk Re
12|2% 2%| Squalls; lowered the dead body of the soldier into
the water.
es 22
2e2ia4 2%| Drizzly, rainy.
3 | 2%| NE/E N /W 24| Raw, chilly.
4 | 2%) | EO N*’W_| 2%) Grenadier Ivan Nebaranov died
Smile ENE N 2%| Squalls, snow; sighted land; S point SE%E about
3 German miles.
6 | 23% 214| 323
7|2% 2%| Cloudy. On the sick list are the Captain Com-
mander, several officers, and 33 members of the
crew and none of the others are in very good
1 OP SA RO Ree ae se)
8 | 23% N%W 2%| Captain Commander Bering, his officers, and the
crew _met to discuss the question of going to
the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul. We had few
men to manage the ship; 12 of our number were
dead, 34 were totally disabled from_scurvy, only
about 10 were able with great difficulty to get
about at all and they were not fit for all kinds of sea
duty. Among them was Lieutenant Waxel. We
have little fresh water. Taking all these factors
into consideration it was decided not to go to the
Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul but to take advan-
tage of the wind and steer for the shore in sight in
order to save the ship and the men. At 9 o’clock
we set the course WSW for the shore.
9/3 NE WSW
EO: || BCE ee ee a ia ea eee eee,
Ir | 3 Examined the main shrouds on the right side which
had been damaged, and on that account we were
ee ee obliged to lower the main yards.
12/3 N In the same way we examined those on the left
side and lowered the main-topmast.
“7 In 24 hours From Vaua
ariation
pomp | 8 | BG) Se] Be lee) e | eee] & | 8
I% rhum = Ay Q Q a) Rana) S
es a Cas ad m% =
By Dead NNW N W NE/N
Reckoning 6°32’W 30 26.3’ | 14.6 25’ |54°56’ll - 3734 1°r4’/E 2°25"

(Footnotes 122 and 123 at bottom of next page)

210 LOG BOOK OF THE “ST /PEPTER?

Q November 6, 1741. After Midday

5 y a

zs Lo) D ®

# | © g 5 %

(a) f=] tol 3 ©

ni | M 3 oO sa

mea I1%| N/E SW /S Topgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
25) 4 My Hoisted the main-topsail on the cap.
OR a 0S] eee te ne SEM
_ Ae le Sounded and got 37 fathoms; sandy bottom.
5 Came into 12 fathoms; sandy bottom; furled sails;
Ee cropped small bower anchor and payed out % of a
cable.

6 Cable broke at 80 fathoms, and the ship was carried
by_ the surf into 5 fathoms and less; we dropped
quickly the spare anchor, the cable of which also
parted, and the ship was taken through the surf
into 4% fathoms. We put over the best bower
anchor and payed out 3% of a cable. Because of
the darkness we could not get our bearings.

Ri Teen Ae Sere! See

8 ——

pate Lt | NeY e Ree| Re ee, ee
Io Calm
es

7 N/E

I N

2 WwW Topsail wind, chilly.

3 Clear with passing clouds and snow.

aS a Pe

5 Clear with passing clouds.

6 One point of the land bears E by S 3% mile; second
point NNW 8 German miles.

ae | ES Reece ee) ewe

8

9 NNW There were no able men to send for water, and in
addition a heavy swell was running.

pas)

II NW /W Put over the longboat into the water.

I2 Light wind, clear with passing clouds.

net In 24 hours | From Vaua !%4

ariation 5 7
at 2 aa eae a ee Sg.) 08 E
1% rhum a la Q4 Qs 4 20 ccd S
elem oa Peer Ao™ | eee

By Dead SW Ss W Ww /S

Reckoning 14W 6 B82) 82.6 7.8’ 154°52’|| 3534 0°38’W | 2°17'

12% The rhumb here seems to be stated exceptionally as direction to Vaua from the
ship; from Vaua it would be NE/N 0°38’ E. The value for the difference in longitude
between Vaua and the scene of the St. Peter’s stranding on Bering Island, 2°17’, indicates
the extent of the error in the reckoing of the ship’s position. The true value is about
8° 20’. On the general question of error in longitude, see also Waxel’s report, p. 276;
Chirikov’s report, p. 322; and footnote 22, p. 308.

Footnotes to Log of November 5

122 Khitrov’s journal: “Came about with the wind to get away from the shore. The
S point of the sighted land bore SE%E.”

123 Khitrov’s journal: “The Captain Commander, officers, and crew had a meeting
and decided to make for the land ahead of us. We could not go on because we had no
able-bodied men, our rigging was rotten, and our provisions and water were gone. When
this had been agreed upon we came about with the wind and sailed WSW.”

LANDING ON BERING ISLAND 211

h November 7, 1741. After Midday

5 9 3
n
Bulo. es 5 z
° Ss He io) oO
sc) ha 5 O 4
I NW /W Lieutenant Waxel went ashore in the yawl to find
Aes water and a suitable place for landing the
sick.
I | a Se ee Se
a S| A eee Pewee
Paral ei rte Sees la hele Nf
2S | SS ee
PCTS NES (eee eae
7
8 Hung a lantern over the stern.
9
10 N Lieutenant Waxel returned and reported that there
was plenty of fresh water but no wood other than
driftwood and little of that.
II
12
5 eS Ee Ee
EE | ES a
e.| _ sy DE | acces |
ae) aioe ME soe: ya High wind; 6 inches of watery in the hold.
= S)||_ 2 es es
OU se eet
Ra ERE IN
I) SP a 0 ee MES Rel Be Ue
9 ESE Warped twice with the best bower anchor to E;
heaved the anchor in order to clear it of the spare
anchor cable, which had wound itself around the
best bower. After clearing we took it on deck.
On the sick list are the Captain Commander and
2 Sain On aS ets 48 others.
mLOx pli Se
ath
I2

125 Khitrov’s journal.

From November 7, 1741 to August 9, 1742, inclusive,

Khitrov’s journal is used. During this period Yushin’s journal consists of a general

account of happenings.

These have, in the following, been inserted in their proper

places as footnotes to Khitrov’s journal.

212 LOG BOOK OF THE “ST. PETER?

i November 8, 1741. After Midday

I SE/S Warped into 3% fathoms and dropped the best
bower and payed out % cable. We_put out one
grappling NE on N and another one E; lowered the

foreyards for fear of the wind.

5 Boatswain Nils Jansen died.

8 Went ashore and took with me Io of the sick and

the body of the boatswain for burial.

I2 The boat returned from shore.

LANDING

ON BERING ISLAND 253

¢ November 9, 1741. After Midday

High wind.
Took the Captain Commander ashore.

Boat returned from shore; took out of the hold a

spare anchor, put it in place of the other spare an-
chor, and dropped it NE.

Light snow, chilly.

Lowered topmast, topsail yards; did not unbend the

sails.

214 LOG BOOK (OF THE. Si) PE Pais

S November 10, 1741. After Midday

I NNW High wind.

Lieutenant Waxel, I, and six of the crew went ashore
to set up tents for the sick.

8 Assistant Constable Roselius, with two men, followed
the beach N in order to see whether there are any
people living here.

9 The boat returned from shore with the same men who
went in it except the assistant constable. Heaved
in the hawser of the best bower on the right side.

LANDING ON BERING ISLAND 215

fo} November 11, 1741. After Midday

Hour
Knots
Leeway

Leal

Z
Z
es)

Moderate breeze, drizzly.

N

a

Boatswain’s Mate Ivan [Ivanov] was sent ashore
with five men to put up tents out of the sails for the
sick.

Go| SS ee Goce eee trumpeter Mikhail Toroptsov.

iS}

w

is

nn

fon

x

ie)

Ke)

taal
°

Lal
Leal

NNE

Da)
Ny

216 LOG BOOK OF THE ST. PETER?

Di November 12, 1741. After Midday

Ww

aS

TZ At times sun is visible.

LANDING ON BERING ISLAND 2N7,

Q November 13,1741. After Midday

I N/E Cloudy.
4 NE/E Fresh breeze.

Hung out two lights on the main shrouds as a signal
for the boat to come from shore.

8 Frost, snow. Signaled with ensign for the boat to
come for we have only one barrel of water on board.

218

LOG BOOK OF THE, Sil: PETERS

h November 14, 1741. After Midday

N Drizzly, snow, fresh breeze.

Hoisted two lanterns as a signal for the boat to come.

Signaled from ensign staff.

Wind as before.

LANDING ON BERING ISLAND 219

: November 15, 1741. After Midday

Leeway

Light air. Boat came with a barrel of water, re-
turned to shore with 7 sick men. Sailor Ivan
Emelianov, the cannoneer Ilya Dergachev, and the
Siberian soldier Vasili Popkov died on board before
tiiey could be removed ashore. Sailor Seliverst
Tarakanov died as he was being landed.

x

lo)

9

220 LOG BOOK OF THEC ST. PETERS

¢ November 16, 1741. After Midday

4 NNE Strong wind and heavy sea which frequently washes
over our deck.

| — | | |

——S._ |§ —_s|§ —— —— ———————_s | ————————————————_ |] ———

8 NE/N On account of the frost the boat and the rigging are
iced. The Siberian soldier Savin Stepanov, who
died on board, was taken ashore.

LANDING ON BERING ISLAND 221

S November 17,1741. After Midday

I NE Went ashore in the yawl.

8 During the day the sea poured into our ship over the
sides and near the forecastle.

12 A strong wind blew, and the air was chilly.

222 LOG BOOK“OR THE 7 Si? RE Mpa

fe) November 18, 1741. After Midday

I NE/E Strong wind.

I2 Wind died down a bit near midnight, stars shining,
cold.

I2 Signaled with ensign for the boat to come.

LANDING ON BERING ISLAND 223

Mh November 10, 1741. After Midday

Course
Leeway

I S Light air, drizzly, uncomfortable weather.

4 The boat has not yet returned from shore, and there
are only four buckets of water on board.

6 Spare anchor is fouled; and we stand on one anchor,
the best bower. Fired three guns; flew a red flag from
main shrouds to call the boat. Sailor Nikita Ovtsin
died.

224 LOG. BOOK OF THE Si] PETERe

QNovember 20, 1741. After Midday

8 Light air. Sailor Mark Antipin died ashore.

LANDING ON BERING ISLAND 225

h November 21,1741. After Midday

a 2 a
n
516 — 5 2
}° S Rel iC) ca)
m | M S O =
I This day Lieutenant Waxel and the other men who
were ill left the ship and went ashore. There re-
mained on board Assistant Constable Roselius and
the Siberian soldier Ignatius Ivonik.
a a a een
fem We Me | foe oh |
|| ea |
25) | CE Se eer (a
©) A a ee One
NE ER | De OO. Sere.) Se:
a | IR 2 | eer eee eee
al a IS eRe SO ee
HO || ha are ee:
TEI |) Ae Vile) eae
I2
I
2
1631S ae (Eee ea IS
oa |\" a | Ee | ee RS
S| a eT (AEE (EAA ae ve et Se Py
6 Captain Commander ordered that Lieutenant Waxel
with all the members of the crew should hold a con-
sultation as to the best way of saving the ship.
Ca 8 | ( P
ES Se | Qe
SDS SSS ee eR ee) a
RE OR fit | oer ee Te
II

226 LOG BOOK OF THE “Si 2EmPRe

‘©: November 22, 1741. After Midday

o This day there died on shore the navigator Andreyan
Eselberg. On account of sickness I had to stop
keeping a regular journal and am just making notes
ike this.

VAENCATIEMPTS TOo SAVE Tie SHIP 227

¢ November 23, 1741. After Midday

I This day we handed to the Captain Commander a
report on the saving of the ship. It is signed by
Lieutenant Waxel, by me, and by all the lower
ornmcers and crew. An exact copy of the report
ollows.

228 LOG BOOK OF THE ST. PETER?

November 23, 1741

REPORT ON SAVING THE SHIP
To His Highness Captain Commander Ivan Ivanovich Bering:

On November 21, 1741, your highness ordered me, the undersigned, to consult
with the higher officers and the crew as to the best way of saving the St. Peter with
the provisions and material on board and also as to a place where she might be
hauled up for the winter. In accordance with your order I, Fleet Master Sofron
Khitrov, all lower officers, and members of the crew met on November 22 to discuss
these points.

1. The St. Peter has one anchor out, the best bower, and its cable is not very
dependable. We have no other anchors or grapplings aside from the 8-pood grap-
pling. As you know, the ship lies out in the open sea and if a strong wind should
come up from the east, southeast, west or northwest, one anchor would not hold.
On the east, north, and west there are rocky reefs. If astrong wind should blow up
from the south, or from between south and west. the ship would be driven out to sea.

2. We therefore agreed that at high tide the boat should be hauled up on the
sandy beach facing it and made fast with hawsers. The water casks should not be
emptied, the ballast should not be taken out, and the cargo should not be disturbed
now; all these things can be done later in the winter, if nothing interferes. In order
to save the provisions from the water in the ship, cables should be put under them.

We have no other suggestion to make, and we leave the matter for your highness’
decision. Something must be done at once to save the vessel because of the winds,
which may cause us to lose both the ship and supplies.

Lieutenant SVEN WAXEL

Fleet Master SOFRON KHITROV

Assistant Navigator KHARLAM YUSHIN
Assistant Skipper NIKITA KHOTYAINTSOV
Assistant Constable BorIs ROSELIUS
Boatswain’s Mate ALEXEI IVANOV

For the quartermaster, Luka Alexeiev, for all the crew, and for himself the sailor
Timofei Anchiugov signed.

On the above written report on the saving of the St. Peter, I received,
this 23rd day of November, an order from the Captain Commander to
carry out the recommendations of the report at the very first oppor-
tunity. I am now waiting for favorable weather to do so.

November 24, 1741

Strong wind, impossible to go aboard.

November 25, 1741

Strong wind, impossible to go aboard.

VANDAL PE VIPTS LO SAVE THE SHIP 229

November 26, 1741 1%6

Today I am quite ill with scurvy and can barely stand on my feet.
Nevertheless, this morning I went to the boatswain’s mate, Alexei
Ivanov, and [told him to go] to the Captain Commander and say that I
am ready to go aboard the ship in order to lay it up if this can be done.
The Captain Commander told Ivanov that in case the ship could not be
hauled up we should at least bring ashore as much of the provisions as we
could. When I walked down to the beach to go on board I was told by
the above-mentioned Ivanov, who was on watch that day, that he had
only five able-bodied men. In pushing out the yawl one of them, the
soldier Elizar Zaikov, got wet and had to go back to the tent; and this
left four men, namely the sailor Timofei Anchiugov, the soldier Grigori
Izmailov, the Kamchatka servant Ivan Partinyagin, and the Chukchi and
Koriak interpreter Alexei Lazukov. They were so weak that I realized
that they could never weigh the best bower anchor. In addition, the
wind was between north and west straight on the rocky reef which
lay from the ship between south and east not more than 150 fathoms
away.

The shrouds and yards were also down. Although we might have
enlisted a few more men, yet because of the reef and the wind it did not
seem safe to try to lay up the ship as we had recommended in the report.
When I saw the impossibility of carrying out the task I went to Lieu-
tenant Waxel and verbally explained the situation. He told me to report
to the Captain Commander, which I did at ten o’clock in the morning
and gave him the reasons already mentioned. When I left him I went
to see the sailor Dimitri Ovtsin who acted as the captain’s adjutant,
and told him to make a written statement of what has taken place and
enumerate the reasons I gave.

November 27, 1741

Today I was so ill that I could not leave the tent for any reason. In
the same tent are Lieutenant Waxel and a number of the crew.

126 Yushin’s journal:

VARIOUS HAPPENINGS IN 1741 AFTER NOVEMBER 6

This month from the 6th to the 22nd we had at times fair wind and weather, but at
other times the winds were so strong that it was impossible to come ashore. The sick
were landed, and huts were made for them by digging holes in the ground and covering
them over with sails. After the 22nd we were all ashore and the St. Peter was at anchor
without a man on board, for there was no one well enough to stand watch or to unrig
the ship; some of the men could not even move from their places and others were at
the point of death.

According to our reckoning we were in Kamchatka, and therefore the assistant con-
stable Roselius, with two men from Kamchatka, was sent north to examine the shore.
Roselius returned in six days, after having walked more than 50 versts, because he and
his men were so exhausted that they could not go farther.

230 LOG. BOOK OP THE Si. PETER?

November 28, 1741

1 was told this morning that during the northeast storm the anchor
cable broke and the St. Petey was driven ashore on the spot where we
had planned to lay her up.

December I, 1741

Captain Commander Bering sent the sailor Timofei Anchiugov with
two men to examine the shore and to determine whether we are on the
mainland or on some island. They were also to keep a lookout for forests.

December 4, 1741
The calker Alexei Klementev died.

December 8, 1741

5 A. M. Captain Commander Bering died, and Lieutenant Waxel
succeeded to the command.

December 0, 1741
Assistant Skipper Nikita Khotyaintsov died.

December 17, 1741

Grenadier Ivan Tretyakov died.

December 27, 1741 }27

Cannoneer Prokofei Efintsov died.
The sailor Timofei Anchiugov returned without bringing any informa-
tion about the land [we are on].

January 2, 1742
The soldier Fedor Panov died.

January 7, 1742
II P. M. died the petty officer Ivan Lagunov.

127 Yushin’s journal:
THE MONTH OF DECEMBER, I74I

By the will of God a strong NE wind broke the cable and drove the ship ashore near
us. Its left side below the water line was badly damaged, the rudder was lost, and it
suffered other injuries as well.

The sailor Anchiugov, with the two men from Kamchatka already mentioned, were
ordered south to obtain information. He was gone about four weeks but did not learn
anything definite. He said that he thought that we were on an island. He could not
follow the shore for any considerable distance because of the cliffs. He reported seeing
saat herds of sea otters. At the end of December I began to recover somewhat from
my illness.

DEATH OF BERING 231

January 18, 1742

STATEMENT ON THE CONDITION OF THE SHIP

Lieutenant Waxel, Master Khitrov, the lower officers and crew of the St. Peter
met on this day to inspect the ship and determine whether it is fit for the continua-
tion of our voyage. The condition of the ship was as follows:

I. The bottom, keel, sternpost and stem were all damaged, and the rudder was
carried out to sea.

2. There was not a single anchor for the voyage, and there was no hope that we
could recover one of those lost.

3. The rigging, shrouds, cables are not to be depended on; they snap and tear,
and some are already torn.

4. It isimpossible that the ship could be moved from its present position because
it is already deeply buried in the sand.

5. Below the water line on the left side there is a crack crossways.

Therefore, the ship is not fit for a continuation of our voyage further.

Lieutenant SVEN WAXEL
Master SOFRON KHITROV

All the lower officers and crew of the St. Peter, except the sailor Dimitri
Ovtsin, signed this.

COUNTERSTATEMENT BY THE SAILOR DIMITRI OVTSIN
To His Highness Lieutenant Waxel:

You commanded that the crew should mect on January 22 to sign the report that
the St. Peter is no longer fit for our voyage, and these were the reasons given.

I. The bottom, keel, sternpost, and stem were damaged, and the rudder was
gone, and it is impossible to examine the inside because of the water in the hold.

2. We have nota single anchor, and there is no hope of finding one.

3. The rigging, shrouds, ropes are not to be depended on, for they break and in
many places are already broken.

4. It is not probable that the ship can be moved from its place, since it is deeply
buried in the sand.

5. Below the waterline there is a crack crossways. Therefore, the ship is unfit
for further service.

On these points I should like to comment to your highness:

I. The sternpost and stem are not so badly injured that they cannot be repaired;
although the false stem is gone, another can be made. As to the condition of the
bottom, it can hardly be ascertained now owing to the snow and ice. Another rudder
can be made, and timber for that purpose could probably be found.

2. We have not yet tried to recover the anchors, and it is not too much to expect
that they may befoundinsummer. Inthespring the winds are surely not as bad as
in the fall, and the weather may become favorable so that we could get the shipina
position to repair it.

3. Some of the bad rigging could be repaired, other parts could be replaced from
the stores; we have also spare ropes in case of need. If, of the four anchors, we find
two, we should have enough for our purpose.

232 LOG BOOK. OF THE SP: PEI PRS

4. Because of the snow and ice it is difficult to say whether the ship can be
floated; if it can be floated, it can be repaired and used with the help of Almighty
God.

5. At present it is difficult to say how badly damaged the bottom is; and, even
if it were, it could be repaired.

These are my views, and these are the reasons why I refuse to sign the report to
the effect that the ship was unfit for further service.

Sailor DIMITRI OVTSIN
January 27, 1742.

January 29, 1742

REBUTTAL

Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Khitrov, all the lower officers and members of
the crew of the St. Petey met today to listen to the reading of the statement of
Dimitri Ovtsin which he handed to Lieutenant Waxel on January 27 of this year.
In this document Ovtsin said that he hoped that the St. Peter could be saved, that
it could be floated, that the damage could be repaired, that is to say the stem and
everything else, that a new rudder could be made out of timber to be found on the
island, and that the anchors lost at sea near here could be recovered. After listening
to his statement and reasons they were rejected by all who were present, because on
January 18 they had examined the ship and found it unseaworthy. A report on
this subject had been made and was signed by the officers and crew. Even if the
ship were sound it could not be floated since we have no anchor, no timber, and
not enough men for such work. Taking all this into consideration it was agreed
(Ovtsin dissenting) that in March the St. Peter should be broken up and out of the
wreck some kind of small vessel should be made to take us to Kamchatka. In the
meantime we should watch for an opportunity when the weather is favorable to
empty out the water from the hold and to inspect again the ship with a view of
determining its seaworthiness.

Lieutenant SVEN WAXEL

Master SOFRON KHITROV and
all the officers and men ex-
cept the Sailor OVTSIN

February 23, 1742

Assistant Navigator Yushin with four men was ordered to follow the
shore to latitude 56° 10’ N, which was the position of the mouth of the
Kamchatka River. On the way he was to make a careful observation of
the country.

March 8, 1742

Yushin and his party returned and reported that he had not gone
farther than 70 versts from our camp because his advance was blocked by
a rocky bluff which could not be passed even at low water. A fierce
blizzard interfered also. Yushin said that when he was about 50 versts
from camp he sighted land to the eastward, about 10 miles away, which
seemed like an island.?74

7a See bracketed statement in third paragraph from bottom of p. 237.

ON BERING ISLAND 233

March to, 1742

Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Khitrov, all the lower officers, and the
crew had another meeting to discuss Yushin’s report. Since it told them
nothing definite about the land, it was decided to send another party
under the boatswain’s mate Alexei Ivanov.

March 15, 1742
Ivanov with four men was sent along the shore to explore the land.

March 10, 1742

Ivanov came back and reported that bluffs blocked his way to the
westward.

March 22, 1742

Ivanov was sent out again with instructions to exert himself to the
utmost to proceed farther and secure some reliable information.

April 7, 1742
Ivanov and his party returned and reported that we were on an island

because he had doubled the northern cape on the other side, which is
about 150 versts from our camp.

April 9, 1742

DECISION MADE ON DETERMINATION THAT LAND Is AN ISLAND

Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Sofron Khitrov, Doctor Georg Steller, all the
lower officers and crew of the .St. Petey met to discuss the report of Ivanov. He said
_that the land on which we live is an island because he had doubled the last northern
cape on the western side and it was therefore evident that we were on an island.
In order to reach Kamchatka it was decided to break up the St. Peter because it
was not fit for further sea service, because it cannot be floated, and because of other
reasons already mentioned, and make out of it some kind of small vessel.

It was agreed that during the period of the vessel’s construction a number of our
men under the leadership of Yushin should be detailed to hunt and to supply the
camp with meat. Whatever they got should be divided equally among all accord-
ing to the size of each group. From the stores of flour left after the April distribu-
tion, 10 sacks should be set aside for the Kamchatka voyage. Until the voyage,
the allowance should be reduced below that which had been allowed.

Lieutenant SVEN WAXEL
Fleet Master SAFRON KHITROV and all the men

May 2, 1742
Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Khitrov, the lower officers, and some
members of the crew looked about for a suitable place for building and

launching a boat. Such a spot was found on the beach directly in front
of the ship.

234 LOG BOOK OF THE “ST. PETER”

May 6, 1742
With God’s help we began the building of the ship by erecting the stem
and the sternpost. It is to have a length of 36 feet, a 12-foot beam, and
depth of 5 feet 3 inches.

July 1, 1742
I started along the beach toward S in order to examine the channel
between us and the islands!*8 sighted and to see whether we could
use it when we sailed from here. I was also anxious to learn whether
there was some good harbor along the coast. Alexei Ivanov went in the
vawl to see if he could find the anchors, but did not locate any except the
8-pood grappling.

July 0,:1742
About 7 p. M. I returned with my party. We found a channel between
the islands but no harbor. I should say that it is about 50 versts to the
southern cape.

July 13, 1742
Alexei Ivanov went again to look for the anchors but was unsuccessful.
Weather clear and sunshiny. I received an order to make an inventory
of all that we are to leave on the island.
July 15, 1742
Light air ‘rom W, weather clear and sunshiny. When the ship was
broken up Lieutenant Waxel, I, the lower officers, and those members of
the crew who were engaged in the work inspected her and found that she
was injured in twelve places.

July 24, 1742
Yushin went in search of the anchors and did not find them.
Light air from SW, fine weather.
Midshipman Ivan Sint handed in his report of July 1, and with it was
a list of the baggage and provisions each person had. The following is
an exact copy:

12 Khitrov was under the impression that Copper Island was two islands. See brack-
eted statement in next-to-last paragraph on p. 237.

ON BERING ISLAND

List oF BAGGAGE OF EACH MEMBER OF THE EXPEDITION

235

RANK AND NAME
Officers

Lieutenant Sven Waxel .
Master Sofron Khitrov
Adjunct Steller .
Ass’t Navigator Kharlam Vushin
Ass’t Constable Boris Roselius
Ass’t Surgeon Matis Betge :
Surgeon Apprentice Arkhip Konavalov
Boatswain’s Mate Alexei Ivanov
Midshipman Ivan Sint

Boatswain’s Mate helper Luka Alexeiev y

Cannoneer Michael Chechuev
Andrei Kransnoi . los
Gulakhition Ivanov

Soldier Ignatius Ivonik

Sailors
Vasili Perfieev
Vasili Avechin
Ivan Semenov ?
Lavrenti Smetanik
Dimitri Ovtsin
Timofei Anchiugov
Dimitri Alavenishkov
Stepan Nikiforov :
Cooper Vasili Severgin .
Sailmaker Denis Sarokin .
Blacksmith Dimitri Kuleksa
Trumpeter Martin Vasilev

Siberian Carpenters
Prokofei Chekalov
Sava Starodubtsov
Jeremiah Tonkikh

Servants of the Captain Commander

Ivan Maltsan. ..
Maffei Kukushkin .

Soldiers
Maffei Antropov
Fedor Darafeev .
Elizar Zykov
Ivan Okulov
Grigori Kaigorodal
Grigori Izmailov
Stepan Zhegalov
Astafei Baiarkin
Dimitri Kalodin

The Corporal RG Okhotsk Harbor
Frederic Plenisner . 3

Employees of Kamchatka Fort

Ivan Partinyagin
Alexei Lazukov .
Cossack’s son Petcr Verkhaturov

Employee of Upper Kaonchatka Fort
Toma Lepekhin . ;

Total of baggage and provisions in possession of all ranks

Poops

WNHNNHWHANW ADA

WONNDHWNHUNNWNHYM

WWW

HW

NNWNHWNHWWW

POUNDS

20
20

2C
20

236 LOG BOOK OF THE “ST. PELER:

August I, 1742

DECISION ON DISPOSITION OF SUPPLIES

Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Khitrov, all lower officers and members of the
crew of the St. Petey met. Our ship with God’s help will soon be finished. The
question came up what to do with all the supplies and materials on hand which we
cannot take along for the following reasons.

1. To take all that material along would oblige us to leave behind half or more
of the crew, and to leave these men on an unknown and uninhabited island is dan-
gerous. There is little food to be had here aside from what may be obtained by
hunting sea animals, and even this source cannot be depended upon. Since our
coming the game has been frightened away and driven off, and one may not in the
future rely on hunting.

2. Of the materials and other supplies on hand only a small part could be taken
along, but owing to the autumn storms of this region it would not be safe to over-
load our vessel. A large part of the supplies and materials is worthless and rotten,
as may be seen from the inventory !29 made out by Fleet Master Khitrov.

3. Although a small part of the above-mentioned material is good, yet it is not
worth while to leave some one to watch it, because the island is uninhabited.

4. If we should leave a guard, we should have to come after him next year.
There is no harbor here, nothing but rocks and reefs and the open sea, and there
is great danger of wrecking the vessel.

5. Taking all these arguments into consideration, the undersigned have unani-
mously agreed to leave no one behind. Of the materials we should take iron enough
to serve as ballast; of supplies, water, several casks of sea cow meat, and such
other things as we need for the voyage.

All else should be left in the warehouses to be constructed.

Lieutenant SVEN WAXEL, Fleet Master SOFRON KHITROV,
all the lower officers and crew

DESCRIPTION OF BERING ISLAND 180

(A Description of the Island On Which We Lived From November, 1741, To
August 13, 1742, [to which are added] Certain Observations Which I Made.)

By agreement with Lieutenant Waxel I called the island “Bering Island” after
the late Captain Commander Vitus Bering, who died and was buried there.

This island extended from latitude 54° to 56° N, that is from the southern cape,
which we called Manati, that is to say Sea Cow. The island lies between NNW
[and SSE?] and is about 130 versts long and from 7 to Io versts wide. There are

129 The inventory exists but has not been included in the present work,
130 Yushin’s journal:

VARIOUS HAPPENINGS IN 1742

On different days and months we secured information which led us to believe that we
were on an island. This island is about eighteen German miles long and its axis lies
NW and SE. It is wider in the north than in the south, averaging, from N to S, 15,
ro, 8, and 6 versts. It is impossible to go around some parts of the island on account
of the cliffs and rocky beaches, which I myself saw in many places. There are some bays
around the island. It is not safe to approach the island nearer than about 5 versts.
Across from our camp, or on the south side, there is a lake about I verst in circumference,
and out of the lake a river flows into the sea. This river is about 100 fathoms in length
and 15 in width. I think that a small vessel, drawing not more than 5 feet of water,
could enter this stream at high tide during the months of May and June. In the autumn

ON BERING ISLAND 237

no habitations on the island and no signs that there ever were any. It is a treeless
region; there is no wood on it at all except in a few spots where a few willows grow,
and they are so small that they are worthless for [fire] wood. There are mountain
ridges, many volcanoes, and rocky bluffs; and therefore [it is] quite unsafe for ships
to come near. The shore is everywhere rocky, some of the rocks extend a verst or
more into the sea. In high water they are covered up, and in low water they are
exposed. In those places where the shore is not rocky a heavy surf runs. There
is no spot where a vessel drawing five or six feet of water may winter. We put our-
selves to a great deal of trouble in looking for such a place—the boatswain’s mate,
Alexei Ivanov, was sent to the northern cape, and I went to the southern. There
is only one spot, on the other [W] side of the island from our cape, where a vessel
might goin. There is a lake over there which has an outlet to the sea, and in time
of high water a ship might enter the lake and remain during the winter. But one
cannot be sure even of this; for each year the old channel] fills up, and a new channel
is formed. Whether the entrance is always as [open?] as when we were there it is
impossible to say.

When the west wind blew, it brought from Kamchatka to this island building
timber which had been in use, [such as] smashed boats and Koriak deer sleds. When
the east wind blew it brought from America big pine trees, oars, and weapons such
as are used by the natives of America but not by those of Kamchatka.

When the weather was clear many of our men claimed that from the western
side of our island they saw more than once snow-covered volcanoes to the west-
ward. We assumed from our reckoning that they must be on Kamchatka but we
could not be sure.

During the whole time that we were on this island we suffered great hardships.
Our habitations were holes in the sand covered over with sails. We had to search
the beach for driftwood, which we had to carry on our shoulders 10 and 12 versts.
At that very time nearly all of us were very ill with scurvy which hung on so long
that some of the men did not completely recover until spring, when green grass
the mouth of the river is covered with driftwood, and the surf plays there. The lake is
deep enough, I think. I have sounded and got 3 feet {along the shore?], and at the mouth
of the river the depth is 6 feet. On the western side of the island there is a breeding place
for fur seals and sea lions. They came in the beginning of April, and soon their large
numbers covered the beach. We used them for food when the sea otters became scarce
in the spring. , :

y common consent we began to break up the St.’ Petey in April, and in May we laid
the keel of the new vessel, which measured 36 feet at the keel. Ten men were detailed
for shipbuilding, the others, petty officers and crew, broke up the old ship and brought
the meat from the south side, a distance of about I5 versts over the hills. Each man
carried about 2 poods, and it was hard work. An additional hardship was the fact that
we ran out of shoes. From the middle of June we began to hunt the sea cow. These

are huge beasts, each giving from 50 to 60 peods of meat and even a greater amount
of fat. They have two forefeet and Ds Ben rats oil

POSITION OF BERING ISLAND

In the north there is a cape NNW_8 German miles. From this cape there is a_pro-
jection NW _5 miles. To the south of us there is a point ESE“E 34 of a mile. From
this point the shore continues south 4 miles. From that point the shore extends NW
to the northern point.

About 10 German miles away, in the direction NE by N from Bering’s Cross, there
is an island which is not seen at all times. [There is no island in the direction indicated,
and what Yushin saw was probably a cloud bank. Chirikov tells of sighting land on
June 26-27, which, on further examination, proved to be a cloud baak].

Another island is seen E34N 6 German miles, a third island E by S 7 German miles.
These two islands extend NE and SW; they seem to be small but very high. [In
the direction indicated there is only one island, Copper Island, which, when viewed
from Bering Island, looks like two islands and is so noted on the early charts.]

The latitude of Bering’ s Cross, when I took it on the 7th day of July, was 55° 05’ N,
variation of the compass 13° 58’, which I accepted as 1%4 rhumb E.

238 LOG BOOK OF THE ST. BETER?

appeared, which grass is known in Kamchatka as sweet grass and from which the
government there manufactures a kind of wine. It tastes something like Russian
borshch.31 We used this grass as well as other grasses for food. We had no
provisions and had to secure our food with great trouble, and such as we found was
bad and unfit for human beings. We were obliged to go along the beach 20 and 30
versts in the hope of killing a sea otter, sea lion, or hair seal. On seeing them we
would steal up behind them as they were on the beach or on the rocks, when the
tide was out, and kill them with clubs, and having killed them we tied them on our-
selves with a load in front and aload behind. If for some reason we could not hunt
these animals we were forced to find and eat dead ones, such as whales and sea cows,
which had been cast up by the sea. During the winter we hunted the animals so
hard that they became frightened, and by spring they were quite a distance from
ourcamp. Just then large herds of fur seals came to breed on the other side of the
island. They were so numerous on the western side that during the breeding season
two or three men could barely get by them in safety, for at that period they are
quite savage and attack people. Sometimes the men, in order to get to their desti-
nations, had to cross over the mountain ridges, for they could not get around the
beach on account of these animals. Their flesh was quite distasteful, and the longer
we ate it the less we liked it. We then turned to hunting the sea cow and did it in
the following manner. This animal does not stay far out at sea but keeps close to
shore. Its back is above water, and with the flood tide it moves toward the shore
to feed on the sea cabbage. As the tide goes out the sea cow goes along so as not to
get stranded, being such a large animal. At the time when it was nearing the shore
our men in the longboat would pull up close to it, and one of them, standing in the
bow, hurled at it a large iron harpoon with sharp teeth. To the harpoon was made
fast a cable from 4 to 5 inches in thickness, which cable was held by 20 men who
were ashore. When the harpoon had penetrated the flesh and held, the men on
shore pulled with all their might while the men in the boat went up close to the ani-
mal, cutting and stabbing with sharp iron weapons in order to weaken it and prevent
it from breaking the rope, which sometimes happened. This cow isso powerful that
it took all these men to hold her. Counting meat and fat, the sea cow gives about
200 poods.!82 From the time on when we began hunting the sea cow we were
not in want. Of all the animals mentioned above the flesh of the cow is the best
tasting. We brought with us to Kamchatka a considerable quantity of it salted.

At times the winds on the island are so strong that a person can with difficulty
keep on his feet. We concluded that these winds are due to the high mountains
and deep valleys. I may say that, owing to these winds, the snow in the air, and the
blizzards blowing off the mountains, we seldom saw a beautiful or clear day from
December to March. From March on, during the spring and summer, there are
heavy and continuous fogs and wet weather so that we seldom saw a pleasant day
during this period. This kind of weather greatly interfered with the speed of our
shipbuilding. In addition, the men were in such poor condition and so undisciplined
that it was not safe to order them around, but everything had to be done by common
consent. On this island there are no minerals or metals, for Adjunct Steller was
sent purposely around the island without finding anything. There are no land
animals on the island aside from the blue foxes. There are all kinds of land and
sea birds.

131 A soup usually made out of beet root.
132 7,200 lbs.

LAUNCHING OF NEW VESSEL 239

August 8, 1742

All the men were preparing cables for launching the ship. After prayer
we named the newly constructed vessel the hooker St. Peter and began
to launch her. When she had slid down the ways 2 or 3 fathoms the
boards of the platform gave way and she stopped.

August 9, 1742 [ci.il day]

With the help of God we got the hooker into the water about 5 o’clock
in the afternoon.

Tue Loc Boox oF THE HooKErR “St. PETER”

August 10, 1742 [astronomical day] 3%

With God’s help I begin this journal on the hooker St. Peter under the
command of Lieutenant Waxel. I take as departure Bering’s Cross which
is in latitude 55° 05’ N, variation of the compass 114 rhumb easterly.

133 From this date until August 23 inclusive, Yushin’s journal is used. Under August

Io entry Khitrov’s journal gives in addition: “Size of the hooker: length, 36 feet; beam,
12 feet; depth, from the deck to the keelson, 514 feet.”

240° LOG BOOK OF THE HOOKER’ SI. PETER:

5 August 10,1742. After Midday

ee ed A ooo

Strong wind, heavy rain.

Wind going down, light rain.
Clear with passing clouds.

With the help of God we launched the new ship into

the water and moored it in 3 fathoms with two an-
chors, one in S and the otherin NE, and payed out %
cable. The new vessel was named the hooker St.
Peter, and it measured 36 feet in length, 11 feet in
beam, 5 feet in depth, and 41 feet from stem to
sternpost.

I am on watch.
Wind comes in puffs.

Light wind.

Cloudy, stars out.

Chilly.
The hooker is drawing 2 feet 10 inches of water, and

at the stern 3 feet.

Shears were brought on board for setting the masts.

Masts and gear were brought.
Rudder was put in place.

Fixed the shears for the masts and made ready to

set them in place.

PREPARATIONS FOR SAILING 241

© August 11,1742. After Midday

— | — | — ———<— meee | ——_

ee eee

— |_—<— | ——q—| | oe _— | —

Clear.
Took the shears ashore.

Since noon we set and rigged the masts and yards.

easietant Constable Roselius relieves me on watch
uty.

Clear with passing clouds.
Stars out.
Light wind and unsteady.

As above.
Cloudy.

Sunshiny.

The main yard was brought on board and rigged.

The bowsprit and topsail yard were brought from
shore, the bowsprit was shipped in place.

Clear with passing clouds.

By noon we had stowed away Io barrels of water, 5

barrels salt meat, 11 sacks of flour, some full others
only partly full.

242. LOG BOOK OF THE HOOKER. ‘ST: PEDERS

DN August 12, 1742. Afier Midday

Leeway

Light wind, clear with passing clouds.

board.

Luka Alexeiev, and I are on watch.

Sails, blocks, and other naval stores were taken on

Tried on the sails; the foresail did not fit and was
taken back for alteration.

Assistant Constable Roselius, the quartermaster

Moon out.

Clear with passing clouds.
Naval and other supplies taken on board.

Air thick, rain.

The crew brought its baggage on board.

Light wind, cloudy.

Stars shining.

Light wind, weather as before.

Wind changeable.

DEPARTURE

FROM BERING ISLAND 243

Q August 13,1742. After Midday

al
5] ©

al
Leal

SS ee ee ee ee

Light wind, drizzly, rainy.

Bent on the foresail and trysail.
Put up a cross in memory of Captain Bering.

The crew have moved on board.
Brought on board four oars for the hooker.
Topgallantsail wind, drizzly.

The hooker is down 434 feet at the stern and 4%

feet at the bow.

Clear with passing clouds, light wind and light sea;

ran out the anchor on the left side.

Warped 100 fathoms to the north.
Took up the anchor and warped.
Dropped the anchor once more.

Since 7:20 warped three times, 100 fathoms each
time.

Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.

Clear with passing clouds; picked up the anchor

with which we warped, set the sails, and with the
help et God headed east in order to get around the
island.

244

LOG BOOK OF THE HOOKER “ST. PETERS

th August 14,1742. After Midday

u » uo} re 3
=] ° is] 2 oO
° & nal 3° .)
aoa ee s O 4
I | 13% N /W EX%S Topgallantsail wind, drizzly, clear with passing
clouds: carrying mainsail, foresail, jib, and top-
sail.
2 || 294) N/E) | EEE
a) "2 ESE Foggy; the southern point of Bering Island
bears S by E%E, Bering Cross WNW ?22N.
4) 20 | | Se Eee
5 | 13% NNE SE/EYE el Drizzly, wind as before.
6|/1% SE/E Took the ship’s boat on deck.
7)\ 2). 2.) SEIS 1). 2) eee
8 | 1% SSE The southern point of Bering Island bears SW14S
about 214% German miles.
9 | 2% Light wind. Ta
Io | 1% Let down the jib.
Tr | 234 NE Sounded in 25 fathoms, no bottom.
B2y |e S
1 | 1% ___|_3 inches of waterin the hold. 00
2|1% Hauled down the foresail; sounded in 30 fathoms,
oad no bottom, 0 eee
3|1% SSW
Pe ec a eee eee nae
5|1% WSW
6s ENE Light wind, drizzly.
7 34 Hoisted foresail and jib.
8 4% W/S At times calm.
9 % We cut off two reefs from the mainsail because it
was already too long. It was left with one reef.
IGE ae eee ee
SEY 76 | oe ee ee EEE
I2 4% Clewed up mainsail because of lack of wind;
drizzly. The southern point of the island bears
NE about 2 German miles. We called this
point, Cape Manati, and we begin our reckon-
ings from it. In today’ s reckoning we take into
account the bearings, distance, and rhumbs of
the 13th. According to our observation Cape
Manati is in latitude 54°50’, 12 minutes E of
Bering’s Cross. At noon by cross bearing it is
distant 5’ of longitude from us.
In 24 hours From Cape Manati
Variation
of 2 ee ea . | Fag = #
ones E Ba | Se of 2S] @ | gba = 5
14 rhum = fay Q 3 20 <
2 | Oe ules aés= | & A
By Dead S E N/E
Reckoning | S10°24’E| 22 27.8! | A.1 We N54cA3¢ 2 KE 0°s’

HOMEWARD FROM BERING ISLAND 245

Cc} August 15,1742. After Midday

z 2 a

5 | 6 = 5 z

) q = fo) ca)

ee s O 4

I|1% S WSW I Light wind, drizzly.

I S/W W/S I%| Set mainsail; carrying, in addition to topsail,
jib and foresail.

3 | 1% 1%

Ail 2 SW/S |WNW4W | 1%| Topgallantsail wind. The officers agreed that
the longboat should be cut adrift because it
impeded our progress.

Sele SSW WwW Weather as before.

|) 2 Let out a reef in mainsail. Cape Manati is
NE by N%E about 4% German miles.

UN 2 S/W W/S I

8} 2 1%

9 | 2% 1%! Topsail wind.

Io | 2% 1%] Drizzly.
Ir | 2% 1%| The hooker has sprung a leak, and we are bail-
ing continuously.

rt BA 1%

234 1%| Wind freshening.

2 1%| Bailing out of the hold but have not yet found
the leak. It is difficult to get at it. We threw
overboard some of our ammunition. By 3 in
the morning we got the leak under control.

3 )11%)| SSW W I

ae Gh || 2S | a ies

5 |1%| S/W W/S 7

6);1% 1%

TNS: 1%

8 13% 1%

9|1% 1%| Topsail wind.

Io | 1% 1%| Reefed the mainsail.

Il |. 1%| Light wind, southerly swell.

I2 | 1 SSW W I Drizzly.

v In 24 hours From Cape Manati

ariation =e le a ae

of ein 2 e

Compass Ses 5 g

1% rhumb E aS te 8

ele) ™

By Dead
Reckoning

N68°57’W

42

4 39 67’ |54°S8’|| 1034 |N70°0’W |1°12’

246 LOG BOOK OF THE HOOKER ‘Si 7PEaErRe

¢ August 16,1742. After Midday

ai >
he 3 uo) S g
3 ° f—} = ro)
fo) i=] = ° 7)
mi S G 4
“T/ «| SW WNW |) ‘Light wind, drizzly, wet; carrying mainsail, fore-
| sail, jib, and topsail.
2 A a
EB 1%| WSW NW
sae ) = | Heavy swell from south at the rate of % a knot
a in 4 hours.
ae | rel ee NNW_]|) Clear with passing clouds.
6 | ° i 3
a Z Foggy, wet.
“s{| %| WSW NW 2 | Changeable wind.
ator > | eee ; Swell at the rate of %4 knot in 4 hours.
ro I = t
cam a 2 (3 |"Stars out.
7 Lae A eee
“Tr! +%| SSE| WSW Light wind, drizzly.
=—s % Fog, wet, clear with passing cicuds.
a 8 SS
melts ile
oe Topsail wind.
“6” 24% Let out a reef in mainsail and torsail.
7 23% TopgaJlantsail wind, atmosphere thick.
2 ie. Ga Gao eee,
“9 | 2%| SE/S| SW/W Clear with passing clouds.
a Ss aa
calla Squally clouds.
T2- 2%
cat In 24 hours From Cape Manati
Menanen a 3B E — “Se, | 22s
Compas | 8 | 2g} Se] 8/88) = | ses] § a
1% rhum 5 Ae AH a As | AGn z ss)
By Dead W
Reckoning |S83°24’W! 22 s5¢ 21.6 | 37’ |{54°56’|| 1534 |N84°33’W] 1°49’

HOMEWARD FROM BERING ISLAND 247

6 August 17,1742. After Midday

Topsail wind, drizzly, rainy; carrying foresail,
mainsail, jib, and topsail.

|
eee 23% |
Mile |S wsw_| ‘i
2 LON a |
5 | 2% | Topgallantsail wind, southerly swell.
6/2
Heer 20s SE/S Weather as before.
wl || 224 |e | a
EeON 3% SSE SW /W Reef-topsail wind, foggy, rainy.
CLAS (es ea
It | 2% | | Lowered topsail.
SUE! Es ee eee
_1 | 2% Reef-topsail wind, rain.
cE es bles
39) 1234) SE SW Undersail wind.
4 | 3% E Hauled down jib and foresail.
22" ee
_614%| ESE | |__| Reef-undersail wind.
_7|4% Wind in gusts, heavy rain.
_ 38. 3% te eae Fog.
_9 | 3% Clear with passing clouds.

Io | 3 SE/E SSW ) Thick fog. Sighted high snow-covered land,
ie N by W and WNW about 3 German miles away.134
Il | 234 t | Wind going down a bit, weather as before.

I2|2%

Pere In 24 hours | From Cape Manati
Variation = 7 Fete) eo | Re ee
of 2 2 i = = gn 2 :
Compass.-| § |ge|8a| 83/82) a | see] & e
I rhum As 5 Q
5 ae Aa | or AS |< | 288 = 8

By Dead S WwW

Reckoning | S65°23’W]| 71 29.6’ | 64.6 | 111’ |54°27’|| 3234 |S79°46’W | 3°40’
134 Khitrov’s journal: “At 9:30 we sighted, through the mist, land in the W from which

rose a high, snow-covered volcano, which we identified as in Kamchatka, near Cape

Kronotski. We steered away from the land.” Cape Kronotski is shown on PI. I.

248 LOG BOOK OF THE HOOLRER STi. PRERERS

fe} August 18,1742. After Mid ay

| Ff EY

| fF | —

n
s|3| 2
a a s
1/1% E/S
2|2 NE
Z| 2
4 | 1%
5 | 4 Ww
6} 3%] W/S
711%] WSW
fee bar

|! ff SE

Il 3
12 | 23% SW
=|
2/2 W
311%
Tall t
~s5|1%| W/S
_6 | 3%
_7|1%
Si) lier
9 | 1%
Io 2

>
5 %
oO =
Ss Strong undersail wind, rain, sunshine.
Wind going down; set topsail, hoisted jib.
Heavy southerly swell.
Clear with passing clouds.
S%E } Topgallantsail wind, chilly.
| Sighted a high volcano W by N, another volcano
+ 1%| W by S. Some distance farther to the north
| a point N%E 5 miles.
S/E J Topsail wind.
} Lowered topsail.
| Undersail wind, stars out.
SSE He
« | Heavy clouds, squalls; tacked to port.
NNW |!
| -
| Stars out, chilly.
NW /N
| 34 Topgallantsail wind.
| Sunshiny.
| Light wind.
| Set topsail reefed.
10} 27 Topsail wind.
NW Clear with passing clouds.

Variation
of
Compass
I rhumb E

By Dead
Reckoning

Rhumb

In 24 hours

Dist
in Knots

Took observation: zenith distance 44° 40’, dec-
lination of the sun 9° 34’, latitude 54° 14’. High
volcano sighted is W by N, the point north of
it is N 4 German miles.

2 aa a
-5 : : “9
Sa|S5/88| e |] gee | &
=) 2 at He
Ss Ww W /
13.6’ | 9.3 18’ 54°13") 33% 4°55’S_ | 3°40’

135 Khitrov’s journal: Rhumb, SW/S o° 51’ Sli.e. S 32° 54’ W]; Dist. in Knots, 20.

HOMEWARD FROM BERING ISLAND 249

ot August 19,1742. After Midday

a >
u 2 Ke) % g
feos | a lk
sof s O a)
“zy | 2%|/WwWSW NW } Topsail wind, clear with passing clouds; carry-
Reels | ing all sails; topsail and mainsail are reefed.
J) ZS | Southerly swell.
27 | ana et ce
4 I3x% | Topgallantsail wind, cloudy.
shiny | Gls Ea, San PTE ne wey We ee Seu
6 Im%| S/W SE/E J eet within 34 mile of shore, tacked to star-
ae a Sa
18H 23% | F Topsail wind.
fa) 4 SE /E | Strong reef-topsail wind; lowered topsail.
fe) 3%
Gurls S ESE ah Undersail wind, heavy rain.
“12 | 2%] S/E E/S
I 2% 1%| Reef-topsail wind, drizzly, rainy, chilly.
2 2 S ESE
31 2 J Hauled down the jib.
_4|_ 1%) SSW SE ; Topsail wind.
5 I 2
~6] 1%| W/S| NWN |? Tacked to port.
“7! ¥%l SW SSE Tacked to starboard.
aC ee (3 | Set topsail and jib.
ron eax WSW S - Topgallantsail wind, clear with passing clouds.
Io 3% )
Sam } ra] Weather as before, heavy southerly swell at
Seal al % og the rate of % knot per hour during 2 hours.
I2 21 25 N Wee northern point bears NW4%4N 1 German
mile.
In 24 hours From Cape Manati
Variation = 5 = ae
of =F . a) a 6 Pay) x “= gn < ab
Compass. E 25 Se] oo | Se) ai] ¢ Ex : 5
1 rhum 5 a : An a as A Age =z 4
By Dead S E WSW
Reckoning | S81°44’E | 23.7 3.4’ | 23.4 | 30.8’ |54°1I0’]| 28 1°33/W 3°0’

250 LOG BOOK OF THE HOOKER “ST, PETER®

Q August 20,1742. After Midday

a eS
b 2B Es) ‘e g
3 fe) Pa 5 5
° =) Heed (eo) .)
eis S O =
Gist = Sw/Ww “S/EYE ras Light wind, clear with passing clouds.
2 %
3 Calm { 2 Warm, clewed up mainsail.
4 4%| WSW S
Sa|)) ) Clear with passing clouds.
6 | | Le) SSin } Heavy southwesterly swell, at the rate of 1 knot
| a per hour during 4 hours in SSE direction. The high
i 3 volcano bears WNW about 12 miles, the point
= ( ° 3 north of it NW by W 8 German miles.
7 | Zz
8
9 %| SW/S SE Light wind, stars out, chilly.
10 % 5
Il I SW SE/S } Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
I2 1%
I I SSEYE | As before.
Zz) I +1%
3 1% | Clouding up.
4 1% |
S I%| WSW SY%E J
6 I W/S |S/W4w ) Light wind.
1 “ i 2
8 7AN| ons Clear with passing clouds.
9 % ao SSE } Southwestern swell at the rate of I knot in 4 hours.
Io % ca |
II % 2 i 3
12 5A | Took observaticn: zenith distance 45° 10’,
declination of the sun 8° 51’, latitude 54° i’.
pee In 24 hours | From Cape Manati
Variation 7 mn lmecac
of = 5 : 5 ae : Banish iy a f
Compass. E 25 Hs av wel ¢ | ofe E g
I rhum 2 at An : Q° , 25 a) g
7 ae A | eR | | ASF z 4
By Dead Ss E | SW /W
Reckoning S202104E, | 2427 352.0! | 7.2 12’ |53°57'll 2734 5°18’W | 2°48’

HOMEWARD FROM BERING ISLAND 251

hh August 21,1742. After Midday

2 y ze
ait ||! S 5 4
° S Rel io) oO
m| x = O a)
Tae Clear with passing clouds.
nee pens
mui Southerly swell.
4 =, Filled four empty barrels with salt water and put
| = them in the hold because the ship was becoming
Yea ri’ : light.
ml; | 2 oe ae! i
axon) pen
Ba) ee
8 |} Laer
“9 %|SW/S| W/N_ 1}) From noon until 9 o’clock we allowed 1% knots
for the swell, which pushed us to the east. Light
| wind and unsteady, clear; set mainsail.
Grou lm 34
ae |
12 1% t 7 Topgallantsail wind, weather as before.
| Ea
@) 1%
Sh YA Light wind.
ae % : Chilly.
a5) 34 S |WSWY%w }
AS |
peeled | Clear with passing clouds.
= ES \ x
9 Calm | Clear with passing clouds.
BLOn %| S/W W/S | Topgallantsail wind.
= i |
I2 1% Chilly; point in the N bears NW 7 miles.
peri G In 24 hours | From Cape Manati
Rartetion a 3 Z =a, l A
7 n
34 rhum 5 aN A le Aw | Aon 5 BS
By Dead N W HT SW
Reckoning |N69°o9’W| 11 Ae 10.5 | 17.6’ |54°or’| 20% 1°58’S 3205s

252 LOG BOOK OF THE HOOKER “sT. PETERS

iz} August 22,1742. After Midday

¥ s
u 3 Ao) ra >
=| ° = 3 o
fe) a = fe) co)
sof a s O 2
“zr\/r%| S| WSW |__| Topgallantsail wind, drizzly; carrying the foresails.
22a | | | |
3 34
4 Calm Light rain.
5 yy iD SW Light wind, weather as before.
6)/1% Topgallantsail wind.
712% Reefed topsail, lowered jib and foresail.
8 | 3 SW /S
9 | 434 Topsail wind, drizzly, heavy rain.
Io |4
Tr eS Undersail wind; lowered topsail.
I2 | 434 Squally.
1/4 NNE SSW %
4M Reef-undersail wind, chilly, heavy rain.
314% Took a reef in mainsail.
414% Gale, rain.
5 | 4% WwSW
613% Wind going down, air thick, clear with passing
ees aa ees Cae ee ee clouds.
SA) A | ee ee Let out reef in mainsail.
_ 8 225) | | ee Topsail wind, northeasterly swell, light rain.
oF 2% aN Ee fe oe Clear with passing clouds.
BELOW |S | ee | | OSCE topsail.
Il | 134
I2 M4 Light wind, sunshine, air clear. Took observation:
zenith distance 45° 0’, declination of the sun
8° 08’, latitude 53° 08’.
ror In 24 hours j From Cape Manati
Variation = a ae
of ir 56 : ° a) os e ob
Compass E be | Hs | Sa | He = SES 5 S
34 rhumb E = a* | AN | AM AS 9 2os = }
p E E Ao Pe a
By Dead S W
Reckoning _|$53°390’W]|_66_| 39.8’ | 52.9 |_89" |s3°2r"| |_| 49 36°
S W

By
Observation |S38°46’W]| 66 53° | 41.3 | 72-7" |§3°08"|| 4524 |\S55°s50/Wileacez

HOMEWARD FROM BERING ISLAND 25

io)

¢ August 23,1742. After Midday

n v ay

2) |) eal ame : z

° S ke! 3° 0)

ma S ) a)

I \u NE/E SW Light wind, clear with passing clouds.

2 . cs)

—- 8 ——

3 ) = Heavy northeasterly swell.

mak [ uy ° Clewed up mainsail.

5 Z Allowed for the swell % knot in 3 hours.

6 4%) SW SSE } Light wind, clear with passing clouds. The high
| volcano mentioned before bears now NNW, the
| point of land SW 3% German miles. We take it to
| be Shipunski Cape. From this cape the land is
| low and level, bearing SW by W 3 miles.

7 34 | Lowered topsail, hoisted jib.

8 1% rz Topgallantsail wind, stars out.

9 2% Chilly.

10 2% | Topsail wind, weather as before.
II 2%
12 2 } At the end of the hour tacked to port.

I 24% WNW

2 2% |

3 13% { I Topgallantsail wind, stars out.

4 1% Set topsail.

5 1% Light wind.

6 1%|SW/S W/N Sun shining.

— eer

Lf I > 1%

8 I Calm Cloudy.

9] \ % SW WNW Very light wind and unsteady.

TOU! f 77 Clear with passing clouds.
It )
12 | | From nine o’clock until noon we worked with the
| oars and advanced at the rate of % of a knot per
{ % hour. The cape or point bears W'%S % German
tf 4 mile, Vilyuchensk Volcano WSW, the cape to the
| south NW 4 German miles. It is quite evident that
| this is Kamchatka and that the Harbor of St. Peter
J and Paul is about 12 German miles to the west.
“ In 24 hours From Cape Manati
ariation
ot a 2 : 2 6 Re | Bete a e
comes, | £ | ae [ee] ee fee] 2) eee) = |e
34 rhum s 5 AA As 4 2G 5
4 ae Ae i AS re 3
By Dead Ss W
Reckoning |S 50°21’W| 6.2 Br2e 5.4 9’ 153°05’|| 4634 |S 56°08’W| 4°26’

254

LOG. BOOK OF THE HOOKER "ST, PETER:

S$ August 24,1742. After Midday1%*

Light wind; carrying all sails.

Light wi nd; let out mainsail and foresail. Shipun-
ski Cape_W by S%S, from it a projection WSW 2
miles. Clewed up mainsail, lowered topsail.

Set mainsail.

Hoisted topsail.

Sunshine.
Clewed up mainsail.
Sunshine, pleasant weather.

Shipunski Cape NW % W 3 miles distant, Burning
Volcano W by NYUN.

In 24 hours From Cape Manati
He] AS Te)
eS eo) ‘ ob 3 i b ob
Aa B2/E2) § | ete) 2 | &
om OU
anise AG m a
Ss WwW SW /W
af 6 Io’ |53°13’] 50% 5 °10’W 57037
S WwW
10.8’ | 4.9 8’ |52°54’ ? ? [4°34']

ro)
cn ee SS) e
=) ° =] =
° S ae ro
m |i S O
1| %|SW/W| NwW/w [i
eS | 4 es [ee | Es
4 %| Calm SW
5 %
6 yl SW SSE
7|1%4%| NNW SW /S
88 Calm
| et ae Rs
sme) 4) WSW S
LES [Lee | eee cea | geeaeeeneeewameecees | Deer
TZ 4%
20 | arG W SSW
SS 5 ees |e Or 3
AAG) SOO e = a Se whe oe
5 |1 W/N SW /S
PRON is Pee ale em cee ae
ei ass | ees SE en, SSA
me) _%
_9 |___|_Calm
RLO} |e seer
pe Ee | ae | ee eee |e
12
Variation a
of 2 oS
Compass E ne
3% rhumb E = fal.
= E
By Dead SW //S
Reckoning 6°s51’W 9.2
(Khitrov)
By Dead
Reckoning |S 24°24’W| 12
(Yushin)

136 Khitrov’s journal is used from now on to the end because Yushin’s is in part illegible.
Yushin’s 24-hour summaries are retained, however, because they are based on the
observed position of August 22, while Khitrov’s seem based on that day’s position by

dead reckoning.

HOMEWARD FROM BERING ISLAND 255

& August 25,1742. After Midday

2 y 3
aes 3 é
m|M a3 O 4
a oath Calm Clear, sunshiny.
2
3) 32S Ww/S Set mainsail, hoisted topsail, light wind.
2 es Pe
Sim ie S/E WSW ) Topgallantsail wind.
6 | 2% |
7 | 13% SW/WiWw
TSH aA { %| Shipunski Cape N 4 miles, Burning Volcano NW ,
eee | by W%4W, Vilyuchensk Volcano WSW 4 W.
Oe) Ee eS wsw
1o|1%| S/W w/s |?
hi i keam Taari
pecan i
2 ee “| Stars shining.
22a ae
|
ae”
_ 8 || A i Rowing.
6/1% s
malx| 2 Es
811% Z
won e: ara
to | a ee
co rey Air clear, calm, making use of the oars.
P20 | crn Isopa Point SSW%W, Burning Volcano NW 2 W.
In 24 hours From Cape Manati
Variation a a aa
of = va) 6 Ao tov) V3 rs oD
Pemeee lee pee aa) Be as | Slgea | 2 | &
x A S S s Asm m 5)
By Dead W/S S WwW SW /W

Reckoning 5°33’W | 20.8 28 20 BAe Soe taelle 554 Cec) || See eY
(Khitrov)

By Dead S Ww
Reckoning ? 20.5 2’ 20 33’ |52°52’ 54 Ss56°s55’W| 5°07’
(Yushin)

ee eee eee

256 LOG BOOK OF THE HOOKER ST. PEGER:

2{ August 26,1742. After Midday

a Y 3
yn
aoe :

° a fe fe) oO

m | S O 4

I]1% S W/S Clear, sunshiny; using the oars; occasional puffs of
wind from S; carrying the topsail, foresail, and jib.

2|1%

BS eS ae Ried OM

4)2%| S/E Stopped rowing.

5 |2% W/S%

6 | 2% Topgallantsail wind. Shipunski Cape NE py E 8
miles, Vaua W1%2S 3% miles.

7 2%

Siete S| WS
oO | 24)\2 ae
Io|/1% E

TE tee W

2)/1% W /N

rae NNE NW Using both sails and oars.

2 Aer NE/N | NW/N Came opposite lighthouse, which was NM%E;
anchored, because of head wind and strong head
tide, in 23 fathoms.

ei 1 eee A ees
eA errs Pe et lo te Soe | a EE —EE
5 “%| N/W Weighed anchor and rowed into the mouth cf Avacha
sae | ee | ee | ne | | 2
6 4%
Ee 2 eas eee eal

8 % Owing to strong head tide we anchored in 10 fathoms.
Kamchadals in baidars came to us and said that
Captain Chirikov had gone to Okhotsk this summer.

kia ERED eae | tee eee ee
ime)
II SSE Weighed anchor and by means of the oars and sails
uae went into the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul.
I2
Sa: In 24 hours From Cape Manati
Variation 7 D hs | ae
of 2 zy 5 en P 5 ot “On a eb
ees g BG He os & 2 = ses = S
4 rhum Ei A BS Mm fc} =) 2S ae g
x Q S QA en a5 AGH ~y pe]
By Dead S) Ww | SW /W 137
Reckoning W3°or’S | 25.2 | 0.8’ 25 42’ |53°10’|| 60% 9°20’ 6°19’
(Khitrov)
By Dead S W |
Reckoning W2°18’S | 25.2 Te 25 4t’ |52°51’) 5034 | S50°54’W|[5°48’]
(Yushin)

137 Even with the fresh start in reckoning from Bering Island, this value is short about
12%%° of the true longitude difference between Cape Manati and Petropavlovsk. See
footnote 124, above.

ARRIVAL AT PETROPAVLOVSK PAG |

Q August 27, 1742.

After Midday

Clear with passing clouds.

Came to the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul, took

in the sails, dropped anchor in 9 fathoms, payed out
a little rope.

Lieutenant Waxel, Khitrov, and the crew went

ashore.

Started to transfer the baggage from the ship to the

barracks.

Light wind.

258 .LOG BOOK OF THE HOOKER “SisPBiEke

h August 28, 1742. After Midday

ee EEE EEE

I SE Light wind, at times calm. This day we took out
all the ammunition, iron, provisions, etc. We in-
spected the ship because on the way over it had
sprung a leak. We discovered that the bottom was
poorly calked and had many cracks. We hauled it
near shore and calked the right side and filled the
cracks with pitch.

ARRIVAL AT PETROPAVLOVSK 259

ic} August 29,1742. After Midday

I SE : Calm at times, calked and repaired vessel on the
other side, and having patched it up we anchored it
farther from shore in 8 feet of water.

2 N Moderate breeze and in gusts.

I2 | Clear, sunshiny.

260

LOG BOOK OF THE HOOKER “ST7 PETERS

¢ August 30,1742. After Midday

—— | ——__

NS

w

p

n

a

— | ——_-

a

io)

Ke)

al
je}

Leal
Lan!

I2

Light wind, sunshiny. Stowed 18 water casks in the

hold and % fathom of wood; added to our meat
stores 5 barrels of fish, I tub of butter, and 12 poods
of groats.

ARRIVAL AT PETROPAVLOVSK 261

6 August 31,1742. After Midday

I NE Light wind, clear. Took on naval stores and personal
baggage.

Leal

Nv

oo |) |

xy

oo

‘0

H
° An | 1

CS [| | | | i

262; LOG BOOK OF THE HOOKER? S71 7PE TER’

fo} September 1, 1742. After Midday

e Y 2
pe | = ae:
mi/2| 5 8 5

Bako wen4 SE ee Light wind and unsteady. Fastened on the shrouds
and stays. Took on board two barrels of water in
which cedar had been boiled for the use of the

agian) ___| crew in case of scurvy.138
2
Seen Rare
eat | ee ra
5 —
25 ae ion
7
eles Lee — 2
——<—— | | EE |
9 ie eete tee Dab weal
ee oe
aol <a =
caer ire

ey

ons <i

By! oe ae

eae ty | ae ——

pe | es aa
mois as
7 SS ——

ars =i

ow eg |e |g eee, Took aboard about 12 poods of iron.

Jo! | NE | | | Lieutenant Waxel, Khitrov, and the crew have
moved to the ship.

a |e ~~ | Heaved the hawsers, weighed anchor, and went in
tow of the yawl and boat until out of the harbor,
and then made use of the sail and oars.

cose ~ | Little breeze, light rain.

138 The cedar in question is, according to Dr. Stejneger, the Pinus cembra, the pros-
trate nut pine. Krasheninnikov (History of Kamchatka, Russian edit., St. Petersburg,
1755, Vol. 2, pp. 192-193) says: “This tree differs from the regular cedar in that it is
smaller and does not grow straight but creeps along the ground, and for that reason it is
cailed slanets. It is a valuable remedy for scurvy.”

Cook refers to it: “One of these [cedars] grows upon the coast. . . It was of this
sort we made our essence for beer, and found it excellent for the purpose. . . Wewere
told by the old Toion [chief] at St. Peter and St. Paul that Beering, during the time he lay
in that harbour, first taught them the use of the decoction of these pines and that it had
proved a most excellent remedy for the scurvy.” (James Cook: A Voyage to the Pacific
Ocean, London, 1784, Vol. 3, Dp. 332-333.)

PTE MPT: TO: REACH OKHOTSK 263

pull September 2, 1742. After Midday

= Y 3
s/ 2] Sy
i) i=) = ° oO
ae) | S O ey
aera | | INES rime Unsteady wind, gloomy, rainy; depth 6, 7, 8, 10
fathoms.
Minoo | At times calm; for that reason it was dangerous to
go out to sea, and we therefore anchored n 10
wane fathoms and paid out 25 fathoms of cable.
| [cea a) (Ne (
| ce |
5 ———
MGlM—un. «|... c..
a Ml ih Tos cer le a ait Se
ei nae ESE aan Lighthouse SE™%E, stone projection SE%S.
ae Loe ole | eal er ae ee tn a nO te a pe edd Nee
“EO. | | ae Sea
“iEge || Sac] |e enn
ane con Calm, clear with passing clouds, chilly.
I
a a a a
3
an pra W ie Light breeze; weighed anchor, hoisted sails, and
went S from the mouth of Avacha Bay.
3 | ee Sa ae
~6}] | NNW eae Ligne breeze; carrying mainsail, foresail, and top-
sail.
oat | a ena a
0) ae aa ae
me prune ae |S ere rene Xen |e we
10| | SE/S Clewed up mainsail and steered E in order to get
na ae ede clear of the Kamchatka coast. Opened mainsail.
TENE

I2 Lighthouse N by W, Isopa Point S%W.

264 LOG BOOK OF THE HOOKER “ST. PETER”

Q September 3,1742. After Midday

Y 3

4 | 3 As) re ES

3 i) eI 5 %

° 5 Re! ° o)

mM 5 O 4

I S ESE Light wind, clear.

2 Light breeze.

3

4 S/W SE/E“%E Vaua NW%W 3 miles, Isopa SSW, Shipunski
Cape NEYN.

5 S ESE

6 S/W SE /E Wind freshening, chilly; took a reef in topsail.

7

8 Topgallantsail breeze; came about with the wind

| ee, ee es | eae and sailed W.
stat 5) SS Was |e We
BEL OIE | Riana |For | eae me ees
SLA | Deel | ese |e ee |
I2 Very little wind.

I

B Tacked to starboard.

z Calm

4 Clewed up mainsail.

5

6 S/W SE /E Hoisted mainsail; rain falling.

af SE%E Topgallantsail wind.

8 Lowered topsail.

9 W/N Lieutenant Waxel and Navigator Yushin agreed to
return to Avacha, because the wind was contrary
and no headway was being made by tackirg and
because the vessel was leaking badly.

Io WNW
II Sailed into Avacha Bay.

T2 NW4wW Vaua lighthouse NW by N 1% German mile.

MITE MP i TO REACH OKHOTSK 265

h September 4, 1742. After Midday

5 Y 3

aio) 2 5 2

° S al fe) .)

ach as S O =)

I S/W Little breeze, sunshiny.

Entered mouth of Avacha Bay and anchored in
8% fathoms.
4 Vaua Point ESE, Vilyuchensk Island S by
W 14 W.139
S| AL Ns a
6 WNW
wal a a a a SE LE ae ee etl er es

8 W Gale blowing; dropped another anchor and payed

out % cable.
Dh NESSES IRE pe (nn re oT
Io
peer bee a ma,
I2 Storm
poeta
2 Wind going down a little.
= 3 || dE] ee | |
GE) S| P
pes a | |p Fe tS | ea | ee eee ee

6 Light wind; weighed one anchor.

7 Had a consultation in regard to the condition of
our ship, which was leaking badly. An accurate
copy of the results of our deliberation is given

a below.
Bi ee
SeeO | eee [earodison (fn 2 AO I ek a ie AN Ph eS es Bee
10 Weighed anchor and began to tack towards the
Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul.
205) S|
12 Clear with passing clouds.

139 “Vilyuchensk” Island has disappeared from the maps. It is probably the same as
“Starichkov” Island of later maps. Steller (“Beschreibung von dem Lande Kamtschatka,”
p. 18) refers to it: “Diesem Haven [Avacha] zur Rechten ist eine kleine steinerne Insel
.-. Diese wird Wiliutschisky ostrow genennet.”

266 LOG BOOK OF THE HOOKER “ST. PETER?”

September 4, 1742

DECISION REACHED AT THE CONSULTATION ON SEPTEMBER 4, 1742

Lieutenant Waxel, Fleet Master Khitrov, and all the lower officers on board on
the voyage from Avacha to Okhotsk came to the following decision:

1. We tried to repair the hooker St. Petey so that it would not leak as much as it
had on the way from Bering Island to Avacha, and when we were at Avacha we had
hoped that this had been done.

2. On September 1, after we had [made out a report ?] of the activities of our com-
pany, based on the original journal and chart, we were ready to go on our way. We
went as far as eight miles from the bay but could not make much headway owing
to the strong head wind which prevented us from sailing on our course, which was
south and between south and west. At the same time our ship sprung a leak as
before, forcing us to bail all the time and in the end to turn back to the aforemen-
tioned bay.

3. We knew, from former experiences, that after the middle of this month the
strong north winds would begin to blow and that our vessel could not weather them
and could never make Okhotsk in time [to escape them?]. We had time to go as far
as the mouth of the Bolshaya River and might have done so, but we knew that at
the Bolsheretsk Post there were not provisions enough foro ur men. Having
taken all these reasons into consideration we decided to return to Avacha Bay.

Lieutenant SVEN WAXEL

Master SOFRON KHITROV

Assistant Navigator KHARLAM YUSHIN
For the Boatswain ALEXEI IVANOV
Boatswain’s mate GRIGORI TRUBESHIN
Midshipman IVAN SINT

FINAL RETURN TO PETROPAVLOVSK 267

©; September 5, 1742. After Midday

I WNW Reef-topsail wind, cloudy; tacked in succession
into the Harbor of St. Peter and St.Paul.

—— | —<—_ | —_ $$ | umm | ——

4 W/N Failed to make the harbor and anchored in 7
fathoms.

(7l|| Sra Dropped another anchor.

4 Sent ashore to get a yawl and another boat to
tow us In.

II W Weighed ai ior and tacked into the harbor.

I2 Fresh breeze, sunshine.

268 LOG BOOK OF THE HOOKER si. PEEK

¢ September 6, 1742. After Midday

is Y e
5/5 = 5 z
oO} § ie ° o
aoe S O 2
at WwW Naas. Topsail wind.
Me Ss ae Eee
i Gee eee ee wo
4 oA By tacking, towing, and rowing got into the
rer ai eee eed harbor.
5
oa eel a a eae
os Sees a ee
8 We safely brought the St. Peter in front of the
|e ares warehouse.
9
co SS Se aes ae
REraie tee ee ee aa ee
ie ab a Dropped the anchors and made fast to shore
with lines.
=
EN et eee ee |
OS arreateae |e een be ae a ee Dds
Bs, 0.0] ad je eee ee ee
5
2 ae es eee Oe
a ae ie
oe vial ~ | Crew took its baggage ashore.
- be eee | een ee ee es
Troe eas eae et he
tls en aa eos
ron |e ~~ | Lieutenant Waxel and I went to our quarters

[on shore].

FINAL RETURN TO PETROPAVLOVSK

& September 7, 1742.

269

After Midday 1*°

140 Yushin’s journal.

Light air.

Clear; discharging the ship and taking the cargo

ashore.

Lee are i oe ee ee Bee ee
Since noon we have been unrigging the hooker.

Fair weather.

Moon and stars out.

Very light air, weather as before.

Cloudy.

Clear.
Sky overcast.

Since 8:30 it has been raining lightly.
Clear with passing clouds.

are re a 2a ee ee ee ts oe ee BR eee
Took out the water barrels and the wood from

the hooker, and it is now empty.

CHAPTER VI

LIEUTENANT WAXEL’S REPORT ON THE
VOYAGE OF THE ST. PETER

Although the log book of the St. Peter gives an intimate, day-
by-day insight into the happenings of the voyage, and is there-
fore a valuable historical document, its stereotyped form and
routine information often obscure the human interest of the
story. This element is supplied by the simple and straightforward
narrative of Lieutenant Sven Waxel’s report, which he, as officer
in command after Bering’s death, forwarded to the Admiralty
College from Petropavlovsk by special messenger in November,
1742. A translation from the original! in the Russian archives
follows.

To THE IMPERIAL ADMIRALTY COLLEGE, A MOostT
HUMBLE REPORT

Last May, 1741, the late Captain Commander Bering called a council,
in which participated Captain Chirikov, Professor de la Croyére, the
officers, and navigators, to decide on the first course to sail after leaving
the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul [Petropavlovsk] in order to discover
the Terra Juan de Gama which is marked on the map of the above-
named Professor de la Croyére and which extends northerly to the 47th
parallel. It was agreed to steer, after going out of Avacha Bay, SE by
E, true compass, to the 46th degree in order to see whether there is any
land on that parallel and if such be discovered to coast alongside of it
between north and east or north and west, depending on the lay of the
land. If, however, no land is seen on that parallel, it was concluded
to sail from there on an E by N course until land is found, and when
found to follow it in a northerly direction for the purpose of observation
as long as time will permit so as to return during the last days of Septem-

1 Archives of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Papers of the Admiralty
College, 1742-1746, No. 2, pp. 233 ff. On the top of the first page is written “Re-
ceived September 4, 1743, from the hands of Boatswain Alexei Ivanov, who was
sent here for that purpose.” The report was passed on to the Senate two days later,
and to the Cabinet on September 17.

PISECOVERY OF LAND: KAYAK ISLAND 27m

ber to the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul, where we would pass the win-
ter. All having agreed to this plan, Captain Commander Bering on the
St. Peter, accompanied by Captain Chirikov on the St. Paul, sailed out
of Avacha Bay on June 4, 1741, and on getting out to sea kept the course
agreed upon, that is SE by E, and a little closer at times.

The wind was fair, and we kept together with Captain Chirikov until
June 19, when there was a strong easterly wind which compelled us and
him to take in sail and heave to. The St. Paul was seen to the northwest
of us until about eleven o’clock at night, being then in latitude 49° 52’
N and from Vaua 17° 49’, but after that time we lost sight of her.
With the coming of day we set out to find her on the course on
which we saw her during the night, and in this neighborhood so far
as the weather allowed we spent 43 hours but without success. Then Cap-
tain Commander Bering, his officers agreeing, decided to pursue the course
originally agreed upon between S and E, and we kept within that quarter
of the compass on various rhumbs, according to the wind, to 45° 13’
and to the east of Vaua 16° 23’, and about 200 German miles without
finding any land. The Captain Commander then changed the course
to E by N, the same which had been agreed upon in council, and we
sailed on it to latitude 48° 38’ and longitude from Vaua 36°, but even at
this distance no land was seen. The Captain Commander, his officers
agreeing, decided to keep a little more to the north in the hope of soon
discovering some land. Between N and E we sailed until July 16, on
which day we saw land [Mt. St. Elias] in the northwest. We steered
for it and on July 20 anchored alongside one of the islands, which we
named St. Elias [Kayak].

This island is situated in latitude 59° 40’ N;? longitude from Vaua
48° 50’, and on the course E by N from Vaua 41734 German miles. That
same day the Captain Commander sent Fleet Master Khitrov in the
longboat to look about among the other islands in sight for a good anchor-
ing place where we might run for shelter in case of need. Khitrov re-
turned during the day and made a verbal report to the Captain to the
effect that he found anchorage between the mainland and the island
in the roadstead, where he got 3 to 3% fathoms of water. Healso reported
that on that island he came across a hut built of hewn boards and that
there were indications that people occupied the hut shortly before our
coming. He brought to show us a wooden basket, a shovel, also a stone
which had on it many marks of copper. The Adjunct Steller, who went
in the small boat to the island of St. Elias, found there an earthen hut
in which were dried fish, cured that very summer; we saw also human
footprints on the sand and a fireplace. It was evident that on seeing

2 Yushin gives 59° 49’, Khitrov 59° 39’. The correct latitude of the southern

point (Cape St. Elias) is 59° 48’, of the northern point 60° o’, and of the St. Peter's
anchorage 59° 56’.

272 REPORT: ON VOYAGE OF THE “S? PEipre

us the people ran into the woods to hide or that their homes are on the
mainland and they visit this island to catch fish and hunt sea animals. In
order to show his good will to the native people the Captain Commander
sent to the hut a number of presents—16 % arshins of green-colored goods,
2 iron knives, 20 Chinese strings of beads, 2 iron [smoking] pipes, all of
which were left there. We could not tell whether on the mainland there
was any good timber or not, but we did see the huge mountains and
volcanoes covered with snow. On the island there is plenty of small
timber, namely fir, larch, and other trees, which are not fit for building
and not even for repairing a ship, for we looked for material for topyards
but did not find it.

When we had provided ourselves with water from the island of St.
Elias, the Captain Commander, mainly because it was dangerous to lie
out in the open sea, departed July 21, and we steered between S and W,
following the lay of the land, for the purpose of observation. In this
way we sailed on various courses and came to latitude 56° 54’ by July 26.
Here we sighted that same coast [Sitkalidak Island] in the direction NE
by N from us, about seven miles distant. On taking soundings we had
35 to 40 fathoms of water. It was quite unsafe to keep near the land be-
cause of the sand banks, continuous heavy fogs, and violent winds; on
that account, as well as our ignorance of the nature of the coast, which
had dangers for us, we steered different courses in order to draw away
from it more and more—all of which is clearly noted down in our log
book. This maneuvering we kept up until August 2. During that night
as the fog lifted, we saw quite close to us an island [Chirikov Island],
the water being 18, 17, and 16 fathoms deep. On that account, as well
as the darkness and the fog, we let go the anchor in 18 fathoms. We
named this island Tumannoi [foggy]. In the morning we sailed away.

The mainland was from us ina NNW direction and not a great distance
away. August 4 we sighted five islands [Semidi], and from this time
on we kept farther and farther out tosea. For the course we were follow-
ing the winds were quite contrary. By August 10 we were in latitude 53°
18’ N and from Vaua a little less than 400 German miles; and taking all
this into consideration, also the report submitted by the assistant surgeon,
to the effect that 21 of our company were down with scurvy and that,
if obliged to remain out at sea during the autumn weather, they would be
altogether unfit for service, the Captain Commander with his higher and
lower officers decided that if the winds permitted it we should from this
day on keep on the 53rd parallel in order to see whether or not American
land is to be found on that parallel, although the last we saw of it was
on the 55th. We attempted to put our decision into execution but, until
August 27, were hindered by the severe headwinds from the west, being
then still more than 300 German miles from Vaua and on the 53rd
parallel of latitude. It was quite clear to the Captain Commander that

LANDING ON SHUMAGIN ISLANDS 273

if these violent head winds held on we should not advance very fast. At
this time we had only 25 barrels of water, and to attempt with no more
on hand to reach the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul, assuming even
that headwinds would no longer trouble us, would be very dangerous and
might lead to a great misfortune.

Taking these possibilities into consideration it was agreed on this 27th
day of August to go in search of water on the land which according
to our calculation was about 60 miles away. On the 29th we saw many
islands [Shumagin], towards which we steered closer and closer, having
55, 50, 45, and 15 fathoms of water, with an even, sloping, sandy bottom.
When we had come near enough we lowered the small yawl and sent
the Assistant Navigator Yushin to find anchorage among the islands.
While he was gone we anchored in 24 fathoms. When he returned and
said that he could not find good anchorage we weighed anchor, put over
the longboat, and went in its tow into the bay among the islands, where
we had 25 and 15 fathoms of water. Near one of the islands we anchored
and sent the navigator ashore to look for water, and, on returning, he
reported to the Captain Commander that he found plenty of it. The
mainland was seen behind these islands about 12 miles away. During
the night we saw fire on one of the islands to the NNE, about a mile and
a half away from us.

The following morning, August 30, Fleet Master Khitrov was sent
in the small yawl to the place where fire had been seen, with instructions
that, if he found people, he should treat them kindly; and with that in
view he was given a number of things to present to them. In the mean-
time a strong wind was blowing, accompanied by squalls, so that it
was not safe to remain longer near the island, as we were wholly unpro-
tected. We were therefore obliged to seek shelter, though it was slight,
among the islands, where we anchored. On September 2 we sent the
longboat to Khitrov because, owing to the violent wind, he could not
get off shore in the small yawl. The next day, September 3, he came
safely aboard but without the small yawl, which he had to leave behind
owing to the strong wind and heavy surf. He made a report to the Cap-
tain Commander that he was at the place where fire had been seen, that
he found the fireplace but did not meet any people. This same day we
weighed anchor and tacked among the islands, going around the first
island to the island [Bird Island] which was to the east of it, about two
miles distant, and there anchoring in 15 fathoms. Here we remained,
September 4. About noon of the 5th we heard a loud noise and saw two
men, who sat in two baidarkas rowing towards our ship. When they
came within 50 fathoms of us they stopped and called to us in their
tongue, which our interpreters of the Chukchi and Koriak languages
could not make out. Our interpreters hailed them in Koriak and in
Chukchi, and it was evident that they could not understand, because

274 REPORT ON VOYAGE OF THE ST-*PEmERS

they pointed to their ears, waved their hands to us, and motioned to
the shore. After this, one of the two approached much closer to our ship
but would not come alongside. At the order of the Captain Commander
we threw to him, tied on a board, several arshins of red (Chinese) silk,
mirrors, iron pipes for smoking Chinese tobacco (called shar), and several
small copper bells. He seemed to receive these gifts with pleasure, and
in return he threw to us two thin sticks planed smooth, to one of which
were tied birds’ feathers and to the other a bird’s claw with the feathers
on, which feathers we identified as that of the hawk. When we had
accepted the presents the Americans pulled away for the shore, at the
same time shouting to us in a loud voice and waving their hands toward
the beach.

The Captain Commander ordered that the longboat should be lowered;
in this I was sent to the Americans. I took with me an interpreter who
understood the Chukchi and Koriak tongues, several armed men, also
presents and Russian liquor. When I came near the place of the Ameri-
cans I anchored because, owing to the surf, the strong wind, and sub-
merged rocks, it was impossible to land. I allowed the interpreter and
several men of my party to wade ashore. At the same time I offered the
Americans presents, which they would not accept. To one of them I
handed a cup of liquor, which he took and drank but immediately spat
it out. In the meantime the interpreter who went ashore was led to
their camp, where he was offered whale blubber, which he accepted.
When he wished to go back to the boat the Americans detained him
and would not allow it; just how fast they held him it was difficult to
say. In order to free him I was obliged to command the soldiers to
fire in the air. When the guns were fired they all fell on the ground,
and this gave the interpreter the chance to come aboard. The Ameri-
cans made a dash for the boat, seized the painter, and started to haul
the boat ashore. I feared that it would be smashed on the rocks and
therefore shouted to cut the painter and slip the cable. With all my
men I returned safe on board and made a verbal report to the Captain
Commander. At night the Americans built a big fire on the beach.
That night there was an unusually strong wind, and we were compelled
to strike the main and fore yards and wait for daylight. As soon as the
5th of September dawned we weighed anchor and tacked near the island
with the intention of proceeding on our course, but the wind was contrary
and the tide against us. We went back again to the island and anchored
in 17 fathoms. While we were at anchor there rowed to us from the afore-
mentioned island seven baidarkas, two of which came right up to the ship.
It was evident that they had never before seen a gun, for when they came
to us they were not in the least afraid. We gave them at this time an
iron kettle and a few needles. They gave to us as presents two hats made
of bark on which were fastened ivory images in the form of a human

SKIRTING THE ALEUTIAN ISLANDS 275

being.* These images are being sent together with this humble report
to the honorable Admiralty College, but the hats as well as the sticks
were lost at the time of our misfortune.

All these islands are uninhabited and treeless. It is evident that the
Americans come in baidarkas from the mainland to the islands to hunt sea
animals and to catch fish. As to the way the Americans make their
baidarkas from seal hide, it may be seen from the detailed drawing which I
made on the map which is sent to the Admiralty College. Having taken
on water we got under sail September 6 and continued on our course.
We called that island Shumagin. We intended to go straight to Avacha
Bay, but contrary winds from the west as well as violent winds hindered
us and caused us much suffering. Frequently we had to heave to in order
to save ourselves. On September 24 we came to latitude 51° N where we
sighted several islands [Adak, Atka] and, behind them on the WNW,
the American mainland [Great Sitkin]. At this place there blew an inde-
scribable gale from the west which continued until October 13. During
the whole time we had to heave to and were carried to the eastward
about 80 German miles. In order that the Admiralty College may form
some idea of the storm it should be pointed out that the old navigators
said that they had seldom seen anything like it. We were saved from it
with great difficulty. A number of the men were down with scurvy,
some died of it, and those who survived were too weak to work. Al-
though, on account of the hard labor and the continuous inclement
weather, we were at the end of our strength, yet with the help of God
we made every effort to reach the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul. On
October 25, being then in latitude 51° and some minutes, we sighted a
high, rocky, and treeless island in NW by N, which we named St. Marki-
ana [Kiska Island]. On the 28th we saw another island to the NNW,
about three miles distant, and in its neighborhood three smallislands. As
far as we could make out they were all bare and treeless. This island we
named St. Stephen [Buldir]. The following day it was foggy, and on
taking soundings and getting only 35 fathoms of water we hove to and
did not take any chances. When it cleared a bit we noticed an island
to the west which we named St. Abraham [one of the Semichi]. We then
hoisted the sails and went on our way. It became very difficult to run the
ship because, in addition to those who died, 40 were ill and those who
were still about were very teeble. We continued under these conditions

3 These so-called hats were eye shades which the hunters used when out at sea.
Cook gives the following description of them: “All of them [Aleuts of Unalaska]
have a kind of oval snouted cap, made of wood, with a rim to admit the head.
These caps are dyed with green and other colors; and round the upper part of the
rim are stuck the long bristles of some sea animal [sea lion] on which are strung
glass beads; and on the front is a small image or two made of bone.” (James Cook:
A Voyage to the Pacific Ocean, London, 1784, Vol. 2, p. 51.) See Fig. 12, lower-

276 REPORT ON VOYAGE OF THE si. -Eier.

until November 4, on which day we sighted land [Copper Island] which
we looked upon as a godsend because it was beyond our strength to
keep any longer at sea. By observation this land is in latitude 54°, but by
dead reckoning we thought we were in latitude 53° and in longitude some
140 minutes from Vaua. From this reckoning we hoped that the land
in sight might be Kamchatka, some little distance north of Shipunski
Cape. Our faulty reckoning was due to the fact that we had for a long
time (as may be seen from our log book) thick weather and no sunshine
to set us right.

We and our men were greatly weakened from the severe attack of the
scurvy and at the end of our strength and in great danger, for it may be
said at that time the ship was without control. Of our men there were
only eight who, with great pain, could look after themselves, and of
these three, one of them being the Captain Commander’s man, could
come on deck. All the others were sick unto death. We had only six
barrels of water on board. As to provisions we had no sea biscuit or such
like and only a little flour, butter, and meat. On top of this the shrouds
on the mainsail above the catharpings on the right side were all torn, and
therefore we could not carry any sail on the mainmast and, as was noted
above, there was no one to do any repairing. At the particular time of
our misfortune the wind was contrary for getting around the cape seen
by us. Therefore, on November 5, realizing that we were in a bad state
to remain longer at sea and that it was dangerous to wait for fair winds
because our men were giving out so fast that we feared we should be left
without any help whatever and the ship would be lost with all on board,
the Captain Commander called together for consultation all the higher
and lower officers and those of the men who were still able to drag them-
selves to the cabin. The members of the crew announced that because
of their sickness and feebleness they were no longer able to do their work
atsea. Taking this into account the Captain Commander and the higher
and lower officers agreed to look for an anchoring place where we might
winter in order to save ourselves and not be entirely destroyed by such
a dreadful disease. All the men agreed to this, and we sailed before the
wird towards the land and drew near it about five o’clock in the after-
noon and anchored with the small bower in 12 fathoms of water and paid
out about three-fourths of a cable. It broke about 80 fathoms from the
end, and we were carried by the surf 5 fathoms, when we let go another
anchor with the same resu!t, and we were carried by the surf over [the
reef] closer to the shore into 41% fathoms, where we let fall the best bower
and paid out three-fourths of a cable. By this time we had 49 of the
crew on the sick list. On November 6 we lowered the longboat and
mocred the ship, but only aiter great difficulty since we were so short-
handed. After this week, with the help of those men who, although with
some effort, were still able to be on their feet, we did our best to transport

VAIN ATTEMPTS TO SAVE THE SHIP 277

the sick ashore and to put up for them tents made out of sails. When
these were up we took the sick Captain Commander ashore on Novem-
ber 8; Fleet Master Khitrov, who was also ill, on the 15th; and many of
the crew, not a few of whom died as they were being transported. On
the 21st I, too, was so ill that I had to be taken off the ship because I was
almost helpless, and there was no one to bring water on board, and no
one to look after the ship. ji

At this time the Captain Commander sent Constable Roselius with
two other men with instructions to follow the shore in a northerly direc-
tion to determine whether the land on which we were was part of Kam-
chatka or some island; and, if Kamchatka, Roselius was to continue
on his way until he came to an inhabited place and there carry out such
orders as the Captain Commander gave him. Roselius was so weak
that he did not go farther than 30 miles from our camp and returned
without news. On November 21, the Captain Commander ordered me,
with the higher and lower officers and members of the crew, to submit
a report on the best way to save the ship. This was done, and the report
was submitted on the 23rd, in which we recommended that the ship
should be hauled up on the sandy beach near our camp and that the cargo
should not be unloaded so that in case of a strong offshore wind and the
breaking of the cables the ship would not be carried out to sea. The Cap-
tain Commander accepted the report and that same day, the 23rd, ordered
Master Khitrov to put it into execution at the very first opportunity.
On the 25th Khitrov started to go on board and, when he came to where
the longboat was hauled up, was told by the boatswain, Alexei Ivanov,
who was on watch, that there were only five able-bodied men. In drag-
ging the longboat into the water one of the men got drenched to the skin
and had to give up, which left four men who were completely exhausted.
When Master Khitrov realized that with this handful of men he could
not weigh the best bower anchor, that the wind at the time was blowing
NNW straight on the rocky reef, which was about 150 fathoms in SSE
direction from where the ship was at that time, and that the topmasts
and yards were down, and even if there had been enough men it would
be dangerous to move the ship in such weather, owing to the above-men-
tioned reef, he became convinced that he could not carry out the task
assigned to him. He then came to me and explained the situation, and
I advised him to make his report to the Captain Commander, which he
did. From the 25th to the 28th it blew hard so that it was not possible
to go on board to carry out the above-mentioned order. In addition to
the other troubles Fleet Master Khitrov was quite ill with scurvy and
unable to be about and was put in the same tent with the rest of us.
On the night of November 28 a violent storm from NE broke the cable
and drove the ship on the sandy beach on which we had planned to
lay her up. On December 1 the Captain Commander sent the sailor

278 REPORT ON. VOYAGE OF THE “ST. PETER?

Anchiugov with two other men along the shore to the south to explore
and to learn whether the land on which we were was the mainland or
some island. They came back on December 27 without any definite
information.

On December 8, 1741, by the will of God, Captain Commander Bering
died of scurvy from which he had been suffering for four months, and we
buried him on the island where we lived. I succeeded him in command,
and, with the assistance of Fleet Master Khitrov, every effort was made
to find out where we were; but, owing to bad weather and other serious
obstacles, it was not before the month of April that we knew anything
certain. As soon as we were sure that we were on an island, we madea
general inspection of the St. Peter to determine whether she was in good
condition for going to Kamchatka and whether it was possible to get her
into the water. Our examination showed that the vessel was so badly
injured that she could not be repaired, that we had nothing to repair her
with, and that we had not the facilities for getting her off since she was
buried in something like seven feet of sand above the keel. We took
council together as to how to get away from the island, and we found
no other means (since the island was bare and treeless) than to break up
the ship and make out of her for our voyage to Kamchatka as large a vessel
as the timber would allow. To this plan all agreed, and we went to work
in April and continued operations until May 5. On the following day
(May 6), with the help of God, we commenced building the new vessel,
the keel of which was 36 feet, beam 12, and depth 5 feet 3 inches. We
worked as fast as we could, making use of every favorable moment.

The island on which we wintered extends from 54° to 56° north latitude,
and from the southern cape, which we named Cape Manati, that is to say
Sea Cow, it stretches from NNW to SSE. It is about 130 versts long
and about 10 wide. There are no habitations on it and no signs that
people ever lived there. There are no trees of any kind except in some
places a few small willows. On the island are high mountains and vol-
canoes. In many places there are rocky bluffs, making it extremely
difficult for seagoing vessels to approach, for on the whole island there are
very few places where the beach is not full of rocks, stretching out into
the sea for a verst or more, which are submerged at high tide and exposed
at low tide. Where the beach is not rocky the surf runs high, and there-
fore it is quite dangerous to anchor in the roadstead. For ships that
draw five or six feet of water there is no place for wintering, for we looked
into the question of a harbor and sent for that purpose Fleet Master
Khitrov to the south and boatswain Alexei Ivanov to the north, but
they could not find one. When the wind blew from the west it brought
us from Kamchatka pieces of timber that had been used in the building
of huts, planks that had been used for fastening together rafts of logs,
and broken deer sleds such as are used by the wandering Koriaks.

WINTERING ON BERING ISLAND 279

Many times when the weather was clear some of our men saw, from
the west side of the island, what seemed to be snow-covered volcanoes,
but on account of the great distance we could not be sure about that,
but our reckoning on the 1742 voyage leaves no room for doubt that the
volcanoes in question were those of the Kamchatka coast. From the
American side there floated over to us big pine trees, arrows, and paddles
such as are not found in Kamchatka. While on the island we lived very
poorly because our dwellings were holes made in the sand covered over
with sail. The gathering of wood was particularly difficult, for we were
obliged to search for it along the beach and carry it on our backs as far
as 10 or 12 versts. While we were there we and nearly all the men in our
command suffered greatly from scurvy and for such a long time that some
did not fully recover before spring when there were found some greens
which could be used for food. During the whole winter our food, because
we had no other provision, was, we might say, very poor, difficult to
obtain, and not fit to eat. We had to hunt along the beach sometimes
as far as 20 and 30 versts in the hopes of killing a sea animal, sea ctter,
sea lion, or hair seal, which is commonly called tulen. Having killed
the beast we had to carry it on our backs the same long distance back to
our camp. If we could not find live animals to kill we had to content
ourselves with dead ones that were washed ashore, such as sea cows and
whales. By spring the game was frightened away, and we had to live
on the fur seals which came here at that time to breed. Their meat was
especially nauseating; and, as it became more so as time went on, we took
to hunting sea cows, huge animals, weighing no less than two hundred
poods. One may form an idea of the appearance of these animals—fur
seal, sea lion, and sea cow—from the sketches of them made on the map
which I send to the Admiralty College. From this time on we lived on sea
cow meat, which is better than that of the other animals aforementioned.

On the island where we lived there were violent winds and even bliz-
zards during the winter. It may be said that between December and
March there was seldom a fair day. From March and during the spring
and summer months there was almost continuous fog and dampness and
little pleasant weather.

The delay in the construction of our vessel was due in part to the dis-
agreeable atmospheric conditions just mentioned and in part to the
poor health of the men and the great distance from the source of author-
ity, which made it unsafe to hold them strictly to their work, and nothing
could be done without the consent of all concerned. Adjunct Steller,
who was with us, prospected the island for metals and minerals but found
none. When with God’s help the new ship was finished, I, with Fleet
Master Khitrov and all the men, had a meeting to discuss what we should

4 Reproduced by W. H. Dall as Pl. 70, Appendix 19, U. S. Coast and Geodetic
Survey Rept. for 1800.

280 REPORT ON VOYAGE OF THE ST). PEERS

do with all the material on hand. We agreed to take with us a certain
amount of iron for ballast, such provisions as we needed, a supply of fresh
water, several barrels of salted sea cow meat, and all the crew with their
baggage and to sail for Kamchatka. All the other material and supplies,
the greater part of which was worthless, according to the testimony of the
Fleet Master and the petty officers, it was decided to leave behind in the
warehouse which we built for that purpose. Owing to the fall weather
and our ignorance of the seaworthiness of our craft we did not think it
wise to overload it. A list of all the material, good and bad, left behind
is sent to the Admiralty College.

On August Io we launched our newly constructed ship which we named
the hooker St. Peter, and we rigged it on August 13. Having taken on
board all the men to the number of 46, we started, with God’s help, on our
way to Kamchatka. On the night of August 15, while out at sea, the ves-
sel, owing to her poor construction, sprang a big leak so that there was
soon about two feet of water in the hold. We were in great danger, and to
lighten the ship we threw out of the hold cannon balls and shot. By
means of buckets and pumps we got rid of some of the water. When the
leak had been somewhat attended to we proceeded on our course. On
August 26 we sailed safely into the Harbor of the Holy Apostles St. Peter
and St. Paul. There we heard that Captain Chirikov and his company
had left this same summer for Okhotsk. We repaired the hooker St. Peter
and set sail on September I with the intention of following him to
Okhotsk, but after being out at sea for five days another big leak was dis-
covered. In addition to other troubles the wind was contrary, so that
we decided, all agreeing, to return for the winter to the harbor so that
we might not suffer misfortune from such a leak in such an unreliable
vessel and so late a season.

We are now in Kamchatka, where we plan to remain until the coming
April, when we will repair the hooker and go to Okhotsk. If Captain
Chirikov should still be there, Iand my company will place ourselves at
his orders; if he should be gone, we will proceed to Yakutsk, where I will
try to carry out the instructions of the Admiralty College which I shall
there receive; if there are no orders on hand, I will wait until they come.

I take this occasion to report to the Admiralty College that from the
time we left the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul in the year 1741, and
during the time we were out at sea and on the island, there died of scurvy
at different times, officers and others, 31 men. The names of these per-
sons and the dates of their death are sent on a special list.

Article 9 of the instructions which the Admiralty College gave to Cap-
tain Commander Bering reads that when the expedition shall have come
to an end there should be forwarded to the Admiralty College the log
book and the chart that shall have been made by the officers who were
on the voyage. I and Fleet Master Khitrov fully meant to do that [make

FINAL ARRANGEMENTS 281

the chart] but we were in such trouble and so ill (all of which I have
reported above) that we have not as yet been able to accomplish it. But
the log book and a sketch map giving the outline of the American coast
(which we wished to name, after the manner of other European dis-
coverers, “New Russia” but did not feel empowered to do so without
orders of the Admiralty College), as well as sketch maps of the islands of
St. Elias, Shumagin, and the other neighboring islands are being sent to
the Admiralty College this 15th day of November, 1742, by a special mes-
senger, one of my men, the boatswain Alexei Ivanov. This man was a
tower of strength when we were in trouble. The Captain Commander
made him boatswain, and he fulfilled the duties of his position in an able
manner. For greater safety in going through the country of the natives
Ivanov is accompanied by Ivan Okulov, one of our soldiers, from a
Tobolsk regiment. They are ordered to go by way of the Anadyr Post
and to lose no time.

That which I have reported above about our hardships and suffering
I humbly pray that the Admiralty College may receive.

Lieutenant SVEN WAXEL
Harbor of the Holy Apostles
St. Peter and St. Paul

November 15, 1742

ENCLOSURE

LIsT OF THE OFFICERS AND MEN OF THE “ST. PETER,” WHICH SAILED FROM THE
HARBOR OF ST. PETER AND ST. PAUL 1N 1741, WHO BY THE WILL OF GOD
DIED OF SCURVY EITHER AT SEA OR ON THE ISLAND WHERE WE
WINTERED

The name of each person and the date when he died are noted below; and the
island where we wintered, and which has been described above, we named Bering’s
Island.

Sailor, 2nd rank Nikita Shumagin Mules) Sire 7 AT
Marine grenadier Andrei Tretyakov Sept. 24, I741
Marine soldier Alexei Kiselev Oct.” 19; 1745
Kamchatka soldier Nikita Kharitonov Oct 205 1745
Marine soldier Luka Zaviakov Oct 2255745
Admiralty cooper Stepan Bogdriev Octy 728s L745
Soldier of the Siberian garrison Karp Pashennoi Octa 310 74r
Admiralty carpenter Ivan Petrov INOVven 2598740
Drummer of the Siberian garrison Osip Chentsov Nov. 4, 1741
Marine grenadier Alexei Popov Nov. 4, 1741
Soldier of the Siberian garrison Ivan Davidov Nov. 4, 1741
Marine grenadier Ivan Nebaranov Nov. 5, 1741
Boatswain Nils Jansen Nov. 8, 1741
Trumpeter Mikhael Toroptsov Nov. II, 1741
Sailor, Ist rank Ivan Emelianov Nov. I5, 1741
Cannoneer, 2nd rank Ilya Dergachev Nov. 15, 1741
Cadet of the Yakutsk regiment Vasili Popkov Nov. 15, 1741
Sailor, 2nd rank Seliverst Tarakanov Nov. 15, 1741

Soldier of the Yakutsk regiment} Savin Stepanov Nov. 16, 1741

282 REPORT ON VOYAGE OF THE “Si. PETERS

Sailor, ist rank Mark Antipin

a ane Mey Semen Artemev5
Navigator Andreyan Eselberg
Admiralty calker Alexei Klementev
Underskipper Nikita Khotyaintsov
Marine grenadier Ivan Tretyakov
Cannoneer, 2nd rank Prokofei Efintsov
Marine soldier Fedor Panov
Ensign Ivan Lagunov

Personal servants of the officers, two men

Altogether, with the Captain Commander, 31 men.6

Nov.
Nov.
Nov.

Dec.
Dec.

Dec.
Dec.

Jan.
Jan.

1741
1741
1741
1741
1741
1741
1741
1742
1742

Lieutenant SVEN WAXEL

5 His death not mentioned in the log book.

6 Waxel left out the name of the sailor Nikita Ovtsin, who died on November

19 (see log book).

CHARTER Vit

THE JOURNAL OF CHIRIKOV’S VESSEL, THE
sh, Bat olly

The second of the two vessels that started on June 4, 1741,
from Petropavlovsk on that eventful voyage was the St. Paul,
Captain Alexei Chirikov in command. The first-hand records
consist of a log book, a daily journal of the voyage, and Captain
Chirikov’s report to the Admiralty College in St. Petersburg.
Of the originals!in the Russian archives, a translation of the
journal is given in this chapter and of Captain Chirikov’s
report in the next chapter. It has not been deemed necessary
to publish the log book, as, other than routine navigational in-
formation, it contains nothing that is not reported even more
fully, in the journal and report. The log book has, however, been
used in plotting the track of the St. Paul (see p. 330, footnote I).

JouRNAL KEPT ON THE SHIP “ST. PAUL” IN COMMAND OF CAPTAIN
ALEXEI CHIRIKOV AT THE TIME IT MADE THE VOYAGE EAST
FROM THE KAMCHATKA HARBOR OF THE HOLY APOSTLES
PETER AND PAUL TO THE WESTERN COAST OF
AMERICA IN THE YEAR I74I

The reckoning begins from the landmark called Vaua at the mouth of
Avacha Bay, situated in latitude 52° 53’ north, longitude (according to the
observation taken recently by Professorof Astronomy Delisle de la Croyére)
127° 55’ from the meridian of St. Petersburg and 175° 55’ from the Peak of
Teneriffe Island. For our reckoning we take the meridian which runs
through Vaua as the first meridian. We reckon in knots, of which there
are sixty to the degree. After June 4 we marked on the chart our daily
position in latitude and longitude, the rhumb, and the distance from Vaua.

1 Log book: Archives of the Hydrographic Section of the Ministry of Marine,
Petrograd: 1741-43, Nos. 645-648. Another log book, under 1742, No. 1706.

Journal: Archives of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Papers of the Admiralty
College, 1743, No. 16.

Report: Archives of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Papers of Captain
Commander Bering, No. 44.

284 JOURNAL’ OF THE Si Rawies

June 4, 1741

From Vaua we sailed on the rhumb S50°E, distance 8.5 knots.

June 5, 1741

From Vaua rhumb S68°E.

Saw the St. Petey, Captain Commander Bering in command, on the
rhumb W by S, 5 knots distant. We fired a gun as a signal for the Cap-
tain Commander to come closer to us since the wind was such that we
could not go to him. From us it seemed that the course sailed was more
southerly than agreed upon. It had been decided by all the officers and
by Professor Delisle de la Croyére to sail SE by E true compass. That
same hour the Captain Commander acknowledged our signal by firing
a gun and stood straight for us.

Although Juan de Gama Land is an island, consequently not a part
of the American continent, yet we decided on the course we did because
our instructions called for an examination of the islands lying on the
way to America. It was agreed in case we failed to find land in lati-
tude 46° N, to sail steadily E by N until we met with success. If
on either of the courses SE by E or E by N we discovered. land it was
our plan to coast along it from east to north or north to west, depend-
ing on its position, but not to follow it up if it extended between south
and east. In that case we were to leave it and go east until we came
across [other] land and keep this in sight while likewise going norther-
ly, to latitude 65° or at least as far as, with the help of God, the time
would permit. If we reached latitude 65° in good time we planned to sail
due west to the Chukchi country and in this way determine the distance
between America and Asia and when that was accomplished to return
to this harbor. If on the above-mentioned rhumb we should run into
head winds then we agreed to keep as close to the rhumb as possible
until, with God’s help, we discovered land, which we would examine
according to the instructions of the Captain Commander. In planning
the voyage we had to keep in mind that we must return to this harbor
towards the end of September. Although we discussed the plan sug-
gested by the Admiralty College, before we left, of sailing (because the
distance was supposed to be short) across from the Chukchi land to
America, yet we did not do so because it was too early.

June 6, 1741

Latitude by observation 52° 02’ N; from Vaua, longitude 1° 57’ 3” E,
rhumb S54°30’E, distance 87.9 knots.?
2 As in the log book of the St. Peter, the positions refer to noon of the astronomical

day. For the difference between the civil and the astronomical date, see foot-
note 6, p. 50. In the journal of the St. Paul, however, the rhumb and distance

SEARCH FOR DE GAMA LAND 285

At 1:30 in the afternoon the Captain Commander, in answer to our
signal mentioned above, came close to our ship. Through the speaking
trumpet we told him that we signaled because he was on the rhumb
W by S, 5 knots distant, wind SW by W, and that we ought to keep
closer together. If we failed to do so we might become separated in
foggy weather and spend valuable time in looking for one another, for
we were on the course agreed upon and the wind fair.

The same day the Captain Commander signaled for one of our lieu-
tenants. Captain Chirikov requested that, unless it was an urgent matter,
the communication should be made through the speaking trumpet, for
to send a lieutenant necessitated the lowering of a boat and the loss of
time. It was replied (from the St. Peter) that if we had any communica-
tion of importance to make to the Captain Commander we should send
a lieutenant; if we had not we need not send him, and that this was all
they wished to tell us. After this the signal was taken down.

June 7, 1741

Latitude 50° 55’; from Vaua, longitude 4° 26’ 7”, rhumb S$54°21’E,
distance 201.4 knots.

June 8, 1741

Latitude 49° 52’; from Vaua, longitude 6° 49’, rhumb S54°41’E,
distance 313 knots.

At the fourth hour in the afternoon the Captain Commander signaled
for our ship to take the lead.

June 0, 1741

Latitude by observation 48° 42’; from Vaua, longitude 9° 09’ 6”,
rhumb S54°08’E, distance 428.4 knots.

June 10, 1741

Latitude by observation 47° 45’; from Vaua, longitude 10° 53’ 9”,
rhumb S$53°33’E, distance 518 knots.

At the fifth hour the St. Petey came near us, and we told them that at
night we would heave to in order to take soundings and when we did that
we would hang a lantern at the ensign staff and that they should keep
a lookout for it and not run into us.

from Vaua are reckoned differently from what they are in the log of the St. Peter.
The rhumb is expressed as direction within a quadrant instead of in points of the
compass, as there (footnote 2, p. 37); the distance, in knots, or nautical miles
(60 to a mean degree of latitude), instead of in German miles (15 to a degree).
Comparing the entries for June 6 and reducing them to a common term, we get:
(1) rhumb: St. Peter, SE by E 3° 30’ E, or, in azimuth, 120° 15’; St. Paul, S54° 30’E,
or 125° 30’; (2) distance, St. Peter, 2514 German miles, or tor knots; St. Paul,
87.9 knots. For the track of the St. Paul Pl. I should be consulted throughout.

286 JOURNAL OF “THE | *St- PAU

June II, 1741

Latitude 46° 58’; from Vaua, longitude 12° 38’ 8”, rhumb S$53°56’E,
603 knots.

At the sixth hour Captain Commander signaled to wait for him and
to do that we hove to. At 6:30 we talked over with him the latitude, the
longitude, and the distance from Vaua. Proceeded on our course. It
was understood that if in the nighttime we took soundings and got
bottom we should fire a gun and bring to.

June 12, 1741

Latitude by observation 46° 05’; from Vaua, longitude 13° 35’ 5”,
rhumb $52°20’E, distance 667.7 knots.

June 13, 1741

Latitude 46° 03’; from Vaua, longitude 14° 0’ 1”, rhumb S53° 02’E.
distance 682 knots.

At 3:30 in the afternoon we hove to while the St. Peter came up to
us. Lieutenant Waxel, through the speaking trumpet, announced that
according to the decision reached by the Captain Commander, the
officers, and the Professor of Astronomy, Delisle de la Croyére, it was
time to change the rhumb and to sail E by N by true compass. From
our ship it was replied that Captain Chirikov and his officers agreed to
this, since the observations made at noon [recorded under June 12] gave
our position as latitude 46° 05’ N, rhumb from Vaua S52°20’E. The con-
versation ended by all agreeing to sail E by N true compass. That same
hour we looked from the crosstrees for land between Sand W,also Sand E,
but saw no land. We filled our sailsand went on the rhumb agreed upon,

June 14, 1741

Latitude 46° 18’; from Vaua, longitude 14° 10’ 7”, rhumb S54°20’E,
distance 677 knots

June 15, 1741

Latitude 47° 41’; from Vaua, longitude 14° 23’ 4”, rhumb S60°26’E,
distance 632.3 knots.

June 16, 1741
Latitude 47° 55’; from Vaua, longitude 14° 39’ 1”, rhumb S61°58’E,
distance 634.1 knots.
At the beginning of the fourth hour in the afternoon we came about
and went on a port tack in order to get closer to the Captain Commander,
who was from us SE by S, about 3% (?) knots away. About the middle

SEPARATION OF THE TWO VESSELS 287

of the hour we shook out the first reef in the fore-topsail; at the end of
the hour we came about on a starboard tack.

At the end of the fifth hour we came up with the St. Peter. We lowered
the staysail, clewed up the foresail, and inquired through the speaking
trumpet how far north we should go in case this east wind held on and
whether a signal would be given us when it was time to put about. In
reply we were told that no changes would be made without a signal. At

‘the beginning of the eighth hour the Captain Commander came about
and so did we.

June 17, 1741

Latitude 48° 12’; from Vaua, longitude 15° 49’ 5”, rhumb S65°0’E,
distance 665 knots.

June 18, 1741

Latitude 48° 53’; from Vaua, longitude 17° 30’ 05”, rhumb S70°04’E,
distance 704 knots.

About the middle of the fifth hour in the morning a gun was fired from
the St. Peter as a signal for us to come up. We brought to, since we were
to the leeward; and in the meantime the St. Peter drew close to us, and
Master Khitrov, speaking through the trumpet, informed us that we were
now near 49° 0’ N, and that the place on the 46th parallel which lies
on the agreed course from Vaua is now SW from us; consequently we
should now come about on another tack. I replied that we should [not?]
come about with the wind as it stands because we are now sailing NE%E
true compass, which course is the same as E by N from the 46th parallel,
a difference of 2% rhumbs. If we came about on another tack we should
be sailing SSW12W, a difference of 1134 rhumbs, which would lead us
far away from our main course. Therefore I suggested that we proceed
on the course we are on, making use of the north and west winds, until
we had come at least as far as the 53rd parallel. No reply was made to
this. We filled our sails and went our way.

June 10, 1741

Latitude 49° 31’; from Vaua, longitude 18° 36’ 2”, rhumb S73°53’E,
distance 727.7 knots.

June 20, 1741
Latitude 48° 49’; from Vaua, longitude 17° 41’ 7”, rhumb S69°58’E,
distance 712 knots.
At the third hour in the morning the St. Peter was 10 knots distant; at
the fifth hour she began to disappear from sight.
The spot where we last saw the ship was to the north, latitude 48° 59’,
longitude from Vaua 18° o’, distance 10 knots.

288 JOURNALSOF THE Si. PAG

June 2r-L 740

Latitude by observation 48° 27’; from Vaua, longitude 17° 29’, rhumb
S68°10’E, distance 716 knots.

At the beginning of the ninth hour wind moderated; hoisted mainsail
and foresail and proceeded on our course; lowered main-staysail. The
signal code which the Captain Commander gave us said that in case we
parted we should look for one another at the place where we last saw
one another. I gave the order to steer as near as possible for that spot,
but this was difficult as it was NNE from us and the wind was dead
ahead.

JUNE 22 T7AL
Latitude 48° 06’; from Vaua, longitude 18° 37’ 8”, rhumb S67°59’E,
distance 765 knots.
June 23, 1741
Latitude 48° 15’; from Vaua, longitude 20° 20’ 3”, rhumb S70°15’E>
distance 823 knots.
At the fifth hour in the morning we gave up looking for the St. Peter
and with the assent of all the officers of the St. Paul we went on our way.

June 24, 1741

Latitude by observation 48° 03’; from Vaua, longitude 23° 14’, rhumb
$71°53’E, distance 933 knots.

June 25, 1741

Latitude 48° 22’; from Vaua, longitude 26° 24’ 2”, rhumb S74°54’E,
distance 1,040 knots.

June 26, 1741

Latitude by observation 48° 11’; from Vaua, longitude 29° 14’, rhumb
575°48’E, distance 1,149 knots.

At the beginning of the twelfth hour in the morning we thought we
sighted mountains between N and NE, and to make sure we steered NE
by compass.

June 27, 1741

Latitude 48° 34’; from Vaua, longitude 30° 52’ 4”, rhumb S77°32’E,
distance, I,200 knots.

At the end of the fourth hour in the afternoon we discovered that the
supposed mountains were clouds and therefore went back to the regular
course. ‘

June 28, 1741

Latitude 48° 59’; from Vaua, longitude 33° 0’ 5”, rhumb S79°24’E,
distance 1,269 knots.

EASTWARD COURSE 289

June 29, 1741

Latitude 49° 22’ 1”; from Vaua, longitude 34° 58’ 1”, rhumb S80°53’E,
distance 1,332 knots.
June 30, 1741
Latitude 49° 47’; from Vaua, longitude 37° 06’ 8”, rhumb S82°24’E,
distance 1,407 knots.
July 1, 1741
Latitude 50° 27’; from Vaua, longitude 40° 31’, rhumb S84°28’E,
distance 1,514 knots.
July 2, 1741
Latitude 50° 48’; from Vaua, longitude 42° 0’ 4”, rhumb S85°24’E,
distance 1,559 knots.
Jiulese eae
Latitude 50° 50’; from Vaua, longitude 42° 06’, rhumb S85°29’E,
distance 1,562 knots.
July 4, 1741
Latitude 51° 03’; from Vaua, longitude 42° 40’, rhumb S86°o1’E,
distance 1,584 knots.
July 5, 1741
Latitude 51° 32’; from Vaua, longitude 45° 12’ 8”, rhumb S87°I3’E,
distance 1,668 knots.
July 6, 1741
Latitude 51° 58’; from Vaua, longitude 47° 33’ 1”, rhumb S88°12’E,
distance 1,751 knots.
July 7, 1741

Latitude 52° 10’; from Vaua, longitude 48° 36’, rhumb S88°37’E,
distance 1,773 knots.

At the eighth hour in the evening we noticed considerable green-look-
ing vegetation afloat, which we thought was grass, and therefore we
brought to in order to take soundings. No bottom at 100 fathoms.

Examined the vegetation and learned that it was not (sea) grass but a
species found in thick water resembling a sea nettle which is washed ashore
in large quantities.

July 8, 1741
Latitude 52° 32’; from Vaua, longitude 48° 45’, rhumb S89°19’E,
distance 1,772 knots.
July 9, 1741

Latitude 52° 49’; from Vaua, longitude 49° 08’, rhumb S89°50’E,
distance 1,782 knots.

290 JOURNAL OF THE “ST. PAUL”

July 10, 1741
Latitude 53° 10’; from Vaua, longitude 51° 18’, rhumb N89°28’E,
distance 1,852 knots.

July 11, 1741

Latitude 53° 21’; from Vaua, longitude 52° 04’, rhumb N89°09’E,
distance 1,874 knots.
July 12, 1741
Latitude by observation 54° 27’; from Vaua, longitude 55° 16’, rhumb

N87°15’E, distance 1,959 knots.
Saw a shore duck today.

July 13, 2741
Latitude by observation 54° 41’; from Vaua, longitude 58° 03’ 5”

rhumb N86°59’E, distance 2,053 knots.
Saw a shore duck, a gull, and two old floating trees.

July 14, 1741

Latitude 55° 09’ 6”; from Vaua, longitude 60° 41’, rhumb N86°21’E,
distance 2,145 knots.

At the beginning of the first hour in the morning we noticed near the
ship three wide and long strips of very white water. We brought to and
took soundings, but no bottom at 100 fathoms. We drifted into the first
strip, which was about half a verst long and 200 fathoms wide, and later
into the other strips, which were smaller. The color of the water was
different, possibly owing to the movement of a school of fish; but we do
not know for certain the cause of it. As the night was dark and foggy
we were afraid of running ashore and therefore during the second and
third hours we sailed by the wind on the course W by N by the compass.

At the third hour in the morning we saw a large number of shore ducks,
gulls, a whale, porpoises, and three medium-sized pieces of driftwood
that had been in the water for some time.

July 15, 1741

Latitude 55° 36’ 3”; from Vaua, longitude 61° 51’, rhumb N85°42’E>
distance 2,178 knots.

At the beginning of the fourth hour in the morning [i.e., 3 A.m.] we
sighted land, took its bearings, and went by the wind ona left tack. Shook
out reef in fore-topsail. At the ninth hour took soundings and at 60
fathoms got bottom of gray sand. The parts of the shore which we saw to-
day are quite mountainous. Wetook a numberof soundingswithin three to
five knots from shore and got nowhere less than 60 fathoms, bottom gray

ge rarcerenenrretrrs Oo eee SSS ceaceaaenere i ace eee

log an ee i * porn s2 oe. jm an Nib o ay 28. eee
1052 Aawngribhe ie /

fe A

ae OR oF y phen a s2 7 fi dt

‘1878. MOY RAS :

epee Veau mplonas Se: 27, ghana 5S ae bee W
7 LEE LTIOR oe ce a7 elads ph. i

ae. os foci ve, Ole GE yony:

fs

eNWul oO EF OF pormnebnee

a,

we “C 27S,

Mamenceen

1B ae > HOF, yeaa tavad 5 gh 2. 58 3-5.) bald owen C
ae ae 2°53 Ainigiite, bing bax Fes Yip GE Ta
: hk pen TAG 44 ape rey re

a open see Od oh oA ‘6 plalt ened 0 WoL oe Ves

sp Ey iui eee Tare

2 PPPY ITER «
- en ilps bere CCM Pieziedy nee Shuster eee Don of bpd
. » it OAM dd H hstouhy Ae LY ¢ eta & déstys, (Che
i . toy bugeds al ’fee arg ee ©, boar trials igh bt
heal, Rees idee SOS Fa LIT LG SEN as whew chi, mr a i spl poliah
Ue Flesedte, A stile ch Ose foie eres fires, ere
— oe CE cre CH eet 2 lomert capse pelacs, “FO TT LOG ? Naw a
ie: Sere Zishote, , Re re 462 dace VAS ne Crit ING ELLs are ime.
ml. ornatt no _ Pex, Ou Sligtee Ludine b£e Be te Ath ERROR Peg
Gee Meenue gteds ee ee eater Dual € Mba ch seg oes ids
ee dinec NOEL zittuna. Cf Ranch. PTT 4 R BI se
Le ‘Yar Ser banihe Wt ba det renl h, G fol bn ey aes Ary bale tae
Gate ire Pe,

Co Se Sf
ee. ernseaif cy bea Mak Zee ¢ BG:
Wi2 Teratib, Filiber ot dee Ate htt fp stime LOuriong ;

ES des peebas |
3 ae po 1 piesa. 9g lbac NOthiug Xx ee / :
ey nnn $5: 363, ghunen Bsigyh « Cink 0 KE. 4 2 }30

4
tn

Sriadhio:r Na WtAam

wy

ae

adda’ 9479 Agi . f

| ORare At ten Phpriois Me a7. redyrees, rete php rcs td 105g
heal ee, Fe ens. See i Kathe cx rand, Leegada YR ert
eae:

fica ete Boe Sey alas SOs L ESS oe
ae Eek OFT ee F- a ye — <

ON wn

Box

Fic. 13—Facsimile of a page of the Sones & tne Ste (eau entries ae jute
10-14 and first part of July 15, 1741, the last recording the discovery of land (for
text, see opposite page).

DISCOVERY OF LAND: CAPE ADDINGTON 201

sand and in places small rocks. Many different kinds of ducks flew past
our ship.

At two in the morning we distinguished some very high mountains and,
as the light at the time was not very good, we brought to. An hour later
the land stood out much better and we could make out trees. This must
be America, judging by the latitude and the longitude, for we were at that
hour in latitude 55°21’ N and longitude from Vaua 61°55’. From this place
we took the following bearings according to the corrected compass: in the
south the land seemed to end in S36°19’E, distant about 30 knots; the
shore nearest to us had three projections in N72°41’E; the cape’ ending
in the north bore N19°41’E. From the third hour proceeded N34W 8
knots. At 5:30 in the morning the three projections were on the rhumb
S70°19’E; the cape which seemed to end in the north was on the rhumb
N34°41’E. We examined the newly discovered coast to the north; the
low cape was on the rhumb N39°22’E; at 8:30 in the morning the coast
seemed to end in N33°0’W.4

July 16, 1741

Latitude by observation 56° 15’; from Vaua, longitude 60° 57’ 2”,
rhumb N84°48’E, distance 2,140 knots.

At the fourth hour in the afternoon we lowered a boat and sent boat-
swain Trubitsin and eight men to the bay sighted an hour and a half ago.
When he reached there he had orders to take soundings and to examine
it to see whether it offered good anchorage and protection from the winds.
He was told to keep an eye on our ensign flagstaff and to listen for guns
signaling for him to return to the ship. At 6:30 in the afternoon we saw our
boat near the shore; we came about so as to get closer to it and hove to.

At the beginning of the eighth hour the boat came back and we took
it in tow and stood off. Trubitsin reported that he took soundings within
Co fathoms of the cape and got 40 fathoms and that the bay was unpro-
tected from south and west winds. He said also that he saw large fir,
spruce, and pine trees on the beach, many sea lions on the rocks, but no
sign of human beings or their habitations. At the seventh hour in the
morning there was an endless flight of large flocks of birds past the ship,
the same species that are found in Kamchatka and known as aru and
urili [murres and cormorants].

At noon we were from seven to three knots from shore, depth of water

3 Cape Addington. (Identifications in this and the next chapter by E. P. B.)

4 Coronation Island.—[The lack of chronological sequence in the entry under
July 15 may be due to the fact that the first paragraph is a general summary of the
events of the day, while the second paragraph takes them up in detail. To this
may also be due the seeming discrepancy in the hour when land was first sighted.
At 2 A. M. the mountain tops were first seen; at 3 A. M. the coast itself became
visible-—Enit. Nore.]

292 JOURNAL, OF THE. Si PAW

from 60 to 62 fathoms. Observed many ducks and gulls of different
species, also sea animals—whales, sea lions, and walrus.

At the ninth hour in the morning the cape to which Trubitsin was sent
bore S by EXE, distant three knots. About the middle of the hour
[ninth] we sighted on the rhumb E by S%E, distant six knots, three small
islets® close to one another and right up against the shore or very close
to it, for we could not see clearly because of the fog. At end of the tenth
hour land* loomed up through the fog on the rhumb N by E34E or
almost ENE, but the fog came down again and hid it. We took sound-
ings, no bottom. Proceeded on our course.

At noon’ we caught sight through the fog of a very mountainous land
on the rhumb N}4E, distant not more than three knots, which stretched
from NW%4W to SE% cr. We sailed parallel to it, keeping it on the east
from three to five knots.

July 17.1741

Latitude by observation 57° 39’; from Vaua, longitude 58° 54’ 2”,
rhumb N82°43’E, distance 2,059 knots.

About the middle of the sixth hour in the afternoon the fog began to
clear and we caught sight of the coast parallel to which we were running.
At the seventh hour we took soundings, depth 75 fathoms. At the tenth
hour in the morning lowered the boat for the purpose of sending it
ashore. From the first to the ninth hour in the afternoon we went
parallel to the shore, having it to the east of us about three or four knots
distant. The land was full of mountains, some covered with snow and all
with trees. At the eighth hour in the evening the coast seemed to end®
in N34E, distant 8 knots; and in its place appeared low land with sea
cliffs, with the high mountains receding in the background. At the ninth
hour in the morning the coast parallel to which we were sailing ended?
in NNWW, distant 30 knots. Behind us there was a cape!® in SE
by S%E, distant 45 knots.

At noon!" the cape which we saw at the ninth hour in NNW14W [sic],
distant 30 knots, is now on that same rhumb, distant 19 knots.

July 18, 1741

At 3:30 in the afternoon we went as close to the shore as we dared.
We sent the boat ashore in charge of Fleet Master Dementiev who had
with him ten armed men. He took with him a hand compass, a small
lead, two empty water casks, a grapnel, and a cable. He had written

5 Hazy Islands.

6 Cape Ommaney.

7 Close to Puffin Point, just north of Cape Ommaney.
8 The south shores of Sitka Sound.

9 Cape Cross.

10 Cape Edgecumbe.

4 At noon the St. Paul was off Cape Edward.

LANDING IN LISIANSKI STRAIT 293

orders; and among other things he was told to make for the opening ?
which seemed to us a bay and to take its bearings. The position of the
bay and other details relating to it are recorded in their places so that
it can be more easily identified.

At the eighth hour in the afternoon we sighted a low shore in N by
E34E, distant 7 knots, which stretched to SE and SE by E. The bear-
ings of the place into which the boat was sent we did not see.

At the beginning of the fifth hour in the afternoon the second mountain,
behind which is another broad mountain covered with snow, isin NE34E;
the bay into which the boat was ordered bears NNE34E, distant 5
knots. There is still cnother mountain with a sharp peak, somewhat
crooked on the right side; and, when you look at it, it is in ENE™%E;
opposite, or a little south of it, is a small island or a piece of rather low
land covered with medium-sized trees. North of this island and opposite
the bay were seen in places projections of bare rocks.

At the end of the day we saw high snow-covered mountains extending
to the northward and ending in NW by N.

According to the reckoning at 4:30 in the afternoon, taking into con-
sideration the bearing of the bay, we set down the position of the bay
into which the boat was sent as latitude 57° 23’ N, longitude from Vaua
59° 36’, distance 2,059 knots, rhuinb N82°28’E; by correction the lati-
tude is 57° 50’, longitude 58°54’.

From this place we again started a new reckoning, because for some
time after July 17 we beat up and down the bay so as not to get too far
from it; but the strong winds and tides carried us out 20, 30, and more
knots.

July 10,1741

At the third hour in the afternoon took the bearings cf a round, forested
volcano; below it was a low, thick, dark green forest on a white cliff in
NE%E; the white cliff was distant about 6 knots. Another volcano to
the left of it and smaller was in NE by N'%E, some distance from shore;
a high bare cape covered with a clump of high trees in SSE™%E, distant
12 knots.

At the middle of the fifth hour in the afternoon we saw a mountain in
NE by NXE, distant 30 knots, another in NNE34E, distant 32 knots;
after this we saw no more land to the north beyond the high mountain
which is in N%4W, distant 30 knots; then the mountain was N by W34W,
distant 40 knots. From this hour we observed lower ground through the
cape in E by S%4E, opposite which we supposed our boat had gone into
the bay.

12 The St. Paul was off Lisianski Strait.

294 JOURNAL OF THE Sie PAUL,

At the eighth hour in the afternoon we saw a high bare cape which at
the third hour bore SSE%E, distant 12 knots; now it bears SE by S%E,
I5 knots.

At the fourth hour in the morning we saw that the small far-away cape
which at the eighth hour bore SE by S%4E now bears SE}4E, distant 25
knots; the mountain which at the fifth hour bore N by E44E, 24 knots,
is now NE34E, 12 knots. Now the mountains extend N4W.

July 20, 1741
During the twenty-four hours the wind shifted about; it was foggy,
cloudy, rainy. The heavy wind and rain carried us away from the place
where the boat had gone and from which it had not yet returned.

July 21, 1741
Boat has not yet returned. We worked hard to come closer to the
place to which it had gone.

July 22, 1741
No boat. We went near the place into which it had been ordered.

July 23, 1741

From about the first hour in the afternoon we kept parallel to the
coast and, according to our opinion, close to the place where the boat
went; but owing to the heavy fog we could not identify the landmarks.

At the second hour we thought we were opposite the exact spot where
the boat was, and to summon it we fired two guns. Depth of water 70,
75, and 80 fathoms; bottom of sand and large rocks.

At the fourth hour the fog lifted a little and we noticed smoke on the
beach E by N%4E, 5 knots, and we supposed that it was made by our
men because during all the time that we followed the shore we saw no
human habitations, no boats, and no fires. Took soundings and got
80 fathoms.

At the seventh hour wind very light, and the air clear from fog, and
the landmarks of the place into which the boat was sent stood out. The
fire burned in the very place into which the boat went, and we took it
for granted that it was kept up by our men, and we fired seven times
at intervals as a signal for them to come out; but no boat appeared,
although the weather was fair. We noticed, however, that after we sig-
nalled the fire on the beach grew bigger.

At the tenth hour in the evening we hung out a lantern at the ensign
staff so that the boat might see us if it came out.

Midnight. The fire on the beach bore ENE4E.

At the ninth hour in the morning no fire on shore; half hour later a
little smoke in ENE34E, and then it again became invisible.

FAILURE OF PARTIES TO RETURN 295

At the eleventh hour a walrus swam past the ship. At the middle of
the twelfth hour lowered the small boat for the purpose of sending it
ashore to help the men in the large boat.

Noon. The place into which the boat was sent bore ENEM%E, 9
knots.

No boat, although we sailed close up to the place into which it went.

July 24, 1741

The weather was fair enough for a considerable length of time for the
boat to come out; since it did not appear we concluded that it must be
damaged and could not. All the officers, higher and lower, were of the
opinion (which they put in writing) that it was necessary to find out
what was the matter with the boat and for that purpose to send, while
the sea was quiet, the small boat with a carpenter and a calker with the
necessary tools to repair the boat, as well as provisions, since those
ashore had only enough for a week. Boatswain Sidor Savelev volun-
teered to take the mechanics ashore, and the sailor Sidor Fadiev, who
expressed a desire to go along, was detailed to accompany them. The
carpenter's name was Nariazhev Polkovnikov and the calker’s was
Gorin. They left at one o’clock in the afternoon, and we, having a
light wind, followed them to shore. The boatswain had orders that as
soon as he landed he should build a fire to notify us of his arrival and to
signal the condition of the men and the boat. He was ordered to leave
ashore the carpenter and the calker to repair the boat, but he himself
was to return without delay to the ship with Dementiev and as many
others as he could accommodate. We sailed up quite close to the land,
on which a heavy sea was running, so that we had difficuity in getting
away, for the sails made little headway against the sea. We saw the
boatswain near the shore in the sixth hour of the afternoon; but he made
no signals and, although the weather was fair, did not come back.

In the fifth hour we brought to in order to wait for the two boats; we
watched for signals but in vain; we took soundings and got 65 fathoms
and a bottom of big rocks. For two or three versts from shore the
water was 70, 65, and 60 fathoms, and the bottom bad. Many rocks
were seen both under and above water on which the surf was playing.
For these reasons we could not anchor.

At the seventh hour we came about and moved away from shore
because we had no signals from the boatswain and the men.

At the ninth hour we steered for the shore to watch for signals. Half
an hour later we were so close to shore that we could see the rocks and
the surf playing on them, but no signals. Because it was night we decided
to go a little farther from land. The place where the two boats went
bore NE34E, 3 knots. We fired a gun as a summons to the men ashore;
at the time there was hardly any wind, the ship was making almost no

296 JOURNAL OF THE Sr) PAUE:

headway, and those ashore had the weather in their favor for coming
out. As we fired from our cannon we thought we saw some one on shore
shooting a gun, but we heard no noise. We observed also a fire on the
beach as if in answer to us. We fired another gun.

At the ninth hour in the evening we observed fire on the beach. Took
soundings, 66 fathoms; very little wind. We hung out two lanterns, one
at the ensign staff and the other at the gaff. The fire on the beach
appeared and disappeared by turns.

At the first hour in the afternoon we saw the fire.

At the third hour we fired guns to summon the boats.

At the fourth hour we fired guns.

At the tenth, eleventh, and twelfth hours we tacked close to the place
into which the boats had gone. Our position is latitude 57° 51’ N.

July 25;:1741

Latitude by observation 57° 50’ 6”; from Vaua, longitude 57° 10’ 2”,
rhumb N82°35’E, distance 2,007 knots.

First hour. We noticed two boats rowing from the bay into which our
boats had gone; one of them was large, and the other small. We naturally
thought they were our boats, and we stood towards them. There was
very little wind stirring, and I ordered that the sails be taken in and the
shrouds tightened[?]. When the small boat drew close to us we became
aware that it was not our boat, for it had a sharp bow, and that those in
it did not row with oars but paddled. The boat did not, however, come
near enough so that we could see the faces of those in it. All that we did
see was that it contained four persons, one at the stern and the others at
the paddle. One of them had on clothes of red material. Being that far
away they stood up and shouted twice “Agai, Agai,” waved their hands,
and turned back toshore. I commanded my men to wave white kerchiefs
and to invite those in the boat to come to our ship. Many of my men did
that but it did no good; the boat proceeded on its way to shore. We
could not pursue them because in the first place we had no wind, in the
second place the small boat went very fast, and the large one had stopped
a considerable distance from us. They continued to pull away and
finally disappeared in the bay from which they had come. We then be-
came convinced that some misfortune had happened to our men,!“¢ for it
was the eighth day since the Fleet Master had left; during that period
there was plenty of fine weather for returning, and we had sailed quite
close to the place, and yet he did not appear. Since the boatswain had
gone we had not been away from the place, the weather had been fair,
and if a misfortune had not overtaken them they would have returned.
The fact that the Americans did not dare to approach our ship leads us
to believe that they have either killed or detained our men. We re-

124 See note on p. 311.

SPART ON RETURN VOYAGE 297

mained close to the place until evening, hoping that our boats would
come out. Towards evening, however, we had to keep away from shore
because of the danger.

At the fourth hour in the afternoon we came about and steered for
shore where we observed a fire, also two boats which came out and,
after keeping close to land, put back and disappeared. This is the last
of boats and signals that we saw, except on the spot where we formerly
observed fire we now had smoke.

Ninth hour in the afternoon. Because of the night we took a reef in
the topsails. There were neither signals nor fires on shore. We hung out
a lantern on the ensign staff so that, if, against all hope, our boats should
come, they could find us.

This day we began again our reckoning. The bay into which the boats
were sent is in latitude 57° 50’ N, longitude 58° 54’.

July 26, 1741
Latitude by observation 58° 21’ 5”; from Vaua, longitude 57° 7’,
rhumb N80°42’E, distance 1,954 knots.
At the fourth hour in the afternoon we saw large quantities of grass,
the kind that grows near the beach.
At noon we saw high, snow-covered mountains!’ on the land ending in
the north, bearing N34E, 40 knots.

July 27, 174%

Latitude by observation 58° 37’ 3”; from Vaua, longitude 54° 11’ 4”,
rhumb N80°23’E, distance 1,862 knots.

At the first hour in the afternoon Captain Chirikov, Lieutenants
Chikhachev and Vrange, Navigators Michael Plautin and Elagin came
to the following decision, which they put in writing: Owing to the fact
that there were no small boats by the help of which the shore could be
examined and water brought aboard (of which there were only 45 casks
left) it would be better to go straight to the Harbor of St. Peter and St.
Paul, in Avacha Bay in eastern Kamchatka.

Ninth hour. Wind strong; cloudy, rainy. Ordered the crew to catch
the rain water from the sails for drinking purposes, for even before this
the men made use of it without being obliged to do so, and no harm
came to them. Considering the distance we were from port the amount
of water on hand was far too little, and therefore I commanded that it
should be rationed out to the crew.

July 28, 1741

Latitude by observation 58° 54’; from Vaua, longitude 52° 57’, rhumb
N78°47’E, distance 1,815 knots.

13 Mt. Fairweather:

298 JOURNAL OF THE “ST. PAUL”

July 20, 1741
Latitude 59° 05’ 6”; from Vaua, longitude 51° 38’ 4”, rhumb N77°52’E,
distance 1,773 knots.
During the day we saw many shore ducks and gulls, which indicated
that there is land not far from us to the north; but owing to the fog and
the gloomy weather it could not be seen.

July 30, 1741

Latitude 58° 25’; from Vaua, longitude 47° 32’, rhumb N78°19’E,
distance 1,640 knots.

Saw one shore duck.

July 31, 1741

Latitude 58° 38’ 7”; from Vaua, longitude 45° 52’, rhumb N77°24’E,
distance 1,587 knots.

During the day we saw many shore ducks and gulls, a little sea cabbage,
water of greenish color—all of which go to show that land is not far from
us to the north. The reason we did not see it was due either to the
atmosphere or to the lowness of the shore.

August I, 1741

Latitude by observation 58° 46’; from Vaua, longitude 45° 21’, rhumb
N76°58’E, distance 1,565 knots.

At the fifth hour sighted land in N by W, 30 knots; it ended NNW
about 18 knots. A walrus dived near the ship.

At noon land ended’ in WNW4W, 50 knots; northern ending
N by E%E, about 30 knots; middle of it NNW%W, 20 knots. There
were high, snow-covered mountains on the land. During the day flocks
of shore ducks and gulls were seen on the wing.

August 2, 1741
Latitude 58° 24’; from Vaua, longitude 45° 12’, rhumb N77°47’E,
distance 1,564 knots.
At noon the Jand in the west seemed to end in W, 65 knots, with high,
snow-covered mountains.'® Saw flying ducks and gulls.

August 3, 1741

Latitude by observation 57° 37’; from Vaua, longitude 44° 49’, rhumb
N79°29’E, distance 1,556 knots.

During the day many flocks of gulls flew over us, also red-billed ducks
and another species with white bellies and white under wings. Sand-
pipers (kuliki) came on board, sea animals swam alongside of us.

14 Cape Elizabeth, the southwestern end of Kenai Peninsula.
15 Probably northern end of Afognak Island, with Mt. Douglas back of it on the
mainland.

LANDFALLS: KENAI AND KODIAK 299

August 4, 1741
Latitude 57° 10’; from Vaua, longitude 45° 07’, rhumb N80°34’E,

distance 1,575 knots.

Saw many whales.

August 5, 1741

Latitude 56° 49’ 4"; from Vaua, longitude 43° 41’, rhumb N81°05’E,
distance 1,525 knots.

Numerous flocks of birds were in the air, the color of the water was not
altogether like the sea, and therefore we concluded that land must be
near, hidden by the fog.

August 6, 1741

Latitude 56° 32’ 4”; from Vaua, longitude 44° 15’, rhumb N81°s1’E,
distance 1,542 knots.

Did not see land.

August 7, 1741
Latitude 56° 31’ 4”; from Vaua, longitude 44° 20’, rhumb N81°5s’E,
distance 1,533 knots.
August 8, 1741
Latitude 55° 57’ 7”; from Vaua, longitude 44° 32’, rhumb N83°13’E,
distance 1,564 knots.
August 0, 1741
Latitude 55° o1’ 7”; from Vaua, longitude 44° 03’, rhumb N85° 15’E,
distance 1,554 knots.
August 10, 1741
Latitude by observation 54° o1’; from Vaua, longitude 42° 21’, rhumb
N87°20’E, distance 1,513 knots.

August II, 1741

Latitude 53° 20’; from Vaua, longitude 41° 25’, rhumb N88°s8’E,
distance 1,492 knots.
Saw many whales near the ship and in the distance.

August 12, 1741

Latitude 53° 08’; from Vaua, longitude 40° 52’, rhumb from N89°25’E,
distance 1,475 knots.
Saw many whales near the ship and in the distance.

August I3, 1741
Latitude 53° 16’; from Vaua, longitude 40° 23’, rhumb N89°06’E, dis-
tance 1,450 knots.

300 JOURNAL OF THE “Si; (PAUiEs

August 14, 1741
Latitude 52° 32’ 4”; from Vaua, longitude 39° 30’, rhumb S89°11’E,
distance 1,436 knots.
August 15, 1741

Latitude 52° 24’; from Vaua, longitude 38° 37’, rhumb S88°49’E,
distance 1,418 knots.
Saw one shore duck—the kind that iives on the rocks.

August 16, 1741

Latitude 52° 31’; from Vaua, longitude 38° 43’, rhumb S89°06’E,
distance 1,408 knots.

Saw three shore gulls, which looked like sea terns, and one fur seal
that dived near the ship.

August 17, 1741

Latitude 53° 10’; from Vaua, longitude 37° 56’, rhumb N89°17’E,
distance 1,369 knots.
Saw one large shore duck.

August 18, 1741

Latitude by observation 52° 30’; from Vaua, longitude 37° 32’ 4”,
rhumb S89°02’E, distance 1,363 knots.

August 19, 1741
Latitude 52° 15’; from Vaua, longitude 36° 39’ 1”, rhumb S88° 22’E,
distance 1,337 knots.
August 20, 1741

Latitude 52° o1’; from Vaua, longitude 35° 43’, rhumb S87°43’E,
distance 1,306 knots.
Saw one shore duck and one fur seal which dived near the ship.

August 21, 1741

Latitude 51° 35’; from Vaua, longitude 34° 50’, rhumb S86°31’E,
distance 1,284 knots.
Saw two shore gulls.

August 22, 1741

Latitude 52°16’, from Vaua, longitude 34° 42’, rhumb S88°20’E, dis-
tance 1,266 knots.
Saw one large shore gull and a large root of sea cabbage.

WESTWARD COURSE 301

August 23, 1741
Latitude 52°15’; from Vaua, longitude 34° 23’, rhumb S88°16’E, dis-
tance 1,254 knots.
Saw a shore duck and floating grass.

August 24, 1741
Latitude 52° 23’ 6”; from Vaua, longitude 33° 42’, rhumb S89°21’E,
distance 1,228 knots.
Saw floating green grass—the kind that grows near shore.

August 25, 1741
Latitude 52° 0’; from Vaua, longitude 34° 20’, rhumb S87°35’E, dis-
tance 1,256 knots.
Saw plenty of floating grass near the ship.

August 26, 1741
Latitude 51° 58’; from Vaua, longitude 34° 26’, rhumb S87°30’E,
distance 1,260 knots.
August 27, 1741
Latitude 52° 03’; from Vaua, longitude 34° 33’ 2”, rhumb S87°45’E,
distance 1,263 knots.
August 28, 1741
Latitude 51° 48’; from Vaua, longitude 34° 15’, rhumb S87°02’E, dis-
tance 1,256 knots.
Saw about ten white shore gulls.

August 20, 1741
Latitude 52° 05’ 9”; from Vaua, longitude 33° 55°, rhumb S87°50’E,
distance 1,239 knots.
August 30, 1741
Latitude by observation 52° 21’; from Vaua, longitude 33° 52’, rhumb
$88°31’E, distance 1,233 knots.

August 31, 1741
Latitude 52° 36’; from Vaua, longitude 31° 18’, rhumb S89°09’E,
distance 1,138 knots.
An old, somewhat dried-up tree floated past us; we saw also one red-
billed duck
September I, 1741
Latitude 52° 52’; from Vaua, longitude 26° 39’, rhumb E, distance
965.3 knots.

302 JOURNAL, OF CHE YSTs PAUiEs

September 2, 1741

Latitude 52° 47’ 5”; from Vaua, longitude 23° 44’, rhumb S— —E,
distance 860.3 knots.
September 3, 1741

Latitude 52° 21’ 5”; from Vaua, longitude 23° 18’, rhumb S87°53’E,
distance 849 knots.
September 4, 1741

Latitude by observation 52° 23’; from Vaua, longitude 21° 10’, rhumb
S88°19’E, distance 770 knots.

At the beginning of the seventh hour in the morning we sighted land
ahead of us and a little to the left, but owing to the mist we could not
observe it carefully. At noon the land'* which we sighted at the seventh
hour appears now NE by N, 4o knots, N by E!4E, 30 knots; mountains
(not very high) in NNW, 25 knots; high land, on which there are several
high peaks, in NNW34W, 25 knots; a large round, snow-covered
volcano NW by N34W;; the land ends W by N34W, distant about 50
knots. Sailed past a dead whale on which were many sea birds called
fulmars.!?

September 5, 1741

Latitude by observation 51° 53’; from Vaua, longitude 19° 55’, rhumb
S85°22’E, distance 730.4 knots.

September 6, 1741
Latitude 51° 29’; from Vaua, longitude 18° 58’, rhumb S83°08’E,
distance 702.5 knots.
September 7, 1741
Latitude 51° 23’; from Vaua, longitude 16° 29’, rhumb S81°34’E,

distance 613.7 knots.
September 8, 1741

Latitude .51° 36’: from Vaua, longitude 12° 20’, rhumb -Sso 72h,
distance 459.4 knots.

From six in the morning until noon we saw floating sea cabbage, also
many shore ducks and gulls flying.

September 9, 1741

Latitude by observation 51° 40’; from Vaua, longitude 11° 28’ 5”,
rhumb S79°39’F, distance 429 knots.

At the ninth hour in the evening paid out 75 fathoms of cable. Took
soundings, 25 fathoms; bottom fine gray sand. Heard the breaking of

16 Islands of Four Mountains.
17 Procellaria glacialis glupischa Stejneger

MEETING WITH NATIVES ON ADAK 303

the surf on the beach to the SW, but owing to the mist we could not see
the land.

At the ninth hour in the morning the fog lifted a bit, and we saw the
shore!8 about 200 fathoms away. High, snow-covered mountains and
tall green grass were seen, but no trees. In places cliffs came down to
the very sea, and close to the shore were many rocks above and below
the water. We caught sight of two men walking through the grass across
the hills from north to south. They were close to a high hill out of which
ran a small stream. It was evident that they had caught sight of us
and came a little nearer so as to have a good look at our ship. We called
to them in Russian and in Kamchadal that they should come to us.
At the end of the hour we heard people shouting to us from the shore
in the direction SSW, but we could not see them and owing to the surf
could not make out their words. We replied, through the speaking
trumpet and without it, asking them to come out to us.

At the tenth hour in the morning seven small boats, one man in each,
were seen rowing towards us. Each of these boats was about I5 feet
long, 3 feet wide, the bow very sharp, the stern somewhat rounded and
blunt, and the whole covered with hair seal and sea lion skins. The
deck was roundish and, like the sides, was sewed with some kind of
skins except one spot between the center and the stern, where there
was a round hole in which the man sat. He was dressed in a kind of
shirt which covered his head and his arms and was made from the
intestines of a whale or some other animal. There was something outside
the hole that resembled leather breeching and which tied around the
man. Some of these breechings were not tied, and we could see that
there were rocks in the boats. They have light double paddles, made of
birch wood, with which they paddle on both sides; and, as far as we
could make out, the men were quite fearless in the water. They were
not deterred by any kind of waves or seas and went through the water
at a rapid rate. When they came within 50 fathoms of the ship they
began to shout, turning first to one side and then to the other, not in
the manner as if they wished to speak but as the Yakuts and Tungus do
in their incantations. From this act we concluded that the people before
us were doing the same thing and were praying that no harm might come
to them from us. Whether this is the true explanation of their behavior
or not I cannot tell. After they had carried on like this about seven or
eight minutes they began to converse with one another in the usual tone
of voice. While they were doing this we looked pleasant, bowed to them,
and waved our hands as an invitation for them to come nearer our ship;
but they did not quite dare to do so. They made a gesture with their
hands as if drawing a bow, which showed that they were afraid we might

is Adak Island.

304, JOURNAL OF THE “ST. PAUL”

attack them. To the best of our ability we tried to convince them that
they had nothing to fear from us. We pressed our hands to our hearts
as a sign that we would receive them in a friendly manner. To convince
them still more I threw them a Chinese cup as a mark of friendship.
One of the men picked it up and after examining it made a gesture as if
to indicate that he had no use for it. He was about to throw it back to
the ship when we bowed and motioned for him to keep it, but he threw
it into the water. I ordered that two pieces of damask should be tied to
a board and thrown into the water near the ship. They picked it up
and after handling it for a little while threw it away. I then gave the
order to bring up the different things we had to give as presents—small
boxes, small bells, needles, Chinese tobacco, pipes—and, holding them
up, I invited them to come near. During this time I had few men on
deck but had them concealed below with their guns loaded in case of
danger. In spite of our efforts we could not convince them of our good
will if they came close to the ship. It was only after we made them
understand that we were out of water and had nothing to drink and
that we looked to them for help that one of them dared approach us.
We gave him Chinese tobacco and a pipe which he took and placed on
the deck of his boat. When the others saw this they, too, became bold
and paddled up. We distributed among them boxes, bells, needles, all
of which they received rather indifferently as if not knowing what to do
with them. They did not even know that needles would sink and did
not make any effort to keep them out of the water, for among the
presents we gave them some of the needles fell into the water, and
instead of saving them they merely watched them go down. Among
them we noticed several who raised one hand to their mouth and with
the other hand made a quick motion as if cutting something near the
mouth. This gave us the idea that they wanted knives, because the
Kamchadals and the other peoples of this region when they eat meat or
anything of that kind cut it at the mouth. I ordered that a knife should
be given them, and when they saw it they were overjoyed and seized it
from one another and with great eagerness begged for more. We then
invited as many of them as would to come aboard so that we might
show them friendly attentions and persuade some of them to accom-
pany us, as the instructions of the Captain Commander required. Not
being able to understand one another, we not only failed to persuade
them to go with us but even to coax one of them to come on board so
that we might show them how friendly we really were. We gave them a
small barrel in which to bring us water from the shore. They understood
what we meant, but they would not take the barrel and showed us that
they had bladders for that purpose. Three of them paddled towards
the beach and returned with water. When they came alongside one of
them held up a bladder and indicated that he wished to have a knife in

‘siveds 9403s

OY} AOF Y}VoOYS “7T sSivods Jo spury JUoIOYIP “Y :sivods pure spysppipg BuLyeu AJOJ S}USUINASUI ‘] !MOIIe pue MO ‘FT !YoIWs Burmosyy

oY} Jo suvour Aq UMOIY} ST Teods oy} Moy ‘4 !Syos Inoqure} ‘yf !sulouep UI posn Anoquie} ‘sf ‘yey UspOOM ‘q fau0q peqieq YIM
poddi reods & puvy io] Sty UT spfoy ‘9 !yoNSs Surmosy} & puey FYB sty ur sppoy ‘g ‘eyseyeuy, jo ueur ‘y Kay fo uotjnUni gx y

‘IOMOT ‘ZI “Sly SB VOINOS OWS WOT ‘“eyxS

eaunarenrn ee ycers ‘

Pjeuy) WoOIJ UeUT JNoTY UY—TI ‘DIY
rerate se paepeper: Ye ds LORE yi hios wee as Lema pee

4 oe oaae et cc manne tis cna ES A “a

Pepe fea
TC ygedinane gepeed grb WA
nave Cae purypwhdisd I8f yy
3 twengdeioa) ne HH
wh D

*S]ISUOJN UIPOOM ‘FT {so9ATUy uoIT ‘5 foauoq Jo yno apeul suoods ‘yf fauep Ady} USYA posn yJoq ‘q !dovjs SeAT}eU 9Y} YOTYM

uo jeu sseis ‘q $JoOYseq sseis ‘gy {puNois oY} Ul SUIBSIp 10J JUOMIMAYSUI Ue ‘g Seyseyeuy) JO UPIOM oAT}eU ‘YW /ay fo UolDUDnigxy
‘IOMOT ‘ZI “STW Se

dINOS OWLS WON] ‘VYSeTLU|, WoOIJ ULTIOM JNoTYy UY :143R “eysepeuy, “Ny sArjyeu Jo SMOIA OpIs}noO pue opIsUy :}JoT—SI “OIA

won
crt

.

[ : t sounragdr® veh oie Ff
s. gig wb on 1B i tryupsssor ‘yitrov !
rerenie ing tao rugregyd eth fous:
e eae wt Yd
on feud ochyou fmuppudut upon Vek

ye rey oe eunsedpnt a .
: _ fepems when, Bro dof 10H(2,
peri a fs
: ¢,

OC, WAR hy 3 weoles ont wuyrhdeswou Gi.
: | Garten pyre rarvav enh ppoditso: F |

;

(ssc Ca RRL cRNRU NNN NURIA ETAT eT age meme anammannnte I70

~orerreiol errr hehiatmumatvrrvteebicetrry-aedtnan ain ves A oS aN UPS RRS Fo MESSE “HN NR AR Spa OR sere mao RR a RR Rene SSAA Som . SST

WESTWARD AGAIN 305

payment. This was given him; but, instead of handing over the bladder,
he passed it to the second man, who also demanded a knife. When he
got it he passed the bladder to the third man, who equally insisted on a
knife. This act, as well as some other things they did, proves that their
conscience is not highly developed.

These men seem to be of fair size and resemble the Tatars. They are
pale and seemingly healthy. Almost all of them were beardless, whether
naturally so or because they had plucked out the hair it is hard to tell;
only two or three of them had anything like beards. They stuff roots into
their noses which causes them to bleed. Some of these roots they were
eating and gave us a few for the same purpose. In order to determine
what these roots are we brought them along. In return for their gift
we made them a present of sea biscuits. They brought us some kind of
mineral wrapped in sea weeds. Aside from arrows, of which we secured
four, there was nothing on board their boats. They wear on their
heads a kind of hat made of thin birch boards, which are decorated with
various colors and feathers. Some of these dippers (hats) had in the
top small ivory statues. We secured one of these dippers by giving in
trade a dull axe, which they received gladly. Asa mark of friendship we
offered them a copper kettle, which they kept for a little while and then
handed back.

When they had been near the ship for a considerable time they re-
turned to the shore. In the afternoon we were visited by fourteen of
these boats, one man in each, among whom were a number who had been
with us before noon. When they neared the ship they made the same
kind of noise as before. Although they spent three or four hours along-
side and we talked a great deal, yet we do not know anything they said,
and we could not persuade one of them to come aboard. They would
have remained near us even longer if I had not ordered that signs should
be made to them to go ashore. I did this because the wind began to
rise, making it possible for us to get out of the bay into which we had
unintentionally entered. After much difficulty and the loss of an anchor
we finally, with God’s help, got out.

September 10, 1741

Latitude 51° 12’; from Vaua, longitude 11° 54’ 6”, rhumb S77°04’E,
distance 451 knots.

At the sixth hour in the afternoon there was a very light offshore
breeze, but we could see from the way the clouds were being driven east-
ward that beyond the mountains there was a west wind.

By the eighth hour the wind freshened a little. We began to heave in
the cable and had already 35 fathoms aboard when all of a sudden a
squall from the mountains struck us. The anchor began to drag. We
hoisted the topsails and foresail. The tide was setting towards the north,

306 JOURNAL OF THE “ST. PAUL”

forcing us on the land, which was about 300 fathoms to the east. Fear-
ing that we might be driven ashore and dashed on the submerged rocks
farther to the west we cut the cable (35 fathoms of which we had already
heaved in) of the spare small bower anchor at the hawsehole, crowded on
all sails and stood out to sea in a SE direction, and after great difficulty
and great danger succeeded.

September 11, 1741
Latitude 50° 52’; from Vaua, longitude 11° 45’ 8”, rhumb §74°28’E,
distance 451.8 knots.
September 12, 1741

Latitude by observation 51° 12’; from Vaua, longitude 10° 52’ 3”,
rhumb $75°59’E, distance 414 knots.

September 13, 1741

Latitude 51° or’; from Vaua, longitude 10° 05’ 9”, rhumb S73°18’E,
distance 389.7 knots.
Saw a considerable quantity of floating weeds near the ship.

September 14, 1741

Latitude 50° 31’; from Vaua, longitude 8° 19’ 0”, rhumb S65°22’E,
distance 341.5 knots.
Saw a shore cormorant on the wing.

September 15, 1741

Latitude 51° o1’; from Vaua, longitude 6° 27’ 9”, rhumb S64°53’E,
distance 264 knots.
September 16, 1741

Latitude 51° 54’; from Vaua, longitude 5° 26’ 5”, rhumb S73°30’E,
distance 207.7 knots.

Captain Chirikov, Lieutenant Chikhachev, and the members of the
crew are very ill, owing to the lack of water and the long and hard sea
voyage. They are no longer able to work. One of the strongest, the sail-
maker Michael Usachev, died of scurvy, and we lowered the body into
the sea. All during the day we saw sea cabbage and floating grass, the
kind that grows near the shore; the color of the water was green, unlike
the color of sea water.

September 17, 1741

Latitude 51° 30’; from Vaua, longitude 5° 17’ 9”, rhumb S66°>561E,
distance 209.5 knots.

This day we saw the same kind of sea cabbage, grass, and water as the
day before.

LANDFALL: AGATTU ISLAND 307

September 18, 1741

Latitude by observation 52° 33’; from Vaua, longitude 4° 44’ 8”,
rhumb S83°20’E, distance 172.5 knots.
Saw the same kind of sea cabbage, grass, and green water.

September 10, 1741

Latitude 52° 37’; from Vaua, longitude 4° 36’ 8”, rhumb S83°12’E,
distance 167.5 knots.

September 20, 1741

Latitude 52° 36’; from Vaua, longitude 4° 17’, rhumb S83°46’E, dis-
tance 156.6 knots.

September 21, 1741

Matitudess2> 355 from Vaua, longitude 3° 20’ 57, rhumb Sé1°sr’ FE,
distance 127 knots.

At the eighth hour we saw a small fish near the ship, took soundings,
and got 60 fathoms. No land in sight, but for the sake of safety we put
about.

At the tenth hour in the morning we saw land straight ahead of us,
which did not look like Kamchatka. We came about on a 1ight tack and
went parallelto theshore onthe east, distant about4knots. Atnoontheland
was still in sight, extending from WSW,, 8 knots,!9 to NW4W, 6 knots.
Until 12:30 the southern half of the land seemed level, and the northern
half mountainous; but the mountains were neither high nor snow-cov-
ered. A small island?° loomed up in N by W/W, to knots. Ina bay
situated between the above-mentioned land in NW'%4W and NE by N
high, snow-covered mountains were seen.?!

September 22, 1741

Latitude 52° 07’; from Vaua, longitude 2° 34’ 3”, rhumb S63°54’E,
distance 104.5 knots.

At the sixth hour in the afternoon the cape which at noon bore WSW,
8 knots, bears now NE by N34E, 12 knots, and the other cape, the
western one, bears N by W, 6 knots; between them the shore is low and
level; the low, snowless mountains, which at noon seemed to stretch
from south to north, and the high, snow-covered mountains in the bay
bear NW by W4W, 15 knots; and the land which we sighted yesterday
in N by W is now N, distant about 15 knots.

Today we saw two otters asleep in the water.

19 This was the southeastern point of Agattu Island.
20 One of the Semichi Islands.
21 The high land of Attu.

308 JOURNAL OF THE “ST. PAUL”

September 23, 1741
Latitude 51° 48’; from Vaua, longitude 3° 10’ 4”, rhumb S54°52’E,
distance 112.9 knots.
September 24, 1741
Latitude 51° 50’; from Vaua, longitude 1° 59’ 1”, rhumb S49°06’E,
distance 96.2 knots.
September 25, 1741
Latitude 51° 27’; from Vaua, longitude 1° 03’ 1” E, rhumb §31°10’E,
distance 100.5 knots.
September 26, 1741

Latitude 52° 16’; from Vaua, longitude 0° 6’ 13” W,”2 rhumb S5°45’W,
distance 46.8 knots.

Assistant Constable Osip Kachikov died of scurvy and we lowered the
body into the sea. Captain Chirikov, Lieutenants Chikhachev and
Plautin, and six of the crew are very ill with scurvy; all the others are so
weak from long sickness, hard work, and lack of water that they can
barely come on deck and do their work. We have not more than seven
barrels of water on board.

September 27, 1741

Latitude 51° 44’; from Vaua, longitude 0° 38’ 27” E, rhumb S18°44’E,
distance 72.9 knots.

Captain Chirikov, Lieutenants Chikhachev and Plautin, Professor of
Astronomy Delisle de la Croyére, and twelve members of the crew are
very sick with scurvy; and the others are weak and get about with great
difficulty. We have only six small barrels of water, and the daily need is
five cups per person. We no longer cook kasha.8

22 All the longitudes ought, of course, to be E, as the whole voyage lay to the
eastward of Vaua. That their calculations from now on gave W longitudes (the
E positions of September 27 and 28 were temporary setbacks because of head winds)
made the officers of the St. Paul aware of the error in the ship’s position: the total
error in longitude amounted to 11° 39’ (see footnote 14, p. 322). The distances,
rhumbs, and longitudes become intelligible when referred to the assumed position
of Vaua, which was about in 170° 30’ E of Greenwich (and 52° 53’ N).

In his report (Chapter VIII, p. 322) Chirikov discusses this matter of error in
longitude and its cause. He correctly ascribes it to lack of a known point at the
farther end of his journey wherewith to check his observations. He also correctly
infers that the currents are partially responsible; he made attempts to determine
this element but was not able to. It is precisely in the adjustment to known posi-
tions through the identification of landfalls and in the allowance made for currents
that lies the value of such modern reconstructions of Bering and Chirikov’s tracks
as is afforded by Pl.I. It is interesting to compare this chart with the reproduction
of the original chart of the navigators accompanying Sokolov’s memoir in Zapiski
Hydrogr. Depart., Vol. 9, St. Petersburg, 1851 (copied on Lauridsen’s “Vitus Bering,”
1889, Map III.)—Enpit. Note.

23 Buckwheat mush.

WESTWARD ON THE LAST STRETCH 309

September 28, 1741

Latitude 51° 17’; from Vaua, longitude 0° 50’ 37” E, rhumb S17°52’E,
distance 101 knots.

September 20, 1741

Latitude 52° 11’; from Vaua, longitude 0° 21’ 53” W, rhumb S17°18’/W,
distance 44 knots.

September 30, 1741

Latitude 51° 55’; from Vaua, longitude 1° 02’ 53” W, rhumb S33°19’W,
distance 69.4 knots.

At the ninth hour in the morning we had a heavy storm with squalls,
hail, and snow. We furled the mainsail, lowered the main yards and
fore yards, and hove to under the mizzen. The waves threw up on deck
a small fish called stickleback (khakhalcha), which is not more than 2%
inches long.

October I, 1741

Latitude 51° 28’; from Vaua, longitude 0° 32' 33” (?) W, rhumb
$13°22’W, distance 87.4 knots.

Heavy sea running; rain, snow, and cold.

October 2, 1741

Latitude 51° 46’; from Vaua, longitude 2° 19’ 6” W, rhumb S51°50’W,
distance 108.4 knots.

October 3, 1741

Latitude 51° 58’; from Vaua, longitude 3° 48’ W, rhumb S68°34’W,
distance 150.5 knots.

October 4, 1741

Latitude by observation 52° 56’; from Vaua, longitude 5° 31’ 4” W
rhumb N89°08’W, distance 199.9 knots.

At the second hour in the afternoon we had a heavy rain, and the
crew had a chance to satisfy their thirst and to catch seven buckets of
water in addition.

October 5, 1741

Latitude 52° 33’; from Vaua, longitude 6° 48’ 4” W, rhumb S85°23’W,
distance 248.4 knots.

At the ninth hour in the morning topsail wind, heavy snow, and very
cold. The men were so weak that they suffered much at their work.

October 6, 1741

Latitude 52° 29’; from Vaua, longitude 6° 41’ 7° W, rhumb S84°22’W,
distance 244.5 knots.

310 JOURNAL, OF) THE Si. Avice

October 7, 1741

Latitude 53° 12’; from Vaua, longitude 9° 32’ W, rhumb N86°54’W,
distance 352 knots.

At the fifth hour in the afternoon Vasili Nizhegorodok of Yakutsk, the
servant of Lieutenant Plautin, died of scurvy, and we lowered the
body into the sea. At end of the tenth hour Lieutenant Chikhachev died
of scurvy.

October 8, 1741

Latitude 52° 37’; from Vaua, longitude 11° 04’ 1” W, rhumb S85°o07’W,
distance 399.4 knots.

Navigator Vrange and Lieutenant Michael Plautin died of scurvy in
the third hour of the afternoon. At the seventh hour in the morning we
sighted land—high, snow-covered mountains. According to our opinion
and according to the position of the land it must be the shore running
north from Isopa to Vaua.*4 Owing, however, to the mist we could not
see very distinctly.

At noon we were certain that the land in sight was Shipunski Cape
bearing NNE34ZE; Avacha, or Burning, Volcano bore NW by N34W,
Vilyuchensk Volcano W by N34W;; the land ended to the S and SW by
W; Vaua could not be seen owing to the mist.

October 0, 1741

Latitude 52° 57’; from Vaua, longitude 11° 39’ 4” W, rhumb N89°27’W,
distance 422 knots.

At the sixth hour we sighted Vaua; but, owing to the head wind and the
coming on of night, we could not enter the bay and therefore put out to
sea. At noon the wind was very light, and the fog cleared a bit, and
Vaua stood out, bearing according to compass W by N, distant about Io
knots.

October 10, 1741

At the fifth hour in the afternoon the wind from N increased a little,
and we sailed WNW into the mouth of the bay.

At the eighth hour noticed a light on Vaua lighthouse.

At the ninth hour we safely passed Vaua and entered the mouth of
Avacha Bay, where we anchored in seven fathoms.

At the seventh hour we fired five guns as a signal for small boats to
come out.

At the ninth hour Ensign Levashev came out and told us that Captain
Commander Bering on the St. Peter had not yet returned, that the galliot
Okhotsk, in command of Assistant Navigator Andrei Sheganov, had

°4Tt was not the coast south of Vaua but north of it that was sighted, as was
soon realized, as the first sentence of the next paragraph shows.

RETURN TO PETROPAVLOVSK 311

come from Okhotsk bringing 1,500 poods of provisions, that Captain
Spanberg with five ships had reached Bolsheretsk from Okhotsk on his
way to Japan.

Professor of Astronomy Delisle de la Croyére died of scurvy at ten
o’clock.

At noon Captain Chirikov was taken ashore in a very sick condition.

October 12, 1741

Brought the ship around into the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul for
the winter and began to discharge cargo.

NOTE ON THE Loss OF CHIRIKOV’S MEN

The loss of Chirikov’s men is the most dramatic incident of the voyage of the St. Paul.
The question naturally arises, What was their fate? Has any account of this episode been
handed down in the traditions of the Indian tribes of the region? This question was sub-
mitted to a number of authorities on the ethnology of the Pacific Coast. Noneof them
had heard of any such tradition. Among previous investigators, Professor George David-
son, to judge by a footnote on p. 20 of his “The Tracks and Landfalls of Bering and Chirikof
on the Northwest Coast of America,” San Francisco, 1901, made an attempt in I90I to
ascertain the traditions of the Tlingits through the medium of two members of the Alaska
Commercial Company. It is not known that any information was secured.

One of the ethnologists consulted, Lieutenant George T. Emmons, whose study of a
similar first contact between a Pacific Coast tribe and white men (The Meeting between
La Pérouse and the Tlingit, Amer. Anthropologist, Vol. 13, I91I, Dp. 294-298), together
with his long labors among the Tlingits, makes him peculiarly well equipped to deal with
this question, has likewise, during thirty years’ investigation among the coast tribes,
never been able to learn anything of the loss of Chirikov’s men. However, in the com-
munication that he kindly sends, he suggests that Chirikov’s two boats may have been
swamped in the strong tidal rips that occur at the mouths of such narrow fiord arms as
Lisianski Strait, especially if they entered with the strength of a flood tide. That this
might easily happen to small boats is evidenced by the fact that today even powerful
steamers, as he states, enter Peril Strait, a similar passage somewhat farther south, only
at slack water. The assumption that the boats were swamped and their occupants
drowned would seem to be borne out by the fact that two native canoes put off from shore
and approached the St. Paul. If the Russians had landed and if, in spite of Chirikov’s
admonitions to his men, there had been a fight, the natives, after this first experience
of firearms, even if they had overpowered the landing parties, would certainly not have
exposed themselves to the greater risk of facing the main body of the Russians. The fact
that they approached the ship would rather prove their innocence. Also, the similarity
of their call of “agai,” as reported by Chirikov, to the Tlingit “agou,” which means “come
here,” would seem to imply friendly intentions. In most later instances the first meetings
of natives of this coast with Europeans, before the Russians commenced to appropriate
their hunting grounds, says Lieutenant Emmons in conclusion, were friendly; indeed,
the Tlingits were rather ready to trade.

The only suggestion of a tradition among the coast tribes that might shed light on the
loss of Chirikov’s men is contained in a recently published book, “The Story of Sitka, The
Historic Outpost of the Northwest Coast, The Chief Factory of the Russian American
Company,” by C. L. Andrews, Seattle, 1922. The relevant passages (pp. 9-10) follow.
The author assumes the locality of the tragedy to be Sitka Sound.

“Nearly two centuries have passed since the Russian seamen landed and no word has
come from them. For more than seventy years the Russian Government sought for some
sign of their fate.* Tales were told of a colony of Russians existing on the coast, but each
upon investigation proved but a rumor.

“There is a dim tradition among the Sitkas of men being lured ashore in the long ago.
They say that Chief Annahootz, the predecessor of the chief of that name who was a
firm friend of the whites at Sitka in 1878, was the leading actor in the tragedy. Annahootz
dressed himself in the skin of a bear and played along the beach. So skillfully did he simu-
late the sinuous motions of the animal that the Russians in the excitement of the chase
plunged into the woods in pursuit and there the savage warriors killed them to a man,
leaving none to tell the story. The disappearance of Chirikof’s men has remained one of
the many unsolved mysteries of the Northland, and their fate will never be known to a
certainty.”—EpIT. NOTE.

* “January 20th, 1820, a letter written by the Directory at St. Petersburg to Chief
Manager Muravief at Sitka enclosing instructions previously given to Hagemeister, in-
structing him to find the descendants of Chirikof’s lost men, urging that it must be done
and expressing surprise that it had been neglected thus long. (Russian American [Com-
Ree coves: [State Department, Washington, D. C.,] Correspondence, Vol. 2,

oO. 108).

CHAPTER Vir

CHIRIKOV’S REPORT ON THE VOYAGE
OF THE “ST, PAUL”

Captain Chirikov’s report on the voyage of the St. Paul,
together with a supplementary report in which he expresses his
readiness to continue the explorations, with their respective
enclosures, translated from the originals! in the Russian archives,
reads as follows.

To THE IMPERIAL ADMIRALTY COLLEGE, A REPORT

On May 4, 1741, Captain Commander Bering, I, Captain Chirikov,
Lieutenant Chikhachev, Navigator Vrange, Fleet Lieutenants Sven
Waxel and Plautin, Professor of Astronomy Louis Delisle de la Croyére,
Fleet Master Sofron Khitrov, Acting Fleet Master Avraam Dementiev,
and Navigators Andreyan Eselberg and Ivan Elagin met to hear the
written instructions given to Captain Commander Bering by the Im-
perial Admiralty College, especially Articles 9, 10, and 17, and Article 6
of the general order of the ruling Senate,? which was with the said in-
structions. After reading them we all agreed that, according to the in-
structions, to find the American coast we should sail at first, after
leaving this harbor, SE by E by true compass and keep on this
rhumb to the 46th parallel of north latitude unless we sooner found
land, for, on the map of Professor Delisle de la Croyére, Juan de Gama
Land was located on the 47th parallel of latitude and right on our course.
We believed that it was a part of America because, on the general charts,
land is indicated all the way from California to Juan de Gama Land,
and this indication is also on the map of Professor Delisle de la Croyére.

Although Juan de Gama Land is represented as anisland,consequently
not a part of the American continent, yet we decided on the course we
did because our instructions called for an examination of the islands
lying on the way to America. It was agreed that in case land was not
found in the latitude just mentioned we should sail steadily E by N

1 Archives of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Papers of Captain Commander
Bering, No. 44.

2The instructions of the Admiralty College to Bering are not given in the
Peed work, but the orders of the Senate are. Article 6 will be found in Chapter

7 Da30-

SEARCH FOR DE GAMA LAND 313

until we met with success. If land was discovered either on the course
SE by E or E by N, we determined to coast alongside of it from east to
north or north to west, depending on its position, but not to follow it
up if it stretched between south and east. In the latter case, we were
to leave it and sail east until we sighted [other] land and when found
to keep it in view likewise while going northerly, to the 65th parallel
or at least as far as, God willing, time would permit. If we reached the
65th parallel in good season we planned to sail due west to the Chukchi
country and determine the distance between America and Asia and when
we had done that to steer for this port. If head winds should prevent
us from keeping on the above-mentioned rhumb, we agreed to keep as
close to it as possible until with God’s help we discovered land and exam-
ined it in accordance with the instructions of the Captain Commander.
In planning the voyage we had to keep in mind that we were to be back
in this harbor towards the end of September. Although we discussed
the suggestion of the Admiralty College, made before we left St. Peters-
burg, to go first to the Chukchi country and from there towards America
(for the distance must be short), we did not act upon it because the season
was too early and there was too much ice in the neighborhood of the
Chukchi land, which is situated near latitude 65° N.

Therefore we ccncluded to follow the course first mentioned, and on
May 29 we sailed out ot the Harbor ot St. Peter and St. Paul [Petropav-
lovsk] and anchored in the roadstead of Avacha Bay and there remained,
on account of head winds, until June 4, when the wind died down and
we put out to sea and kept the course agreed upon for Juan de Gama
Land. By June 12 we had come as far as the 46th parallel without
finding the said land, and it became quite evident that it did not exist,
since we had sailed over the region where it was supposed to be. On June
13 we changed the course in order to find America and sailed E by N,
or as near to it as the winds permitted. On June 20 because of the con-
tinuous fogs, which are common in this region, and the stormy winds
(which obliged us to heave to under the mizzensail) the Captain Com-
mander and I became separated. During this bad weather I searched
for him as long a time as he allowed for such a purpose but without
success. From this time on I did not again see his ship and was, there-
fore, compelled to continue the voyage alone on the course laid out.

On July 15 (having, from the mouth of Avacha Bay, where we had put
up a lighthouse named Vaua, come east 61° 51’ of longitude, according
to our reckoning, distance on the rhumb E by N 6° 57’ E, 2,178 knots or
Italian miles, or 3,793 Russian versts, counting 104% versts to a degree
—in returning we made 73° 30" of longitude, distance on the rhumb E by
N 7° 38’ E, 2,589 knots, or 4,509 Russian versts—) we discovered land
[Cape Addington] in latitude 55° 36’ north [noon position]. This land
was without doubt the American coast, because, according to the map

214 REPORT ON VOYAGE OF THE “ST 2PAUia

of the Nuremberg geographer Johann Baptist Homann and others, we
were not far from parts of America that are well known. To illustrate
this point more clearly we have joined (on the chart which is being sent
to the Admiralty College) our discoveries with the American coast as
it appears on the map of Homann and Professor Delisle de la Croyére,
namely the northern part of California, the mouth of the Moozemleck
River,? a portion of the interior of the eastern part of Hudson Strait.
The longitude of Kamchatka, as given on the chart, is referred to
Teneriffe Island and St. Petersburg as calculated by Professor Delisle
de la Croyére.

When we stood near the land on the above-noted date we looked about
for anchorage in order to make our observations as we were instructed.
We approached within three versts of the shore and even nearer in some
places, sounding as we went along, but found no good anchorage, for
the depth was about 70 fathoms or more. The coast is irregular and
mountainous; these mountains had a fine growth of timber and in
places were covered with snow. In the journal and on the general chart
may be seen the lay of the land, for we paralleled it. Not finding a good
anchorage I sent the quartermaster Grigori Trubitsin with eight men in
the longboat into a bay to ascertain whether it could be entered, the kind
of anchorage, and the depth of the water. He did as he was told and
returned in four hours and made a written report to the effect that he
had been within 60 fathoms of the shore opposite the bay, where he found
4o fathoms of water and gravelly, sandy bottom. There was shelter
from north and east winds, but no protection from west and south winds.
It offered anchorage for only a small boat. The width of the bay from
the cape to the shore is son 2where from 4 to 5 versts. In going by the
cape we noticed on the rocks many sea lions. On the mountains were
large trees of fir and pine. Human habitation we did not see. On July
16, at eight o’clock in the evening, we took the longboat aboard, because
there was no good place to anchor; and, for more safety, we steered away
from shore for the night. About five in the morning, the wind being fair,
we came about and sailed north on the same rhumb on which we last
saw land [Cape Ommaney] in the north the night before. At ten o'clock
in the morning we came within a half verst of it. At the time it was quite
foggy, and in order not to get too close we paralleled it, keeping between
north and west. It was my intention to make a careful survey of a part
of the American coast, but my plans were ruined by the misfortune of
July 18. On that day we were in the 58th degree, and I noticed that the
mountains had more snow on them than those we had passed. Evidently
we were going into colder country, where it is more difficult to make ob-
servations than in warmer. With this idea in mind I ordered, my officers

3QOn Homann’s map (1712?) this river falls into the Gulf of California.

LANDING IN LISIANSKI STRAIT 315

agreeing, the acting fleet master Avraam Dementiev with ten armed men
to take the yawl and examine the bay. It was then in the fourth hour. I
followed them with the ship, with the purpose of anchoring when I was
near the bay into which they entered. Much to our disappointment we
found no place to anchor; everywhere the shore is broken up, and the
mountains come right down to the water’s edge; and, as is usual in such
cases, the water is deep, which on sounding we found to be true, as may
be seen in the officers’ journals.

We approached within two versts of the bay, sounding as we went
along, but got nowhere less than 65 fathoms. Almost everywhere the
bottom was gravelly, and in many places rocks were seen above and
below water. For these reasons we did not anchor but hove to and
tacked in front of the bay, the bearings of which we took. Before he set
out I handed Dementiev a copy of the instructions which had been
given to us to display in public. He read it over several times. I gave
him also the following order which was signed by me:

You are put in command of the longboat and ten armed men, one copper cannon
and two rockets; and you are to go ashore and do the following things.

(1) When you come near enough to the shore, make a landing if possible;
if not, come back to the ship and for our information fire two guns. (2) If with
God’s help you get ashore, look about for human beings; if you find them, be
gentle with them and present them with a few small presents with which the ensign
Choglokov will provide you, namely a copper and an iron kettle, two hundred
beads, three packages of Chinese tobacco, one piece of nankeen, one piece of damask,
five rattles [?], and a paper of needles. From me you will receive ten-ruble pieces
which you may distribute among the inhabitants as you think best. Among other
questions ask them, in case the Koriak interpreter who goes with you can enter
into conversation with them (for it is not likely that any other language but his
will be of any help), what kind of land this is and under what government they
are; and ask some of them to come aboard our ship. (3) See whether there is
a safe place for a ship to come in and anchor for a time, take soundings, and make
a sketch map of the harbor, even if it is only rough. (4) Note the kind of trees
and grasses on shore. (5) Examine the rocks and the soil to see whether they
contain precious minerals; in order to help you a piece of silver ore is given you to
take along and if you find something like it bring it aboard. (6) Ask the natives
in what direction the land extends, whether it has any rivers that flow into the
sea, and where they are; and obtain such other informationasyou can. (7) Ifthe
inhabitants should act in an unfriendly manner and make it unsafe to remain,
return to the ship as quickly as you can; but do them no harm nor allow your men
to do so. (8) Make every effort to carry out quickly the above instructions so
that you may return to the ship the same day or at least not later than the next
day. If thick weather should set in, making it impossible to see the ship, you had
better not come out. If stormy weather should come on, delay your departure
and, with that in view, take with you provisions enough to last your company a
week. (9) As soon as you land signal to us with a rocket and when you embark
let off another one. While ashore keep up a big fire, especially at night, if you think

216 REPORT ON VOYAGE OF THE Si PAUiEg

we are likely to see the flame, or the smoke in the day time. (10) When you are
within a verst of the shore begin sounding to ascertain the depth and the kind of
bottom. (11) Fill with fresh water the two barrels which are being sent with
you. In all things conduct yourself as a true and good servant of Her Imperial
Majesty.

We had no signal of any kind from him. We saw them approach
the shore, and that is all. Hoping that he would come out, we kept under
sail for five days and as near the bay as we dared.

At first the weather was such that the longboat could have come
without any trouble; later we had heavy rains, fog, and strong winds
which carried us from the said bay a distance of about 30 knots. On
July 23 we returned and went up quite close to the bay and there saw
a fire which we thought was made by our men. During all the time that
we had followed the coast we had seen no fire, no buildings, no boats,
nor any other signs of human beings and therefore supposed that the
country was uninhabited. When we observed the flame we fired a gun
at intervals as a signal to the boat to come out; but no boat came,
although the weather was fair for that purpose and we sailed quite close
to the shore. As we fired the blaze on the beach grew bigger.

On July 24 we concluded that it was quite probable that the boat was
damaged and could not come out. With this idea in mind all the officers
consulted and decided (in writing) to send ashore the small boat with
the carpenter, the calker, and the necessary tools to repair the longboat.
Boatswain Sidor Savelev volunteered to accompany them, and the sailor
Fadiev was asked to go and help row because he had expressed a desire
to doso. These are the instructions (a copy of which is enclosed’) which
were given to the boatswain. On reaching shore and finding the boat
in need of repairs he was to leave the carpenter and calker; and he, with
Dementiev and three or four of the men, was to return to the ship without
delay. When he departed the weather was very still; we followed him
quite close to shore and saw him approach it. According to our time
it was exactly six o’clock in the afternoon. The signals which had been
agreed upon he failed to make and at the expected time did not return.
The weather was fair. Next day, July 25, at one o’clock in the afternoon
we sighted coming out of the bay into which we had sent our men two
boats, one small and the other larger, and we concluded that they must
be our boats returning. We went to meet them; as we drew near we
noticed that they were not our boats, because their bows were sharp
and the men did not row as we do but paddled. They did not come
near enough for us to make out their faces; all we saw was that there
were four menin one boat; one man stood at the stern and three paddled.
One of them wore something red. We saw them stand up, motion with

4 See below, p. 323.

LOSS OF FIFTEEN MEN 27,

their hands, and heard them call twice, “Agai, Agai”; and then they
turned about and paddled for the shore. I ordered white kerchiefs to be
waved as an invitation for them to board our ship. This was done by
a number of our men, but it did no good; the people in the boats paid
no attention, proceeded shoreward, and entered the bay out of which
they had come. We could not follow them because in the first place there
was little wind and in the second place the small boat was fast and the
larger one had not come very near us. We became convinced that some
misfortune had happened to our men.44 Dementiev had been gone eight
days, and during that time the weather was fair for returning and we
stood close by. From the time that the boatswain left us we had hardly
moved, and the weather was quiet. Surely something must have hap-
pened to them; otherwise they would have come. The action of the
natives, their fear to come close to us, made us suspect that they had
either killed our men or held them. We stood near the place the rest
of the day; in the evening we kept offshore a bit but had a lantern at the
stern so that in case our men came out they would see us.

The next morning at eleven we came about and coasted along the shore
between north and west. By the end of July 26, we had come to latitude
58° 21’ N and longitude from Vaua, according to our reckoning as we
went along, 54° 11’.5 At this place and on July 27 we discussed whether we
should still keep up the search. We had no small boat and therefore
no means of sending a party ashore or bringing water and provisions on
board. According to our reckoning in coming over we were nearly 2,000
knots from the Harbor of St. Peter and St. Paul, and we had no idea
what kind of wind we should have. We had 45 casks of water, hardly
enough for such a distance; we did not know whether they were full
or partly empty (later it proved that we were seven short). Having
taken all these circumstances into consideration, we—that is, I, Lieuten-
ant Chikhachev, Navigator Vrange, Fleet Lieutenant Plautin, and
Navigator Ivan Elagin—agreed not to continue on our course [not to
follow the coast] but to start back at once for the Harbor of St. Peter
and St. Paul. I enclose an accurate copy of our decision. At the time
we realized that it was too soon for going back and, had it not been
for our misfortunes, we should not have done so. Altogether we saw
about 400 versts of the [American] coast.

Having decided, we put about and sailed for this harbor. On the
way we had contrary winds from northwest and southwest almost con-
tinuously. We unexpectedly ran into some land [Adak Island] which
was on our course and nearly lost the ship and all on board. We saw
whales, sea lions, walruses, porpoises, birds, many white-backed ducks,

5 According to the journal (Chapter VII, p. 207) the latitude is that of July 26

but the longitude that of July 27.
6 See below, p. 324. 4@ See note on p. 3ITI.

218 REPORT ON VOYAGE OF THE si, PAWiEe

also another kind with a red crooked biil, and many different kinds of
gulls. All along the coast the mountains are high, the shore steep, and
the water deep.

The mountains along the shore which we first sighted were covered
with growths of good-sized trees; some of the mountains had snow on
them, increasing in quantity the farther north we went. From the
place we turned back we could see in N34E very high snow-covered
mountains [Mt. Fairweather], far higher than any in Kamchatka. On
August I, at five in the afternoon, we sighted land in NW}4W [SW end of
Kenai Peninsula], about 30 knots distant, and towards the end of the day
we took bearings of it. On this land there was a chain of snow-covered
mountains, and we were of the opinion that this was a continuation of
the land from which we had turned back a few days before, because
in the interval we saw birds, gulls, ducks, also floating grass which grows
along the shore. These we did not see on our outward voyage, when we
were a considerable distance from land, except during two or three days
when we ran into a little floating grass and observed one bird a day (not
counting gray gulls and another kind of small bird that looks like the
kestrel of the steppes,’ which we always saw far out). On account of
this we kept a little south of the regular course and the fair wind. Begin-
ning with July 31 the color of the water was different from what it is
far out at sea, but we saw no land on that day, probably because of the
fog. On August I and 2 we caught sight of it and at the end of the day
took its bearings. On August 4 and 5 we took soundings and got bottom
between 43 and go fathoms. Many birds flew about, and the color of
the water indicated that we were near land; but we did not see it. Dur-
ing the night of August 6 we came to a bank where the water was only 30
fathoms and the bottom sandy and rocky, and we were therefore obliged
to come about and go on an easterly course. The land which we sighted
on August I is marked on the chart alongside of the date, and our daily
positions are also indicated there. The winds were contrary, and the
fresh water was decreasing.

On August 1 I consulted with the officers and with their consent gave
the order that the crew should have cooked kasha* once a day for two
days and twice on the third day, and of drinking water no more than is
necessary to quench the thirst. As to the officers, they were to have
one cooked meal a day. When it rained the crew set buckets and other

7 According to Pallas, pustolga is the Russian name for the kestrel (Falco tinnun-
culus), which is common enough on the Russian steppes but does not occur in eastern
Asia or in Alaska. The bird seen by Chirikov must therefore be another species
of small hawk or falcon, possibly Circus hudsonius, or more likely Falco columbarius,
the typical form of which has been recorded from the Prince William Sound region by
Grinnell (Univ. of California Publs. in Zool., Vol. 5, 1910, p. 387) while the dark form
(Falco c. suckleyi) prevails between Sitka and northern California. (L. Stejneger.)

8 A buckwheat mush.

WESTWARD ALONG ALASKAN COAST 319

vessels to catch the water from the sails; and, although it was bitterish
and tasted of tar, yet the men drank it gladly and said that it was good
for the health and that the tar bitterness cured them of scurvy. In order
that the men might not become too weak from lack of sufficient food I
ordered that on those days when they had kasha just once they should
be given (this did not apply to the officers and their servants) a cup of
wine in addition to the usual allowance. As the head winds continued
and the supply of water ran short without any hope of our getting more,
the distance from the harbor being still considerable, I ordered that the
crew should have kasha only every other day. The men took it in the
right spirit, and on the days when they had no kasha they lived on
biscuit and butter. On those days when additional food was allowed
they had salt meat cooked in sea water. After September 14 the crew
had cooked kasha but once a week, and on the other six days they lived
on cold food. It was understood that if any one wished to use his allow-
ance of drinking water for cooking his biscuit he might do so, but this
would be the only warm food he would receive. These privations began
to tell; many of the men came down with scurvy, and both officers and
crew did their work under great difficulties. Some of the men were so
feeble that they could not even come on deck. I began to fear that
the worst might happen and therefore ordered that after September 14
the members of the crew should have daily two cups of wine and the petty
officers one above the usual allowance.

About seven in the morning of September 4 we sighted land [Islands
of Four Mountains], and at the end of the day we took the bearings
of it. The reckoning on our returning voyage gave latitude 52° 23’ N,
longitude from Vaua 32° 49’, distance on the rhumb E by S 9°48’E,
1,186 knots,® or 2,065)4 Russian versts. The land was full of mountains,
the highest of which was covered with snow. At eight o’clock we came
about to get away from the land and sailed on a course between S and W
so that after we got by it we could continue on our regular course. On
September 8 we had many indications of the nearness of land, namely
birds and floating grass, and on that account between seven in the even-
ing and seven in the morning we kept one or two points more to the south
than usual, and after that we sailed on the regular course for a short time.
At nine o’clock the fog set in and the signs of land were still plentiful,
and I was again obliged to sail one point south of our regular course, or
west by true compass. At the end of the seventh hour in the evening
the wind, by God’s mercy, suddenly moderated. We took soundings and
found bottom at 50 fathoms.

While we made ready to anchor the sea carried us into 30 fathoms
and sandy bottom, and there we let go the small bower anchor and

9 These are the corrected longitude and distance. The journal for September 4
(see p. 302) gives: longitude, 21° 10’, distance 770 knois.

320 REPORT ‘ON VOYAGE OF THE “si 4-PAuie

paid out a half cable. At the bow there was 28 fathoms and at the stern
24. We heard the breaking of the surf on the rocks, but the heavy
fog hid everything from sight. Towards nine in the morning, when it
cleared a bit, we saw land to the west [Adak Island], about 200 fathoms
away. The high mountains on it were bare of trees but covered with grass.
The beach was irregular, the eastern part seemed lower and about 300
fathoms away. Near the shore, on both sides, there were many rocks
above and below the water, and we could see the surf breaking over them.
To the north no land was seen.

As we examined the shore we caught sight of two men walking along
the beach. We shouted to them in Russian and in the Kamchadal
language to come aboard; a little later we heard human voices calling
to us, but the breaking of the surf made so much noise that we could not
make out what was said. Through the speaking trumpet and without
it we again invited them to come. At ten o'clock seven men in seven
small skin boats came near us and, after looking on for some time, went
back to shore. In the afternoon (September 9) fourteen of these skin
boats, one man in each, paddled up to our ship, and from them we secured
one of the hats they wore (which was made of birch wood) and four
arrows. They also gave us, wrapped up in seaweeds, some kind of mineral
which I think is antimony (or stibnite), which I have sent to Bolsheretsk
Post to be assayed by the assayer Gardebol; but up to this time I have
not heard from him. They also gave us the roots of a grass with which
they stuff their noses, and a few of these roots we brought with us for
exhibition. As to how they came, their kind of boats, their dealings with
us, and other such matters are written up in the journal.

At the eighth hour in the evening of September 10, the wind began to
blow from the west, and, trusting to God’s help, we attempted to get
away from where we stood before it was too late. We started to heave
in but while doing this drifted easterly to within 300 fathoms of the shore
and wete in danger of being blown on it. I feared also that there might
be submerged rocks on the west. I, therefore, ordered to cut the cable
(34 fathoms of which was still out) at the hawse hole, to put on all sail,
and to goSE. This was done with God’s help, but it was a narrow escape,
for a strong wind blew off the mountains and from all directions.

The place where we were at anchor is in latitude 51° 40’N, distant from
Vaua, reckoning from our returning point on the rhumb E by S 6°20’E,
852 knots,!° or 1,484 Russian versts. After we cleared the land we
proceeded to sail a little more westerly than our laid-out course, but the
head winds greatly hindered us.

_ On September 21, at eight in the evening, we noticed a small fish close
tothe ship. Wetook soundings and got 60fathoms. We let the ship drift

10 This is the corrected distance. The journal for September 9 (p. 302) gives
429 knots.

LANDFALLS IN THE ALEUTIAN ISLANDS 321

and took more soundings and got the same depth with sandy bottom.
There was no land in sight, probably because it was hidden by the dark-
ness and fog; but we took no chances and stood out easterly for two
hours and then hove to until three in the morning, when we proceeded
on our course. At the end of the ninth hour in the morning, land [Agattu
Island] was sighted on the rhumb W by N, but I knew that it was not yet
Kamchatka. In the tenth hour we came about in order to clear it in the
south, for the wind was favorable and we were keeping parallel with the
shore between south and west. At the end of the day we took the bear-
ings of the land, which was latitude 52° 35’ N, distant from Vaua 956
Russian versts,!! reckoning from the returning point. The shore seemed
broken up; here and there were mountains of no great size, but in the
distance were high snow-covered mountains; but on the lower mountains
and on the level there was no snow. At different times we noticed near
the land four otters, the kind that live near Kamchatka, but which we
had found nowhere else. We had the land in view until six in the morning
of September 22. I am of the opinion that the land which we sighted on
September 4, 9, and 21 is one and the same body, and it is probably due
to the fog that we did not always see it. We had enough evidence of it
in the shape of shore birds, different kinds of animals that keep close to
land, and floating grasses. As we sailed south these signs either decreased
or disappeared <ltogether. On our outward voyage, when we kept much
farther south than cn the inward, we saw hardly any of the above indica-
tions, aside from sea animals and a small amount of fairly broken-up
sea grass and that rarely. I am inclined to think that all the land which
we saw is one body because from August 6, when it disappeared from
view, until September 4, when we caught sight of it once more, there
were signs that it was near. Another good bit of evidence to substantiate
my theory is this: If the people we met with on September 9 were on
an island it goes to show that the mainland is near, for how could they
have come here otherwise? If it is not an island then it is the mainland
itself. I cannot say for certain which it is.

By the end of September all members of the crew were down with
scurvy; many of them could not stand their watch, and those that came
on deck did so because it was necessary and not because they had the
strength. Between September 16 and the time when we returned to the
harbor six men died. Their names, as well as those who were left on the
American coast, are recorded in the register.!2. On the night of October 7,
at ten o’clock, Lieutenant Chikhachev died; on the next day Navigator
Vrange and Fleet Master Michael Plautin passed away. Chikhachev
could not stand his watch for three weeks before he died, and Plautin

11 Equivalent to 549 knots. This would be the corrected distance. The journal

for September 21 (p. 307) gives 127 knots.
12 Not published in the present work.

322, ‘REPORT ON VOYAGE OF THE “Siyveau it

for two weeks. I wasso ill with scurvy and so weak that I expected death
any moment. From September 21 to the time that we reached port I was
not able to come on deck. The ship was navigated by Ivan Elagin,
who, although very ill, yet would not give in and because of dire necessity
remained on deck almost continuously. I gave him such help as I could,
for, thanks to God, my mind did not leave me. I worked out the courses
from the log book and told him what to do. When, according to our
reckoning on the outward voyage, we should have sighted Kamchatka
but failed to do so, I ordered him to steer west close to the parallel of this
harbor. Elagin has good judgment, and, if it had not been for him and
the strength which God gave him, some great misfortune would have
happened to the ship. Because of his great merits, good judgment,
soberness, as well as for numerous difficult services, I promoted him to the
rank of fleet lieutenant, for he not only did the work of that office but ran
the whole ship.

By the will of God we caught sight of Kamchatka at seven in the morn-
ing of October 8, and two days later, nine in the evening, we sailed into
Avacha Bay and anchored. At the time we had but two barrels of
water, which we had boiled out of seawater. At ten o’clock in the morning
of October 10 Professor Delisle de la Croyére died. With God’s help we
entered the Harbor of the Holy Apostles Peter and Paul on October 12.
At the time of this writing the Captain Commander has not yet arrived,
and it is not known whether on account of some misfortune he has been
obliged to winter somewhere. We had enough provisions on board both
ships to last a half year in case of necessity.

Enclosed is a list of the crew (with their names) who are with the
Captain Commander. I am submitting to the Admiralty College the
journal of our voyage and a Mercator chart. According to our reckoning
the number of degrees of longitude between Kamchatka and America
differs in going and coming, owing to the fact that during all the time
that we were at sea we reckoned from only one base, the meridian of
Vaua, and had no other base or way to correct by. The outward voyage
and the land discovered on it are marked on the chart in black ink;
and the return voyage, with the land sighted and its extension, in red
ink. During such a long voyage and period of time it is impossible even
for the best navigators to escape errors altogether. If a more accurate map
is desired, the professors of the Academy can make it from the reckonings
going and coming or in some other way from the log, journal, and chart.
To what extent the error in longitude is due to the currents I cannot tell.
In going we tried twice to determine the current but failed. Along the
American coast there was a tidal current running up and down parallel

13 Not published in the present work.

14 Going, 61° 51’; coming, 73° 30’ (see Chirikov’s report, above, p. 313; also
Chapter VII, footnote 22, p. 308).

RETURN TO PETROPAVLOVSK 323

to the shore. In returning we had no small boat and could not make a
study of the tide.

It took six weeks to go from Kamchatka to America; these weeks
were in the months of June and July (by the middle of June we were
in latitude 46° N), and yet it was as cold as our middle autumn. We
had almost continuous fogs; only occasionally about the middle of the
day did the sun show itself. During these six weeks we had only three
really fair days. The same kind of weather prevailed along the American
coast, for while we were there the weather was not fair. In August and
September, when we returned, we had many more clear days with the
usual strong autumn winds. In my opinion the best time to navigate
these seas is August and half of September and not June and July.

The instructions of the Admiralty College require that this report be
sent in care of an officer who took part in the expedition. Unfortunately
this is not possible, as the officers are dead; and therefore I am sending
it in care of the marine Semeon Splavshikov, who will follow the winter
overland route. This route as far as Yakutsk is not very safe because
of the unsubdued natives living between Kamchatka and the Kolyma
Post, who sometimes kill, plunder, or detain Russian travelers. If I
were not to send it, I shotld be blamed for delay. For fear that these
papers may not reach their destination I intend, as soon as navigation
to Okhotsk opens in the spring, to send to the Admiralty College exact
copies of the report, journal, chart, list of the crew with their names, by
a special messenger, the midshipman Yurlov. He will also take along
the things we secured from the natives of the newly discovered land and
hand them to the Admiralty College. I beg to add that in this journal
the day of the month begins at noon as is customary in all naval journals.

To the Admiralty College from its humble servant.

Captain ALEXEI CHIRIKOV
December 7, 1741

ENCLOSURES
INSTRUCTIONS TO BOATSWAIN SIDOR SAVELEV

On the roth of this month Acting Fleet Master and Navigator Dementiev went
ashore and has not been heard of since, and it is possible some harm has come to
him. We are now near the spot where he was sent, and I order you to go in the
small boat to the place where he went. Take with you a carpenter and a calker
and such tools as are needed for repairing the boat. When you come close to the
shore, if you see no hostile natives or see Dementiev or some of his men, make a
landing. If the boat is damaged and can be repaired, set the carpenter and some
of Dementiev’s men to work; but do you come back at once and bring with you
Dementiev and as many of his men as are not needed to do the repair work. If
the boat is beyond repairs bring aboard as many men as your boat will hold, and

324° REPORT ON. VOYAGE OF THE Si FAURE

for the others another trip will be made. If you find his party and boat in good
condition, signal that fact to us by making two fires—the smoke of which we could
see in day time and the flames at night. If the boat can be repaired, build three
fires; it it cannot be, make four some little distance apart. But you are to come
aboard with Dementiev and as many others as the boat wili accommodate without
overloading. Should you start back in the evening or at night, lay out the fires as
best you can.
Captain CHIRIKOV

July 23, 1741
DECISION TO RETURN

On July 26, 1741, Captain Chirikov and the undersigned officers decided, owing
to the loss of the two ship’s boats with Dementiev and fourteen men, not to follow
out the original plan but to start for Kamchatka that very day. There were no
more small boats on board, which made it impossible to examine the shore or to
take on fresh water. We had only 45 barrels of water, and this is a very small
amount considering the long distance to Avacha, which is nearly 2,000 knots. We
were not even sure that some of the water had not leaked out of the casks. We were
equally in doubt as to the kind of winds we might have. Because of this shortage
of water it was agreed not to examine the coast but to sail for Kamchatka so as not
to suffer some great misfortune.

Captain ALEXEI CHIRIKOV
IvAN CHIKHACHEV
MICHAEL PLAUTIN
Navigator IVAN ELAGIN

Lieutenants {

To THE ADMIRALTY COLLEGE, A [SUPPLEMENTARY] REPORT

Captain Commander Bering’s instructions required us to examine the
land which according to rumor lies opposite the Chukchi country, some
distance to the east, also the last land we saw on our voyage, 956 versts
from here[Agattu]. It is my humble duty as well as my great desire to se-
cure full information about both of these lands. Of the company that was
put under my command, that is to say the lieutenant, two navigators,
constable, boatswain, and crew, some, by the will of God, have died,
others were lost on the American coast (their names I have sent with my
first report to the Admiralty College). At the present time I have only
one man on board for navigating the ship, keeping the log, and mapping
the coast, and that is the navigator Elagin. Although on the list of officers
there is the name of the assistant navigator Yurlov (who was not taken
along on the last expedition), yet he does not know his business. (It
would seem that he was taken from a warehouse, where he acted as
watchman, and put to study navigation, being then of an age when he
could learn neither the theory nor the practice of it; and after a time,
because of length of service, he was given the rank and pay of assistant
navigator.) Asto myself, Iam quite unfit for sea duty. The scurvy is
sleep in my system, and this it is difficult to shake off because of the

SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT 325

heavy atmosphere and especially because of the poor and insufficient
food. Twice on the return voyage I nearly died of the disease, the last time
it was October 26. Now, by God’s mercy, I am just able to sit up; my
feet are drawn up and full of spots, and the teeth are loose in the gums.
The drugs on hand are so old that they are worthless. A similar state of
ill health exists among the crew; some of them are not fit for sea service.
From the enclosed lists !® may be seen how many officers and men we still
have, how many were left ashore, how many we should have according
to the regulations of the Admiralty College, and how many we need.
The ship’s rigging is in bad condition, and I attach the report '® made by
the lower officers on that subject. We cannot replace it because we have
no other rigging. Taking all these things into consideration—my illness,
shortage in men, food, material—it is impossible to put to sea for the
purpose of making a detailed investigation of the above-mentioned lands,
namely the one we discovered and the one cpposite the Chukchi country.
I am going to ask help from Captain Spanberg (who is now at Bolsheretsk
with five ships). If he himself cannot take part in the expedition, he
may be willing to give us a navigator or an assistant navigator and pro-
visions, a list of which I have made out and sent to him. If I should
receive assistance, even if only enough to repair my rigging, and if Iam
not too ill I will do my duty and goto sea. If help should not come the
best thing to do would be to take the men on board and go to Okhotsk
or Yakutsk and wait there for orders. It would perhaps be better to go
on to Yakutsk so as not to use up the provisions at Okhotsk, where they
cculd be used later for the expedition.

Should it be the wish of her Imperial Majesty for us to explore the
newly discovered land as well as that part which is supposed to lie
opposite the Chukchi country and (according to the instructions to
Captain Commander Bering) to bring the inhabitants under Her Imperial
Majesty’s subjection, it would be necessary to increase the number of
men on the ship to the full complement as laid down by the Admiralty
College. How many men and of what rank they should be is indi-
cated on the enclosed list.17 We need also new rigging, spare parts, and
a number of other things. If I were at Yakutsk to hurry the material
along it would reach here more quickly than by my waiting for it in these
harbors. If I should receive no aid, I, with the assent of my officers, will
do the best that we can for the interests of Her Imperial Majesty and
will report to the Admiralty College.

According to the instructions of the Admiralty College we were re-
quired to bring to St. Petersburg a few inhabitants of the newly dis-
covered land, or of land we might discover in the future. We could not

15 See p. 327.

16 Not published here.
17 See p. 326.

326° | REPORT ON VOYAGE OF THES? Paik

persuade them to come, and to force them against their will without

special instructions was dangerous.

Not having any of these people

with me and not knowing their language I can say little about them. It
is not likely that they will come on board willingly, and I do not suppose
Her Imperial Majesty would have us use force. For that purpose a

larger crew is necessary than we have had so far.

To the Admiralty College from its humble servant.

December 0, 1741

Captain ALEXEI CHIRIKOV

ENCLOSURES

LisT OF THE COMPLEMENT OF MEN ON My Suip, ACCORDING TO THE REGULATION OF
THE ADMIRALTY COLLEGE, THE NUMBER ON HAND (BESIDES THOSE WHO
ARE UNFIT FOR SEA SERVICE), THE NUMBER NEEDED, AND THEIR RANK

Rank

Captain

Lieutenant
Navigator

Assistant navigators
Surgeon

Assistamt surgeon
Surgeon’s apprentices
Boatswain
Boatswain’s mates
Quartermasters
Purser

Assistant constable
Cannoneers

Copyist

Assistant storekeeper
Sailors

Calkers

Sailmakers
Carpenters

Coopers

Corporal

Soldiers

Drummer

Monk

Total

Complement Present Needed

a]
BHWWWWNHHH OKRA NNHNHAN HA

iS)

lee

75

I

#5
1E
I
I I
I
eA
I I
I
16
4 2
I
y
8 4
3
2 I
3
2 I
iz
24
I
I
54 21

In addition we need a boatswain’s mate in place of Evdokim Fedorov.

Captain ALEXEI CHIRIKOV

SUPPLEMENTARY REPORT 327

List OF ADMIRALTY MEN, ARTILLERISTS, AND SIBERIANS OF VARIOUS RANKS WHO
ARE REGISTERED IN THE HARBOR OF THE HOLY APOSTLES ST. PETER AND
St. PAUL. Some of these men are on hand and others absent

Absent
Rank Registered | | Albsent | Present
(a) | (6) | © | (d)
Captain it I
Ensigns 2 B
Assistant surgeon I I
Surgeon’s apprentice I I
Navigator I I
Assistant navigator I I
Assistant storekeeper I I
Midshipman I I
Clerk I I
Copyist I I
Boatswain’s mates 2 2
Registrars 2 2
Cannoneer corporal I I
Ist class 2 2
Cannoneers eae lace a 7
Quartermaster I I
: Ist class 3 3
Sailors 2nd class 3 3
Ranked as Siberian = car-
sailors penters 2 2
Workman I I
Assistant corporal I I
Soldiers 2 I I I
Carpenters 4 4
Turner I I
Blacksmiths
Foreman I I
a Smiths 2 2
: ooper I I
Admiralty Assistant
cooper and
Siberian
carpenter I I
Calkers 2 2
Sailmakers 3 3
Secretaries 2 2
Siberian { Drummer I I
garrison Soldiers I9 I I 18
From Yakutsk regiment 38 I I il
Siberian carpenters 4 I I 3
Employees of Kamchatka posts 2 2 2
Total 83 if I 2 2 6 77

Captain CHIRIKOV

(a) Sent to St. Petersburg with a report.
(b) Sent to buy deer.

(c) Guard the deer herds at Bolsheretsk.
(d) In Lower Kamchatka Post.

CHAPTER EX

THE END OF THE EXPEDITION

Bering’s second expedition came officially to an end in 1749,
although very little in the line of exploration and discovery was
done after 1742. Counting from the time when Peter the Great
signed the instructions for the first expedition, twenty-five
years had been spent in the attempt to solve the mysteries of the
North Pacific and the Arctic. Many of them were solved. It
was proved that a northeast passage was impracticable; that
Novaya Zemlya was not a peninsula; that the Asiatic coast
extended much farther to the eastward than was supposed; that
Terra de Ieso, Company Land, and Gama Land, as pictured by
the cartographers, did not exist; that Japan was an island; and
that the American coast ran in a northwesterly direction from
Cape Blanco. In brief, it made clear all the points which were in
doubt at the time of Peter’s last visit to Paris.

Unfortunately, the one question, the important question, the
raison d’étre of these undertakings, whether Asia and America
were united, was not answered, owing to the fact that the explorers
along the Arctic coast were unable to go from the Kolyma to the
Anadyr. The same questions were asked after the second expe-
dition as at the end of the first expedition; and they continued
to be asked until another Russian, Baron Ferdinand Wrangell,
answered them during the winters of 1821 and 1823, when he
walked along the Arctic shore from the Kolyma to Kolyuchin
Island, a place that had been charted by Billings, of the Russian
Navy,in 1791. So, after all, Russia did solve that problem, and
to her belongs the credit.

It may be of some interest to the reader to know what became
of the officers who survived the hard voyage. Chirikov passed
the winter of 1741-1742 at Petropavlovsk, and in the spring he

PATE OF THE OFFICERS 329

sailed on the St. Paul to the eastward in the hope of finding Bering
and locating the American coast opposite East Cape. He failed
in both of his objects largely because of the poor health of his
men, the poor equipment, and the unseaworthiness of his ves-
sel. He did, however, reach the islands of Attu and Atka, the
first being a new discovery, the second probably a resighting
of an island seen by Bering on September 25, 1741. During
the summer of 1742 he sailed for Okhotsk, where he left the SZ.
Paul, and from there he proceeded inland. He remained in
Siberia as the head of the expedition until 1745, when he was
asked to come to the capital and was promoted to the rank of
captain commander; but he died in 1748 as a result of a disease
contracted on the voyage. Waxel left Kamchatka in 1743 for
Okhotsk, and from there he went to Yakutsk and Yeniseisk,
where he found Chirikov. When the latter was called to St.
Petersburg, Waxel assumed command until he was summoned
home. There he was made captain of the first rank, and when he
died his widow was granted a pension of 2,000 rubles.

Khitrov was made rear-admiral in 1753. Ovtsin in 1757 was
in command of the Poltava, holding at the time the rank of
oberster Kriegskommisar.

All others who took part in these expeditions were advanced
one grade in rank, dating from July 15, 1744, and their wages
were paid accordingly. The Senate requested the Admiralty
College to reward them as it should seem best.

When Bering’s death became known at Kamchatka his private
property was sold at auction and the proceeds, about 1,000 rubles,
were sent to his family. Whatever wages were due him at the
time of his death were also paid over to his wife and children.
In addition the Senate voted him a reward of 5,000 rubles.

NOTE TO ACCOMPANY THE CHART OF THE VOYAGE
OF BERING AND CHIRIKOV FROM KAMCHATKA
TO THE ALASKAN COAST AND RETURN, 1741!

By the late
ELLSWoRTH P. BERTHOLF
CaptaineCommandant U. S. Coast Guard (retired)

The tracks of both vessels, as laid down on the accompanying
chart (Pl. I), show the approximate noon positions throughout
the voyage and indicate the several portions of the coast and
the islands sighted or examined by the navigators.”

THE JOINT VOYAGE OF THE “ST. PETER” AND THE “ST. PAUL”

The brigs St. Peter and St. Paul, commanded respectively by
Captain Commander Bering and Captain Chirikov, sailed out of
Avacha Bay, Kamchatka, on June 4, 1741, and entered on their
eventful voyage of discovery. Bering’s instructions from the
Admiralty College required that he should steer SE by E, true,
until he reached latitude 46° in order to locate JuandeGama Land,
which, according to the map of the astronomer Louis Delisle
de la Croyére, extended to the 47th parallel of north latitude. If
no land was sighted on that course he was to steer E by N, true,
until he came to the American continent. The wind being fair,
the ships were able to make good the true course, SE by E, and
found themselves on June 12 in latitude 46°. No land being

1 The following material (translated by Professor F. A. Golder) was made use
of in constructing the chart. In connection with the St. Peter: (a) Yushin’s log book;
(b) Khitrov’s log book; (c) the report of Lieutenant Waxel, who succeeded to the
command after Bering’s death; and (d) the journal of the naturalist Steller (pub-
lished in Vol. II of the present work). In connection with the St. Paul: (a) the log
book, (b) the daily journal, and (c) the report of Captain Chirikov. [Captain Bert-
holf, shortly before his sudden death in November, 1921, was able to revise a
proof of the chart. Asit now stands it represents his final judgment.—EnpiT. Note. ]

2 In the course of several tours of duty in Alaskan waters, as executive and com-
manding officer in the U. S. Revenue Cutter Service and the U. S. Coast Guard,
the writer became familiar with the coast and islands of that territory, and this
knowledge has been of great help to him in identifying the land sighted by Bering
and Chirikov.

VOYAGE OF THE “ST. PETER” 331

sighted and no bottom being found at 100 fathoms, Bering, on
the 13th, gave the order to change the course to E by N. The
wind was now unfavorable, but the vessels continued in company
until the 20th, when stormy weather overtook them and they
became separated during the night. Although up to this time
the vessels had exchanged signals almost daily and had frequently
spoken to each other and compared positions, nevertheless the
noon positions recorded in the log books of the two vessels do not
always agree even on those days when they both obtained obser-
vations of the sun. On June Io both vessels took observations
within sight of each other, but the St. Peter’s log records the
latitude as 47° 29’, while the St. Paul's log gives the latitude as
47°45’. In plotting the noon position of the vessels while in
company we have therefore averaged the positions recorded in
the two log books.

On June 20 the wind was strong from the eastward with a
heavy sea running, and both vessels were under short sail. The
St. Peter’s log for that day records that at 1o P.M. the St. Paul bore
NW distant 2 miles, and that at I a.m. the latter was no longer
within sight, in consequence of which the St. Peter hove to. The
log of the St. Paul for June 20 records that at 3 A.M. the St. Peter
was 10 miles distant, and at 5 A.M. she began to disappear from
sight, whereupon the St. Paul hove to, and both vessels, being
hove to on the port tack, drifted to the southward and west-
ward. The following day the weather moderated, and in
accordance with Bering’s previous instructions each vessel began
to search for the other in the direction in which the other was last
seen. Bering believed the Si. Paul to be northwest of him and
began his search in that direction. Chirikov, however, reckoned
the St. Peter to be north-northeast of him and endeavored to
search in that direction, but as the wind was from that same
quarter the St. Paul made little progress.

THE SEPARATE VOYAGE OF THE “St. PETER”

Bering searched for the St. Paul until the 22nd and then
resumed the voyage; but, after taking council with his officers, he

332 NOTE, TO ACCOMPANY THE, CHAK

decided to shape again his course to the southward as far as
latitude 46° in order to make another attempt to locate the
elusive Gama Land. Noon of the 25th found the ship in latitude
45°16’, with clear weather and noland insight. This finally con-
vinced Bering that the map of Delisle de la Croyére was incorrect
and that Juan de Gama Land did not exist, and consequently he
changed the course to E by N, true. He had fair winds and made
good progress, but no land being sighted by July 6 he began to
keep more to the northward. On July 14, being fearful of
the water supply, a council of the officers was called, and it was
decided to steer more towards the north, in the hope of reach-
ing some land where the empty water casks might be refilled.

DISCOVERY OF LAND

At noon July 16 (the end of the log book day’), the ship was in
latitude 58° 17’ by observation. Thirty minutes later land was
sighted, high mountains covered with snow, and at I P.M.,
July 17, a particularly high snow-covered mountain bore N by
W. This was Mt. St. Elias, Bering’s first glimpse of the American
continent, at a distance of about 120 nautical miles. The longi-
tude according to the reckoning was 151° 26’ W, but this was
more than 9° in error, the correct approximate longitude of the
St. Peter at noon July 16 having been 142° 10’ W. These early
navigators were sailing unknown seas and had no means of know-
ing that during the greater part of their voyage a current set
them constantly to the eastward. The errors in reckoning the
ship’s position were due in small part to crude methods and lack
of instruments, and ina larger part to the unknown currents. In
plotting the positions of Bering and Chirikov we have endeav-
oredt to make due allowance for these currents.

3 While the civil day begins at midnight and ends the following midnight, the
astronomical day is reckoned from noon to noon. The log books of the St. Peter
and the St. Paul were kept according to the astronomical date, and the log date of
July 16 begins at ncon July 15 and ends at noon July 16. The civil date coincides
with the log date during the hours of the forenoon, but during the hours of the
afternoon the log date is one day in advance of the civil date. The St. Peter’s log

book records that land was sighted July 17 at 12.30 P.M., or 30 minutes after that
day began; the civil date was July 16, 12.30 P.M. (Russian calendar).

VOYAGE OF THE “Sl PETER’ 333

In approaching land the vessel made slow progress against the
light head winds prevailing, and on the 18th foggy weather
obliged Bering to proceed with caution. No land was seen that
day, although there were many indications that the shore was
close aboard. At 8 p.m. on the 19th the fog lifted, and the S¢.
Peter found herself in the bight to the eastward of Kayak Island,
with the southern point of the island and its detached Pinnacle
Rock in plain view bearing SW by W. During the night the ship
was worked around the point, and on the morning of the 20th the
St. Peter dropped her anchor on the west side of Kayak Island
about midway of its length. Bering named the island St. Elias,
and the southern point Cape St. Elias. The two boats were put
overboard, and men were sent ashore to fill the empty casks.
Khitrov sounded out the passage hetween Kayak and Wingham
Islands to find sheltered anchorage in case of need; he also
landed and examined Wingham Island.

SKIRTING THE ALASKAN COAST

The next morning at daybreak, the wind being fair, Bering,
taking into consideration the lateness of the season and the signs
of scurvy among the crew, gave orders to weigh anchor and begin
the return voyage. After leaving Kayak Island early in the
morning of July 21, the St. Peter made Cape Hinchinbrook,
opened out the passage into Prince William Sound, and then
hauled to the southward along Montague Island. The officers
took bearings of the Wooded Islands, and at noon of the 22nd
the ship was just below Cape Cleare and about 25 miles distant.
The weather being thick no land was seen on the 23rd, 24th,
and 25th, although on the 24th the course was changed more to
the westward in order to draw near to land. At 4 A.M. on July
26 they suddenly made high land bearing NE by N distant about
8 miles and got bottom at 35 fathoms. This was Black Point,
the southern point of Sitkalidak Island.4 After sighting Black
Point, the St. Peter stood about due south until noon, covering a

4Tt has been stated that Bering named the point Cape St. Hermogenes, but no
mention of this is made in any of the ship’s records or in Steller’s diary.

334 NOTE TO ACCOMPANY THE CHART

distance of some 32 miles, and then hauled more to the westward
until noon of the 27th. Frequent soundings were taken and the
water shoaled to 35 fathoms. The weather being thick, no land
was seen after leaving Black Point, but at noon of the 27th Bering
decided that they were getting too near the land and hauled to
the southward and eastward to work offshore until the weather
cleared.®

From noon of the 27th until noon of the 31st the St. Peter stood
off shore in a general southeasterly direction. On the 31st the
weather cleared, and shortly before noon the course was changed
to the northward and westward in order to get in touch with the
land. Towards evening of August 2, a heevy fog set in, and the
vessel was again headed offshore as the water had shoaled to 30
fathoms. Ati A.M. the fog temporarily cleared and disclosed land
close aboard bearing SE by S. The log records that a sounding
shoaled 20 fathoms, whereupon the ship was put about and
anchored in 18 fathoms to await daylight. Steller records this
incident in his diary as follows: “About one o’clock in the night
it was discovered on heaving the lead that the boat was in 4

5 Mr. George Davidson in his “The Tracks and Landfalls of Bering and Chirikof,
on the Northwest Coast of America,” San Francisco, I90I, concluded that the
St. Peter, after leaving Black Point, passed through Douglas Channel between the
Trinity Islands and the southern end of Kodiak Island. There is nothing in the
original records to support that conclusion, while there is much evidence to the
contrary. After sighting Black Point at 4 A.M., July 26, the St. Petey made 32 miles
due south up to noon and was then some 25 miles to the eastward of Douglas
Channel. From this point the vessel turned to the westward, and if she did indeed
pass through this channel she must have done so between noon and 9 P.M. be-
cause at that hour the course was changed to WSW, true. From noon to I P.M. the
St. Peter made SW by S, true; from I to 2 P.M., SW14W, true; from 2 to 3 P.M.,
W by S, true; and from 3 to 9EP.M., W14S, true, covering from noon until 9 P.M. a
distance of 29 miles according to the log. All this time soundings were taken fre-
quently, but no depth less than 35 fathoms is recorded. As the water in Douglas
Channel shoals to 7 fathoms, it is clear the ship could not have reached the nar-
rowest part of the channel by 9 P.M. From 9 P.M. to II P.M. the course was WSW,
true; from II P.M. until daylight the course was generally SW, true; and at mid-
night they sounded in 40 fathoms. If the exact position of the St. Petey at noon on
the 26th was such that the courses steered between noon and 9 P.M. carried her in
the direction of Douglas Channel, then at 9 P.M. she must have been in the immedi-
ate vicinity of the eastern entrance to the channel, because the soundings show she
had not passed through the channel up to 9 P.M. Being in that position at 9 P.M.,
the course steered after that hour would have put the ship ashore on the Trinity
Islands.

By plotting on the modern chart the hourly runs of the St. Peter from 4 A.M.,
July 26, until noon of July 27, making due allowance for the tides and currents and

VOVACE OF DHE sl. PETER 335

fathoms of water, but it was otherwise reported to the captain.
Gradually the ship worked out of this into 18 and 20 fathoms,
where anchor was dropped to wait for daylight.”

This was Chirikov Island, and at daylight the bearings showed
the ship was anchored about 1% miles off the northern end. They
named this island Tumannoi (foggy). Towards evening of theard
the anchor was raised, and the St. Peter stood to the northward
and westward. At 3 p.M. of August 4 Mt. Chiginigak was sighted,
and at 8 p.m. the officers made out the mainland from Cape Provi-
dence to Chignik Bay, with Sutwik Island in plain view. The
vessel was now working to the southward; but the wind had
fallen to light variable airs, and she made little progress during
the night. In the morning the wind freshened from the east-
ward; and at noon August 4, according to the bearings, the St.
Peter was 5 miles to the eastward of Anowik Island of the Semidi
group. The largest and most northerly island of the group must
have been hidden by the fog, as both the log and Waxel’s report
state that only five islands were seen. Owing to the fog, un-
steady winds, and numerous islands, Bering decided to work off-

noting at the. proper intervals the soundings recorded in the log, it at once be-
comes apparent that the vessel passed to the southward of the Trinity Islands and
at noon of the 27th was about 15 miles south of Tugidak Island. Mr. Davidson
states that at night the vessel found herself in shoal water, tossed by heavy cur-
rent rips. This would indeed have been the case had she passed through Douglas
Channel with the SE storm prevailing, but there is no entry in the log indicating
any unusual conditions. At 7 and 8 p.m. the log records depths of 35 and 40 fathoms,
and at 9 P.M. is the following entry: “Sounded, but no bottom. We are in danger
of running on sand banks and therefore cannot keep close to land, hence have kept
off a few points.” At that hour the course was changed to WSW,, true; and at mid-
night, having found bottom at 40 fathoms, the vessel was hauled off to SW, true.
Waxel makes no mention of unusually shoal water at this time, and Steller, who was
an exceptionally keen observer and painstaking recorder of events, makes only the
following comment in his diary covering the 26th and 27th: “These gentlemen
(the navigators) thought it necessary always to hug the coast, instead of which it
might have been better after sailing a hundred versts to try and go north one or
two degrees. Their navigation and a small storm drove us during the night of July
27 on a bank 50 fathoms under water, that stretched out from the shore into the
sea, but the land itself, to our great fortune, was so distant as not to be seen.”
Steller apparently seized every opportunity to criticize Bering and the navigators.
On more than one occasion he recites that shoal water and other unusual events were
kept from the knowledge of the Captain and suppressed from the log, and it is
fair to assume that if the St. Peter had passed through Douglas Channel on the
stormy night of the 27th, Steller would not have failed to note the unusual condi-
tions and record them in his diary.

336 NOTE TO ACCOMPANY THE CHART

shore and, after sighting the Semidi Islands, stood to the south-
ward until August 10 when he concluded to work to the westward
along the 53rd parallel of latitude. But he now experienced a
succession of head winds and storms and made so little progress
on the homeward voyage that on the 27th he again became
troubled over the water supply and called a council of the officers.
There were but 25 casks of fresh water remaining in the hold, and
if the westerly winds continued for any length of time they could
not hope to reach Avacha Bay before the water supply was
exhausted. According to the reckoning land was about 240 miles®
distant, and it was agreed “for safety’s sake, to go nearer the land
with a view to finding good anchorage where we might take on
waterenough to last until our return so that in case of head winds
we should not suffer extremely.”

LANDING ON THE SHUMAGIN ISLANDS

Accordingly, on August 27, the ship was headed to the north-
ward; on the 29th, shortly after daylight, a group of islands
came into view, and on the afternoon of the 30th the Sé. Peter
anchored between Near Island and Nagai Island of the Shumagin
group. The following morning the task of filling the empty water
casks was begun, and Khitrov was sent ashore to examine the
land in the vicinity of a fire which had been seen the night before.’
Steller went ashore with the water party to pursue his studies, the
results of which he has minutely recorded in his diary.

On September 1 the work of filling the water casks was com-
pleted, and the sick men were brought on board in the longboat;
but the wind had freshened and kicked up a sea, and Khitrov,
who had landed in the small boat and extended his explorations
some distance along the shores of Nagai Island, was unable to
return to the ship. Towards noon of the 2nd the weather moder-

6 “60 German miles.”

7 There were now ten of the ship’s company down with the scurvy, and these
men were sent ashore for rest and fresh air; but one of the sick seamen, Nikita
Shumagin, died just after he was landed. He was buried on shore, and in his
memory Bering named the island Shumagin. But the name has come down to us
as applied to this entire group, and the particular island which Bering named
Shumagin is now known as Nagai Island.

VOYAGE OF THE “ST. PETER’ 337

ated somewhat, and the longboat was sent ashore for Khitrov
and his party, but, owing to the fog and squally weather, the
party did not return until the forenoon of the 3rd. Khitrov
reported finding the place where the fire had been and many
signs of human beings but had seen no people.

Just before noon of the 3rd the St. Peter got under way, but
the wind fell to light airs from the SW, and, being unable to work
out to sea, Bering anchored off the north end of Bird Island on
the evening of the 4th. The following morning they again
attempted to get to sea; but the wind was baffling and the cur-
rent against them, and in the afternoon of the 5th Bering again
anchored close to Bird Island. Scarcely had the anchor been
dropped when human voices were heard from the shore; soon
two baidarkas, or skin boats, with one man in each, approached
the St. Peter, and Bering and his ship’s company had their first
glimpse of the people who inhabited the land they had dis-
covered. The longboat was lowered, and a party went ashore to
distribute presents and interview the natives. The account of
this incident, as given in the log and in Steller’s diary, will be
found very interesting.

On the afternoon of the 6th another attempt was made to get
to sea; but it was unsuccessful, and the St. Peter was obliged
to return to the anchorage off Bird Island. The following morn-
ing the St. Peter sailed around the northern end of the island,
passed out to sea through Otter Strait between Bird and Cherna-
bura Islands, and by noon was clear of the land, standing to
the southward. This course was held until the 8th, when Bering
again turned to the westward along the 53rd parallel. The wind
still held from the westward and the progress towards Avacha
was necessarily slow.

LANDFALL OF ADAK AND ATKA ISLANDS

On September 22 an observation of the sun gave their latitude
as 50° 27’, and the vessel was headed more to the northward
to work towards the 53rd parallel. On the 24th they got another
sight of the sun at noon and found themselves in latitude 51°

338 NOTE TO ACCOMPANY THE CHART

30’. A few hours later, 3 P.M. of September 25, land was signted ;
one point of land bore W by S, another point bore ENE, and
a high snow-covered mountain, which they concluded was on the
mainland, bore NW by W%W. They sounded and got no
bottom, but nevertheless the ship was put about and pointed off
shore. According to our adjustments for errors in reckoning and
currents, the St. Peter was in longitude 175° 23’ W, and the
snow-covered mountain was the 5,000-foot peak on Great Sitkin
Island. The land seen to the westward was the south shore of
Adak Island or one of the small islands close by, and to the east-
ward they saw the shores of Atka Island. No name was given
in the log to the land sighted on the 25th.

BESET BY STORMS AND SCURVY

A series of westerly gales now set in which continued with
varying violence, driving the ship to the eastward, until October
11. On September 30 a particularly violent gale broke upon the
little craft and rendered her all but helpless for two days. Steller
records that “We had never experienced the like of it before, and
it is hard to even imagine it. We expected to be smashed to
pieces any minute; we could neither stand, sit, nor liedown. No
one stood his watch, and the storm drove the ship where it willed.
Half of our crew were sick and feeble, and the other half were
on their feet only because they had to be, but on account of the
storm and the violent motion of boat were out of their heads.”

On October 11 the weather moderated and a noon observation
of the sun was obtained. The St. Peter was in latitude 48° 15’,
longitude 168° 25’ W, having been driven some 350 miles south-
east from the landfall of September 25. On October 12 they made
fair progress to the westward, but another storm forced them to
the northward until the 15th, when the wind again permitted
working to the westward. The scurvy was now in full swing; 32
of the ship’s company were ill, several had died, and deaths were
occurring almost daily. Bering himself was affected and,
although he had found some temporary relief in the antiscorbutic
plants gathered by Steller on the Shumagin Islands, he gradually

VOYAGE OF THE ST. PETER” 339

grew worse. On October 18 he was unable to leave his bed and
from that date was carried on the sick list.

LANDFALLS OF KISKA AND BULDIR ISLANDS

On October 23 the course was changed more to the northward
in order to regain the 53rd parallel; and at 8 A.m. on the 25th
a high, rocky, and treeless island was sighted in the northwest
which Waxel in his report states they named St. Markiana. This
was Kiska Island, the approximate position of the St. Peter
being latitude 51° 11’, longitude 178° 23’ E.

Passing to the northward and westward beyond Kiska Island
the St. Peter encountered the heavy tide rips frequently met with
in that vicinity, and at daylight on October 28 was close to Buldir
Island. Steller records in his diary that “it was quite evident
we were in a strait because the waves, even in stormy weather,
were not so high.” Early in the morning of the 28th signs of
land were observed; and, the weather being foggy, the vessel
was put under short sail. Shortly after daylight the fog cleared
and disclosed a small island directly in the path of the vessel not
more than 3 miles distant. The log records that early in the
morning one of the ship’s company, Stephen Buldirev, died, and
his body was lowered into the sea after land was sighted. Waxel
states in his report that they named the island St. Stephen; the
modern name is Buldir.

LANDING ON BERING ISLAND

The wind was now fair, and the St. Peter steered between W
and WNW, true, until 10 a.m. the following morning, October 29,
when another island was sighted which they named St. Abraham.
This was the eastern of the Semichi Islands. The St. Peter passed
to the northward of these islands and the island of Attu, and on
the morning of November 4 the eastern island of the Commander
group was sighted. At first it was believed the land was Kam-
chatka, but after rounding the southern point they realized their
error. By this time conditions on board were pitiful. Twelve of
the crew had already died, and of the remaining 65 Waxel reports

340 NOTE TO ACCOMPANY THE CHART

that there were only eight who, with great pain, could help them-
selves, and only three of these were able to be on deck. Bering
called into consultation such of the officers and men as were able
to drag themselves into the cabin; and, being convinced they
would not be able to handle the ship in the event of a storm, it
was decided immediately to seek an anchorage where they might
winter on shore and rid themselves of the dreadful disease that
had gripped the ship’s company.

The St. Peter was therefore worked over to Bering Island, and
on November 6 a small anchor was dropped in 12 fathoms of
water. The cable parted, and another small anchor was let go;
but this cable parted also, and by the time the heavy anchor
could be got overboard to hold the ship the fresh easterly
breeze had carried her into 4% fathoms, close to the shore. The
longboat was lowered, and the task of getting the sick men ashore
was begun; but with the very few men who were able to move
about this was not completed until the 15th, and meanwhile the
scurvy had claimed seven more victims.

A narrow section of sandy beach was discovered near the camp,
and it was decided to haul the St. Peter ashore at this place, where
they might secure her against the winter storms. It was found,
however, that there was no sufficient strength left in the crew
even to raise the anchor, and the ship remained where they left
her until November 28, when a heavy gale drove her ashore and
wrecked her on the very beach where they had planned to lay
her up.

Bering was very ill when he was carried ashore on November 8
and realized that he could not last many days; but he retained
his mind and power of speech and continued to direct affairs to
the end. At 2 o’clock in the morning of December 8, 1741, he
passed away, and his comrades reverently interred his remains
on the island that bears his name and marked the spot with a
cross.

With the fresh water and fresh meat which they were able to
procure on shore the health of the men rapidly improved, and by
Christmas most of them were on their feet again. As they

VOVAGE OF THE sm, PAUL? 341

regained their strength Waxel, who had succeeded to the com-
mand, sent out exploring parties, which reported that they were
on an island and that the Kamchatka coast was not far distant.

RETURN TO PETROPAVLOVSK

In the spring they began to break up the St. Peter to build a
small craft to carry them to the mainland. On August Io the
boat was launched, and preparations were made to leave the
‘island. This boat was 36 feet long, with a beam of 12 feet anda
depth of 514 feet, sloop-rigged with a bowsprit. They named
her the St. Peter and in this small craft Waxel loaded his 45 men
together with food, water, and baggage, and set sail from Bering
Island on August 13. On the 15th the hooker began to leak
badly; but the carpenter managed to patch up the hole, and they
kept on. On August 27 they sailed into the harbor of Petro-
pavlovsk. Of the 77 officers and men who left on the St. Peter
fourteen months before only 45 returned, and these had suffered
shipwreck and untold hardships; but their misfortunes did not
end with their safe return, for they soon learned that they had
been given up as lost and that the personal property they had
left behind had been appropriated by the inhabitants of Avacha!
Truly the lot of those early explorers was not altogether a happy
one.

THE SEPARATE VOYAGE OF THE “ST. PAUL”

When the weather moderated on the morning of June 21,
Chirikov reckoned that the St. Peter was NNE from him and
began his search in that direction; but the wind was ahead, and
little progress could be made. On the 23rd he gave up the
search and resumed the E by N course agreed upon. On July 1,
no land having been sighted, Chirikov steered more to the
northward. Both vessels had been favored with fair winds since
they parted company; but, as Bering had stood south to the 45th
parallel before resuming the easterly course, the S#. Paul was
considerably in advance of the St. Peter, and Chirikov’s noon
position on July I was within 30 miles of Bering’s noon position
on July 8.

342 NOTE 10 ACCOMPANY THE CHART

DISCOVERY OF LAND

On July 14 large numbers of shore ducks and gulls indicated
that land was not far distant, and at daybreak on the 15th the
land to the northward of Dixon’s Entrance was sighted. At 3
A.M. Capes Addington and Bartolome were in plain sight; but,
the wind being very light, it was not until noon that the St. Paul
could be worked in under the shores of Cape Addington. In the
afternoon of the 16th a boat was sent to examine the bay between
the two capes; but, finding the anchorage unprotected from the
west and south winds, Chirikov stood offshore when the breeze
freshened at sundown. At daylight the course was changed to
the northward, and the St. Paul passed outside the Hazy Islands,
which were sighted at nine o’clock in the forenoon. An hour later
the highland of Cape Ommaney loomed up through the mist,
and at noon, July 16, the St. Paul was under the hills of Puffin
Point. Chirikov now paralleled the coast until 9 P.M. of the
17th, keeping from three to four miles from the shore, and then
hauled offshore until 11 P.M. when he hove to until daylight.
From noon until 8 p.m. of the 17th the vessel logged a distance of
36 knots; adding to this a favorable current of about one knot
per hour would place the S¢. Paul at 8 P.M. abreast that part of
the coast where the land falls away to form the southern shores
of Sitka Sound, and the log records that at 8 P.M. the “coast seemed
to end in N34E, distant 8 knots, and in its place appeared
low land with sea cliffs, with the high mountains receding in the
background.” An hour later the S¢. Paul’s course was changed
to WNW44W, true, for two hours. At 11 P.M. she was hove to,
and at daylight the course parallel to the coast was resumed. All
this time the current was setting to the northward along the
coast so that the St. Paul passed Sitka Sound in the night and
was well north of Cape Edgecumbe at daylight. Indeed the
log records at 9 A.M. on the 17th a cape to the SE, which could
be no other than Cape Edgecumbe. At the same time another
point of land (Cape Cross) loomed up about NNW; Chirikov’s
observation on the 17th gave the noon latitude as 57° 39’; the
bearings at noon as given in the log and the courses and distances

VOYAGE OF THE “ST. PAUL” 343

run since the previous noon, augmented by allowance for current,
all coincide in fixing the position of the St. Paul at noon, July 17,
as abreast Cape Edward, and about ten miles offshore. At 3:30
o'clock in the afternoon of July 18 the longboat was lowered and
Fleet Master Dementiev with ten armed men was sent to exam-
ine the shore. Comprehensive instructions were given him,
which are fully set forth in Chirikov’s report, and Dementiev
was to signal with a rocket as soon as he landed.

LOSS OF TWO LANDING PARTIES

In his report Chirikov states “we had no signal of any kind from
him. We saw them approach the shore, and that is all.” For
five days the St. Paul kept as near the bay as possible, waiting for
the boat to return. At first the weather was such that the long-
boat could have come off without trouble, but later they had
strong winds that at times carried the ship a distance of 30 miles.
On July 23 the St. Paul returned and upon approaching the bay
saw a fire which they thought had been made by Dementiev, be-
cause all the time they had followed the coast they had seen no fire,
buildings, boats, nor any other signs of human beings and sup-
posed the coast was uninhabited. Upon noting the fire a gun
was fired at intervals as a signal, and the St. Paul was sailed close
to the shore. As the gun was fired the fire on shore appeared to
grow brighter, but there was no sign of the boat. On July 24 Chiri-
kov concluded the longboat had been damaged and was unable to
come off, and it was decided to send the small boat ashore with
tools for repairing the longboat. Accordingly, boatswain Savelev
was sent in the small boat with a carpenter, a calker, and a
seaman.

Chirikov reports that when Savelev departed “the weather was
very still; we followed him quite close to the shore and saw
him approach it. According to our time it was exactly six o’clock
in the afternoon. The signals which had been agreed upon he
failed to make and at the expected time did not return.” We
can well imagine the anxiety with which Chirikov and his ship’s

344 NOTE: TO: ACCOMPANY “THE (GHimikas

company watched and waited that night and the following day,
for their last boat had gone and this left them no means of reach-
ing the shore; but at one o'clock in the afternoon (July 25) two
boats were seen coming out of the bay which the St. Paul's boats
had entered. One of the boats was larger than the other, and at
first it was thought the ship’s boats were returning; but they soon
saw their error, for the small boat approached rapidly and the
four men in it used paddles instead of oars. This boat stopped at
some distance from the ship; the four occupants stood up and
shouted twice “Agai, Agai,” waved their hands, and turned back
to the larger boat, which had stopped at a still further distance
from the St. Paul. White kerchiefs were waved, and every effort
was made to induce the boats to come closer, but to no avail;
and the two boats rapidly returned to the bay from which they
had come. The actions of the natives and their fear to come close
to the ship convinced Chirikov that his men had either been killed
or held captive, and the ship’s company began to realize the full
extent of the disaster that had overtaken them. They had lost 15
of their shipmates and their only two boats; they could not follow
the native boats in the St. Paul and were helpless to avenge or
release their comrades, since they had no means of reaching the
shore. The remainder of the afternoon the St. Paul kept close
to the mouth of the bay but at sundown headed offshore for the
night and in the morning coasted along the shore to the north-
ward. At noon of the 26th, being in latitude 58° 21’, Chirikov
called a council of the officers, and it was decided that as the
remaining water supply was barely sufficient for the return voy-
age and they had no boats with which to obtain a,fresh supply or
even to examine the shore, it was the part of wisdom to sail at
once for Kamchatka.

IDENTIFICATION OF PLACE WHERE CHIRIKOV’S MEN WERE LOST

At this point it is of interest to discuss the location of the bay
where the St. Paul lost her two boats and 15 of her crew, as there
appears to have been some doubt on this point. The position of

VOYAGE OF THE “ST. PAUL” 345

the St. Paul at noon on July 17, checked by her observed lati-
tude, the bearings of the land given in the log, and the traverse
table from the previous noon, was latitude 57° 39’, longitude
136° 34’ W, about 10 miles SW by W from Cape Edward. Three
hours and a half later (3:30 P.M., July 18) the longboat was sent
ashore, and in that time the St. Paul had made good 8 miles N,
true, which placed her about 5 miles WSW, true, from the
entrance to Lisianski Strait. On the 24th when the small boat
was sent ashore the weather was clear, and Chirikov took a noon
observation close to the mouth of the bay and found the latitude
to be 57° 50’. This is the correct latitude of Lisianski Strait. On
other occasions where it has been possible to check Chirikov’s
observed latitude with the definitely known position of the ship,
his noon sights have proved to be very good, and there is no
reason to doubt the general accuracy of his observation on this
occasion. Mr. Davidson states* that Chirikov designated the
place as “a great bay in latitude 57° 15’.” Chirikov in his report
simply refers to a bay with nothing to indicate particularly
whether it was large or small. The log book which was kept by
Chirikov records the latitude as 57° 50’ and gives the impression
that the bay was considered small. The entry in the log for July
18 recites that “At 3:30 stood for the land as near as we dared and
sent ashore in the boat the Fleet Master Dementiev and ten
armed men. . . . He carried a written order which, among
other things, told him to make for the opening, which seemed to us
a bay, and take its bearings.”

Another entry on the same day recites that “According to the
reckoning at 4.30 in the afternoon, taking also into consideration
the position of the bay into which Dementiev was sent, we set
down the position of the said bay as 57° 23’ N, longitude from
Vaua 59° 36’. . . . Bycorrection the latitude is 57° 50’, longitude
58° 54’. The true latitude we got by observation on the 24th.”

Chirikov’s observed latitude, the traverse table, the bearings
taken during the several days the St. Paul remained in the
vicinity, and the references in the log all point with certainty to

8P. 19 of work cited in footnote 5, p. 334.

346 NOTE. TO ACCOMPANY THE Ghaka

Lisianski Strait as the place where the boats of the St. Paul met
with disaster.
BEGINNING OF HOMEWARD VOYAGE

In accordance with the decision of the council the homeward
voyage was begun. At noon of the 26th Mt. Fairweather was
sighted at a distance of 40 miles, and on the morning of July 27
they made out Ocean Cape where the land falls away to form
Yakutat Bay. On August 1 the Kenai Peninsula came into view,
and Chirikov hauled to the southward. At noon Cape Elizabeth
was 50 miles distant. At noon of August 2, although the St. Paul
was keeping well offshore, the northern end of Afognak Island
was sighted with Mt. Douglas in the distance, and on the 3rd
they caught a glimpse of the high land in the vicinity of Cape
Chiniak. Chirikov now worked to the southward and westward
until the parallel of 53° was reached on the 12th, when he again
hauled to the westward; but a spell of contrary winds and bad
weather set in, and between that date and the 30th the St.
Paul advanced but 100 miles to the westward. On August 31
the wind was fair, and good progress was made until September
4, when Umnak Island and the Islands of Four Mountains were
sighted. At noon the St. Paul was about 25 miles to the south-
ward of the islands, the weather was clear, and as the land seemed
to extend to the southward and westward Chirikov stood in that
direction for two days before continuing west. On September 8
there were many indications that the ship was again approaching
land, and on the 9th they found themselves on soundings. At
sundown it was calm with a dense fog; a cast of the lead showing
only 30 fathoms of water, Chirikov wisely brought his ship to
anchor. During the night they could hear the surf breaking on
the beach, and the lifting of the fog the following morning re-
vealed a rocky shore scarcely a quarter of a mile away. The
St. Paul had anchored in one of the small bights on the south
shore of Adak Island, probably the easternmost one. During
the night the tide was running to the westward, and but for
Chirikov’s prudence the night before the S#. Paul would have
drifted upon the rocks in the fog.

VOYAGE OF THE “ST. PAUL” 347

LANDFALLS IN THE ALEUTIAN ISLANDS

Soon after the fog cleared two men were seen on the beach, and
in a short timeseven baidarkas,each carrying one man, approached
the ship. Gifts were distributed by Chirikov, but the natives
could not be persuaded to come on board. In the afternoon
(September 10) 14 of these skin boats came out to the ship; but
none of the natives would come on board, and Chirikov had no
boats in which to send a party ashore. The log for September 9
has an interesting account of this meeting. Late in the afternoon
of September 10 the wind freshened, heavy squalls came down the
hills, the St. Paul began to drag towards the rocks which lined the
shore, and Chirikov was obliged to cut the cable and put hastily
to sea. For the next four days, until September 14, Chirikov
steered to the southward of west to keep clear of the land, but
on the latter date, being in latitude 50° 31’ with no signs of land,
the course was changed to the northward of west so as to work up
to the 53rd parallel. This course took the St. Paul within 20
miles of Kiska Island on the 16th, but the weather was overcast
and no land was seen.

In the latter part of August, Chirikov found it necessary to
put the crew on short allowance of both food and water, and he
reports that the crew had cooked kasha (a buckwheat mush) but
once a week and on the other six days lived on cold food, with an
allowance of water just sufficient to quench the thirst. These
privations soon sapped the vitality of the men, and on September
16 the log records the death of one man from scurvy and the fact
that many of the men were very ill, Chirikov among the number.

At sundown of September 21 a cast of the lead indicated 60
fathoms, and Chirikov, with his customary prudence, gave orders
to shorten sail and heave to for the night. In the morning land
was sighted, and at noon the S¢. Paul was close under the eastern
shores of Agattu Island. The atmosphere was clear, and they
made out the Semichi Islands and the peaks of Attu in the
distance. By this time all but one of the officers and most of the
crew were down with scurvy, and only a few were able to drag
themselves on deck to work the ship. Chirikov himself was so

348 NOTE TO ACCOMPANY THE CHART

ill that after September 21 he never left the cabin until he was
carried ashore when they made port. The only officer not
confined to his bed was Ivan Elagin, who although affected by the
scurvy would not give up and kept the deck almost continuously.
Chirikov, lying in his bed, worked out the sights and the reckon-
ing and directed Elagin what courses to steer; when according
to their reckoning they had run up their longitude and no land |
was sighted Chirikov gave directions to keep to the westward
close to the 53rd parallel. On October 7 Lieutenant Chikhachev
died, and the next day both Lieutenant Plautin and Navigator
Vrange passed away.

RETURN TO PETROPAVLOVSK

On October 8 they were gladdened by the sight of land, at
noon they recognized the familiar outlines of Cape Shipunski,
and two days later the St. Paul anchored in Avacha Bay. Pro-
fessor de la Croyére died just as the anchor was dropped.
Chirikov was very low, but he was immediately taken ashore,
where he rallied sufficiently to write his report and resume direc-
tion of affairs. He never fully regained his health. Thusended the
eventful voyage of the Sé. Paul. Of her 76 officers and men who
sailed from Avacha Harbor June 4 but 54 returned, and all of
these were suffering from the scurvy.

The voyages of Bering and Chirikov are events of great impor-
tance. These two navigators crossed the Pacific and discovered
the northwestern coast of the American continent at a tremen-
dous cost and in the face of untold difficulties; and a seaman
reads the details of their struggle with increasing respect and
admiration for the men who achieved so great an object with tools
so inadequate for the purpose.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTE

MANUSCRIPT SOURCES

Golder’s “Guide to Materials for American History in Russian
Archives” (Carnegie Instn. Publ. No. 239, Washington, D. C.,
1917) lists all the unpublished documents on this subject that
are to be found in Petrograd and Moscow.

In the Archives of the Ministry of Marine at Petrograd there
are classified under the heading “Captain Commander Bering”
111 bundles of documents, some of which contain between 2,000
and 3,000 pages. In addition there are many other papers in the
archives relating to this subject catalogued under different heads,
such as “Admiralty College,” “Count Apraksin,” and various other
names. These are by no means all the documents. The Hydro-
graphic Section of the Ministry of Marine, the Academy of
Sciences, the Archives of the State, the Ministry of War, and
most of the other archives, both at Petrograd and Moscow, have
manuscript material in this field.

This vast amount of material is, however, out of proportion to
its importance. Many of the 111 bundles associated, with the
name of Bering have nothing whatever to do with him, his work,
or his period, but deal nearly altogether with purely Siberian
affairs of a much later time. In the remaining bundles which do
concern the Bering expeditions, much of the material con-
tained is worthless because of duplication. Each undertaking
went through the hands of several administrative bodies and
bureaus, all of which made copies and comments; by the time a
decision was reached a large number of papers had accumulated
that were merely repetitions of the same subject. To give con-
crete illustrations: The trouble between Spanberg and one of his
lieutenants fills many bundles of documents—the same charge (a
very petty one) being repeated again and again. The petition of

350 BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTE

Bering’s family, after his death, that the pay due him should be
handed over to them makes two or more bundles of affidavits,
copies of certificates, comments of various bureaus, etc. The
good and the worthless material is all tied up together.

In the archives of the Ministry of Marine at Paris there is a
collection of valuable papers as yet unpublished. These are
letters, copies of journals, charts, reports of conversation,
newspaper clippings, and other such material collected by the
members of the Delisle family—all of which throw interesting
side lights on the period and the men. The papers which are
of special importance for this study are those gathered by
Joseph Nicolas Delisle during his twenty-one years’ (1726-
1747) residence at the Russian capital as an officer of the
Academy. Those of his papers which have recently come to
light in the Bibliotheque Nationale have been discussed by
Isnard.

The principal materials for the present work are the original
log books and other naval papers of the navigators. They have all
been preserved except the journal of the Si. Peter, which was lost
at the time of the wreck of the ship. The documents dealing with
Bering’s second expedition have never been published, not even
in Russia, and have been used only once before—by Sokolov for
his study. But even Sokolov was ignorant of the existence
of some of the material. On his return from Petrograd in 1917
the author prided himself on having examined all the docu-
ments, but it seems that he was mistaken. His attention has
recently been called to a reference by Eugen Biichner (“Die
Abbildungen der Nordischen Seekuh,” St. Petersburg, 1891, p. 1)
to “eine handsschriftliche Beschreibung der zweiten Bering’schen
Expedition . . . . die den Schiffs-Capitain Swen Waxell .
zum Verfasser hat,” which is deposited in the Emperor’s pri-
vate library in Tsarskoe Selo. Whether this is merely a copy
of the document here published or something different it is
difficult to say. It cannot be greatly different since the same
man wrote both; however, that is an open question for the
time being.

PUBLISHED SOURCES 351

When the officers returned to Kamchatka they had several
copies made of their papers and forwarded them to the Admir-
alty College. These copies occasionally differ from one another,
as might be expected, because of the copyists; but it is possible to
check up the errors. Many of the expressions then used are now
archaic and can be found only in old Russian and Dutch diction-
aries.

PUBLISHED SOURCES

For the first two decades of the eighteenth century the printed
material is found in the “Pamyatniki Sibirskoi Istorii.” The “Pol-
noe Sobranie Zakonov Rossiiskoi Imperii” contains the instruc-
tions to the officers in Siberia and the navigators. Bering’s report
to the Empress on his first voyage is printed without comment in
Zapiskt Voenno-Topograficheskago Depo. Berkh in his “Per-
voe Morskoe Puteshestvie Rossiyan” edited the log book of the
first voyage which was kept by the midshipman, Peter Chaplin.
Vakhtin in “Russkiye Truzheniki Morya” printed additional docu-
ments on this voyage. Gvozdev’s report and other material
bearing on the sighting of the American coast in 1732 may be
found in Zapiski Hydrograficheskago Departamenta. Steller’s
“Reise von Kamtschatka nach Amerika” is the only original docu-
ment of importance dealing with the second sea voyage which
has up to this time appeared in print.

Miiller, Gmelin, and Krasheninnikov were members of Ber-
ing’s second expedition though they did not go to sea with him.
Their writings may be classed partly as original and partly as
contemporary documents, depending altogether on the topics
which they discuss. About the middle of the nineteenth century
a friendly controversy arose between Karl Ernst von Baer, a
German scholar residing at St. Petersburg, and Lieutenant Soko-
lov of the Russian Navy. In 1848 and 1849 Baer wrote a series of
newspaper articles on Peter the Great’s contribution to the ad-
vancement of geographical knowledge. These papers were trans-
lated into Russian and published in the Proceedings (Zapiskt) of
the Geographical Society in 1849 and 1850. Assoonas they ap-

352 BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTE

peared Sokolov replied to them, heading his papers “Bering and
Chirikov.” His contention was that Chirikov did not receive all
thecredit he merited for the part he took in the Beringexpeditions.
Baer took notice of the attack and defended his position in the
St. Petersburger Zeitung (Nos. 114, I15, 116). The controversy
had this good in it: it stimulated a study of the original docu-
ments, and the results of these researches appeared in the Zap-
iskt Hydrograficheskago Departamenta and brought out many
points unknown before. In 1872 Baer, then eighty years of age,
completed his monograph and summarized the points of the
controversy in an admirable way. Towards the end of the
nineteenth century Lauridsen, a Dane, took up the cudgels in
behalf of Bering.
SECONDARY MATERIALS

Mezhov’s “Bibliographia Sibirica” is the best published work on
the subject but is neither complete nor wholly reliable. A
hitherto unpublished card bibliography of Alaska which has
been prepared by Judge James Wickersham of Juneau is much
better than Mezhov’s for Alaska.

The secondary material is not altogether satisfactory. It is
almost two hundred years since Bering received his commission
to undertake his first voyage, and during that long period only
six men have been sufficiently interested in the subject to give
it careful consideration, either in whole or in part. These men
are Miiller, Coxe, Sokolov, Baer, Bancroft, and Lauridsen. One
of these is a Russian, and the two Germans were in the service of
Russia at the time of their writing. The most important book
in this field is, after all, the third volume of Miiller’s “Sammlung
Russischer Geschichte,” published in 1758. Soon after its appear-
ance this work was translated into Russian, English, and French.
Although since that time much paper and ink have been used up
in telling this story, yet very little that is new has been added to
our knowledge of the subject. Both Russian and non-Russian
scholars have preferred to follow Miiller’s version than to consult
the originals. Miiller’s work, although very valuable, should not
be used as a source, but along with the sources. Miiller was too

REFERENCES 353

much a part of the period to see it in its true proportions. His
judgment of the men of his time is not critical; he usually rates
their deeds at a higher value than they deserve. His lenient
attitude may be partly explained by the fact that many of the
men of whom he was writing, or their friends, were yet alive, and
it was wise not to say anything which might offend.

“Peter’s des Grossen Verdienste um die Erweiterung der
geographischen Kenntnisse,” the monograph by Karl Ernst von
Baer referred to above, gives an excellent summary of the Bering
voyages. It is scholarly, readable, and fair in its judgments.
Lauridsen’s “Vitus Bering” has brought to light many interesting
facts. Bancroft’s “History of Alaska” is of much value and
may be used with profit in connection with the sources. Dall’s
“Critical Review of Bering’s First Expedition” is the first
really critical discussion in English of the first expedition.
There are many helpful papers in the Morskoz Sborntk.
Fischer’s “Sibirische Geschichte,” Slovtsov’s “Istoricheskoe
Obozryenie Sibiri,” and Pallas’ “Neue Nordische Beitrage” have
much important material. The journals of Cook, Lapérouse,
Krusenstern, and other navigators in the North Pacific Ocean
help in understanding the difficulties and problems which con-
fronted the Russian sailors of the seventeenth and eighteenth
centuries.

In conclusion it should be said that nearly all of the manuscript
material used in this work was photostated and is now deposited
in the Library of Congress at Washington, D. C., and the library
of the University of Washington at Seattle. As far as printed
material is concerned, the Yudin Collection of the Library of
Congress is richer for the study of this subject than any library
in Western Europe and, according to the statements of certain
Russian scholars, even than the Imperial Library at Petrograd.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

In the following list of references the author’s original en-
tries have been editorially amplified, classified, and commented
upon. This amplification includes the addition of a number of

354 BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTE

entries, especially the papers published during the first half of
the nineteenth century by Russian students of the subject.
The author has not had occasion to see proofs of the bibliog-
raphy. The titles are grouped by topics in the natural order of
the development of the theme. Within each group the titles
are arranged logically, beginning with the more general ones,
or chronologically. Comment is often added to characterize the
title’s relation to the Bering expeditions. Russian titles are trans-
literated and translated.

History of Siberia

MezuHov, V. I. [on title page in quasi-French transliteration, MEJow].
Bibliographia sibirica: Bibliographie des livres et articles de journaux
russes et étrangers concernant la Sibérie. 4 vols. in three. St. Peters-
burg, 1891-92. [Vol. 2 deals with geography and voyages.]

Akty istoricheskie (Historical documents). Collected and published
by the Archeographical Commission. Vols. I-5, for 1334-1700.
St. Petersburg, 1841-43. Separate index, 1843.

Dopolneniya k aktam istoricheskim (Supplementary historical docu-
ments). Collected and published by the Archeographical Commission.
Vols. I-12, for 1150-1700. St. Petersburg, 1846-72. Separate index
to Vois. I-10, 1875.

Pamyatniki Sibirskoi istorii xviii vyeka (Memoirs for Siberian history
of the eighteenth century). Edited for the Archeographical Commis-
sion by A. I. Timofeev. 2 vols. (Vol. 1, 1700-1713; Vol. 2, 1713-1724).
St. Petersburg, 1882-85.

FIscHER, J. E. Sibirische Geschichte von der Entdekkung Sibiriens bis
auf die Eroberung dieses Landes durch die russischen Waffen. 2 vols.
Acad. of Sci., St. Petersburg, 1768. [Russian edition was published
in 1774 Fischer was one of the scientists who were members of
Bering’s second expedition.]

ANDRYEVICH, V. K. Istoriya Sibiri (History of Siberia). 2 vols. St.
Petersburg, 1889.

SLtovtsov, P. A. Istoricheskoe obozryenie Sibiri (Historical survey of .
Siberia). 2 vols. in one. St. Petersburg, 1886.

Kuznetsov, E. V. Sibirskii lyetopisets. Lyetopis kontsa xvii i nachala
xviii stolyetii, vedennaya v Tobolskye (Annals of Siberia. Annals of
the seventeenth and beginning of the eighteenth century, recorded
in Tobolsk). Tobolsk, 1892.

{Tirov, A. A.] Sibir v xvii vyekye. Sbornik starinnykh Russkikh statei
o Sibiri i prilezhashchikh k ner zemlyakh. S prilozheniem snimka so

REFERENCES 355

starinnoi karty Sibiri. (Siberia in the seventeenth century. A col-
lection of old Russian publications on Siberia and its borderlands,
accompanied by a reproduction of an old map of Siberia.) Edited
by G. Yudin. Moscow, 1890.

Titov, A. A. Tyumen v xvii stolyetii (Tyumen in the seventeenth
century). Published by A. I. Chukmalsina, Moscow, 1903.

SUKACHEV, V. P., edit. Pervoe stolyetie Irkutska (First century of
Irkutsk). St. Petersburg, 1902.

RemeEzov, S. Chertezhnaya kniga Sibiri (Map book of Siberia).
Archeographical Commission, St. Petersburg, 1882. [A modern
reproduction of an atlas of Siberia and the accompanying notes made
at the request of the tsar by Remezov towards the end of the seven-
teenth century. The important general map of Siberia in this atlas is
reproduced in A. E. Nordenskiéld’s Periplus, Stockholm, 1897, P1.37.]

CAHEN, GASTON. Les cartes de la Sibérie au xviiie siécle: Essai de
bibliographie critique. Paris, I9II.

Popov, M. Pervaya morskaya expeditsiya k ustyu ryeki Obi (First
sea expedition to the mouth of the Ob). St. Petersburg, 1907.

Geographical Knowledge of the North Pacific
Prior to Bering’s Expeditions

Nacuop, Oskar. Ein unentdecktes Goldland: Ein Beitrag zur Ge-
schichte der Entdeckungen im nérdlichen Grossen Ocean. Separate
from Mitt. der Deutschen Gesell. fiiy Natur und V dlkerkunde Ostasiens.
[Tokyo, 1900.] [Deals with the voyages of the Spaniard Vizcaino
from Mexico in 1611 and 1612 in search of the rumored gold islands
east of Japan.]

HEERES, J. E., edit. Abel Janszoon Tasman’s journal of his discovery
of Van Diemens Land and New Zealand in 1642, with documents
relating to his exploration of Australia in 1644. Amsterdam, 1898.
[Contains a good brief account of Tasman and Quast’s voyage in
1639 in search of the rumored gold islands, on which they reached
42°N. 600 Dutch miles east of Japan and discovered the Bonin
Islands.]}

Lreupe, P. A., edit. Reize van Maarten Gerritsz[oon] Vries in 1643
naar het noorden en oosten van Japan, volgens het journaal gehouden
door C. J. Coen, op het schip Castricum. Published under the aus-
pices of the Koninklijk Instituut voor Taal-, Land-, en Volkenkunde
van Nederlandsch Indié. Amsterdam, 1858. [First publication of
the journal of Vries’s voyage of 1643.]

TELEKI, Pau. Atlas zur Geschichte der Kartographie der Japanischen
Inseln, nebst dem hollandischen Journal der Reise Mathys Quasts und
A. J. Tasmans zur Entdeckung der Goldinseln im Osten von Japan

356 BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTE

i. d. J. 1639 und dessen deutscher Ubersetzung. Budapest, 1900.
[Contains the complete journal of Quast on Tasman and Quast’s
voyage of 1639 in search of the rumored gold islands east of Japan;
also an account of Vries’s voyage of 1643.]

WITSEN, NicoLaas. Noord en oost Tartaryen, behelzende eene beschry-
ving van verscheidene Tartersche en nabuurige gewesten, in de
noorder en oostelykste deelen van Azién en Europa. 2 vols. 2nd
edit., Amsterdam, 1785. [First edition, 1692.]

Histoire [i. e. Mémoires] de l’ Académie des Sciences [de Paris]. Vols. for
1714, 1720, 1725, 1729. [These volumes contain papers by Guillaume
and Joseph Delisle. The volume for 1720 has one by Guillaume
Delisle, for instance (Détermination géographique de la situation et
de l’étendue des différentes parties de ia terre), in which he excellently
sums up the geographical knowledge of the North Pacific at the time.
In this he advances the opinion that Terra de Yezo is a part of the
continent of Asia and Japan a peninsula of Yezo. From 1699 to 1789
the title of the Mémoires was Histoire.]

VAUGONDY, ROBERT DE. Observations critiques sur les nouvelles décou-
vertes de l’Amiral Fuentes. Paris, 1753. [Bartolomé de Fuentes
was a Spanish admiral who made a voyage in the North Pacific in
1640 to discover a northwest passage. See also the paper by J. N.
Delisle listed on p. 360-361.]

KAEMPFER, ENGELBERT. The history of Japan, giving an account of
the antient and present state and government of that empire. Written
in High Dutch by E. Kaempfer ... and translated from his original
manuscript, never before printed, by J. G. Scheuchzer ... 2 vols.
London, 1728. [One of the accompanying maps shows Kamchatka
and Terra de Yezo as the same land.]

STRAHLENBERG, P. J. von. An historico-geographical description of the
north and eastern parts of Europe and Asia, but more particularly
of Russia, Siberia, and Great Tartary ... Written originally in
High German by Mr. Philip John von Strahlenberg ... London,
1738. Original edition, Stockholm, 1730. [Strahlenberg was a Swedish
officer who was made prisoner by the Russians at the Battle of Pultava.
During his captivity in Siberia, where he enjoyed much freedom of
movement, he made the observations on which this book is based.
The important map of northern Eurasia accompanying the original
edition is reproduced in facsimile in A. E. Nordenskiéld’s Periplus,
Stockholm, 1897, Pl. 38.]

BERNARD, J. F., edit. Recueil de voyages au nord, contenant divers
mémoires trés utiles au commerce et a la navigation. 10 vols. Am-
sterdam, 1725-38. [Vol. 4, published 1732, contains account of re-
port by Jesuits in 1566 of body of land north of Nippon called Yezo.]

CHARLEVOIX, [P. F. X.] DE. Histoire et description générale du Japon.

REFERENCES 357

2 vols. Paris, 1736. [One of the accompanying maps, by Bellin,
“Ingénieur au Dépét des Cartes de la Marine” (facsimile reproduction
as Pl. 15 (1) in Teleki’s atlas, cited above on p. 355), shows Kam-
chatka as called Terra de Yezo by the Japanese.]

RUGE, SOPHUS. Fretum Anian. Dresden, 1873.

Minor Expeditions: Shestakov and Gvozdev

SciBNEv, A. S. Materialy dlya istorii Kamchatki, etc. (Materials for
the history of Kamchatka: Expedition of Shestakov). Morskoi
Sbornik, Vol. 100, Section 2, St. Petersburg, 1869.

GvozDEv, MIKHAEL SPIRIDONOVICH. Report of his voyage of 1732.
Archives of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Papers of Count
Chernishev, 1762-68, No. 367, pp. 46-49. [Manuscript. For published
version, see the present work, pp. 22—24.]

Pjotonsku], A. [S.]. Pokhod geodezista Mikhaila Gvozdeva, etc.
(Journey of the surveyor Mikhail Gvozdev to Bering Strait in 1732).
Morskoi Sbornik, Vol. 4, pp. 389-402, St. Petersburg, 1850. [Discusses
Gvozdev’s voyage mainly on the basis of a preliminary first report
made by him and Skurikhin, another member of the expedition, in
1741.]

Pervyi pokhod Russkikh k Amerikye 1732 goda (First voyage of the
Russians to America in 1732). Zapiski Hydrograficheskago Departa-
menta, Vol. 9, pp. 78-107, St. Petersburg, 1851. [Publishes (pp. 88-
103) Gvozdev’s second report, made to Spanberg in 1743, which is
fuller than the first preliminary report of 1741.]

DELISLE, JOSEPH NicoLas Navigation et découvertes faites par les
Russes dans la Mer Orientale entre les deux voiages du Capitaine
Beerings vers les années 1731 et 1732: Nouvelles connoissances sur
les terres orientales données par Mr. Feodor Ivanitch Soimonof le 1
Mars, 1738. Delisle MSS., No. XXV, 16 and 16K, Archives du Dépot
des Cartes et Plans de la Marine, Paris. [Note, with map, on Gvozdev’s
voyage. Published, with translation, in F. A. Golder: Russian Expan-
sion in the Pacific, 1641-1850, Cleveland, O., 1914, Appendix E,
pp. 298-301; map on Pp. 154.]

Bering’s Expeditions: Accounts of Participanis or Persons Directly Concerned
(a) Manuscript
(See also entries in F. A. Golder: Guide to Materials for
American History in Russian Archives, Carnegie Instn. Publ.
No. 239, Washington, D. C., 1917, especially pp. 116-135)

CHAPLIN, PETER. Journal and log book of Bering’s first expedition.
Archives of the Hydrographic Section of the Ministry of Marine,

358 BIBLIOGRAPHIGAL: NOTE

Petrograd: Nautical Journals, 1725-1731, No. 641. [For abridged
published version, see book by Berkh, 1832, listed below on p. 363.]
BERING, Vitus. Report on his first expedition. Archives of the General
Staff, Petrograd: Section X, No. 566. [For published version, see
reference listed below on p. 359 and translation of the report in

the present work, pp. 9-20.]

YUSHIN, KHARLAM. Log book of the St. Peter. Archives of the Hydro-
graphic Section of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Nautical
Journals, 1741, 1742, Nos. 642, 643, 644. [Photostat copies in the
Library of Congress, Washington, D. C., and the library of the Uni-
versity of Washington, Seattle, Wash.]

KHITROV, SOFRON. Log book of the St. Peter. Archives of the Imperial
Academy of Science, Petrograd: MS. No. 120, 32: 16: 19. [Photostat
copy in the library of the University of Washington, Seattle, Wash.]

KHITROV, SOFRON. Log book of the St. Peter [another copy]. Archives
of State, Petrograd, XXIV, No. 9. [Photostat copy in Library of
Congress, Washington, D. C.]

WAXEL, SVEN. Report on voyage of the St. Peter. Archives of the
Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Papers of the Admiralty College,
Bundle No. 2. [Photostat copies in the Library of Congress, Wash-
ington, D. C., and the library of the University of Washington,
Seattle, Wash.]

Log book of the St. Paul. Archives of the Hydrographic Section of
the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Nautical Journals, 1741-1743,
Nos. 645-648.

Journal of the St. Paul. Archives of the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd:
Papers of the Admiralty College, Bundle No. 16.

CHIRIKOV, ALEXEI. Report on the voyage of the St. Paul. Archives of
the Ministry of Marine, Petrograd: Papers of Captain Commander
Bering, Bundle No. 44. [Photostat copies of all three St. Paul doc-
uments are in the Library of Congress, Washington, D. C., and the
library of the University of Washington, Seattle, Wash.]

Delisle Manuscripts. Archives du Dépdt des Cartes et Plans de la
Marine, Paris. [See under Delisle, J. N., above, p. 357, and below,
this page, and, under Isnard, p. 361.]

(b) Published

Markov, L. N., edit. Razskazy Nartova o Petrye Velikom (Nartov’s
narratives about Peter the Great). Acad. of Sci., St. Petersburg,
1891. [A. K. Nartov (1683-1756) was almost in constant attendance
on the Emperor during his last days, and records his own words
concerning his plans for Bering’s first expedition.]

DELISLE, JoSEPH NIcoLAs. Explication de la carte de la Mer Orientale
dressée pour montrer le plus court chemin de 1’Asie 4 l’Amérique.

REFERENCES 359

Lue a l’Académie [des Sciences de St. Pétersbourg] l’an 1732. Delisle
MSS., No. XXV, 14, Archives du Dépét des Cartes et Plans de
la Marine, Paris. [Memoir explaining the map (Delisle MSS.,
XXVI, 3B) which was given to Bering on his second expedition;
De Gama and Company Lands were indicated on it. Original memoir,
with translation, published in F. A. Golder: Russian Expansion in
the Pacific, 1641-1850, Cleveland, O., 1914, Appendix F, pp. 302-313.]

Donesenie Flota Kapitana Beringa ob ekspeditsii ego k vostochnym
beregam Sibiri (Report of Fleet Captain Bering on his expedition to
the eastern coast of Siberia). Zapiski Voenno-Topograficheskago
Depo, Vol. 10, pp. 69-75 (report) and 77-79 (tables), St. Petersburg,
1847. [For a translation from the original manuscript, see the present
work, pp. 9—-20.]

MULLER, GERHARD FRIEDRICH. Nachrichten von Seereisen und zur
See gemachten Entdeckungen, die von Russland aus langs den Kiisten
des Eismeeres und auf dem 6stlichen Weltmeere gegen Japan und
Amerika geschehen sind, zur Erlauterung einer bei der Academie
der Wissenschaften vertertigten Landkarte. In series: Sammlung
Russischer Geschichte (9 vols., Acad. of Sci., St. Petersburg, 1732-
1764), Vol. 3, Parts 1-3, St. Petersburg, 1758. [This is the most im-
portant account by a contemporary. Miiller was one of the scientists
who were members of Bering’s second expedition. He did not go to
sea with him, however.]

MULLER, GERHARD FRIEDRICH. Voyages from Asia to America for
completing the discoveries of the north west coast of America. To
which is prefixed a summary of the voyages made by the Russians
on the Frozen Sea in search of a north east passage. Serving as an
explanation of a map of the Russian discoveries, published by the
Academy of Sciences at Petersburgh. Translated from the High Dutch
of S. [i. e. G.] Muller . . . By Thomas Jefferys . . . London, 1761.
[Translation of the author’s German work.]

MULiter, GERHARD FRIEDRICH. Voyages et découvertes faites par les
Russes le long des cétes de la Mer Glaciale et sur l’Océan Oriental,
tant vers le Japon que vers |l’Amérique. Ouvrage traduit de l’allemand
de Mr. G. P. [sic] Muller, par C. G. F. Dumas. 2 vols. Amsterdam,
1766. [Translation of the author’s German work. The accompanying
map, which shows the results of Bering’s expeditions as well as the
tracks of his vessels, is reproduced in facsimile in A. E. Nordenskidld’s
Periplus, Stockholm, 1897, Fig. 42 on p. 98.]

STELLER, GEORG WILHELM. Beschreibung von dem Lande Kam-
tschatka, dessen Einwohnern, deren Sitten, Nahmen, Lebensart und
verschiedenen Gewohnheiten, hrsg. von J. B. S. . . . Frankfort and
Leipzig, 1774.

STELLER, GEORG WILHELM. Reise von Kamtschatka nach Amerika

360 BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTE

mit dem Commandeur-Capitan Bering. Ein Pendant zu dessen
Beschreibung von Kamtschatka. St. Petersburg, 1793. Also in P. S.
Pallas: Neue Nordische Beitrige, Vol. 5, pp. 129-236; Vol. 6, pp. 1-26,
Leipzig, 1795. [Translated in Vol. 2 of the present work.]

GMELIN, JOHANN GEORG. Reise durch Sibirien, von dem Jahr 1733 bis
1743. (In series: Sammlung Neuer und Merkwiirdiger Reisen zu
Wasser und zu Lande, Parts 4-7). 4 vols. in two. G6ttingen, 1751—
52. [Gmelin was one of the scientists who were members of Bering’s
second expedition. He took part only in the land expedition, and
did not go to sea with him.]

CMELIN, JOHANN GEORG. Voyage au Kamtschatka par la Sibérie.
In A. F. Prévost: Histoire générale des voyages, Vol. 24, pp. 94-
499, The Hague, 1779. [Translation of the author’s German work.]

[KRASHENINNIKOV, STEPAN PETROVICH.] The history of Kamtschatka
and the Kurilski Islands, with the countries adjacent; illustrated
with maps and cuts. Published at Petersbourg in the Russian language,
by order of Her Imperial Majesty, and translated into English by
James Grieve, M.D. _London, 1764. [Krasheninnikov was one of
the scientists who were members of Bering’s second expedition.
He did not go to sea with him, however. An abridged translation
from the Russian original, which was published in 1755. A complete
translation of the original appeared in French at Amsterdam in 1770.
A second Russian edition was published in 1786.]

Pauuas, P. S. Nachrichten von den russischen Entdeckungen zwischen
Asia und Europa. Biisching’s Magazin fiir die Neue Historie und
Geographie, Vol. 16, pp. 235-286. Halle, 1782.

DELISLE, JOSEPH NICOLAS. Explication de la carte des nouvelles dé-
couvertes au nord de la Mer du Sud. Paris, 1752. Accompanied by
a map: Carte des nouvelles découvertes au nord de la Mer du Sud,
tant a l’est de la Sibérie et du Kamtchatka, qu’a l’ouest de la Nouvelle
France, dressée sur les mémoires de Mr. Del’ Isle . . . par Philippe
Buache (facsimile reproduction as Pl. 14 (1) in Teleki’s atlas, cited
above on p. 355). [Contains a paper read by J. N. Delisle after his
return from his twenty-one years’ stay in St. Petersburg (1726-1747)
before the Paris Academy of Sciences on April 8, 1750, entitled “Nou-
velles découvertes au nord de la Mer du Sud.” In this paper Delisle
said that Bering was wrecked on an island and had not been in America,
while Chirikov and Delisle de la Croyére had touched on the Amer-
ican coast. This statement was probably made in good faith because
Delisle did not know the true facts of the voyage of the St. Peter,
many of the original journals and charts still being in Siberia and
the Admiralty College probably not yet having given out accurate
information. ]

DELISLE, JOSEPH NIcoLAs. Nouvelles cartes des découvertes de l’amiral

REFERENCES 361

de Fonte et autres navigateurs . . . dans les mers septentrionales,
avec leur explication. Paris, 1753. [Accompanied by a map on which
the discoveries of Bering and Chirikov, whose tracks are shown, are
correlated with the alleged discoveries along the northwestern coast
of North America of the Spanish navigator Bartolomé de Fuentes
in 1640. A facsimile of this map accompanies A. W. Greely’s paper,
listed on p. 367, as Pl. 21, Natl. Geogr. Magaz., Vol. 3, 1891.]

ISNARD, ALBERT. Joseph-Nicolas Delisle: Sa biographie et sa collection
de cartes géographiques a la Bibliothéque Nationale. Bull. Section de
Géogr., Comité des Travaux Hist. et Sci., Vol. 30, 1915, pp. 34-164.
Minist. de l’Instruction Publ. et des Beaux-Arts, Paris. [Of the
collection of manuscripts and maps brought back to Paris by Delisle
from his twenty-one years’ stay in St. Petersburg (1726-1747) one
part was deposited in the archives of the Dépdt des Cartes et Plans
de la Marine. Reference is made to these above, on p. 358. The
remaining part was deposited in the Bibliothéque Royale. These, long
missing, have recently been found. They are now in the Section
Géographique of the Bibliothéque Nationale and are described and
listed in the present paper. The collection contains first-hand copies
of maps of Bering’s route on his first expedition from Tobolsk to
Bering Strait (Nos. 165, 166, 166 bis, 167).]

OmontT, H. Lettres de J.-N. Delisle au Comte de Maurepas et a l’Abbé
Bignon sur ses travaux géographiques en Russie (1726-1730). Bull.
Section de Géogr., Comité des Travaux Hist. et Sci., Vol. 32, 1917, pp.
130-164. Minist. de l’Instruction Publ. et des Beaux-Arts, Paris.
iSeven letters, of which five from Delisle to the then Minister of Ma-
rine and to the librarian of the Bibliothéque Royale, informing them
of his activities during the first years of his sojourn in Russia. Letters
IiI and VII, on pp. 141-147 and 160-162, deal at first hand with
Bering’s first expedition and the state of geographical knowledge cf
the North Pacific prior to that expedition, including von Strahlen-
berg’s studies (see above, p. 356). “C’est du capitaine Beerings
luy-méme, qui est icy de retour depuis quelques mois, que j’ay appris
ce que je viens d’en marquer A Votre Grandeur” (Letter VII, dated
June 25, 1730).]

FROIDEVAUX, HENRI. Les études géographiques de Joseph-Nicolas
Delisle sur l’7Empire Russe. La Géographie, Vol. 33, 1920, pp. 219-228.
Paris. [An abstract of the papers by Isnard and Omont listed above.]

BUACHE, PHILIPPE. Considérations géographiques et physiques sur les
nouvelles découvertes au nord de la grande mer appelée vulgairement
la Mer du Sud, avec des cartes qui y sont relatives. Paris, 1753.
[Buache, who was “Premier Géographe du Roy” and in close touch
with J. N. Delisle, in this memoir discusses the geography of the
North Pacific mainly as established by Bering’s expeditions. The

362 BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTE

memoir is accompanied by 13 maps, of which two are reproduced in
facsimile as Figs. Io and II on pp. 140 and 141 of Teleki’s atlas, cited
above on p. 355.]

[WAXEL, SVEN](?). Lettre d’un officier de la marine russienne a un
Seigneur de la Cour concernant la carte des nouvelles découvertes au
nord de la Mer du Sud, et la mémoire qui y sert d’explication, publiée
par M. de I'Isle a Paris en 1752. Traduit de l’original russe. Berlin,
1753. [In this anonymous pamphlet the origin and inception of the
Bering expeditions are discussed and exception is taken to J. N.
Delisle’s statement (see entry on p. 360) that Bering had not
reached America. From internal evidence A. W. Greely (p. 222 of
paper listed on p. 367) concludes that Sven Waxel was the author.
Long quotations from the pamphlet are there given in translation.
A careless English translation appeared in London in 1754.]

Near-Contemporary Accounts of Bering’s Expeditions,
and Compendiums

Du HALDE, JEAN BAPTISIE. Description géographique, historique,
chronologique, politique, et physique de l’empire de la Chine et de
la Tartarie chinoise ...4 vols. The Hague, 1736. [Vol. 4, p. 562,
contains Bering’s report on his first voyage. In the atlas to accompany
Du Halde’s work (J. B. B. d’Anville’s Nouvel atlas de la Chine,
de la Tartarie chinoise et du Thibet, The Hague, 1737) is reproduced
Bering’s original map of his first voyage. This map, which he made
in Moscow in 1731, was presented by the Russian government to
the King of Poland, who gave it to the Jesuit father Du Halde. It
is from a copy of this map for use in Sweden that our Fig. 5 is repro-
duced.]

WEBER, ————. Das neuverdnderte Russland. At least 3 vcls. Frank-
fort and Leipzig, 1744. [Weber, who knew and associated with Bering,
in this account follows verbatim a report of Bering’s first expedition
which appeared in the Copenhagen periodical Nye Tidende immedi-
ately after Bering’s return in March, 1730, and which Lauridsen
(work cited on p. 366) ascribes to Bering himself.]

HARRIS, JOHN, edit. Navigantium atque itinerantium bibliotheca. Or,
a complete collection of voyages and travels. Consisting of above
six hundred of the most authentic writers . . . Originally published
. . . by John Harris . . .'2 vols. London, 1744-1748. |Vola2 ype
1018-1022, contains an account, by John Campbell, based on Bering’s
report, of his first expedition and, facing p. 1016, a reproduction of his
map.]

CHAPPE D’AUTEROCHE, JEAN. Voyage en Sibérie, fait par ordre du roi
en 1761; contenant les mceurs, les usages des Russes, et l'état actual

REFERENCES 363

de cette puissance; la description géographique et le nivellement de
la route de Paris 4 Tobolsk. 2 vols. in three, and atlas. Paris, 1768.
[Vol. 2 contains a translation of Krasheninnikov’s history of Kam-
chatka.]

[SCHERER, J. B.] (?) Neue Nachrichten von denen neuentdekten Insuln in
der See zwischen Asien und Amerika; aus mitgetheilten Urkunden
und Ausziigen verfasset von J. L.S. . Hamburg and Leipzig, 1776.
[Attributed to J. B. Scherer, who wrote the introduction to and
edited Steller’s “Beschreibung von dem Lande Kamtschatka,” 1774.]

Coxe, WILLIAM. Account of the Russian discoveries between Asia and
America. To which are added the conquest of Siberia and the
history of the transactions and commerce between Russia and China.
With Supplement: A comparative view of the Russian discoveries
with those made by Captains Cook and Clerke. 3d edit., London,
1787. [Important book. The author lived in Russia during the
second half of the eighteenth century. In his account of the Russian
voyages up to and including the Bering period, he follows Miiller
closely. Earlier edition, 1780.]

HALLAGER, MoRTEN, comp. Udférlige og troeverdige efterretninger
om de fra Rusland af langs med kysterne af lishavet til sdes giorte
opdagelser; tilligemed de i russiske tieneste vzrende danske sé6e-
officerers, commandeur-capitain Vitus Berings og capitain Morten
Spangbergs sGe-reiser, foretagne i aarene 1728, 1729, 1738, 1741 til
1743, paa det dstlige ocean fra Kamtschatka af til Japon og Amerika;
samt en beskrivelse over de siden den tid i dette hav fundne Ger

. uddragne af ovenmeldte sdefareres dagbéger og af Statsraad
Miillers, Adjunctus Stellers, Prof. de I’Isle’s, Dr. Pallas’s beretninger
og Skrifter. . . Copenhagen, 1784.

FORSTER, JOHANN REINHOLD. History of the voyages and dis-
coveries made inthe North. Translated from the German. London,

1786,
BurNEY, JAmMes. A chronological history of the discoveries in the
South Sea or Pacific Ocean ... 5 vols. London, 1803-17.

BurRNEY, JAMES. A chronological history of north-eastern voyages of
discovery; and of the early eastern navigations of the Russians.
London, 1819.

Modern Discussions of Bering’s Expeditions

BERKH, VASILI N. Pervoe morskoe puteshestvie Rossiyan, predprinyatoe
dlya ryesheniya geograficheskoi zadachi, Soedinyaetsya li Aziya s
Amerikoyu? i sovershennoe v 1727, 28 i 29 godakh pod nachalstvom
Flota Kapitana I-go ranga Vitusa Beringa (First sea voyage of the

364. BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTE

Russians undertaken for settling this geographical problem, Are
Asia and America united? and performed in 1727-1729, under the
command of Captain of the first rank Vitus Bering). Imp. Acad. of
Sci. Press, St. Petersburg, 1823. [The leading discussion of the first
expedition, based on a study of the archives. It includes an abridged
version of the log book kept by midshipman Peter Chaplin and a
map showing the route of the sea voyage, reproduced in Fig. 6 of the
present work.]

PoLonsxil, A. S. Pervaya Kamchatskaya Ekspeditsiya Beringa,
1725-29 goda (First Kamchatka Expedition of Bering, 1725-29).
Zapiski Hydrograficheskago Departamenta, Vol. 8, pp. 535-556, St.
Petersburg, 1850. [Contains Spanberg’s and Chirikov’s arguments
as to proceeding farther after expedition had reached 67° 18’ N. See
the present work, p. I9.]

P[otonski], A. [S.]. Pervaya Kamchatskaya Ekspeditsiya Beringa,
1725-29 goda (First Kamchatka Expedition of Bering, 1725-29).
Otechestveniya Zapiski, 1851, No. 3.

Naznachenie pervoi Beringovoi ekspeditsii (Destination of Bering’s
first expedition). Zapiski Hydrograficheskago Departamenta, Vol. 9,
pp. 642-644, St. Petersburg, 1851.

BERKH, VASILI N. Puteshestvie Kap. Komandora Beringa i Kap.
Chirikova, etc. (Voyage of Capt. Commander Bering and Capt.
Chirikov to the northwest coast of America: Second expedition).
Blagonamyerennyi Zhurnal, Vol. 2, 1818, No. 6(?), St. Petersburg.

BAER, KARL ERNST VON. Zaslugi Petra Velikago po chasti rasprostrane-
niya geograficheskikh poznanii o Rossii i pogranichnikh s neyu zem-
lyakh Azii (The merits of Peter the Great in the extension of geo-
graphical knowledge about Russia and her Asiatic frontier regions).
Zapiski Russkago Geograficheskago Obshchestva, Vol. 3, 1849, pp. 217-
253; Vol. 4, 1850, pp. 260-283. [Read at the meeting of Jan. 14,
1848, of the Russian Geographical Society. This was the paper which
led to the friendly controversy between von Baer and Sokolov as
to the relative merits of Bering and Chirikov which is reflected in
the entries that follow.]

SOKOLOV, ALEKSANDR. Bering i Chirikov. Svyevernaya Pchela, 1849,
No. 98 (May 5), pp. 391-392; No. 99 (May 6), pp. 395-396, St.
Petersburg. [In reply to von Baer’s article in Zapiski Russ. Geogr.
Obshch., Vols. 3 and 4, 1849-50. Also published separately, 13 pp.,
St. Petersburg, 1849.]

BAER, KARL ErRNst von. [Bering und Tschirikow](?) St. Petersburger
Zeitung, 1849, Nos. 114, 115, 116. [Reply to Sokolov’s article in
Syevernaya Pchela, 1849, Nos. 98 and 99.]

BAER, KARL ERNST VON. Bering i Chirikov. Russkii Invalid ili Voenniya
Vyedomosti, 1849, Nos. 121, 122, 123, St. Petersburg. [Russian

REFERENCES 365

translation of von Baer’s article in St. Petersburger Zeitung, 1849,
Nos. 114-116.]

SOKOLOV, ALEKSANDR. [Reply to Mr. Baer of the Academy of Sciences.]
Syevernaya Pchela, 1849, No. 133, St. Petersburg. [Reply to von
Baer’s translated article in Russkit Invalid, 1849, Nos. 121-123.]

SOKOLOV, ALEKSANDR. Syevernaya ekspeditsiya, 1733-43 goda (The
northern expeditions, 1733-43). Zapiskit Hydrograficheskago Departa-
menta, Vol. 9, pp. 190-469, St. Petersburg, 1851. [The leading dis-
cussion of the second expedition, based on a study of the archives.
It contains a map on Mercator’s projection, equatorial scale I:
17,500,000, showing Bering’s and Chirikov’s tracks according to
their own calculations, and Khitrov’s map of Kayak Island, both
reproduced by Lauridsen in his “Vitus Bering,” cited on p. 366.]

SoKOLOv, ALEKSANDR. Primyechaniya, etc. (Remarks on the ‘Account
of the Northern Expeditions, 1733-43,’ published in Vol. 9 of the
Journ. of the Hydrographic Department). Morskot Sbornik, Vol. 25,
No. 13, Section 4, pp. 103-105, St. Petersburg, 1856.

Astronomicheskie i geodezicheskie instrumenty Delil-de-la Kroera,
vtoroi Kamchatskoi ekspeditsii (Astronomical and geodetic instru-
ments used by Delisle de la Croyére on the second Kamchatka expedi-
tion). Zapiski Hydrograficheskago Departamenta, Vol. 7, pp. 537-542,
St. Petersburg, 1849.

BERKH, VASILI N. Biograficheskoe svyedenie 0 Kapitan-Komandorye
Vitusye Beringye (Biographical sketch of Capt. Commander Vitus
Bering). Syevernyi Arkhiv, Vol. 6, No. 8, St. Petersburg, 1823.

BERKH, VASILI N. Zhizneopisaniya pervykh rossiiskikh admiralov, etc.
(Biographies of the first Russian admirals, or an attempt at the
history of the Russian Navy). 4 vols., St. Petersburg, 1831-36.

BarER, KARL ERNST VON. Peter’s des Grossen Verdienste um die Er-
weiterung der geographischen Kenntnisse. (In series: Beitrage zur
Kenntnis des russischen Reiches, Vol. 16.) St. Petersburg, 1872.

STEJNEGER, LEONHARD. Contributions to the history of the Com-
mander Islands, No. 1: Notes on the natural history, including de-
scriptions of new cetaceans. Proc. U. S. Natl. Museum, Vol. 6, 1883,
pp. 58-89.

STEJNEGER, LEONHARD. Contributions to the history of the Com-
-mander Islands, No. 2: Investigations relating to the date of the
extermination of Steller’s sea-cow. Proc. U. S. Natl. Museum, Vol. 7,
1884, pp. 181-189.

STEJNEGER, LEONHARD. Fra det yderste Osten. Naturen, Vol. 8, 1884,
pp. 65-69. Christiania.

STEJNEGER, LEONHARD. Eine Umsegelung der Bering’s-Insel, Herbst
1882. Deutsche Geogr. Blétter, Vol. 3, 1885, pp. 225-273. Bremen.

[DAHLGREN, E. W.] Berings karta dfver Sibirien. Yer, Vol. 4, 1884,

366 BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTE

pp. 93-94. [On copies in Sweden of Bering’s map of his first
expedition.]

NORDENSKIOLD, A. E. Den foérsta pa verkliga iakttagelser grundade
karta O6fver norra Asien. Ymer, Vol. 7, 1887, pp. 133-144. Stockholm.

BANCROFT, H. H. Alaska, 1730-1885. (In his “History of the Pacific
States of North America,” San Francisco, 1882-90, Vol. 28.) San
Francisco, 1886. [Bering’s voyages are treated in Chapters 3-5.
There is a valuable but undifferentiated list of “Authorities quoted,”
pp. xxiii—xxxviii.]

LAURIDSEN, PETER. Vitus Jonassen Bering. Geografisk Tidskrift, Vol.
6, 1862, pp. 89-98. Copenhagen. [A study preliminary to Lauridsen’s
major work, listed in the next entry. This paper discusses the first
expedition only.]

LAURIDSEN, PETER. Vitus I. Bering og de russiske opdagelsesrejser
fra 1725-43. Copenhagen, 1885. [The Danish original of the next
entry, which see. Reviewed by A. E. Nordenskidld in Journ. Amer.
Geogr. Soc., Vol. 17, 1885, pp. 285—298.]

LAURIDSEN, PETER. Vitus Bering, the discoverer of Bering Strait.
Revised by the author, and translated from the Danish by Julius
E. Olson. . . . With an introduction to the American edition by Fred-
erick Schwatka. . . . Chicago, 1889. [An apologia of Bering. In spite
of this bias it is valuable as one of the first West European discussions
of the subject taking the Russian sources into consideration. The
author had access to the Russian archives in 1883, but even with
the assistance received from Admiral Wessalgo, then director of the
Hydrographic Section of the Ministry of Marine, and others, the
handicap of incomplete familiarity with Russian could not be entirely
overcome. Lauridsen reproduces (map III) in quasi-facsimile from
Sokolov, Zapiski Hydrogr. Dept., Vol. 9, combined, the tracks of the
St. Peter and the St. Paul from the original charts of Waxel and Khitrov
and of Chirikov. But, as the accumulated error in longitude of the
ship’s position in each case is not prorated but is thrown into one
day, the two tracks are not properly related to each other. However,
the map is of importance as representing the navigators’ own con-
ception of their tracks. Lauridsen also reproduces (map IV), from the
same publication, Khitrov’s map of Kayak Island from his journal.]

VAKHTIN, V. Russkiye truzheniki morya. Pervaya morskaya eks-
peditsiya Beringa, etc. (Russian self-sacrificing navigators. Bering’s
first expedition, etc.). St. Petersburg, 1890. [Publishes documents on
the first voyage.]

DaLL, W. H. Alaska and its resources. Boston, 1870. [Pp. 297-301
refer to Bering’s voyages.]

Dat, W. H. Notes on an original chart of Bering’s expedition of 1725-
1730, and on an original manuscript chart of his second expedition;

REFERENCES 367

together with a summary of a journal of the first expedition, kept
by Peter Chaplin, and now first rendered into English from Bergh’s
Russian version. Appendix No. 19, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey
Rept. for 1890, pp. 759-774. Washington, D. C., 1891. [Valuable
because it makes easily accessible Chaplin’s journal of Bering’s first
expedition. The translation is from the work by Berkh listed above
on p. 363. Of the accompanying facsimile of the map of the first
expedition the eastern section is reproduced in our Fig. 5. The likewise
accompanying map of the second expedition is a facsimile of a manu-
script chart by Sven Waxel showing the discoveries of that expedition.]

DALL, W. H. A critical review of Bering’s first expedition, 1725-30,
together with a translation of his original report upon it. Natl. Geogr.
Mag., Vol. 2, 1890, pp. 111-169. [The first modern discussion in
English of Bering’s first expedition based on a critical consideration
of the sources available at the time of publication.]

GREELY, A. W. The cartography and observations of Bering’s first
voyage. Natl. Geogr. Mag., Vol. 3, 1891-92, pp. 205-230. [Important
critical remarks on some of the sources, based on copies in the author’s
possession.]

Scuotr, C. A. On the magnetic observations of Bering during his first
expedition. Appendix No. 5, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey Rept.
for 1891. Washington, D. C., 1892. Reprinted from U. S. Coast
and Geodetic Survey Bull. 20.

DAVIDSON, GEORGE. The tracks and landfalls of Bering and Chirikof
on the northwest coast of America from the point of their separation
in latitude 49° 10’, longitude 176° 40’ west, to their return to the
same meridian, June, July, August, September, October, 1741.
[San Francisco], 1901. Also published in Trans. and Proc. Geogr. Soc.
of the Pacific, Ser. 2, Vol. 1. [Accompanied by an important map
showing the tracks of the St. Peter and St. Paul, east of the point
of their separation, adjusted to the actual outline of the Alaskan
coast. The sources used for plotting the ship’s positions are not
indicated in the text.]

GoLpER, F. A. Russian expansion on the Pacific, 1641-1850: An ac-
count of the earliest and later expeditions made by the Russians
along the Pacific coast of Asia and North America, including some
related expeditions to the Arctic regions. Cleveland, 1914. [Ber-
ing’s voyages are dealt with in Chapters VI and VIII, Terra de Yezo
in Chapter V, and Gvozdev’s voyage in Chapter VII.]

Later Voyages to the Same Region Which Shed Light on the Conditions
Under Which Bering’s Expeditions Were Made

Coox, JAMES. A voyage to the Pacific Ocean. Undertaken, by the

368 BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTE

command of His Majesty, for making discoveries in the Northern
hemisphere, to determine the position and extent of the west side
of North America; its distance from Asia; and the practicability of
a northern passage to Europe. Performed under the direction of
Captains Cook, Clerke, and Gore, in His Majesty’s ships the Reso-
lution and Discovery, in the years 1776, 1777, 1778, 1779, and 1780.
Vol. 1 and 1 written by Captain James Cook, F.R.s. Vol. III by
Captain James King, L.u.p. and F.R.S. Published by order of the
Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty. 3 vols. and atlas. London,
1784.

Drxon, GEORGE. A voyage round the world; but more particularly
to the north-west coast of America; performed in 1785, 1786, 1787,
and 1788, in the King George and Queen Charlotie, Captains Portlock
and Dixon... « -Jvondon, 1760:

SHELEKHOV, GRIGORII. Grigori Schelechof russischen Kaufmanns erste
und zweyte Reise von Ochotsk in Siberien durch den 6stlichen Ocean
nach den Kiisten von Amerika in den Jahren 1783 bis 1789. Nebst
umstindlicher Beschreibung der von ihm neuentdeckten Inseln
Kiiktak, Afagnak und mehrerer andrer, zu welchen selbst der be-
riihmte Cap. Cook nicht gekommen und die sich der russischen Herr-
schaft unterworfen haben. Aus dem Russischen iibersetzt von J. Z.
Logan. St. Petersburg, 1793.

LAPEROUSE, JEAN FRANCOIS DE GALAUP, Comte DE. Voyage de La
Pérouse autour du monde, publié conformément au décrit du 22
avril 1791, et rédigé par M. L. A. Millet-Mureau. 4 vols. and atlas.
Paris, £707:

SAUER, MARTIN. An account of a geographical and astronomical ex-
pedition to the northern parts of Russia, for ascertaining the degrees
of latitude and longitude of the mouth of the river Kovima; of the
whole coast of the Tshutski, to East Cape; and of the islands in the
eastern ocean, stretching to the American coast. Performed ... by
Commodore Joseph Billings, in the years 1785, etc., to 1794. The
whole narrated from the original papers. London, 1802. [Reference,
p. 194, to a native met with on Billings’ expedition who remembered
Bering’s landing on Kayak Island.]

SARYCHEV, GAvRuL. Account of a voyage of discovery to the north-
east of Siberia, the Frozen Ocean, and the north-east sea. 2 vols.
in one. Translated from the Russian. London, 1806-07. [Gives an
account of the meeting, on Billings’ expedition, of a native who
remembered Bering’s landing on Kayak Island.]

VANCOUVER, GEORGE. A voyage of discovery to the North Pacific
Ocean, and round the world, in which the coast of north-west Amer-
ica has been carefully examined and accurately surveyed. Under-
taken by His Majesty’s command, principally with a view to ascertain

REFERENCES 369

the existence of any navigable communication between the North
Pacific and North Atlantic oceans; and performed in the years 1790,
I79I, 1792, 1793, 1794, and 1795, in the Discovery, sloop of war,
and armed tender Chatham, under the command of Captain George
Vancouver .. . 3 vols. and atlas. London, 1798.

BROUGHTON, W. R. A voyage of discovery to the North Pacific Ocean,
in which the coast of Asia, from the lat. of 35° north to the lat. of
52° north, the island of Insu (commonly known under the name
of the land of Jesso,) the north, south, and east coasts of Japan, the
Lieuchieux and the adjacent isles, as well as the coast of Corea,
have been examined and surveyed. Performed in His Majesty’s
sloop Providence and her tender, in the years 1795, 1796, 1797, 1798.
London, 1804.

KRUSENSTERN, A. J. VON. Voyage round the world, in the years 1803,
1804, 1805, and 1806, by order of His Imperial Majesty Alexander
the First, on board the ships Nadeshda and Neva, under the command
of Captain A. J. von Krusenstern. . . . Translated from the original
German, by Hoppner. 2 vols. in one. London, 1813.

LANGspDoRFF, G. H. VON. Voyages and travels in various parts of the
world, during the years 1803, 1804, 1805, 1806, and 1807. 2 vols.
London, 1813-14. [Translation of the author’s “Bemerkungen auf
einer Reise um die Welt,” Frankfort, 1812.]

KOTZEBUE, OTTO VON. A voyage of discovery, into the South Sea and
Beering’s Straits, for the purpose of exploring a north-east passage,
undertaken in the years 1815-1818, at the expense of His Highness
. . . Count Romanzoff, in the ship Rurick, under the command of
the lieutenant in the Russian imperial navy, Ctto von Kotzebue
eg vols. London, 1821.

CuHoris, Louis. Voyage pittoresque autour du monde, avec des por-
traits de sauvages d’Amérique, d’Asie, d’Afrique, et des tles du Grand
Océan. Paris, 1822. [Choris accompanied Kotzebue’s expedition as
artist.]

WRANGELL, FERDINAND VON. Narrative of an expedition to the Polar
Sea, in the years 1820, 1821, 1822, and 1823. Edited by Major Edward
Sabine. . . . London, 1840. [Translated from G. Engelhardt’s German
translation of the then unpublished Russian manuscript.]

BEECHEY, F. W. Narrative of a voyage to the Pacific and Beering’s
Strait, to co-operate with the polar expeditions, performed in His
Majesty’s ship Blossom, under the command of Captain F. W. Beechey

. in the years 1825, 26, 27, 28. 2 vols. London, 1831.

DOBELL, PETER. Travels in Kamtchatka and Siberia; with a narrative
of a residence in China. 2 vols. London, 1830.

MIpDpDENDOoRFF, A. T. VON. Reise in den dussersten Norden und Osten
Sibiriens wahrend der Jahre 1843 und 1844, mit allerhGchster Genehmi-

370 BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTE

gung auf Veranstaltung der k. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu
St. Petersburg ausgefiihrt und in Verbindung mit vielen Gelehrten
herausgegeben. 4 vols. in seven, and atlas. Acad. of Sci., St. Peters-
burg, 1847-1875.

KiTTLitz, F. H. von. Denkwiirdigkeiten einer Reise nach dem rus-
sischen Amerika, nach Mikronesien und durch Kamtschatka. 2 vols.
Gotha, 1858.

NORDENSKIOLD, A. E. The voyage of the Vega round Asia and Europe;
with a historical review of previous journeys along the north coast of
the Old World. Translated [from the Swedish] by Alexander Leslie.
2 vols. London, 1881. [Chapter 13 contains references to Bering’s
voyages.} y

GUILLEMARD, F. H. H. The cruise of the Marchesa to Kamschatka &
New Guinea. With notices of Formosa, Liu-Kiu, and various islands
of the Malay archipelago. 2nd edit. London, 1889.

BURNEY, JAMES. Memoir on the geography of the north-eastern part
of Asia. London, 1818. [Paper read before a scientific body in Lon-
don in which the author, who had been with Cook in Bering Strait,
insisted that it was not conclusively proved that the Old World
and the New World were two distinct continents.]

VENIAMINOV, IvAN (Innokentii, metropolitan of Moscow). Zapiski ob
ostrovakh Unalashkinskago otdyela. Izdano izhdiveniem Rossiisko-
Amerikanskoi Kompanii. (Notes on the islands of the Unalaska
district. Published at the expense of the Russian-American Company.)
3 vols. in two. St. Petersburg, 1840.

HoLMBERG, H. J. Ethnographische Skizzen iiber die Vélker des rus-
sischen Amerika. 2 vols. Helsingfors, 1855-[63]. [Vol. I reprinted
from Vol. 4 of the Acta of Finska Vetenskaps-Societeten; Vol. 2 is
a separate (pp. [35]-101) from Vol. 7 of the Acta.]}

DALL, W. H., and GEorGE GiBsBs. Tribes of the extreme Northwest,
by W. H. Dall. Tribes of western Washington and northwestern
Oregon, by George Gibbs. Contributions to North American Eth-
nology, Vol. 1. Bur. of Ethnol., Washington, D.C. 1877.

SLUININ, N. V. Okhotsko-Kamchatkii krai (Okhotsk-Kamchatka
region). Vol. 1. St. Petersburg, 1900. [Description of the natural
history of the region, with map.]

RYABUSHINSKI, F. P. Kamchatskaya ekspeditsiya. Moscow, I912.
[Account of a scientific expedition to Kamchatka financed by the
author, on which Waldemar Jochelson, known for his work on the
Jesup North Pacific Expedition, was in charge of ethnology.]

REFERENCES 2

Official Documents, and Bibliographies

Polnoe sobranie zakonov Rossiiskoi Imperii (Complete collection
of the laws of the Russian Empire). Vols. 3, 4, 7, 8. Imperial Print-
ing Press, St. Petersburg, ca. 1830.

Obshchii morskoi spisok (General navy list). 13 vols. and 1 vol. of
index. St. Petersburg, 1885-1907. [Useful in following the careers
of the officers who took part in Bering’s voyages.]

Opisanie dyyl arkhiva Morskago Ministerstva s poloviny xvii do nachala
xix stolyetiya (Description of the papers in the archives of the Min-
istry of Marine from the middle of the seventeenth to the begin-
ning of the nineteenth century). 10 vols. Published by direction of
the Ministry of Marine, St. Petersburg, 1877-1906.

Dati, W. H., and Marcus BAKER. Partial list of charts, maps, and
publications relating to Alaska and the adjacent region, from Puget
Sound and Hakodadi to the Arctic Ocean, between the Rocky and the
Stanovoi Mountains, in: Pacific Coast Pilot: Coasts and Islands of
Alaska, Second Series, pp. 163-374, U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey,
Washington, D.C., 1879. [Invaluable bibliography. Strong on Russian
sources; Russian titles are given in Cyrillic. The contents of periodical
series are analyzed. Maps are listed on pp. 167-223, text publications
On Pp. 225-374.].

GoLpDER, F. A. Guide to materials for American history in Russian
archives. Carnegie Instn. Publ. No. 239. Washington, D. C., 1917.
[The dccuments relating to the Bering expeditions are mainly in the
archives of the Ministry of Marine (listed on pp. 119-130), of the Hydro-
graphic Section of that Ministry (pp.. 130-136), and of the General
Staff (pp. 116-119).]

on ; 7" [oh Oyen ; ie
ny mi ie te o@% ‘2 Tea dL), ” * a
® a

eee

= oT] -

7

as he tee

i. e a ate ny oe

%

xt

A oy : H - - 7
Tie le & -

fe “ey i uF aie '
! 7 ; 7 7 :

a av ee - : : iy

iy py ; yuk: ae 1 ,

‘ 1 8 eS ease
ee “4 i 7 ‘ ae

penn

Eteiecsael

eSrtetsts
it erties

faba ; dengrer Shh

st

rites

Sedrsgrtssit

sees

acerestesters sis

Paar

tats!
date

setae

apap e

This : Sta tbese: